QUE$TOR Help

QUE$TOR Help
iii
Table Of Contents
Introduction ............................................................................................... 1
About QUE$TOR....................................................................................... 1
QUE$TOR Capabilities ............................................................................ 1
Contacting Customer Support .................................................................... 2
Recommended System Specifications.......................................................... 3
Before installing QUE$TOR...................................................................... 4
Copyright ................................................................................................ 4
Quick Start Guide........................................................................................ 5
About the Quick Start Guide ...................................................................... 5
Button Terminology .................................................................................. 5
Project Properties ..................................................................................... 5
Field Level Data Entry ............................................................................... 7
Creating a Production Profile...................................................................... 9
Select Your Field Development Concept - Offshore...................................... 10
Select Your Field Development Concept - Onshore...................................... 12
Component Level Data............................................................................ 14
Operating Costs ..................................................................................... 16
Scheduling ............................................................................................ 17
Investment and Production Profile ............................................................ 18
Editing Units .......................................................................................... 18
Database Editor ..................................................................................... 20
Project Editor......................................................................................... 23
Locking ................................................................................................. 24
Contacting Customer Support .................................................................. 24
Program Conventions................................................................................. 27
QUE$TOR Help
iv
Launching QUE$TOR............................................................................... 27
New / Open / Save ................................................................................. 27
Project Menus ........................................................................................ 28
QUE$TOR Units ...................................................................................... 31
Form Controls and Conventions................................................................ 31
QUE$TOR Messages................................................................................ 33
Ghosting of Drilling Components .............................................................. 35
Project Notes ......................................................................................... 37
Data Flow and Locking............................................................................... 39
About Data Flow and Locking................................................................... 39
Data Flow between Components............................................................... 39
Data Flow Within Components.................................................................. 41
Locking ................................................................................................. 42
QUE$TOR Offshore .................................................................................... 45
Modelling an Offshore Field...................................................................... 45
QUE$TOR Structure ............................................................................. 45
Project Properties ................................................................................ 46
Field Level Data................................................................................... 51
Production Profile ................................................................................ 55
Concept Selector ................................................................................. 59
Component Level Data ......................................................................... 62
Operating Expenditure (OPEX) .............................................................. 74
CAPEX Scheduling................................................................................ 84
Investment and Production Profile ......................................................... 90
Offshore Components ............................................................................. 93
About Offshore Components ................................................................. 93
Topsides............................................................................................. 95
Table Of Contents
v
Jacket .............................................................................................. 144
Gravity Base Structure ....................................................................... 155
Offshore Pipelines.............................................................................. 160
Semi-submersible.............................................................................. 175
Spar Buoy ........................................................................................ 188
Tanker ............................................................................................. 199
Tension Leg Platform.......................................................................... 212
Offshore Loading ............................................................................... 220
Offshore Drilling ................................................................................ 230
Subsea............................................................................................. 247
Barge............................................................................................... 270
Offshore User Defined ........................................................................ 277
Offshore Decommissioning.................................................................. 278
QUE$TOR Onshore .................................................................................. 299
Modelling an Onshore Field.................................................................... 299
QUE$TOR Structure ........................................................................... 299
Project Properties .............................................................................. 300
Field Level Data................................................................................. 305
Production Profile .............................................................................. 310
Concept Selector ............................................................................... 315
Component Level Data ....................................................................... 318
Operating Expenditure (OPEX) ............................................................ 330
CAPEX Scheduling.............................................................................. 340
Investment and Production Profile ....................................................... 346
Onshore Components............................................................................ 349
About Onshore Components................................................................ 349
Production Facility ............................................................................. 351
QUE$TOR Help
vi
Terminal Facility ................................................................................ 395
Onshore Pipelines .............................................................................. 418
Wellpad Group .................................................................................. 445
Onshore Drilling ................................................................................ 464
Infrastructure.................................................................................... 484
Onshore User Defined ........................................................................ 497
LNG Regasification Onshore...................................................................... 499
Modelling an LNG Regasification Terminal ................................................ 499
LNG Regasification Structure............................................................... 499
Operating Expenditure (OPEX) ............................................................ 499
CAPEX Scheduling.............................................................................. 508
Investment and Production Profile ....................................................... 513
LNG Regasification Terminal .................................................................. 516
About Regasification Terminal Facilities ................................................ 516
User Interface ................................................................................... 517
Primary Inputs .................................................................................. 519
Inlet Composition .............................................................................. 520
Design Specifications ......................................................................... 522
Prefabrication.................................................................................... 523
Winterisation..................................................................................... 524
Marine Infrastructure ......................................................................... 525
LNG Storage ..................................................................................... 528
LNG Processing ................................................................................. 530
LNG Pumping .................................................................................... 534
Liquid Storage................................................................................... 536
Liquid Export..................................................................................... 539
Vapour Handling................................................................................ 541
Table Of Contents
vii
Vapourisation.................................................................................... 544
Control and Communications............................................................... 547
Utilities............................................................................................. 548
Power .............................................................................................. 550
Civils................................................................................................ 553
Equipment Costs ............................................................................... 555
Material Costs ................................................................................... 557
Prefabrication Costs ........................................................................... 559
Construction Costs............................................................................. 559
General Costs.................................................................................... 560
Reports.................................................................................................. 563
About Reports...................................................................................... 563
Component Reports .............................................................................. 563
Project Reports .................................................................................... 564
Editors................................................................................................... 567
Unit Editor ........................................................................................... 567
About Unit Editor ............................................................................... 567
Custom Unit Sets............................................................................... 567
Database Editor ................................................................................... 570
About Database Editor........................................................................ 570
Procurement Strategies ...................................................................... 571
Technical Databases .......................................................................... 572
Database Editor Interface ................................................................... 574
Project Editor....................................................................................... 578
About Project Editor ........................................................................... 578
User Interface ................................................................................... 579
Procurement Strategies ...................................................................... 580
QUE$TOR Help
viii
Technical Databases .......................................................................... 581
Definitions.............................................................................................. 583
Contingency Definitions......................................................................... 583
ANSI Class .......................................................................................... 585
Flow Definitions.................................................................................... 585
QUE$TOR Offshore ............................................................................... 586
Offshore Components......................................................................... 586
Offshore Toolbar................................................................................ 588
Offshore Technical Databases.............................................................. 588
Offshore Concepts ............................................................................. 589
Basis of Inspection and Maintenance.................................................... 589
CAPEX Scheduling Toolbar .................................................................. 590
Comparison of Profile Timescales......................................................... 590
Offshore Components......................................................................... 591
QUE$TOR Onshore................................................................................ 602
Onshore Components......................................................................... 602
Onshore Toolbar ................................................................................ 603
Onshore Technical Databases.............................................................. 603
Onshore Concepts.............................................................................. 604
Onshore Components......................................................................... 604
QUE$TOR LNG ..................................................................................... 608
Double Containment LNG Storage Tanks .............................................. 608
Full Containment LNG Storage Tanks ................................................... 609
Single Containment LNG Storage Tanks................................................ 610
LNG Tanker Properties........................................................................ 611
LNG Regasification Onshore Toolbar..................................................... 612
Table Of Contents
ix
Editors ................................................................................................ 612
Unit Sets .......................................................................................... 612
Database Editor Toolbar ..................................................................... 613
1
Introduction
About QUE$TOR
QUE$TOR is a project modelling, evaluation and decision support system for
global application in the oil and gas industry. It uses a systematic approach to
generate a field development basis, capital and operating costs, and project
schedules. This systematic approach allows engineers, estimators and
economists to produce weight and cost estimates quickly, consistently and
accurately and to develop investment profiles.
QUE$TORs comprehensive capability, flexibility and ease of use have benefits in
many applications including:
- Prospect Evaluation
- Screening Studies
- Feasibility Studies
- Conceptual Studies
- Optimisation Studies
The ability to produce cost estimates from basic reservoir data provides for
meaningful prospect evaluation and facilitates investment decisions. The ability
to refine QUE$TORs assumptions and defaults allows detailed estimates to be
produced suitable for use in conceptual and optimisation studies.
The use of separate cost and technical databases for all major worldwide oil and
gas producing regions means that any development, present or future, can be
modelled.
You can also guarantee an up-to-date estimate based on the latest economic and
supply situation due to regular updates to the cost databases.
Professional-quality printed outputs can be produced for inclusion in management
level reports including overall summaries, component costs, technical input
sheets, schedules and the base data used to build up each estimate.
QUE$TOR Capabilities
QUE$TOR has the capability to handle both offshore and onshore projects.
Offshore Capabilities
The offshore portion of QUE$TOR incorporates all stages of offshore field
development, from appraisal drilling, through to hook-up and commissioning
(HUC) of installations, operations to decommissioning. All types of development
are covered from single subsea well tie-backs connected to existing platforms, to
major complexes consisting of platforms, support structures, pipelines and
offshore loading systems.
In generating capital cost estimates for a field development, the estimate is
broken down into a number of discrete components. Combining these
components allows a field development plan to be identified and estimated. It is
QUE$TOR Help
2
then possible to generate operating costs for the facilities specified and phase the
expenditures as necessary.
Onshore Capabilities
The onshore portion of QUE$TOR incorporates all stages of onshore field
development, from appraisal drilling, through to construction of installations and
operational costs. All types of development are covered from single wellpads tied
back to an existing production facility, to major complexes consisting of
production facilities, terminal facilities, pipelines and all associated infrastructure.
In generating capital cost estimates for a field development, the estimate is
broken down into a number of discrete components. Combining these
components allows a field development plan to be identified and estimated. It is
then possible to generate operating costs for the facilities specified and phase the
expenditures as necessary.
Combined Capability
Combining the offshore and onshore portions of QUE$TOR makes it possible to
model a field development that is split between offshore and onshore e.g. a
topsides can be tied back to a terminal facility, or the wells could be in both
offshore and onshore locations.
LNG Capability
The LNG portion of QUE$TOR is in development. The QUE$TOR 9.7 release
incorporates onshore LNG regasification terminals.
The LNG regasification terminal can be costed on its own or with other onshore
and offshore components, but requires a separate licence and either an onshore
or an offshore licence.
Contacting Customer Support
As part of the continuing licensing agreement for QUE$TOR, IHS offers a full
technical support service via its London, Houston and Singapore offices. Both
computing and engineering support relating to the operation and understanding
of the program are available.
The QUE$TOR Support Group has a dedicated support email address:
support_questor@ihs.com
Note: There is an 's', not a '$' in questor in the email address.
The IHS software support team key contacts are as follows:
Europe, Africa &
Middle East
John Helliwell - Fulfillment Manager,
john.helliwell@ihs.com
Robert Chambers - Product Specialist,
Introduction
3
robert.chambers@ihs.com
Kelly Field - QUE$TOR Support, kelly.field@ihs.com
Newplan House
41 East Street
Epsom, Surrey
KT17 1BL
UK
Tel: +44 (0) 20 86023800
Fax: +44 (0) 20 86023805
North, Central &
South America
Jonathan Stephens - Product Manager,
jonathan.stephens@ihs.com
Raj Ilapogu - Support Engineer,
raj.ilapogu@ihs.com
Tobe Okeke - Development Engineer,
tobe.okeke@ihs.com
5333 Westheimer
Houston
Texas 77056
USA
Tel: +1 713 840 8282
Fax: +1 713 995 8593
China
Yaxing Wang - Technical Support Special,
yaxing.wang@ihs.com
China WTC
West Wing 306
Beijing
100004
Tel: +86 10 6505 2966
Russia
Konstantin Larin - Client Support,
konstantin.larin@ihs.com
9 Gadovikova Street
Moscow
129085
Tel: +7 495 763 7506
S.E. Asia &
Australia
James Blanchard - Product Support Specialist,
james.blanchard@ihs.com
3 Shenton Way
25-01 Shenton House
Singapore
068805
Tel: +65 6225 4166 ext. 102
Fax: +65 6225 9694
Recommended System Specifications
We recommend the following minimum system specifications:
QUE$TOR Help
4
- Windows XP with Service Pack 2
- 1 GHz Pentium 4 processor
- 512 MB RAM
- 200 MB disk space
- Minimum 1024x768 resolution
- CD ROM drive
Before installing QUE$TOR
- QUE$TOR requires that you install .NET framework 3.5, Windows Installer
3.1 components or later.
- QUE$TOR requires that the Sentinel SuperPro driver be installed on PCs
that have a local security key (dongle) for their QUE$TOR licence.
- For users of the SentinelLM network licence manager system the SuperPro
driver only needs to be installed on the licence server.
- These are included on the CD.
- Administrator privileges are required to install these components.
Copyright
2008, IHS Inc. and its affiliated and subsidiary companies, all rights reserved.
Windows and Excel are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All
other trademarks belong to IHS and its affiliated and subsidiary companies, all
rights reserved.
This product, including software, data and documentation, is licensed to the user
for its internal business purposes only and may not be disclosed,
disseminated,sold, licensed, copied, reproduced, translated or transferred to any
third party. All rights reserved.
IHS Inc.
15 Inverness Way East
Englewood, Colorado 80112
(303) 736-3000
Rev November 2008
5
Quick Start Guide
About the Quick Start Guide
This guide is designed to help you understand the basic operation of the
QUE$TOR program, allowing you to develop a QUE$TOR project and produce a
scheduled estimate for capital and operating costs.
Getting Started
- QUE$TOR must be installed on a local PC. This must be done by a local
administrator. See the release notes for installation instructions.
- A licence must be available; either a standalone dongle which plugs
directly into your computer or a network licence which is accessible across
your company network. Contact your IT department for further details.
- QUE$TOR can be run either from the QUE$TOR icon on the desktop or by
selecting the program from the Start menu following All Programs \IHS
\QUE$TOR 9.x.
Button Terminology
Apply accepts the changes on an input sheet and recalculates the
cost sheet to show the impact of that change.
OK applies changes to the input or cost sheet, closes the form and
updates all dependent values elsewhere in the program.
Cancel closes the form or cost sheet without saving any changes
that have been made.
Project Properties
- The project properties allow you to setup the basic information about your
project, the procurement strategy, regional technical database and units
set you will be running the project with.
- On start up select if you wish to create an onshore project or an offshore
project, see below. You also have the option to open an existing project,
there are shortcuts to the last five projects opened in QUE$TOR. The
location of your wells determines whether you pick offshore or onshore as
the start point. Later at the field development schematic stage, you may
activate the alternate licence to develop a combined offshore plus onshore
project.
QUE$TOR Help
6
- QUE$TOR checks you have a valid licence to run the selected project type,
i.e. offshore or onshore, and if you do opens the Project properties form.
- Give your project a name.
- Select the units you want to work in. Pick from one of the standard unit
sets provided or create your own using the Unit Editor tool, see below.
- Select the main product, Oil or Gas, see below.
- Select the geographical region, country, and basin to enable QUE$TOR to
seed your project with typical basin specific data analyzed from the IHS
IRIS21 E&P database, see below.
- Create your procurement strategy by clicking the New button. The form
below is displayed. Procurement strategies allow you to choose different
regional cost databases for each cost centre. This is similar to the
procurement strategy in QUE$TOR Onshore version 7.9.
Quick Start Guide
7
- By default all costs are reported in US Dollars.
- The procurement strategy also allows you to change the database
currency from US$ into the currency of your choice.
- The technical database for the project defaults to the most appropriate
region for the country you have selected. Use Browse to select an
alternative if required.
- To create an LNG regasification terminal only project ensure the Proceed
directly to field schematic is checked.
Field Level Data Entry
All the data on the next screen is categorized as field level data. It has been
populated from the basin database you have selected. To modify any input
value, simply overwrite with your own data. The information entered varies
slightly depending on whether you have selected an offshore or onshore project.
The field level data form for an offshore oil project is shown below. This
information is not required if creating an LNG regasification only project.
QUE$TOR Help
8
- This is populated with typical values from the basin characteristics
database.
- Individual input units can be changed on the fly by clicking on the unit to
the right of the value and selecting the unit you wish to use from the
options available, see below.
Quick Start Guide
9
Creating a Production Profile
Select field life and plateau data to produce the production profile, see below.
QUE$TOR Help
10
The default production profile is displayed.
- Copy and paste in your own data or adjust until you have the profile that
you require. When using cut and paste ensure the field life agrees with the
imported profile. You may change the display to daily, annual or
cumulative production using the graph dropdown list.
- Follow through the next steps to calculate the number of wells and
production capacity.
Select Your Field Development Concept - Offshore
QUE$TOR selects an appropriate field development concept based on the field
level data and production profile. You can change this to another of the 14
default concepts using the list box.
QUE$TOR also selects typical oil and gas export options.
Quick Start Guide
11
You can configure your own field development plan (select Blank) or select one of
the standard development concepts and modify it if required using the QUE$TOR
Offshore components
When you select one of the 14 standard development concepts and click the OK
button QUE$TOR runs the complete cost estimate using program defaults
throughout and displays the field development schematic along with the cost
summary tree.
QUE$TOR Help
12
Select Your Field Development Concept - Onshore
QUE$TOR selects an appropriate field development concept based on the field
level data and production profile. You can change this to another of the 6 default
concepts using the list box.
Quick Start Guide
13
You can configure your own field development plan (select Blank) or select one of
the standard development concepts and modify it if required using the QUE$TOR
Onshore components
When you select one of the 6 standard development concepts and click the OK
button QUE$TOR runs the complete cost estimate using program defaults
throughout and displays the field development schematic along with the cost
summary tree.
QUE$TOR Help
14
Component Level Data
To review and/or adjust the default input values used to generate a component
cost, double click the icon in the field development schematic. This displays the
input data and the cost sheet for the selected component, see below.
Quick Start Guide
15
Input and output screens have now been standardised between the components.
The left hand side contains all the input data for that component. The arrow
buttons allow you to move quickly around the calculation process without
having to go through each step sequentially.
The icon opens up more detailed calculation forms as a separate view.
QUE$TOR Help
16
If you overwrite a value it is considered to be locked in subsequent calculations.
Is how it appears on the cost sheet
when locked.
The locked item on the input sheet
appears bold with a small padlock alongside it.
Operating Costs
Operating costs may be accessed by selecting OPEX from the Project menu. A
summary of the operating costs for each year of production is displayed.
Quick Start Guide
17
A more detailed breakdown of these costs can be obtained by clicking on the
items in blue hypertext type. This will open up further definition sheets for you to
review or adjust the default values.
Scheduling
The Scheduling module can be accessed by selecting Scheduling from the
Project menu.
You can lock a component schedule by right clicking on the component name, re-
adjust the capital cost and apply the revised costs to the saved schedule. This
introduces much more flexibility than QUE$TOR version 7.9.
You can specify the cost vs. duration distribution of each activity. Four
distribution types are available; uniform (UNI), down payment and delivery
(DPD), triangular (TRI) and user entered (User). To view and adjust these
distributions by activity click on the relevant Dist cell.
QUE$TOR Help
18
The CAPEX tabular data is calculated on a yearly, quarterly or monthly basis and
can be viewed or exported to Excel from the breakdown chart form.
Investment and Production Profile
The investment and production profile is accessed by selecting Investment and
production profiles from the Project menu.
Operating costs and production profile reflect when first oil occurs (as defined in
scheduling). If first oil occurs part way through a project or calendar year then
the profiles are adjusted accordingly.
Editing Units
You may use the standard units databases provided with the program or you can
create and use your own units sets. To create your own units set or open an
existing unit set, the unit editor can be accessed using the Start menu following
All Programs \IHS \QUE$TOR 9.x \Unit editor. Or select Unit editor from
the Tools menu of QUE$TOR.
You may create your own custom set of units, see below. This set can be saved
and used as a custom unit set when creating a new QUE$TOR project.
Quick Start Guide
19
A mouse click on any unit when running the program allows on-the-fly changing,
see below.
QUE$TOR Help
20
The current unit is shown in bold on the list of available alternatives.
Database Editor
The database editor allows you to create and view/edit both procurement
strategies (cost databases) and the regional technical databases. It can be
accessed using either All Programs \IHS \QUE$TOR 9.x \Database editor
from the Start menu or from the Tools menu when QUE$TOR is running.
Note: Any changes made to databases will not be reflected in any existing
projects that use those databases. Only future projects will pick up the changes.
Warning: Care is required when editing procurement strategies and technical
databases. These databases are used to drive QUE$TOR and it is possible to
modify them so that QUE$TOR no longer functions correctly when the modified
databases are used in a project.
On entering the database editor you are given two options. You can either
view/edit an existing database or create a new database using one of the existing
databases as its template.
Quick Start Guide
21
You then select which type of database you want to view or create; offshore,
onshore or LNG and procurement (cost) or technical.
There are 17 regional offshore databases and 11 regional onshore cost and
technical databases to choose from as a template when creating a new database
If you select Modify an existing database a form similar to the one shown below is
displayed allowing you to select the database you want to open
QUE$TOR Help
22
On opening the required database the form is displayed
To select a table you must choose the Item type, Component type and the Table
description
The Toolbar buttons provided to help you search through a database, plus log,
print and save changes.
Quick Start Guide
23
Some tables contain several columns of values, e.g. equipment, topsides, gas
compression turbine data. If there are a number of columns some may not be
visible without scrolling across. To maximise the amount of data that can be
seen without having to scroll you can use Scale data column width slider to adjust
the relative width of the data columns
If the Show audit information check box is ticked then two more columns (or
rows depending on the format of the selected table) are added to show who
edited the data plus the time and date when the last change was made
Project Editor
This feature allows users to adjust the regional cost and technical data of a
completed project without recreating the project. The project editor can be
accessed through the Start menu All Programs \IHS \QUE$TOR 9.x \Project
Editor.
On running the project editor you must choose which project to adjust.
The program then shows which databases are being used within the program.
You can then browse alternative databases a select a new database for the
project.
QUE$TOR Help
24
Saving the project then overwrites the original databases with the new selections.
Locking
This feature was introduced in QUE$TOR version 8.0 to give flexibility in saving
information and recalculating projects.
A locked item is an item that you have overwritten. It is locked to the program.
The value is shown in bold and there is a padlock symbol to the left of the value
entry box, see below. During any recalculation, a locked item will not be
overwritten by QUE$TOR. This allows you to modify individual data points and
still be able to recalculate and retain these items. You may change the locked
item by typing in a new number. It is not necessary to unlock it first.
You may unlock the data item with a right mouse click and the program will
revert to the previous input value prior to your change.
Contacting Customer Support
As part of the continuing licensing agreement for QUE$TOR, IHS offers a full
technical support service via its London, Houston and Singapore offices. Both
Quick Start Guide
25
computing and engineering support relating to the operation and understanding
of the program are available.
The QUE$TOR Support Group has a dedicated support email address:
support_questor@ihs.com
Note: There is an 's', not a '$' in questor in the email address.
The IHS software support team key contacts are as follows:
Europe, Africa &
Middle East
John Helliwell - Fulfillment Manager,
john.helliwell@ihs.com
Robert Chambers - Product Specialist,
robert.chambers@ihs.com
Kelly Field - QUE$TOR Support, kelly.field@ihs.com
Newplan House
41 East Street
Epsom, Surrey
KT17 1BL
UK
Tel: +44 (0) 20 86023800
Fax: +44 (0) 20 86023805
North, Central &
South America
Jonathan Stephens - Product Manager,
jonathan.stephens@ihs.com
Raj Ilapogu - Support Engineer,
raj.ilapogu@ihs.com
Tobe Okeke - Development Engineer,
tobe.okeke@ihs.com
5333 Westheimer
Houston
Texas 77056
USA
Tel: +1 713 840 8282
Fax: +1 713 995 8593
China
Yaxing Wang - Technical Support Special,
yaxing.wang@ihs.com
China WTC
West Wing 306
Beijing
100004
Tel: +86 10 6505 2966
Russia
Konstantin Larin - Client Support,
konstantin.larin@ihs.com
9 Gadovikova Street
Moscow
129085
Tel: +7 495 763 7506
S.E. Asia &
Australia
James Blanchard - Product Support Specialist,
james.blanchard@ihs.com
QUE$TOR Help
26
3 Shenton Way
25-01 Shenton House
Singapore
068805
Tel: +65 6225 4166 ext. 102
Fax: +65 6225 9694
27
Program Conventions
Launching QUE$TOR
Depending on your installation options, you can launch QUE$TOR either from the
Start button on the taskbar or by double-clicking the QUE$TOR icon on your PC
desktop.
To launch QUE$TOR
1. On the taskbar, click Start and follow All Programs \IHS \QUE$TOR
9.x
OR
On your PC desktop, double-click the QUE$TOR launch icon .
After you launch QUE$TOR the task selection form will appear, allowing you to
create a new project, open an existing project or change the unit set.
New / Open / Save
On opening QUE$TOR the task selection form opens as shown below. This allows
you to create new projects or open existing projects.
Creating a New Project
To create a new project select, using the option buttons, Create a new offshore
project for an offshore project or Create a new onshore project for an
onshore project and click OK to proceed.
QUE$TOR Help
28
A new project can be created when a project is open, to do this select New
project from the File menu or click on the New project button on the utilities
toolbar. You will be asked if you wish to save your existing project before
creating the new project via a similar task selection form.
Note: Projects are not saved automatically. You can save a project by
selecting Save from the File menu once you get to the Field development
schematic. When you create a new project you won't be able to do this until you
have stepped through all the initial forms.
Saving a Project
Projects are not automatically saved in QUE$TOR. To save a project select Save
or Save As from the File menu. This will enable you to save the project in the
usual windows fashion. The default location for saved projects is My
Documents\IHS\QUE$TOR\Projects.
Saved projects include the selected procurement strategy, technical database and
unit set. Once saved, projects are completely standalone and have no further
interaction with QUE$TORs databases. This means that saved projects can easily
be sent to others who may not have the same databases.
Saved projects can be moved, copied and renamed using Microsoft Windows
Explorer in the same way as any Windows file. Projects can be opened either
directly from Windows Explorer or from within QUE$TOR. To open a saved
project in QUE$TOR either select Open existing project from the form that
appears when QUE$TOR starts or select Open from the File menu.
Opening a Saved Project
To open a saved project select, using the option buttons, Open existing project
and click OK to proceed. This will enable you to open a project in the usual
windows fashion. The Open existing project box has shortcuts to the last five
projects opened in QUE$TOR. Saved projects have a .QPR file extension.
Project Menus
This section describes the actions of the commands and operations available from
the drop down menus above the field development schematic (FDS) when a
project is open. Menu options are greyed out when not available.
The utilities toolbar provides a shortcut to many of the menu commands. Where
available, the relevant button is shown next to each of the commands listed
below.
File menu
Program Conventions
29
- New project: exits the current project and create a new one from
scratch. QUE$TOR will prompt you to save your project. Remember
projects are not saved automatically.
- Open: opens a previously saved project.
- Save: saves the project under its existing name.
- Save as..: allows the project to be saved under a new name.
- Print preview: shows how the printout will appear on the page.
- Print: prints the active screen.
- Export to Excel workbook: allows reports to be exported to
Excel.
- Recent projects: provides shortcuts to projects used recently.
- Exit: closes the program. QUE$TOR will prompt you to save your
project. Remember projects are not saved automatically.
Project menu
- Project properties: opens the Project properties form, which displays
the field location, procurement strategy etc.
- Field level data: opens the field level data form, which allows
specification of high level variables such as reserves.
- Production profile: opens the production profile generator allowing
the estimation or input of the overall field liquid and gas profiles and the
number of development wells required.
- Concept selector: allows you to review the concept chosen.
- OPEX: opens the OPEX module allowing you to calculate field operating
costs.
- Scheduling: opens the scheduling component allowing you to schedule
the calculated CAPEX.
- Investment and production profiles: opens the investment &
production profile, which brings together the scheduled CAPEX, OPEX and
production profiles.
- Offshore decommissioning: opens the offshore decommissioning
options to allow you to change the Offshore decommissioning
assumptions.
- Onshore decommissioning: opens the onshore decommissioning
options to allow you to change the Onshore decommissioning
assumptions.
- LNG Regas decommissioning: opens the LNG Regasification
decommissioning options to allow you to change the LNG Regasification
decommissioning assumptions.
- Project notes: opens the projects notes form, see Project notes for
further details.
QUE$TOR Help
30
Reports menu
- Report builder wizard: Starts the report builder wizard which allows
you to create a user defined report.
- Offshore cost summary: opens a print preview of the cost summary
report of the offshore components only.
- Onshore cost summary: opens a print preview of the cost summary
report of the onshore components only.
- LNG Regas onshore cost summary: opens a print preview of the cost
summary report of the LNG regasification onshore components only.
- Combined cost summary: opens a print preview of the cost summary
report including all components.
- Offshore decommissioning cost summary: opens a print preview of
the decommissioning cost summary of the offshore components.
- Onshore decommissioning cost summary: opens a print preview of
the decommissioning cost summary of the onshore components.
- LNG Regas onshore decommissioning cost summary: opens a print
preview of the decommissioning cost summary of the LNG regasification
onshore components.
- Combined decommissioning cost summary: opens a print preview of
the decommissioning cost summary report including all components.
- Project summary: opens a print preview of the project summary report.
- OPEX summary: opens a print preview of the OPEX summary report.
This will be greyed out and inactive if the OPEX module has not been run.
- Investment and production profiles: opens a print preview of the
investment & production profile report.
- Copy schematic image to clipboard: copies an image of the field
development schematic to a clipboard as a bitmap file so you can paste it
into an another application, e.g. Word or PowerPoint, for reporting
purposes.
Tools menu
- Ghost options: allows the cost of drilling components to be ignored while
maintaining the technical parameters. See Ghosting of drilling components
for more details.
- Unit editor: allows a default unit set to be defined, see Unit editor for
further details.
- Database editor: allows you to view and edit QUE$TORs cost and
technical databases, see Database editor for further details.
Help menu
- Help topics: opens QUE$TOR Help.
- About: displays a form containing the QUE$TOR version number.
Program Conventions
31
QUE$TOR Units
For every input QUE$TOR provides a choice of relevant units. You can change
these units by clicking on the unit and selecting from the list displayed. Changing
the unit selected will convert the value in the cell in to the new unit.
The default units to be used within a new project can be chosen in the project
properties. Three unit sets are available by default: metric, oilfield and imperial
QUE$TOR ships with three built-in unit sets: Oilfield, Imperial and Metric.
You can also define their own unit sets using the unit editor.
Form Controls and Conventions
QUE$TOR has been developed for a Microsoft Windows environment and
consequently uses familiar Windows conventions for program operation.
Forms are used extensively for data entry throughout QUE$TOR. They follow
standard Windows conventions, which are summarised briefly below.
The gas compression form is shown below to demonstrate these conventions.
QUE$TOR Help
32
Boxes
Display calculated or default values. The majority of values can be overwritten,
however when a box is greyed the value is displayed for information only and is
not editable.
Frames
Group a number of related inputs / options together.
Option buttons
These provide a one off choice from a selection of options located within a frame.
The required option can be selected using a left mouse click.
Check boxes
These can be toggled on and off using left mouse clicks. Unlike option buttons
they allow any number of multiple options to be turned on or off.
Dropdown lists
Boxes with a dropdown arrow to the right of them allow the selection any of the
options in the dropdown list. The list can be viewed by clicking on the dropdown
arrow.
Tabs
Program Conventions
33
Tabs behave like pages in a form. Clicking on a tabs heading will display the
tab. If changes are made to multiple tabs, clicking on OK or Apply will apply the
changes made in every tab.
Command buttons
If changes are made to multiple tabs, clicking on OK or Apply will apply the
changes made in every tab.
Apply applies changes to the input sheet any dependent values
elsewhere in the program will not be updated until OK is clicked.
Recalc. accepts the changes on an input sheet and recalculates the
cost sheet to show the impact of that change.
OK applies changes to the input or cost sheet, closes the form and
updates all dependent values elsewhere in the program.
Cancel closes the form or cost sheet without saving any changes
that have been made.
Opens the Project notes form, see Project notes for more details.
QUE$TOR Messages
QUE$TOR incorporates a messaging system to warn you when errors may be
occurring. When a potential error is spotted a message is displayed at the
bottom of the active window.
QUE$TOR Help
34
Clicking on the message will display all relevant messages in a scrollable list. An
example of the messages you may receive are shown below.
There are three levels of message as indicated by the following icons:
- Information
- Potential errors
- Identified errors
The messages give a description of where the problem is occurring. QUE$TOR
will require you to review/revise default values to resolve any identified problems.
Note: Whilst efforts have been made to make this messaging system
comprehensive it is unlikely to be able to pick up every problem that may occur.
The error messages can be copied to the clipboard by right clicking on the
message list and selecting Copy or they can be printed or exported to Microsoft
Excel using the reporting options, see Reports for more details.
Program Conventions
35
Ghosting of Drilling Components
The ghosting options in QUE$TOR allow users to ignore the CAPEX and/or OPEX
of the drilling components in a project, while maintaining the technical algorithms
for data flow to downstream components. This feature has been introduced to
assist users whose costs are produced independently to QUE$TOR.
The ghosting options can be looked at on a component by component basis or
they can be applied to all future drilling components used in the current project
and future projects.
The overall ghosting options can be accessed through the Tools menu, clicking
on Ghost options will open the QUE$TOR ghost options form.
The ghost options form allows the ghosting defaults to be specified. The
selections made will influence all future drilling components within QUE$TOR but
will not affect any components in an open project.
Note: In order to make changes to an existing project each drilling
component will have to be changed individually. See below
The ghosting options for a single drilling component can be edited by right
clicking on the component. This will display a drop down where Ghost CAPEX and
Ghost OPEX can be selected or deselected.
QUE$TOR Help
36
Ghost CAPEX
When Ghost CAPEX is selected for a drilling component the capital cost of the
component is ignored, with the technical parameters still shown. This results in
the following:
- The component changes appearance, it will be greyed and paler.
- Remove the CAPEX estimate from the cost tree on the left hand side of the
screen. The QUE$TOR cost estimate can still be seen by going into the
component.
- No capital cost is shown for the component in any of the summary reports
generated by QUE$TOR, component reports still show the calculated cost.
- The capital cost is passed through to OPEX for calculation of the insurance
costs, which are based on a percentage of CAPEX.
Note: If insurance costs not are required in the OPEX or you want to
change the value then you should manually remove or change the drilling cost in
the first year of the Insurance sheet within OPEX
- No capital cost for the component is passed through to scheduling,
however the component can still be scheduled.
- No capital cost for the component is passed through to the investment and
production profile.
Ghost OPEX
When Ghost OPEX is selected for a drilling component the operating cost of the
component will be ignored. This results in the following:
- No OPEX costs for insurance or well workover are calculated
Program Conventions
37
Project Notes
The project notes feature allows you to keep notes on a project on which you are
working. These are saved within the QUE$TOR project file.
It is accessible from all forms using the project notes button located in the
bottom left corner.
From the field development schematic Project notes can be accessed through the
Project menu or by using the toolbar shortcut .
Clicking on Project notes opens the project notes form, shown below.
The notes are saved in the project file so that when returning to the project there
is a reference to the previous thought process.
Text can be cut and pasted into the spreadsheet using the standard keyboard
shortcuts, i.e. CTRL+C for Copy, CTRL+V for Paste. What is entered is down to
your preference.
QUE$TOR Help
38
The Project notes can be printed or exported to Excel, see Reports for further
details.
39
Data Flow and Locking
About Data Flow and Locking
Cost estimates in QUE$TOR are made up of a number of individual components
such as topsides and jackets. Each of these components will influence or be
dependent on the design of associated components, e.g. jacket design is
dependent on its associated topsides. Components are linked or docked to those
components from which they require data. There are also high level parameters
defined within QUE$TOR, such as reserves, which influence all components.
In generating a cost estimate QUE$TOR calculates one component at a time and
then passes all requisite data onto the next component. The order of this is
defined by the calculation hierarchy. The concept selector generates a basic
development plan from a selection of built-in defaults. The components selected
by the concept are then run in the hierarchy order to provide a development
capable of handling the wells and production defined in the production profile and
field level data.
If you wish to fix parameters within a component, preventing them from being
recalculated by the program, you can lock them.
Data Flow between Components
The data flow between components is defined by a calculation hierarchy. This
defines the order in which components are calculated and is illustrated below.
Data is automatically passed to components lower in the hierarchy, i.e. data in
level 1 (field level data) is automatically passed to level 2 (production profile) and
to all other levels. Data is not generally passed in the opposite direction although
there are cases where it is, these are listed below.
Changing any variable or component will automatically change all variables and
components below it in the hierarchy e.g. a change to topsides weight will change
the jacket cost.
The one exception is the concept selector where the concept must be manually
changed. Changes to the field level data or production profile are still passed
automatically to all components below the concept selector in the hierarchy, e.g.
changing the plateau production rate will change the production capacity of the
topsides. However, if changes to the field level data or production profile result in
a change to QUE$TORs default concept the concept will not be changed until you
enter the concept selector and manually select the new concept.
Changing the concept will delete all components and create a new set of
components.
Note: When you change the concept you will lose any changes you have
made to the components in the original field development plan
QUE$TOR Help
40
Exceptions to the hierarchy order
41
Oil and gas export: oil export pumps and gas export compressors are
dependent on the pressure drop in the export pipeline. The export pipelines are
sized first and changing the pipeline diameter will automatically recalculate the
pumps or compressors.
Multiple topsides
QUE$TOR uses a logical technique in passing flowrates between multiple
topsides. The topsides must be linked with appropriate pipelines before any data
is passed between them, for example gas lift flowrates wont be passed between
two topsides unless they are linked by a gas lift pipeline.
When two topsides are linked by a pipeline they look at the pipeline direction (as
defined in the pipeline component) to work out which direction the flows are
travelling in. Data is then passed in the direction of production. Increasing the
oil flowrate on a wellhead platform tied back to a processing platform will
increase the capacity on the processing platform. Similarly increasing the gas
injection on a wellhead platform receiving gas injection from a main platform will
increase the gas injection capacity on the main platform. These relationships do
not apply in reverse. See Well flow and distribution for further details.
Data Flow Within Components
Many of component inputs influence other inputs within the component. Usually
this is relatively simple, for example the number of storage days for a tanker will
affect the tanker size chosen. Data flow between these types of inputs also
follows a calculation hierarchy. Changing the number of days storage required
will dynamically update the tanker size but changing the tanker size will not
update the number of days storage. These types of relationships are explained
individually for each component in the help sections covering component inputs.
The data flow between topsides facilities is illustrated below. The flowchart is
designed to give a broad view of the relationships between sub-components. Any
changes to a sub-component may affect all sub-components downstream of it in
the flowchart. This does not apply to every parameter of a sub-component and
neither does it mean that every downstream sub-component will be influenced by
changes to an upstream component.
QUE$TOR Help
42
Locking
Any calculated variable in QUE$TOR, whether on the cost sheet or in the inputs
can be locked. Locking a variable will prevent it from being recalculated by the
program. For example locking the steel weight in a jacket will prevent it from
being recalculated if you add or remove systems from the associated topsides.
It is important to note that you can overwrite locked values at any time. In
terms of QUE$TOR a locked value is one that will not be changed by the
program; you can change it freely.
Variables can be locked by right clicking on them and selecting Locked.
Variables are locked automatically if you change them. They can be unlocked by
right clicking on them and de-selecting Locked. When you do this they will
revert to the values calculated by the program.
Locking should be used with care to ensure that you dont lock values based on
incorrect data. For example the power demand in a topsides is calculated by
adding the power requirements of all processes on the platform. If you changed
the model of turbines selected and locked them before adjusting other topsides
systems you may be basing your turbine selection on an incorrect power demand.
To avoid this you should follow the calculation hierarchy. When adjusting
projects: start with the highest level inputs (field level data) and work down to
the lowest (scheduling).
43
In some situations you may wish to input your own data and ignore QUE$TORs
calculations and so QUE$TOR does allow you to enter data in any order.
45
QUE$TOR Offshore
Modelling an Offshore Field
QUE$TOR Structure
QUE$TOR is structured around a field development schematic (FDS) which allows
users to create a visualisation of the development. The FDS is driven by a
number of high level inputs which allow the development conditions to be
specified. The basic program calculation sequence followed in QUE$TOR to
generate a full life-cycle field or prospect development cost estimate is shown
below.
To define the new project, QUE$TOR presents you with a series of forms that
allow high level parameters of the development to be specified. Once you have
QUE$TOR Help
46
reviewed and adjusted as necessary the default inputs in each form, click on OK
to apply the inputs and move on to the next form. Click on Cancel to go back to
the previous form and adjust any changes made.
On starting each new project you will be led through the first four stages shown
above. Each of these stages will be populated with default values based upon
your choices in the previous stage.
When the concept selector is completed, QUE$TOR will generate a complete cost
estimate immediately made up of a series of components, e.g. topsides, jacket,
drilling and pipelines.
These components are all live linked to each other so that a change to one
component will change all dependent components, e.g. jacket cost is dependent
on topsides operating weight. You can enter and update these components and
fix inputs so that they are no longer updated by the program. This is called
locking. Although you can edit components in any order you should try to follow
a logical path to avoid locking variables based on incorrect data. For example
you should not lock the jacket weight until the topsides is fully defined.
QUE$TORs order of calculation is explained in further detail in Data flow and
locking.
OPEX and Scheduling take data from all components to generate field operating
costs (OPEX) and schedule the calculated capital and operating costs along with
the production profile to give an overall project investment profile.
Once on the FDS
such as topsides and jackets. Each of these components will influence or be
dependent on the design of associated components, e.g. jacket design is
dependent on its associated topsides. Components are linked or docked to those
components from which they require data. There are also high level parameters
defined within QUE$TOR, such as reserves, which influence all components.
field level data.
Project Properties
About Project Properties
QUE$TOR Offshore
47
The project properties is the starting point for defining a new project. It enables
you to specify the location of the project, the procurement strategy and technical
database to be used in the project and the preferred units.
Note: it is not possible to make changes in this screen once a project is
created. However the project editor does allow the procurement strategy and the
technical database to be changed once the project is saved.
Name: enter a name for the project here. This will be the default file name
when you save the project.
Units of Measure
The units of measure define the units that will appear, both in the project and the
reports. QUE$TOR has three built in unit sets, metric, imperial and oilfield which
are selected from the dropdown list.
QUE$TOR Help
48
Custom unit sets can be defined using the unit editor. To select a user defined
unit set, select the use custom unit set option button and use the Browse button
to locate it. The default location for custom unit sets is: My Documents \IHS
\QUE$TOR \Procurement Strategies.
Once in a project the units can be easily changed, for every input QUE$TOR
provides a choice of relevant units. However the units in the reports are fixed by
the choice of unit set.
Main Product
The main product can be either oil or gas, the volume of the secondary product,
e.g. associated gas when oil is selected, is defined by a ratio on the Field level
data form.
The default product type is set to the choice made in the last project you created,
or to oil when QUE$TOR is shipped.
Location
QUE$TOR contains a database of typical field characteristics, extracted from the
IHS IRIS21 E&P database. These are broken down on a basin by basin basis and
provide the default properties for the field. Whilst you can overwrite all these
characteristics, they can be useful if some data is unavailable.
Procurement strategy
This allows you to select the regional databases to be used for each of the cost
centres for the new project. For example equipment could be sourced from North
America and design performed in Europe. The currency of the cost estimate can
also be defined.
The box displays existing procurement strategies which can be chosen by
selection.
To look for existing procurement strategies in a different folder, click on Browse.
Click on New to create a procurement strategy. When you create a new
procurement strategy QUE$TOR bases the default regional database on the
location selected. See Creating procurement strategies for more information.
Click on View to look an examine procurement strategy.
Click on Delete to delete the selected procurement strategy.
Note: QUE$TOR does not ship with any built in procurement strategies.
Technical database
The technical database contains regional specific technical data such as
environmental data. QUE$TOR includes template databases for every offshore
region worldwide. The default database is based on the location chosen. To
change to a different database, click on Browse.
QUE$TOR Offshore
49
You will be prompted to choose whether you want to use a template database
supplied with QUE$TOR or use a custom database. See Technical Databases for
further information.
Once you have adjusted all inputs as necessary, click OK. This applies your
changes and closes the form to move on. Cancel will clear all entries in the form
and take you back a step.
Creating Procurement Strategies
Procurement strategies allow you to choose different regional cost databases for
each cost centre. They can also be used to choose the currency for the cost
estimate. The cost data in each regional database is stored in either US dollars or
the local currency (for the UK, Norway and the Netherlands). When cost
databases are brought in to the procurement strategy QUE$TOR converts them
all in to US dollars. You can edit the exchange rate used for this conversion. You
can then choose a currency for the cost estimate and enter the exchange rate
from US dollars to this currency.
To create a new procurement strategy
1. Click Create new procurement strategy in the project properties form.
This opens the form shown below.
QUE$TOR Help
50
2. Select a region and country.
3. By default the cost database will be assigned a title which is the same as the
country selected. This can optionally be overwritten.
4. Click OK.
5. The procurement strategy definition form is displayed.
6. QUE$TOR has built in defaults for every country which it uses to choose
where cost centres are sourced from. To adjust the default region use the
dropdown lists.
QUE$TOR Offshore
51
7. Check the exchange rate for each database. Some cost databases are in
local currencies. In creating a procurement strategy QUE$TOR converts all
costs to US dollars. A default exchange rate is entered if the cost database is
in local currency but this should obviously be treated with care and edited to
reflect expected exchange rates. The rate should be in the form of local
currency to 1 US dollar, e.g. UK0.55 = US$1.
8. Define the currency in which you wish to cost your project. Enter a name
and a symbol (the symbol can have up to three characters). Enter an
exchange rate from US dollars. The rate should be in the form of the
specified currency to 1 US dollars, e.g. UK0.55 = US$1.
9. Click OK.
10. The new procurement strategy will now be available for selection in the
procurement strategy frame in the project properties form.
Field Level Data
About Field Level Data
The field level data form opens after the project properties if you are creating a
new project. If you are in an existing project you can open it by selecting Field
level data from the Project menu or clicking in the toolbar.
The field level data form allows specification of the overall field and reservoir
characteristics. All inputs have default values based on your chosen basin. These
are useful if you do not have some data available although the more accurate the
data the more accurate your cost estimate will be. The form has three tabs; Field
characteristics, Fluid / profile characteristics and Miscellaneous.
Once you have adjusted the input data on all tabs as necessary, click OK. This
applies your changes and closes the form to move on. Cancel will clear all
entries in the form and take you back a step.
Field Characteristics
The offshore field characteristics tab is shown below.
QUE$TOR Help
52
- Reserves: the total recoverable reserves for the field(s) covered by your
project. If you have specified the main product as gas, this is the gas
recoverable reserves. For oil projects it is the oil recoverable reserves.
- Condensate gas ratio / Gas oil ratio: for gas projects enter the
condensate gas ratio (CGR) and for oil projects the gas oil ratio (GOR).
The ratio should be in terms of recoverable reserves and is used to
determine the reserves and production profile of your secondary product
based on those of the main product.
- Reservoir depth from LAT: measured from the lowest astronomical tide
(LAT) and is used to calculate drilling costs.
- Reservoir pressure: used in calculating wellhead and injection
pressures.
- Reservoir length and Reservoir width: used in conjunction with the
maximum drilling stepout to calculate the number of drilling centres
required to fully drain the reservoir.
- Water depth: measured from the lowest astronomical tide (LAT) and
strongly influences the development concept chosen.
Fluid / Profile Characteristics
The fluid/profile characteristics tab is shown below.
QUE$TOR Offshore
53
Liquid data
Oil density: the crude or condensate API at stock tank conditions is used in
conjunction with the GOR/LGR and the gas molecular weight to generate a
pseudo composition for the wellstream fluid. This is used in the topsides
component for sizing the separators.
Gas data
- Gas molecular weight: used to define the gas composition in the oil and
gas processing modules of the topsides.
Note: The gas molecular weight entered is for the hydrocarbon
plus acid gas components. If you change the default acid gas
content you should considering adjusting the gas molecular weight
as increasing the acid gas content without increasing the gas
molecular weight effectively decreases the molecular weight of the
hydrocarbon portion of the gas.
- CO
2
content and H
2
S content: the gas H
2
S and CO
2
contents are used
in the topsides component for selection of the materials (carbon steel or
stainless steel), corrosion allowances and the gas sweetening option.
They are also used to choose casing, conductor and Xmas tree costs in
drilling. Here stainless steel is used in preference to the cheaper carbon
steel if CO
2
content is greater than 3%.
Well data
- Productivity: used to generate the production well count and relates to
the total production of a well over the field life.
QUE$TOR Help
54
- Peak well flow: used to determine the plateau production rate which is
also based on the percentage of reserves extracted at peak and estimated
drilling durations. The peak well flow should be entered on a daily basis.
Miscellaneous
The miscellaneous tab is shown below.
Miscellaneous Items
- Distance to operations base: used to determine the cost of logistics
(transportation of men and consumables) in OPEX.
- Distance to delivery point: used in the concept selector to determine
the export route and whether or not a subsea or wellhead tie-back
development is viable.
- Maximum drilling stepout: used in conjunction with the reservoir
extent to determine the number of drilling centres required to drain the
whole of the reservoir.
Temperature
Maximum ambient air temperature: used to calculate a derating factor for
gas turbine driven compressors and power generation packages. The calculated
power requirement is then divided by the derating factor to calculate the ISO
equivalent power requirement for any gas turbines.
QUE$TOR Offshore
55
Production Profile
About Production Profiles
The production profile opens after the field level data if you are creating a new
project, if you are in an existing project you can open it by selecting Production
Profile from the Project menu or clicking in the toolbar.
The production profile consists of a series of four forms which allow you to define
the production profile as well as the capacities of your facilities and the number of
wells.
Once you have completed adjusting each form click OK. This applies your
Production Profile Edit
QUE$TOR will generate a default profile based on the reserves, well productivity
and well peak flow rate. The initial ramp-up duration is calculated based on 8
wells being drilled a year whilst plateau production is assumed to last until 55%
of the recoverable reserves have been produced. QUE$TOR assumes that the
field will be on-stream for 350 days a year, allowing for an annual two week
maintenance period. The production profile edit form, shown below, allows you
to modify QUE$TORs initial estimates to shape the generated production profile
as required.
Once these values have been adjusted, click OK to progress to the production
profile. You can still go back to the production profile edit form by clicking on
Modify Profile below the production profile.
QUE$TOR Help
56
Production Profile
The production profile form gives the user a visual representation of the
production profile as specified in the production profile edit form.
The production profile is displayed in a graphical and tabular format. Click on the
appropriate tab to display either the liquid or gas profiles. Use the dropdown lists
to select which graph is displayed on each tab. The tabular data can be
overwritten either individually or by pasting in a profile from a spreadsheet.
Tip: Ensure that the field life specified in the production profile edit form is
the same as that of the profile you are pasting in. You cannot overwrite the
cumulative row of the table. You can also copy the data in the production profile
and paste it into an external spreadsheet
If you wish to change the reserves or any other field level data, click on Field
data to go back to the field level data form.
In an oil project, changes to the oil profile are automatically reflected in the gas
profile (using the input GOR) and similarly with gas projects the liquids profile
reflects the numbers input for gas. The reverse is not true, i.e. the oil is not back
calculated if a new gas profile is entered in an oil project.
QUE$TOR Offshore
57
Note: The daily production rate is based on 350 onstream days, unless
otherwise specified in the Production profile edit form.
To preview a printout of the graphs and tables, click above the Oil and Gas
tabs then click in the print preview toolbar to print the selected graph and
table. Alternatively the profiles can be printed by clicking on above the Oil
and Gas tabs. Clicking OK continues with the development configuration.
If the production profile entered results in cumulative production differing by
>1% from the total recoverable reserves entered in the field level data a warning
will be displayed when you click OK, shown below. Click OK to continue with the
entered profile or Cancel to go back and edit the values. If you continue with the
profile, the recoverable reserves entered in the field level data will be ignored.
Design Flowrates
The design oil and gas processing and injection rates are set on the Design
flowrates form, see below. Here the daily average from the peak production year
is brought forward from the production profile. A design factor (for oil projects)
or a swing factor (for gas projects) is applied to calculate the design capacity
used for equipment sizing. Entering a new design factor or swing factor
automatically recalculates the design rates.
QUE$TOR Help
58
Reservoir pressure maintenance can be specified as either water injection or gas
injection by entering the relevant flowrates. Set the flowrate to zero if it is not
required.
For oil projects gas injection is selected as the default method of gas disposal if
the daily associated gas production rate is between 5 and 200 MMscf/day. Water
injection is selected by default as the means of reservoir pressure maintenance
for oil projects.
The water injection capacity factor is a multiplier applied to the design oil
production flowrate to calculate the water injection design flow, this defaults to
1.2 for an oil project.
Neither gas or water injection are included by default for gas projects.
Number of Wells
The number of development wells form, shown below, provides the estimated
number of wells required across the field to achieve the specified profile but you
can modify the well count. The default number of production wells is based on
the well lifetime productivity. The default number of water injection wells
assumes an average of two injectors for every five oil production wells. Gas
injectors are based on an average flowrate of 30 MMscf/day per well.
QUE$TOR Offshore
59
Concept Selector
About the Concept Selector
The concept selector opens after the production profile if you are creating a new
project. If you are in an existing project you can open it by selecting Concept
selector from the Project menu or clicking in the toolbar.
It must be recognised that whilst QUE$TORs default concept selection is very
useful, the software does not take all the factors into account that would
ultimately influence a final concept selection. In some instances a concept may
be returned that, based on the generic software logic, is very reasonable but
when compared to your real life field situation might appear somewhat
surprising. Having said that, time and effort has gone into making the selection
process as comprehensive and realistic as possible.
Concept Selection for New Projects
The concept selector form, shown below, gives you the option to define your own
concept or use a predefined concept.
QUE$TOR Help
60
QUE$TOR will choose a default concept based on the field level data and
production profile. You can change this to another of the 14 Predefined concepts
using the list box. Alternatively you can select Blank Concept from the list box
and use the field development schematic to create your own concept. The key
input parameters that influence the selection most are: hydrocarbon type,
reservoir extent, water depth, distance to delivery point, and the number of wells.
The gas export and oil export frames allow you to specify the oil and gas export
method from the main platform. Again QUE$TOR will choose a default concept
but you can select an alternative using the list boxes. Distances to delivery point
should also be entered for pipeline export to determine length of the export
pipelines.
Once you have completed adjusting the form click OK. This applies your
changes, closes the form and opens the field development schematic. Cancel
will clear all entries in the form and take you back a step.
Concept Selection for Existing Projects
When the concept selector is opened from an existing projects it has two tabs,
New and Last selected, as shown below.
QUE$TOR Offshore
61
The Last selected tab is not editable but displays the concept being used by
QUE$TOR at that time.
The New tab will display QUE$TORs default concept selection. This may be
different to the last selected concept if you have changed the field level data or
production profile. The New tab also allows you to choose a different concept. To
use the concept selected on the New tab click OK. This will delete all existing
components and create a new set of components. To exit without changing the
concept click Cancel.
Note: When you create a new concept you will lose any changes you have
made to the components in the original field development plan.
The concept is never changed automatically. If you make changes to the field
level data or production profile that trigger a change to QUE$TORs default
concept the concept will only be changed if you open the concept selector and
click OK on the New tab. A warning is displayed, see below, to caution you that
you have chosen to replace the current development concept with the new
concept. The warning then gives a description of the new concept selected in
brackets
QUE$TOR Help
62
If you want to use the new concept click Yes. If you want to keep your existing
development concept click No, to return you to the previous form, then Cancel.
This is to prevent QUE$TOR deleting your changes to components in the field
development schematic (FDS). Any changes to the field level data or production
profile are passed automatically to all components in the FDS, e.g. changing the
plateau production rate will change the production capacity of the topsides, but
the concept will remain fixed.
About Component Level Data
QUE$TOR calculates capital costs based on default inputs for every component as
soon as it is added to the field development schematic (FDS). You can then open
any of these components and adjust the inputs to refine the cost estimate. The
default inputs are chosen based upon the region selected, your inputs in the field
level details and other linked components. The default inputs are designed to
give you a reasonable cost estimate in the absence of further data.
The components are all live linked to each other so that a change to one
component will change all dependent components, e.g. jacket cost is dependent
on topsides operating weight. You can enter and update these components and
fix inputs so that they are no longer updated by the program. This is called
locking. Although you can edit components in any order you should try to follow
a logical path to avoid locking variables based on incorrect data. QUE$TORs
order of calculation is explained fully see Data flow and locking.
QUE$TOR Offshore
63
Cost summary tree
The cost summary tree can be seen in the panel to the left of the FDS. This
displays a running total of the total project cost together with a breakdown of
each component cost. By default, the tree is displayed in expanded format, i.e.
for all components the cost for each cost centre is displayed. If you want to see
just the total cost of each component right click in this panel and select Collapse
all.
The tree is updated automatically as components are added, deleted and
adjusted.
When a component is opened the cost summary tree shows a cost breakdown for
the open component and a total cost for all other components.
Component Toolbar
The components toolbar displays the components which can be used to create a
development configuration. There are three tabs available in the components
toolbar Offshore, Onshore and LNG Regasification. When starting a new
project QUE$TOR will acquire only the licence for the type of development being
created. This initial licence is called the primary licence, the example below
illustrates a new offshore project. The green circle indicates the active
procurement strategies that QUE$TOR is currently using. The example below
illustrates an offshore only project and therefore only the offshore tab has a
green circle.
QUE$TOR Help
64
The Offshore tab displays the offshore components available in QUE$TOR the
Onshore tab however will not yet contain any components since the licence has
not been activated.
To add onshore components the licence must be activated, to do this click Add
onshore project. QUE$TOR will locate the onshore licence, when it is located
the onshore components will become active and the Onshore tab will now display
the onshore components.
A green circle has now appeared on the Onshore tab to indicate an onshore
procurement strategy is selected and is ready to be used.
Note: Once acquired QUE$TOR will not release a licence until the program
is closed
Similarly, to add a LNG regasification component, the licence must be activated.
To do this click Add LNG regasification onshore project, QUE$TOR will
locate the LNG regasification licence, when it is located the LNG regas onshore
tab will become active and will display the LNG regas onshore components.
Some components have a drop down next to them, these can have one of two
functions:
- Some components are available in different variations e.g. a spar buoy
component can be a caisson, truss or cell spar buoy.
- To change the component type selected use the dropdown arrow to the
right of the component button, the type selected is indicated by the
marker dot.
- The components this applies to are: Jackets, GBS, TLP, Spar Buoy,
Offshore Loading and Terminal Facilities.
- For Topsides, Production facilities and Regasification terminal facilities this
dropdown allows the functions of the component to be defined. This can
also be done within these components.
QUE$TOR Offshore
65
- To change the component type selected use the dropdown arrow to the
right of the component button, the functions present are ticked.
Field Development Schematic
The field development schematic gives a graphical representation of the project
and allows the selected concept to be refined.
To add components to the FDS
Select a component from the Components Toolbar by left clicking on it. If you
require a different component type to that selected, use the dropdown button to
change the type before clicking on the component button. Move the cursor onto
the FDS and left click again to drop the component in the required position.
To select a group of components on the FDS
Groups of components can be selected by left clicking with the mouse and holding
down to drag over all required components before releasing. These groups can
be moved or deleted.
To move a component or group of components
Left click on a component or group of components and hold down to drag to a
new position.
To delete a component or group of components
QUE$TOR Help
66
Either select the component(s) with a left mouse click and hit delete or right click
on the component and select Delete. You will be asked to confirm any deletions
to prevent any components being inadvertently deleted.
To open a component
To open and adjust a components cost estimate, double click on it or right click
on it and select Edit/View Cost Estimate. See the relevant component chapter
for more information.
Topsides docking to substructures
Topsides are docked to their associated substructure. This enables the program
to pass data needed to size the components between them. It also means that
moving one of the components will move both components. To dock a
substructure and topsides, move one towards the other in the FDS by selecting it
and holding down on the left mouse button. When they get close together they
will snap towards each other, release the mouse button to dock the components.
To undock a topsides and substructure right click on either one and select
Undock.
Pipelines & linking components
The Link button enables components to be linked together. This can represent
pipelines e.g. between platforms but can also be used as an information link e.g.
linking drilling to subsea. To link two components:
- Ensure the two components you wish to connect are on screen.
- Select the link button in the components toolbar.
- Left click the first component you wish to connect in the link then click
again on the second component.
The order in which components are linked should generally follow the sequence of
oil/gas production, i.e. drilling to subsea or topsides and not the other way
round. If you cant complete a link, hit the escape key and retry in the opposite
direction.
You cannot create links to or from substructures. Links can only be made
between the following components: topsides, offshore loading, subsea, drilling,
sources and sinks.
The link will be displayed in one of three colours:
- Black: A pipeline link. There can be one or more pipelines in each link.
- Blue: Used to link subsea components to topsides. This link is for passing
data only. All flowline costs are included in the subsea component.
- Green: Used to link drilling components to subsea or topsides
components. This link is for passing data only
Links become red when selected and can be deleted by hitting delete or right
clicking and selecting Delete link.
QUE$TOR Offshore
67
Pipelines
To add a pipeline to a link, double click on the link and click on Add in the
Pipeline linking form, shown below. The form enables you to specify the pipeline
length and maximum water depth. Pipelines can then be sized and costed by
selecting them and clicking Cost. For more information see Offshore Pipelines.
There can be multiple pipelines in each link. All pipelines in a link are assumed to
follow exactly the same route. Pipelines in the same pipeline link can flow in
either direction. To change flow direction or fluid type right click on the link and
select Show all pipelines in the link or double click on the link.
Well and Flow Distribution
QUE$TOR divides the wells and flows specified in the production profile between
the components in the field development schematic. Wells are divided up first
and flows are then allocated on a per well basis.
Production, water injection and gas injection wells are divided equally between all
drilling components. The three projects shown below, all have a total of 11
producers specified in the production profiles. The well distribution is illustrated
in each figure.
QUE$TOR Help
68
This shows a project with two drilling components. The wells are split between
the two drilling components with the extra well going to the main production
platform.
QUE$TOR Offshore
69
This shows a the same project but with the addition of a subsea component with
associated drilling. The eleven wells are again divided between the drilling
components.
This shows a the same project but the number of subsea wells has been specified
as 5. Therefore the remaining six wells have been split equally between the
remaining two drilling components.
Note: Changes to the number of wells or the flowrates in a subsea
component will not be passed to any linked drilling component but they will be
passed to any linked topsides.
Water and gas injection wells are allocated on the same basis as production wells.
Adding a new drilling component or adding wells to an existing drilling
components will re-allocate the wells and reduce the number of wells in all other
unlocked drilling components. The total number of wells will be maintained at the
number specified in the production profile. If there is only one drilling component
or if all other drilling components are locked then adding wells will increase the
total wells. Deleting wells follows the same methodology in reverse. Any change
to the total wells in the drilling and subsea components will not be passed back to
the production profile but will be included in all capital and operating cost
estimates. See Data flow and locking for more information on the calculation
hierarchy.
QUE$TOR Help
70
Flowrate allocation is done on a per well basis. The design capacities specified in
the production profile are divided by the number of wells in the production profile
to give a flowrate per well. If you increase the total wells in the field schematic
then the total flowrate will be increased as the flow per well is based on the
number of wells and design capacity specified in the production profile. The same
applies in reverse if you decrease the total wells in the field schematic.
Flows from drilling components are passed from component to component in the
direction of production. Gas injection and water injection flowrates are handled in
the same fashion despite physically flowing in the opposite direction. Their
flowrates are determined in the drilling component and passed in the direction of
production to calculate the injection facilities required on the relevant topsides.
Note: The flowrates from the wellhead platform will not be passed to the
main topsides unless there is an appropriate pipeline in the link, the flowrate will
be automatically used to size the pipeline.
If a wellhead platform has a water injection pipeline coming from a main (full
production) platform then QUE$TOR assumes that all pumping is on the main
platform. If you add water injection to the wellhead platform then QUE$TOR will
reduce the pumping capacity on the main platform accordingly. Gas injection and
gas lift compression is always assumed to be done exclusively on the main
platform.
Note: Even though injection fluids physically flow from the main platform to
the reservoir information on their flowrates is passed in the opposite direction. If
you wish to change injection flowrates change them in the drilling components
and the topsides component will be automatically updated.
Offshore Cost Centres
The cost estimate sheet is displayed on the right hand side of the screen when a
component is open. It displays a breakdown of every cost item included in the
component. The component inputs are used to calculate the quantities shown on
the cost estimate. The unit rates are determined by the procurement strategy.
The costs are generally based on a simple weight x unit rate = cost
relationship. It is possible to go to any blue number in the cost sheet and make
any appropriate changes to the calculated weights or the unit rates.
QUE$TOR Offshore
71
Offshore components costs are broken down into eight cost centres:
Equipment Costs
The equipment weights are updated in the cost estimate sheet as each sub-
component is adjusted and unit rates for each identified equipment item are
retrieved from the procurement strategy. Unit rates are also dependent on the
construction material with stainless steel or a stainless steel internal cladding
used in areas where high acid gas contents are experienced. Equipment costs
cover the vendor's cost for fabrication of the equipment, any procurement of sub-
components and sub-vendor's submission to approval authorities and testing at
the vendor's works. Direct procurement costs are included in the design cost
centre.
A freight cost is then added which is assumed by QUE$TOR to be a percentage of
the total cost of the equipment identified in the systems listed above. It includes
the cost of packaging and transporting equipment from the manufacturer to the
construction yard. You can modify the freight percentage, the default is
dependent on where the equipment is procured 'in region' or 'out of region' i.e. is
the item being procured from the same region as the field location.
Materials Costs
Covers all the bulk materials permanently installed with the component. The
costs cover delivery, insurance, guarantees and duties. There are five main
categories for the bulk materials:
- Steel: covers any secondary steel required for a component such as
support steel, module frames, access ways, ladders etc.
QUE$TOR Help
72
- Piping: covers any pipe supports, flanges and fittings and valves but
excludes control valves and emergency shutdown valves (which are
included in instrument bulks).
- Electrical: covers any cabling, cable trays, supports, terminations,
glands, gland transits, junction boxes, lighting and small power systems
(e.g. batteries/life support power).
- Instrument: covers any instrument cabling, pneumatic tubing,
terminations, glands, gland penetrations, supports, control valves, relief
valves and ESD and blowdown valves.
- Others: covers any additional bulk system weights associated with the
HVAC and safety systems plus painting and architectural bulks.
A freight cost is added to these in a similar method to the equipment freight
costs.
Costs for consumables and materials for construction aids or temporary works are
included in fabrication.
Fabrication Costs
The fabrication costs include all fabrication activities, from receipt and storage of
materials, fabrication, assembly, testing and precommissioning to weighing,
including any off-site fabrication (not vendor-supplied skids).
The fabrication costs are based around a required number of man-hours and a
man-hour rate. Clicking on the hyperlinked fabrication heading will open up the
fabrication breakdown form giving details of how the fabrication costs are
calculated, see Fabrication Details for more information.
The man-hour rate includes for: yard mobilisation, welder testing, all wages,
salaries and bonuses, payroll burden, indirect services, i.e. scaffolding, cleaning,
yard maintenance; consumable materials, temporary construction/lifting aids,
construction plant and small tools, contractor's own supervision and
management, shop drawings, general overheads, utility services, depreciation,
project expenses, i.e. office facilities for operator's representatives, secretarial
and office staff, accounting.
Installation Costs
Installation costs include transport of the component modules or deck from the
fabrication yard to the installation site or deck mating area and installation costs
of lifting the modules or deck on to an installed jacket, mating a deck with a GBS
or TLP substructure or installation of modules on to a semi-submersible or tanker
deck in a yard.
Hook up and Commissioning (HUC) Costs
Cover all the costs off hook-up and commissioning and can be broken down into
three areas:
- Atshore HUC: work which can be carried out in the yard where systems
can be tested and commissioned in situ, prior to leaving the yard.
- Inshore HUC: work which can be carried out away from the construction
yard but at a location close to shore, e.g. deepwater sites used for deck
mating, and applies generally to GBS platforms. It includes for labour,
QUE$TOR Offshore
73
support services (supply boat, etc) onshore accommodation and catering
and onshore supply base costs. Inshore hook-up therefore reduces the
cost of transporting personnel and equipment to the hook-up location.
The costs include all HUC activities possible without having hydrocarbons
available. This includes connection of modules/equipment (e.g. pressure
testing, loop testing of cabling, run up of turbines on propane, testing of
compressors, etc). It includes allowance for salaries, consumables,
overheads, temporary construction aids/lifting aids, construction plant and
small tools, specialist subcontractors, contractors own supervision and
management.
- Offshore HUC: work carried out at the offshore location. It includes for
labour, support services (supply boat, helicopter, etc) temporary
accommodation and catering and onshore supply base costs. The costs
include all hook-up and commissioning activities to achieve first oil, all
modules/equipment fully performance tested using crude from the field
and all systems on-line and available for production. The costs include all
salaries, consumables, overheads, temporary construction aids/lifting aids,
construction plant and small tools, specialist subcontractors, contractors
own supervision and management. There is also an allowance for
additional shift changes, travelling time, etc.
Design and Project management Costs
Covers the hours of the component designers and project management:
- Design hours: the design man-hours are factored from the equipment
and materials weights and include project specification, special studies,
detail design, site surveys, follow on engineering, purchasing, expediting
and inspection services, project control, QA and documentation during the
detailed design phase.
The rates include wages, salaries and other benefits paid to personnel,
payroll burdens, insurance, general overheads (office facilities, utility
services, depreciation of facilities and equipment and administration),
project expenses and equipment. Also included are vendor drawings and
data, delivery of items to the yard, vendors installation and commissioning
services, commissioning spares, insurance up to delivery, guarantees and
import duties.
- Project management hours: covers the hours required for all operator
company personnel and any project management team costs, to manage,
monitor and control all phases of the development and includes
management, prospect evaluation and economics, project engineering,
project control and planning, design and construction supervision, quality
assurance and third party liaison. This covers from the conceptual design
phase, through completion in the yard, to first oil offshore however
operations supervision, product sales, etc are excluded from this cost
centre, as are contractors own management costs.
The project management man-hours are factored from the design man-hours
Insurance and Certification costs
Covers the costs of insuring and certifying the components:
QUE$TOR Help
74
- Insurance: covers the cost of insuring project components during
transport, construction, installation, HUC, etc up to first oil. Personnel
liability insurances are assumed to be covered by corporate policies. The
insurance costs are taken as a percentage of the overall component cost.
- Certification: covers the certification costs of the design, equipment,
materials and construction of the development by a recognised certifying
authority (e.g. Lloyd's, ABS or DNV). Certification is only included by
default for European and North American countries where it is common
practice and is taken as a percentage of the total component cost. A
certification percentage is included in the Canadian, North Sea and U.S.
cost databases. All other cost databases have a zero cost for certification.
Contingency
A contingency is added as a percentage of the total material, fabrication,
installation, HUC, design, project management, insurance and certification costs
to bring the component cost estimate to a P50 level. For a fuller explanation see
Contingency Definitions.
Operating Expenditure (OPEX)
Operating Expenditure - OPEX
Selecting OPEX from the Project menu opens the operating expenditure analysis
form. This displays the calculated operating costs for each year of production.
There are four possible tabs: Offshore, Onshore, LNG Regas onshore plus a
Summary tab. Which sections are produced is dependent on the development
types in use in QUE$TOR. If it is an offshore only development then the offshore
sheet will be displayed. If both offshore and onshore developments are present
then an offshore, an Onshore and a summary tab will be displayed.
Note: The activation of the relevant licence will result in the development
OPEX being included even if no components are present.
The values are calculated using the defaults in the procurement strategy. To see
other years use the scroll bar at the bottom of the window.
QUE$TOR Offshore
75
The costs are split into three groups:
- Direct costs: component based costs including personnel, inspection and
maintenance, logistics and consumables, well maintenance and insurance.
- Field project costs: overall fixed field costs including administration
supply warehousing and support.
- Tariff costs: includes both tariffs paid by the operator for transportation
or remote processing of oil or gas, and tariffs received by the operator for
use of the processing or transportation facilities.
Clicking on any of the underlined blue headings opens a new window where the
calculated operating costs can be viewed and edited in more detail. The blue
headings are only present on the individual development tabs.
Note: The Cancel button is only active at the cost summary level.
The three icons in the windows utility bar allow you to produce reports of the
operating expenditure analysis:
Print: activates the report builder wizard in preparation to print.
Print Preview: activates the report builder wizard to preview the reports.
Export to Excel workbook: allows reports to be exported to Excel.
Applying a Change to a Range of Cells
A number of the calculations within OPEX use the same calculation for each year
of the operation, with the option to change each year's basis individually. To
allow quick duplication of this change to other years a change to a cell within
OPEX can be applied to other cells within a row using the "fill right" or "fill left"
options.
To use this feature options:
1. Make the desired change to the cell.
2. Select the range of cells that you want to apply the change to.
3. Right click on these cells and select "fill right" to apply the value in the
leftmost cell to the range of cells or "fill left" to apply the value in the
rightmost cell to the range of cells.
Working with an Existing OPEX Analysis
QUE$TOR Help
76
The OPEX module differs significantly from the rest of QUE$TOR. It is not live
linked into other parts of QUE$TOR. If changes are made to any component you
must create a new OPEX analysis to bring these changes into the OPEX analysis.
This will mean losing any changes you have made to the operating costs. The
same principles apply if components are added or deleted or if the production
profile is changed. All default values in the OPEX analysis are taken from the
databases specified in the procurement strategy.
Note: If you wish to run multiple OPEX scenarios it is recommended that
you adjust defaults in the databases for faster results.
When you select OPEX from the Project menu having already done an OPEX
analysis you will be presented with the following three buttons.
Clicking Retrieve existing OPEX analysis opens the previously run analysis.
This option does not update the operating costs if modifications to the
components have been made.
Clicking Create a new OPEX analysis overwrites the previous estimate with a
new project including all current component data.
Clicking Cancel leaves the saved operating costs unchanged and returns to the
field schematic.
Operating Personnel
This covers the permanent manning levels required by the developments. In
offshore developments the topsides manning requirements are specified. These
numbers are shown in the Operating personnel window along with the Shift
rotation pattern and annual Cost per man taken from the procurement strategy.
The offshore operating personnel sheet is shown below.
The permanent manning levels on each platform are passed from the topsides
components. The drilling crew and associated support staff are excluded from
QUE$TOR Offshore
77
these numbers as their costs are included within the drilling day rate used in the
drilling components.
For offshore loading facilities with a permanently moored storage tanker a
minimum marine crew is included. These numbers are shown in the Operating
personnel window along with the Shift rotation pattern and annual Cost per man
taken from the procurement strategy.
The operating personnel cost is based on the number of permanent crew on the
platform with allowance for a replacement crew or crews on onshore leave
according to the rotation pattern. The Days onsite 2 and Days offsite 2 inputs
allow you to specify more than one shift pattern. The Cost per man covers
salaries, expenses, payroll burden, etc but excludes transport to and from the
platform.
Changing the default values for Shift rotation patterns, Cost per man or Number
of men automatically updates the annual cost.
Inspection and Maintenance
Clicking on Inspection & maintenance costs in the OPEX summary opens the
Inspection and maintenance summary window.
The inspection and maintenance cost covers the ongoing inspection requirements,
maintenance, planned and unplanned repair and replacement. For all
components the costs are assigned to one of three areas: Spares, Inspection and
Repair. The basis of these costs are summarised in Basis of Inspection and
Maintenance.
Spares costs are determined by applying a percentage to the relevant equipment
and materials capital costs.
Inspection is based on contract labour or services to complete periodic
inspection. For topsides this includes for equipment vendor representatives and
specialist inspection staff in addition to permanent platform maintenance areas.
For all other components inspection includes the cost of a DSV or other suitable
vessel, consumables, crew and mobilisation/ demobilisation costs.
Repair costs are included in the inspection costs for topsides and substructures.
For pipelines and subsea components specialist vessels are hired to perform
repairs.
QUE$TOR Help
78
Platforms
Clicking on Platform costs opens the platform inspection & maintenance
window.
This shows the annual inspection and maintenance cost for each topsides,
substructure and offshore loading component. Changes may be made to the
intermediate calculation data, such as spares %, labour rate or DSV days and the
whole sheet will be recalculated. Changes can also be made to individual
calculated costs.
The labour cost includes for inspection and maintenance performed by specialists
or vendor representatives who are not normally stationed on the platform.
Equipment and spares covers all replacement equipment parts, instrumentation,
electrical, corrosion coverings, etc. DSV duration covers the annual inspection of
the substructure, hull and mooring systems as appropriate.
Pipelines
Clicking on Pipeline costs opens the Pipeline inspection and maintenance
window.
QUE$TOR Offshore
79
This shows the annual inspection and maintenance cost for each pipeline
component and the total cost. By default, the operating costs includes for an
annual pipeline survey and infrequent repair and pigging operations with intervals
varying by region. Repair covers span correction, reburial or additional rock
dumping type activities. Intelligent pigging cost includes the hire of the pig,
specialist operators and analysis of the results.
Subsea
Clicking on Subsea costs opens the Subsea inspection and maintenance window.
This shows the annual inspection and maintenance cost for each subsea
component and the total cost. Subsea inspection and maintenance is performed
by either multipurpose service vessel (MSV) or diving support vessel (DSV) and
includes for divers in shallow water and remotely operated vehicles
(ROVs)/intervention tools in deeper waters. The inspection and spares cost is
based on an annual visit and changeout of critical items.
QUE$TOR Help
80
If the MSV mob/demob duration is less than the total repair time for all subsea
items then the MSV repair days is set to zero. In this situation it is not
considered worth mobilising an MSV for such a short operation.
Logistics and Consumables
Logistics covers for helicopter transport of crew to and from all platforms in the
field, supply boats and standby boats. Consumables includes fuel gas, diesel fuel
and well and production chemicals.
Helicopters
QUE$TOR calculates the number of required helicopter flights based on the
number of operating personnel in the field, the shift rotation pattern and the
capacity of the helicopter. A minimum of 12 flights per year are assumed for
unmanned platforms and a minimum of 26 flights per year for manned
platforms. The trip time is based on the distance from the supply base and its
speed with an allowance for landings, take off, refuelling, etc. The cost is then
based on a standing charter charge plus a cost per hour of trip time.
Supply Boats
The cost of supply boats to transfer chemicals, diesel, spares, food, etc to the
platforms is calculated based on the number of trips per week to each platform.
The number of trips per week is taken from the regional technical database and
varies according to the topsides weight, if the platform is fixed or floating and
whether or not the platform is permanently manned. The distance from the
supply base and supply boat speed are used to calculate the round trip time
allowing 4 hours at port and in the field for loading and unloading. The cost is
QUE$TOR Offshore
81
then the number of days vessel hire plus the fuel cost (days x consumption per
day x diesel cost).
Rescue and recovery boat
Includes the cost of a boat permanently located in the field if any platform in the
development is manned. The day rate includes vessel hire, consumables and
crew costs.
Fuel Gas
The electrical power load and gas turbine driver duties for all platforms are
brought forward from the component estimates. From these power loads, fuel
gas requirements are calculated using typical efficiencies for power generation
sets and gas turbine drivers and the number of onstream days. The cost of fuel
gas is only included for projects where gas is exported and is then charged at
sales gas value. Where all produced gas is flared or re-injected into the reservoir
it is assumed the gas has no value.
Diesel
The amount of diesel consumed is determined from the electrical power duty and
the calorific value of diesel and is an allowance for usage in emergency power
generators, cranes, fire pump testing, etc. An allowance is also included for the
base electrical load on a FPSO or semi-submersible.
Chemicals
The cost of chemicals consumed in the field is split into three operations:
production chemicals with consumption based on the oil flowrate for oil projects
and the gas flow rate for gas projects, water injection chemicals, with
consumption, based on the water injection rate, and well chemicals with
consumption based on the number of wells. Consumption rates are taken from
the operating expenditure technical database.
The cost of diesel and the various injection chemicals are taken from the OPEX
cost database.
Well Costs
The cost of well operations such as wirelining and workover for each type of well
(oil producer, gas producer, water injector or gas injector) are calculated. The
cost and duration of each activity is dependent on the type of rig used to perform
the operation:
- Platform with rig: well operations performed by permanent platform
installed rig
- Platform no rig: well operations performed by skid-on rig or cantilevered
jack-up rig
- Subsea: well operations are performed by semi-submersible drilling
vessel.
QUE$TOR Help
82
This shows the annual cost for all routine and non-routine well maintenance
operations. Non routine well maintenance includes all activities which require a
rig to pull the production tubing, e.g. workovers. Routine well maintenance
covers the cost of maintaining all well systems such as kill and control and
includes through tubing workovers (TTWO), pressure seal test, tubing caliper
runs, tubing clean out and downhole surveys.
The well costs window contains the Material cost per operation, the Rig rate,
Interval between operations, and the Duration of each operation. For platform
rigs the operations are spaced out evenly, while for jack-up and semi-submersible
drilling options they are grouped together. All wells are assumed to be in
operation from year 1, and the interval period starts counting from that date.
The duration includes for weather downtime but excludes mobilisation/
demobilisation.
The rig rate includes for vessel hire, labour, consumables, and logistics for each
of the drilling options.
Insurance
Annual insurance costs are determined as a percentage of the capital costs. The
percentages are applied to the total component capital cost, assuming complete
component replacement with an identical item and can be viewed and modified
by clicking on Insurance costs. This displays the Insurance window.
QUE$TOR Offshore
83
Field/Project OPEX
Clicking on field / project costs displays the field/project costs window.
The field/project costs cover the onshore support and administration related to
the development and includes:
- Onshore admin: a percentage of the offshore operating personnel cost
- Supply base/warehousing: a fixed sum to include for a secure
warehouse and open storage area to store key spare equipment, piping
and valves. The rate includes labour costs and office accommodation
- Operations support: a percentage of the total offshore annual operating
costs
- Special items: a blank cell that a user defined cost can be entered in to
cover any other onshore costs.
Changing the Onshore admin and Operations support percentage automatically
updates the associated costs.
QUE$TOR Help
84
Also on this sheet are the Share factors which allow the partial allocation of
field/project costs. This is used when project operating costs are shared with
other fields allowing you to enter the percentage of logistics costs (helicopter and
supply boat fixed costs), supply/warehousing costs and onshore administration
costs attributed to this project.
Tariffs
Clicking on Tariff costs opens the Tariffs window, shown below. This shows the
oil and gas profiles on which tariffs can be paid. These default to the field export
profiles but you can overwrite them. You can also include profiles on which tariffs
can be received.
Oil transportation tariffs are included by default if export is via an existing
pipeline, offshore loading or ship to ship. Gas transportation tariffs are included
by default if export is via an existing pipeline.
Tariff values are read from the procurement strategy or can be entered for
processing and transportation of the oil and gas streams.
CAPEX Scheduling
Capital Expenditure Scheduling
QUE$TOR provides the means to produce development schedules and investment
profiles from the calculated engineering data used to produce cost estimates.
QUE$TOR Offshore
85
This is in the form of standard schedules for each project component, based on
derived technical data such as weight, length and durations. Scheduling is
accessed from the Project menu by selecting Scheduling.
The default schedules have been developed from analysis of existing projects and
studies for various capacities and complexities, while taking into account current
contracting techniques and practices, such as for example the use of turnkey
procurement strategies for smaller southern North Sea projects.
CAPEX Scheduling Window
The CAPEX scheduling window can be opened by selecting Scheduling from the
Project menu.
The window contains a table showing the start month, duration and cost of each
component in the project. The table also includes a distribution (Dist) column.
When a component is expanded distributions can be chosen for each cost centre.
A scheduling bar to the right of each component displays its start, finish and
duration. A vertical bar indicates when first oil will be produced. The Toolbar
Icons give various shortcuts.
The window illustrated above displays the components in a collapsed view,
showing only their total CAPEX. This total CAPEX is made up of a number of cost
centres, e.g. equipment or installation. These are each assigned a default start
date and duration and are called activities. The activities that make up each
component are based on the cost centres in their cost estimate sheets.
To view and edit the start dates and durations of a components activities,
components can be expanded. To do this either expand the component
individually or click on the Expand all button in the toolbar.
QUE$TOR Help
86
Distributions
Each component activity is assigned a distribution. This determines the profile of
expenditure. Distributions can be changed for each component activity by double
clicking on the distribution cell.
Each distribution is made up of three time periods, the distribution is defined by
specifying the percentage of time and cost apportioned to each period. QUE$TOR
uses a down payment and delivery (DPD) distribution for equipment and
materials activities and a uniform (UNI) distribution for all other activities. There
is an additional built in distribution, triangular (TRI) but this is not used by
default. You can select a built in distribution using the dropdown list or specify
their own by selecting User as shown below.
QUE$TOR Offshore
87
When specifying a user defined distribution, you can adjust the first two time
periods and the third will be automatically calculated. You should ensure that the
sum of the first two percentages does not exceed 100%.
When a user defined distribution is applied to an activity it only applies to that
specific activity. Choosing user defined for another activitys distribution will
enable you to specify a distribution but will not set the distribution equal to any
other activitys user defined distribution.
The affect of these distributions on the total capital expenditure profile can be
quickly assessed using the CAPEX breakdown graphs. The CAPEX profile used in
the investment and production profile will also include these distributions.
Intra-component relationships
QUE$TOR includes default relationships between each activity within a
component. In the example shown above, procurement of jacket materials lags
the beginning of jacket design by three months; jacket fabrication lags the
beginning of design by six months and jacket installation starts at the end of
fabrication. Jacket project management begins with start of the first activity and
ends with the end of the last activity. Whilst different components have different
activities the same principles still apply.
The start date and duration of each activity can be edited by either adjusting the
values in the table or moving or resizing the scheduling bars. If you change an
activity on which the start dates of other components are dependent then all
these activities will move to maintain the default lag.
These default relationships only apply in one direction. In the example shown
above, moving design will move all other activities. Moving materials will move
fabrication, installation and project management but will not affect design. In
general each activity is dependent on an activity that starts before it. Moving an
activity will affect all dependent activities that start after it but will break any
links with activities that start before it. Project management has slightly different
rules in that it will always start when the first activity starts and end when the
last activity ends.
Note: The default schedule for the user defined component uses the
defaults for a lightweight topsides. You will probably need to adjust it
Inter-component relationships
QUE$TOR Help
88
QUE$TOR considers a default set of relationships between components when
generating a project schedule. These relationships between components are
considered as links between activities within each component. The object of
these default relationships is to delay expenditure on each component as far as
possible without pushing back the first oil date. For example in a typical platform
development, the time to first oil will generally be the time from design to final
commissioning of the main topsides. So in this situation QUE$TOR will schedule
pipeline installation to finish at the same time as topsides hook-up. Inter-
component relationships behave in a similar fashion to intra-component
relationships. Moving an activity will move all dependent components but the link
will not apply in reverse. Moving an activity will break any relationships with
activities in other components on which that activity is dependent.
To use the topsides and pipeline example, delaying the topsides by a year will
automatically delay the pipeline by a year but delaying the pipeline by a year will
not affect the topsides.
To reschedule a component with respect to the other components click on the
Project Management bar and slide it backwards or forwards as required. The
duration for all activities within the component remain as previously specified but
their start date changes.
In projects with multiple topsides QUE$TOR tends to schedule all pipelines to
finish with the main topsides. Delaying a wellhead platform may not delay the
pipelines linking it to the main topsides as you would expect. In these projects
you should be careful to review QUE$TORs scheduling assumptions and
potentially delay some in-field pipelines.
Locking
When you change any start date or duration it will become locked. All
relationships with activities upon which the edited activity is dependent will then
be broken. Unlocking values will restore the default relationships and durations.
Right clicking on a component name in the scheduling table will enable you to
lock or unlock all its start dates and durations. Individual start dates and
durations can also be locked and unlock by right clicking on them.
Locking a component's schedule enables you to recalculate its CAPEX whilst
maintaining its schedule.
First Oil
QUE$TOR will calculate the month in which it expects production to start and
display this on the scheduling chart as a vertical bar. The first oil indicator has no
direct influence on the scheduling calculations. Its only purpose is to specify the
month in which production will start in the investment and production profile.
Moving the first oil indictor will not influence the schedule but it will influence the
investment and production profile.
Initially first oil will be linked to what QUE$TOR calculates to be the critical path,
this will usually be the end of the main topsides hook-up. Moving this activity, or
others on which the activity is dependent will move the first oil. You can break
the default link by moving the first oil bar on the scheduling chart. This will have
no affect on the rest of scheduling.
QUE$TOR Offshore
89
When you move the first oil bar it will lock. It can also be locked and unlocked by
right clicking on it. The first oil bar is red when locked and black when unlocked.
Whilst QUE$TOR is reasonably accurate with simple developments, it will struggle
with complex and multi-phase developments. In these situations you are advised
to check the date of first oil carefully.
Timescale
The scheduling chart can be toggled between project and calendar timescales by
using the project and calendar timescale buttons on the toolbar.
The project timescale is displayed in months, starting from zero. The calendar
timescale is displayed in calendar years starting from a date specified in the
toolbar. In converting between these two timescales, the project is assumed to
start at the beginning of the month specified. If the start month is month 1, 0 in
the project timescale is assumed to be equivalent to 1
st
day of month 1. Each
month is assumed to be equal to one twelfth of a year in both timescales,
variation in calendar month duration is not considered.
Adding and Removing Components
Any components added or removed from the project using the field development
schematic will automatically be added or removed from scheduling. Any locked
values in scheduling will be maintained unless the component is deleted.
Note: Generating a new concept will delete all components and so any
schedule will be lost.
CAPEX Breakdown Graphs
Clicking on the CAPEX breakdown graph button in the scheduling window toolbar
opens a new window that displays a breakdown of capital expenditure against
time. Three timescales can be chosen from the dropdown list: monthly, quarterly
and yearly. The yearly breakdown is shown below.
QUE$TOR Help
90
About the Investment and Production Profile
The Investment and production profile window can be opened by selecting
Investment and production profile from the Project menu. The window
combines all the information from the project in a format suitable for economic or
life-cycle cost analysis.
QUE$TOR Offshore
91
The investment and production profile summarises the project costs: scheduled
CAPEX, OPEX and decommissioning costs along with the production profile. An
OPEX analysis and a CAPEX schedule will be automatically generated if you have
not already edited them.
You can adjust and lock any of the imported profiles. You can also enter your
own data for annual investment cost such as seismic, well test and modifications
etc. which are not covered in QUE$TOR.
The timescale will be set to the timescale used in scheduling. This can be a
project or calendar timescale. With a project timescale the investment and
production profile starts at this year plus one. With a calendar timescale it starts
at the year specified in scheduling. If the calendar start date specified in
scheduling is, for example, 07/2008 then the first year in the investment profile
will be 2008 but it will only include costs incurred from month 7 to 12.
The OPEX and production profiles begin at first oil. The date of first oil can be
edited in scheduling. If first oil is mid year then the OPEX and production profiles
are recalculated to account for the partial year of production. The overall
production and expenditures are not changed, they are just given a new
timescale to match the project timescale.
In the example comparison of profile timescales, the first oil occurs exactly half
way through year 3. The production profile is recalculated so that it starts at the
beginning of month 7 in year 3 in the investment profile.
Simple indicators are shown giving the cost per barrel of oil equivalent for E&A,
Drilling, Facilities, total Capital (drilling + facilities), Operating cost and Lifecycle
cost. The factors used to convert from condensate (bbl) or gas (MScf) are shown
and may be edited.
To save the investment and production profile sheet as an Excel file click in
the toolbar. To preview the profile before you print click in the toolbar.
QUE$TOR Help
92
Select on the preview screen to print the report. Alternatively, to print the
profile without previewing it click in the toolbar.
Exporting the Investment Profile into AS$ET
Note: AS$ET 3.3 or later is required to be able to import from QUE$TOR.
The investment and production profile sheet can be exported into the IHS project
and portfolio economic evaluation program, AS$ET by clicking in the toolbar.
This offers two methods of exporting the data; by clipboard or by file.
The Clipboard method is useful if you are running AS$ET at the same time as
QUE$TOR and want to import a single project.
The File method is useful if you want to import a number of projects into AS$ET
or save the project to run AS$ET at a later date. When the File method is
selected you specify the location where you want to save the QUE$TOR to AS$ET
file using the Export project to AS$ET form.
QUE$TOR Offshore
93
Offshore Components
About Offshore Components
On entering a component the input panel is shown in the bottom left of the
screen with the cost estimate sheet on the right hand side, the cost tree will
display the open component.
You can edit all inputs, quantities and unit rates. When a value is changed it will
become locked and will no longer be updated by QUE$TOR if a higher level input
is adjusted. You can also lock a value without changing it by right clicking on it
and selecting Locked. To unlock a value, right click on it and deselect Locked.
You can change locked values without unlocking them. Unlocked values will be
updated if other variables in the component or project upon which they are
dependent are changed.
Once all the inputs are adjusted, click Apply to update the cost estimate. To
apply all changes and exit a component, click OK. To exit a component without
saving your changes click Cancel.
QUE$TOR Help
94
Cost Summary Tree
Input Panel
The input panel displays the inputs of the components and behave in a similar
manner to forms. Some input panels contain arrow buttons ( ) which when
clicked will open up a sub-component form e.g. Topsides Manifolding, allowing
more detailed specification. When new inputs are entered the cost estimate and
any other dependent values are not updated until Apply is clicked.
Apply will only be active if changes have been made to the inputs.
Cost Estimate Sheets
The cost estimate sheet displays a breakdown of every cost item included in the
component which are broken down under the QUE$TOR cost centres. The costs
are broken down into a quantity, usually a weight, and a unit rate. The
component inputs are used to calculate the quantities and the unit rates are
determined by the procurement strategy. The costs are generally based on a
simple weight x unit rate = cost relationship. It is possible to go to any blue
number in the cost sheet and make any appropriate changes to the calculated
quantities or the unit rates.
Some sheets have blue underlined values. Clicking on these will open a more
detailed cost estimate sheet in a new window.
QUE$TOR Offshore
95
Clicking on OK will apply all changes to the component, close it and return you to
the FDS. Clicking on Cancel will exit the component without applying any
changes and return you to the FDS.
Topsides
About Topsides
The topsides component covers processing facilities for oil or gas, including
wellhead manifolding, separation, gas treatment, gas compression, condensate
handling, export metering, water or gas injection, utilities, power generation,
communications and control, quarters, drilling facilities, bulk materials and
structural steel.
Technical algorithms are used to calculate process capacities and equipment sizes
from which weights are derived. These weights are then combined into system
weights and associated utilities and power requirements calculated. Bulk factors
are applied to systems and individual equipment items to estimate the piping,
electrical, instrumentation, architectural and safety bulk material requirements.
Module steel, module support frame (MSF) steel and deck steel are calculated
according to the above weight estimates and fabrication costs for the topsides
modules or decks generated.
The configuration of topsides facilities, bulk factors and steel weight calculations
are dependent on the choice of modular (including module weight limitations) or
integrated deck construction and the choice of substructure type, i.e. jacket,
lightweight structure, GBS, TLP/spar or floating production unit. Regional
differences between oil producing countries are reflected in both the technical
algorithms and the cost databases.
The estimate is completed by calculating transportation and installation durations,
hook-up and commissioning (HUC) man-hours, design and project man-hours and
adding allowances for insurance, certification and contingency.
Primary Inputs
The Primary inputs tab allow you to choose the highest level topsides design
specifications and is shown below.
QUE$TOR Help
96
Functions
The topsides can consist of any or all of five functions: Wellhead (manifolding),
Production, Compression, Drilling and Quarters. Selecting a function will include
all associated systems in the cost estimate and allow you to open and edit the
associated sub-components.
Note: You must click Apply before your changes are implemented.
The functions are:
- Wellhead: selection of this incorporates production, test, water and gas
injection and gas lift manifolds. It also includes a well kill manifold, a well
control package with its associated panels and a hydraulic power unit for
well control. It does not include Xmas trees which are included in the
Drilling component.
- Production: selection of this will include production and test separation,
oil or condensate processing, oil export facilities, gas processing and water
injection facilities. Detailed specifications of the processing facilities are
made interactively in the relevant sub-components.
- Compression: selection of this includes flash gas, gas export, gas
reinjection and lift gas compression packages along with the associated
suction scrubbers and aftercoolers.
- Drilling: selection of this includes all drilling facilities on the platform and
should be selected for platform rigs and tender supported drilling. It is not
applicable for lightweight structures.
- Quarters: selection of this function includes the accommodation and
helideck. For floating production units it is assumed that some
accommodation is supplied with the vessel, however, additional
accommodation and refurbishment of the existing accommodation can be
included. If quarters is not selected, QUE$TOR includes an emergency
shelter and a lighter helideck. If a lightweight structure is selected, a
lightweight aluminium helideck can be included.
QUE$TOR Offshore
97
Utilities, power generation and distribution systems are calculated for all topsides
and are determined based on the process systems included.
Capacities
The capacities include flows to or from other linked platforms and are used to size
separation, processing and export facilities. They include the design margins
specified in the Production profile.
- Oil/condensate: total flowrate of all oil or condensate arriving at the
topsides.
- Water injection: the total water injection flowing from the platform to
linked drilling subsea and topsides components.
- Export/flared gas: the flowrate of gas leaving the platform via flare,
gas or two phase pipelines.
- Gas injection: the flowrate of gas leaving the platform for gas injection.
This includes gas going to linked drilling, subsea and topsides components.
- Gas lift: the flowrate of gas leaving the platform for gas lift. This
includes gas going to linked drilling, subsea and topsides components. For
further details see Gas lift projects.
The total gas arriving at the topsides from all linked drilling subsea and topsides
components is taken to be the sum of the Export/flared gas, the Gas injection
and the Gas lift. This total flowrate is used to size the separation and processing
facilities.
Water injection, gas injection and gas lift capacities do not necessarily reflect the
pumping or compression facilities on the topsides. They are simply flowrates.
Water and gas injection is assumed to be supplied at high pressure to wellhead
platforms tied back to a full processing platform.
For example consider a project with a wellhead platform tied back to a main
platform with processing facilities. If there is gas injection all associated gas
produced on the wellhead platform flows back via a two phase pipeline to the
main platform. Here QUE$TOR assumes it is separated and compressed to the
full injection pressure. If there are any gas injectors on the wellhead platform a
portion of the gas will flow to it via a high pressure gas injection pipeline. The
gas injection capacity of the wellhead platform will then be greater than zero but
it will still have no gas injection compressors. The same principles apply by
default for water injection.
Gas lift is never included by default but if you add it QUE$TOR will assume that all
gas lift compression is done on the main platform (providing the platforms are
linked by a gas lift pipeline). In this situation the Export/disposed gas capacity of
the wellhead platform should be increased equivalent to its Gas lift capacity to
take account of the gas lift circulation.
Should you wish to transfer injection or compression away from the main
platform, QUE$TORs default assumptions can be easily overridden using locking.
Configuration
QUE$TOR Help
98
The Configuration tab allows you to specify the topsides configuration, the
substructure type and the hook-up and commissioning philosophy.
Substructure Type
This defaults to the associated substructure but can be set to a different type.
Note: FPSO / Semi-sub should be selected if the topsides is to be installed on a
barge.
QUE$TOR uses the substructure type to determine the steel weights required, the
installation method and to determine which utilities to include. For example, a
GBS has a higher structural steel content than a jacket, deck mating and hook-up
/ commissioning can occur inshore and some utility systems may be located in
the shaft, e.g. seawater lift and firewater pumps. For FPSO / Semi-subs it is
assumed that process units are installed directly on to the deck at the fabrication
yard thus saving the primary or module support frame (MSF) steel. If the
topsides equipment is installed on an elevated deck this is taken in to account in
the substructure component.
Some utilities are assumed to be supplied by the FPSO / Semi-sub including some
power generation and accommodation. Lightweight assumes minimum facilities
will be required and only the wellhead function is automatically selected.
Note: Changing the substructure type in the topsides component will not
change the type of substructure it is docked to in the schematic.
Configuration
This gives the ability to choose between Modular or Integrated deck topsides,
QUE$TOR will default to integrated. If integrated deck is selected then the
nominal module weight is not used. For integrated deck topsides installed on
jackets, the drilling, accommodation and flare boom are treated as separate
modules.
QUE$TOR Offshore
99
Module weight
The nominal module weight is used when the configuration type selected is
Modular. QUE$TOR allows the choice of four options: 2,500 tonnes, 6,000 tonnes
and 10,000 tonnes and Specify. By selecting the Specify option, any module
weight can be entered into the adjacent box. The nominal module weight is
generally determined by the proposed construction philosophy or the availability
of heavy lift vessels in any particular region. Nominal module weight affects the
calculation of offshore installation costs and HUC costs.
Installation and HUC
This percentage allows you to specify the split between atshore, inshore and
offshore hook-up and commissioning man-hours.
The default percentages are a function of the substructure type and the deck
configuration (modular or integrated). If these are adjusted QUE$TOR
automatically calculates the percentage for atshore, inshore or offshore HUC
depending on which of these has been selected to auto calculate to ensure the
percentages add up to 100.
See Hook-up costs for an in-depth description of what activities are covered in
the HUC costs.
Product Export
The Export tab allows you to specify the export method for the topsides
products. This information is used to select the appropriate levels of processing
for these products.
Oil/Condensate Export/Disposal
QUE$TOR Help
100
The default method and delivery distance is selected in the Concept Selector. If,
for this particular topsides, the export route or pipeline length is different from
the field export routes, then they should be changed at this stage. This might
happen when Offshore loading has been selected but the platform being
investigated is exporting the crude to another platform before it is exported to
the offshore loading system. In this case, QUE$TOR's selection should be
modified to Pipeline to existing platform and the distance to the other platform
entered in the export pipeline component link dialog box.
Selection of Inject into gas line (gas projects only), Offshore loading or Pipeline to
shore/existing platform/tie in determines the configuration of the separation,
oil/condensate treatment and oil export options. For instance, selecting Pipeline
to shore sets QUE$TORs default separation system to two stages with default
pressures and temperatures to achieve a true vapour pressure (TVP) of 10 bara
suitable for pipeline transmission, whilst selection of Offshore loading will set
QUE$TORs default separation to three stages achieving a Reid vapour pressure
(RVP) of 0.7 bara suitable for tanker loading.
Selection of pipeline export to shore, existing platform, or pipeline tie in is used to
set the pipeline configuration in the Pipelines component and has no effect on the
topsides calculation. Pipeline to shore includes a pipeline to a landfall site
including the export end riser and the shore approach, Pipeline to existing
platform includes platform risers at both ends of the pipeline and Pipeline tie in
includes the export end riser and a tie in to an existing or new pipeline.
Gas Disposal / Export
As with oil/condensate export/disposal, the default method and delivery distance
is selected in the Concept Selector. Again, if for this particular topsides any data
is inappropriate then it should be changed at this stage.
Gas used for Flare/fuel/two phase is not processed, gas reinjected to the
reservoir is dehydrated but not dewpointed by default. These options can be
changed when running the system calculations. If a combination of gas export by
pipeline and gas reinjection is to be modelled, select Pipeline to shore, Pipeline to
existing platform, or Pipeline tie in as appropriate and enter a gas injection
capacity.
Design Conditions
The Design Conditions tab allows you to specify the reservoir pressure, maximum
monthly air temperature and acid gas/high temperature/pressure conditions.
QUE$TOR Offshore
101
Reservoir Pressure
The reservoir pressure is used to determine default gas lift, water and gas
injection pressures.
Acid Gas /High T / High P
This allows you to specify whether there is acid gas or if the reservoir is high
pressure/high temperature. If the box is selected QUE$TOR will automatically
use more costly, higher grade materials.
If the CO
2
content of the gas specified 1.5 mol% then carbon steel is used for
the oil/gas separation and processing equipment with a corrosion allowance of 1.5
mm (1/16th inch). If the CO
2
content 3 mol% then carbon steel is still used but
the corrosion allowance is increased to 3 mm (1/8th inch). If the CO
2
content >3
mol% then acid gas materials, typically stainless steel lining, are used for
pressure vessels and pumps etc with no corrosion allowance.
Maximum monthly average air temperature
This is used to calculate a derating factor for gas turbine driven compressors and
power generation packages. The calculated power requirement is then divided by
the derating factor to calculate the ISO equivalent power requirement for any gas
turbines.
Facilities
The facilities frame contains links to each of the topsides sub-components (e.g.
gas compression) available in QUE$TOR. Clicking on the button next to each
label allows the design details to be reviewed and optionally adjusted. All of
these sub-components are recalculated when unlocked if a high level input (e.g.
oil capacity) is changed. In a similar fashion if you adjust gas processing then, as
QUE$TOR Help
102
long as it is unlocked, power generation will be recalculated based on the new
power requirements.
Note: Facilities follow a hierarchy for recalculations, with changes to high
level facilities causing a recalculation of lower level facilities.
This does not apply in reverse. You should also note that once an input is locked
in a facility, the input and its dependent values will no longer be updated by the
program if higher level inputs are adjusted. For example if you adjust and lock
power generation then you must ensure that any subsequent changes you make
to higher level facilities do not result in a power demand that cannot be met by
the selected generators. This problem can be solved by returning to power
generation and unlocking the values.
The data flow between topsides facilities is illustrated below. The flowchart is
designed to give a broad view of the relationships between sub-components. Any
changes to a sub-component may affect all sub-components downstream of it in
the flowchart. This does not apply to every parameter of a sub-component and
neither does it mean that every downstream sub-component will be influenced by
changes to an upstream component.
Manifolding
Clicking on Manifolding in the topsides inputs panel opens the manifolding sub-
component, shown below. This is only available if the Wellheads function has
QUE$TOR Offshore
103
been selected. The manifolding system includes the associated valving and
manifolds for Production, Test, Water injection, Gas injection and Gas lift.
Manifolding will be included for each of these flows if the total number of relevant
wells and remote risers > 1 and their flowrate in the topsides primary inputs > 0.
Additional weights for a Well kill manifold, Well control package, and Hydraulic
power unit are included if required. Manifolding for a particular flow can be added
or removed using the check boxes.
The number of linked wells is passed from all linked topsides, subsea and drilling
components. Platform wells are those with dry trees on this topsides. Remote
wells are any wells either subsea or on wellhead platforms whose production
flows to this topsides.
QUE$TOR defaults to two wellbay areas with one set of production and test
manifolds per wellbay if the total number of wells is >32 with a maximum of 40
wells per wellbay possible. This is valid for platform drilled wells but if drilling is
to be carried out using a tender support vessel the number of wells per wellbay
should be reduced to 28 and if drilling is to be done using a jack-up in
cantilevered mode a maximum of 24 wells per wellbay should be used.
Operating Pressures
QUE$TOR calculates the manifold operating pressures as follows:
- Production & Test: 35 bara (508 psia) for oil projects and 80 bara (1160
psia) for gas projects.
- Water injection: 55% of the reservoir pressure. This percentage has
been set based on an analysis of a large number of field developments
where reservoir pressure maintenance is by water injection.
- Gas injection: Based on the reservoir pressure, an allowance for the
hydraulic head of gas between the topsides and the reservoir, a nominal
pressure drop in the gas injection well and an overpressure to ensure the
gas injection pressure at the bottom of the tubing exceeds the reservoir
pressure.
- Gas lift: 50% of the reservoir pressure.
QUE$TOR Help
104
- Well kill: Equal to the reservoir pressure.
Design Pressures
QUE$TOR calculates the manifold design pressures as follows:
- Production & Test: Based on the calculated well shut-in pressure.
QUE$TOR selects the lowest possible standard ANSI Class to allow for
wellhead shut-in in the event of an emergency shutdown.
- Water injection, Gas injection, Gas lift & Well kill: QUE$TOR selects
the lowest ANSI class with a working pressure greater than 108.5% of the
operating pressure. If this pressure exceeds the ANSI 2500# class the
design pressure is set to 108.5% of the operating pressure.
Manifolding lengths are calculated based on the number of platform wells and
remote risers allowing 1m per slot with 3m for each branch line.
Manifolding diameters are determined based on the total flow of the
corresponding fluid at the operating pressure assuming the velocity does not
exceed 50% of the erosional velocity. QUE$TOR assumes an equal productivity
for all wells, both platform and remote.
The manifold sizing includes spare slots according to the number of connections
to it as follows:
- < 5 connections - no spare slots (minimum 2 connections)
- 5 to 10 connections - 1 spare slot
- > 10 connections - 2 spare slots.
The manifold weights are calculated based on the calculated length, diameter and
design pressure and include for non-return and isolation valves.
Xmas trees are not included in this system as they are costed as part of the
drilling component.
Oil Processing
The oil processing sub-component is only available if the Processing function has
been selected. It calculates the weights and dimensions of oil/gas separation
equipment (separators and reboiled stabilisers), heat exchangers (heaters and
coolers) and oil treatment equipment (dehydrators and desalters).
It allows flexibility in the equipment configuration and a mass balance is
performed internally using the Peng-Robinson equation of state based on user
defined operating conditions and an inlet stream defined by the oil SG, gas
molecular weight and gas/oil ratio (specified in the Field level data).
Clicking on Oil processing in the topsides input panel opens the oil processing
window. The example shown below is specified to produce a tanker loadable i.e.
fully stabilised oil export stream.
QUE$TOR Offshore
105
The colour scheme in the oil processing schematic is as follows:
- Green - Oil stream
- Red - Gas stream
- Blue - Water stream.
A default oil processing configuration is generated based on the feed conditions
and product specification. Stream numbers are automatically assigned to each
stream. The product specifications available are:
- Tanker/fully stabilised
- Pipeline/partially stabilised
- Live export
- Combined gas + condensate (gas/condensate projects only).
There are separate default configurations for oil projects and gas projects.
Note: All separators are 3-phase except for the live export and combined
gas condensate product specification where 2-phase separators are selected.
QUE$TOR will automatically assign a product specification by looking at the
oil/condensate export route entered in the topsides export inputs. This product
specification can be changed via the drop down menu at the top of the screen
which will give you the option of changing the configuration to match the default
for the product specification.
QUE$TOR Help
106
If you wish to accept the default configuration click the OK button at the bottom.
However, if you wish to define your own configuration, components can be added
and deleted by using Toolbar Buttons.
To delete a component, right click on it from within the Oil processing schematic
and then select the Remove option. To add heat exchanger or a separator,
select the point in the flow scheme where you wish to add the item (the selected
line is highlighted) then select the item from the menu bar. The item is added to
the schematic and the stream numbers automatically updated. To add a
dehydrator, desalter or reboiled stabiliser simply click the relevant button from
the menu bar. These components will appear automatically in the Oil processing
schematic in a logical position.
Note: QUE$TOR allows a maximum of three stages of separation plus a test
separator. Wellstream heaters (upstream of the first stage separator) are not
allowed.
The stream properties can be viewed by double clicking on any stream (but not
the stream number itself). The stream dialog box will appear on screen, as
shown below.
The oil volumetric flow is shown at operating conditions (@ T&P). This is typically
higher than the oil production capacity entered in the component input data form
as the production capacity is a stock tank flow, i.e. measured at atmospheric
pressure and 60 F (15.6 C).
In an oil project the default water flow is set to 10% of the oil flow at stock tank
conditions. In a gas project the default water flow is set to 1% of the condensate
flow at stock tank conditions.
QUE$TOR allows you to edit the Water flow, Temperature and Pressure in Stream
1. All other stream properties will then be recalculated when you click Close.
The flowrates and operating conditions of all other streams are calculated values
and cannot be edited. They can be manipulated by changing the operating
parameters of upstream processing units.
QUE$TOR Offshore
107
Note: To see the recalculated flowrates when you change the operating
conditions of stream 1 you need to edit the conditions, close the form and then
reopen it. The flowrates do not update dynamically.
By double clicking on a component in the oil processing schematic the component
data forms will appear on screen. As an example, the separator properties form
is shown below.
The type of separator type can be changed via the drop down menu. The
following options are available:
- 3 Phase (horizontal)
- 2 Phase (horizontal)
- 2 Phase (vertical)
The Operating pressure can also be changed to recalculate the size and weight of
the vessel plus internals. Similar forms exist for heaters, coolers, dehydrators
and reboiled stabilisers.
QUE$TOR calculates the number of oil and gas separation trains based on
restricting the vessel diameter and wall thickness to 4 m (13 ft) and 100 mm (4
inch) respectively. If either maximum is exceeded, QUE$TOR increments the
number of trains by one until both criteria are met. The Number of trains (up to
a maximum of 20) can be overwritten to tailor the oil and gas separation
configuration to your specific requirements.
The Design capacity per train allows the basis for sizing each individual separator
to be adjusted. The percentage entered is applied to the flow of the inlet
stream. By default, the design capacity per train is (100/number of trains).
More details of each item can be seen by clicking on the Details button in the
properties form. This gives details of the input data being used for sizing and the
calculated weights, heat loads and dimensions. The Separator details form is
shown below.
QUE$TOR Help
108
QUE$TOR includes a default slug volume in the first stage separator. The default
is dependent on water depth, varying from 3-5 m
3
.
The surge factor applies to the volumetric fluid flowrates and defaults to zero.
The separator sizing is based on the inlet liquid and gas flows increased by the
surge factor percentage.
All input variables on the Separator details dialog box can be changed. The
weight and dimensions are recalculated dynamically. Similar forms exist for
heaters, coolers, dehydrators and reboiled stabilisers. In all cases, changes can
be made to the design variables to recalculate the equipment size and weight.
The oil processing flow schematic and a table of the following stream properties
can be printed by selecting the printer button in the Oil processing schematic
menu bar:
- Pressure
- Temperature
- Oil flow
- Water flow
- Gas flow
- Oil SG
- Gas MW (molecular weight).
Oil Export
QUE$TOR Offshore
109
The oil export sub-component is only available when Processing has been
selected, as QUE$TOR does not include multiphase pumps. The oil export system
includes pumps and fiscal metering skids.
Clicking on Oil export in the topsides inputs panel opens the Oil Export form as
shown below. The pump power is dependent on the pressure drop along the
export pipeline and so the pipeline sizing frame is also displayed.
Pipeline Sizing
The pipeline sizing frame in the oil export sub-component is the same as the
pipeline sizing tab in the oil export pipeline component. Its operation is identical
and adjustments can be made to it either in the oil export sub-component or in
the Pipeline component itself. For more details on pipeline sizing see offshore
pipelines.
The pipeline sizing frame allows you to resize the oil export line, or specify a
diameter and calculate the inlet or outlet pressure. This can change the pumping
requirements of the export pumps. Click on Resize pipeline to recalculate all
unlocked values. The new pump differential pressure and power requirement etc
are automatically calculated.
Liquid Flowrate
The liquid flowrate is the capacity of both the export pump and the pipeline. The
gas flowrate is set to zero and is not editable multiphase pumps are not
currently available in QUE$TOR.
Note: It is not possible to change the length of the pipeline in this dialog
box. To do this go to the relevant pipeline link.
Oil Export Driver Type
QUE$TOR Help
110
The oil export driver is specified as either a Gas engine or an Electric driver. If
any regional technical database other then S.E. Asia is chosen, this frame will be
greyed out and QUE$TOR will select an Electric driver by default, as the Gas
engine driver type is only available for S.E. Asia.
Pump Differential Pressure
The pump differential pressure is the difference between the suction pressure
(suction is taken from the outlet of the last oil processing unit) and the required
pipeline inlet pressure. If metering capacity is greater than zero, an allowance of
2.5 bar is included for pressure losses on the metering skid. If the topsides is
installed on an FPSO then the liquids run by gravity into the storage tanks and
hence no pressure drop is included here. Offloading pumps are assumed to be
included within the supply of a new vessel or existing for a conversion.
Total Pump Power
Pump power is derived from capacity and pump differential pressure, assuming
75 per cent efficiency.
Number of Pumps
Specifies the number of parallel pumps installed. If modified, the program
recalculates the pump weight.
Note: Changing the training assumption will also initially change the
sparing percentage if unlocked, i.e. 2 x 100%, 3 x 50%, 4 x 33%.
Design Duty / Pump
The percentage shown is the capacity of each pump, e.g. 100%, 50%, 33%.
Combined with the number of pumps this specifies how many spare units are
installed.
Pumping Weight
The equipment weight derived from the pump power is based on standard motor
sizes or gas engine driver packages and is the total for the specified pump
arrangement. The weight includes a skid-mounted pump and fixed-speed motor.
Metering Capacity
Normally this will be the same as the export capacity except for when offshore
loading occurs. For these projects the metering capacity will be ten times the
production capacity allowing any shuttle tanker to load ten days production
within 24 hours.
Metering Weight
The metering weight is based on the use of conventional fiscal turbine meters
incorporating a meter prover loop for operation within the ANSI Class 600 #
rating.
Total Weight
QUE$TOR Offshore
111
The sum of the pump and metering package weight.
Gas Processing
The gas processing sub-component is only available if the Processing function has
been selected. It calculates the weights and dimensions of sweetening,
dehydration, dewpointing and NGL stabilisation systems.
Clicking on Gas processing in the topsides inputs panel opens the gas
processing sub-component as shown below. This consists of a series of linked
forms which represent different gas processing unit operations (cooling,
sweetening, dehydration, dewpoint control/NGL recovery, and stabiliser). These
can be turned on and off using the check boxes. The gas processing
specifications and the process used can be changed from within the forms.
A minimum gas processing inlet pressure of 35 bar has been set in QUE$TOR in
order to reduce the diameter of the gas sweetening and gas dehydration vessels
and the loading on the dehydration unit. If the inlet pressure is less than 35 bar
QUE$TOR will automatically include booster compression to reset the inlet
pressure to 35 bar. The booster compressor duty is accommodated by reducing
the export gas compression suction pressure accordingly.
QUE$TOR chooses a default gas processing system configuration based on the
Product Gas Specifications required to achieve gas export or disposal as selected
in the Export inputs tab. This initial selection is displayed in the top right-hand
corner of the screen.
The gas processing unit operations available are:
- Cooling.
- Acid gas removal.
QUE$TOR Help
112
- Dehydration.
- Dewpoint control / NGL recovery.
- Stabiliser.
The gas product specification can be modified either by selecting a new Gas
product spec. from the drop down list or by directly editing the values in each
specification.
A change in the overall Gas product spec. will automatically re-default the process
selections required to achieve that specification and reset the stream data.
If an alternative process is required to that selected automatically by QUE$TOR,
this can be selected from the drop down list for that process unit. The minimum
number of acid gas removal, dehydration and dewpoint control trains required to
process the gas is calculated and displayed. Additional trains can be estimated by
overwriting the number shown.
At all times, a mass balance is maintained over the gas processing module and
stream data between each process unit can be displayed by clicking on the
numbered buttons. Each of the conditions may be edited on any stream and the
complete gas process module is automatically recalculated.
If any gas processing unit specification is changed click Recalc to update the unit
sizing routines.
Cooling
Two cooling options are available:
- Water cooled using a shell and tube exchanger.
- Air cooled fan exchanger sized using the ambient air temperature in the
regional technical database.
Cooling is applied if the feed temperature is above 50C, or 11C greater than the
ambient air temperature.
Water cooled exchanger design is based on shell and tube designs with the water
on the shell side. A 20C water temperature rise and a 10C minimum approach
temperature is used to calculate the required heat transfer areas for shell and
tube weights.
Air cooled exchangers are based on 9.1 m long tubes, 25.4 mm diameter, 1.65
mm thick on a 57 mm pitch. The number of tubes is calculated from the
exchanger duty, log mean temperature difference and an overall heat transfer
coefficient calculated according to the pressure. The weight of the exchanger
includes for steel headers, tubes, plenum and aluminium fins, fan, motor and
support steel.
Acid Gas Removal
The options available are:
- Amine, (MEA, DEA or MDEA)
- Physical solvents (Selexol)
QUE$TOR Offshore
113
- Combination (Sulfinol)
- Solid bed (Zinc oxide adsorption).
The default selection is dependent on the quantities of H
2
S and CO
2
to be
removed. If the gas flow does not exceed 50 MMscf/d, no CO
2
removal is
required and the daily quantity of H
2
S removed is less 60 kg then a zinc oxide
process is selected by default. For other gas flows and quantities of H
2
S and CO
2
the choice is dependent on whether there is Simultaneous H
2
S and CO
2
removal,
H
2
S removal only or CO
2
removal only.
Amine and Sulfinol units are assumed to contain the same process equipment
items namely: inlet scrubber, contactor and regeneration unit. The Selexol unit is
similar except that the regeneration unit contains three flash drums. A reboiled
stripping column assumed to be electrically heated, is required only if H
2
S is
being removed. The zinc oxide process uses solid beds to adsorb H
2
S from the
gas (CO
2
is unaffected) and must be regularly regenerated. This is normally
performed offsite by the zinc oxide vendor who will replace the spent material.
The contactor column used in solvent (amine or physical) process is sized based
on the gas throughput and is unaffected by the solvent circulation rate. The
diameter is calculated using the formula:
where:
D = contactor diameter (m)
Qg = actual gas flow at operating conditions (m
3
/s)
g
= gas density at operating conditions (kg/m
3
)
l
= solvent/density (kg/m
3
)
M = design margin of 1.3
= gas load factor, 0.055 for bubble cap trays and 0.1 for structured packing.
The height of the contactor is based on 14 theoretical trays and a tray efficiency
of 60% for bubble cap trays. For structured packing an equivalent transfer unit
height is calculated based on the gas density and a specific area of packing equal
to 250 m
2
/m
3
.
The regeneration unit is calculated from the circulation rate of solvent (Amine,
Selexol or Sulfinol) required to achieve the acid gas removal, see Solvent Data for
further details.
A flash vessel is included if the operating pressure is greater than 30 bar.
Otherwise solvent is fed directly to the regeneration column via the
solvent/solvent interchanger. For Selexol, two further flash vessels are included
bringing the pressure down to 1.5 bar in the LP flash tank, this flashes the CO
2
QUE$TOR Help
114
from the Selexol. For amines, Sulfinol and in cases where Selexol is used to
remove H
2
S as well as CO
2
, a reboiled stripping column is used to regenerate the
solvent. Overhead gases from the stripper are routed to the sulphur recovery
unit if present. Lean solvent is pumped back to the contactor column via the
solvent/solvent interchanger and trim cooler. If the contactor operating pressure
is greater than 50 bar, then hydraulic turbines recover some of the pressure drop
lost between the contactor and regeneration section. In the amine systems, a
20% slipstream flows through a cartridge filter and an activated carbon filter pre-
and post-cooling. A sump/storage vessel provides surge volume in operation and
a drain point in case of process upset.
For small gas flows where relatively small amounts of H
2
S require removal from
the gas, a solid bed process will prove to be more economic than a solvent-based
process. Therefore zinc oxide beds are offered as an alternative process within
QUE$TOR.
The system requires 5 kg of zinc oxide per kg of H
2
S removed and is based on
replacing the zinc oxide every 60 days. The system includes adsorber(s) and an
after-filter. No on-site regeneration is included.
Any tail gas from the Acid gas removal unit is flared. Sulphur is not recovered.
Dehydration
The two options available are:
- Molecular sieve
- Tri-ethylene glycol contacting with a choice of regeneration systems
(conventional, stripping gas, Cold Finger, Drizo).
The Default Dehydration Process is based on the water dewpoint temperature at
the dehydration unit conditions.
The quantity of molecular sieve required to dehydrate the gas is based on the
amount of water in the feed stream (all water present will be removed).
Each train is composed of three adsorption vessels operating with two on line and
one being regenerated. Each adsorber operates cyclically with 8 hours on line
followed by 4 hours regeneration. Regeneration takes 10% of the dry gas, heats
it in a fired heater, and backflows through the off-line adsorber. Hot gas picks up
the water from the molecular sieve bed and is returned to the feed stream after
being cooled and free water knocked out.
The required TEG concentration is calculated based on the dewpoint depression
specified, with water content of the saturated feed gas and dry gas conforming to
data given in GPSA.
The TEG contactor column is gas phase sized based on a trayed column with
between 4 and 12 trays calculated from the lean glycol concentration required
and the effective fraction of dehydration,
QUE$TOR Offshore
115
where:
Y
in
= water content wet gas
Y
out
= water content dry gas
= effective fraction of dehydration
QUE$TOR then completes a mass and energy balance around the system using
recovery factors for each of the components calculated on the conditions in the
low temperature separator. Heat is assumed to be recovered from both the cold
gas and cold liquid streams. A 15C and 10C approach temperature respectively
is assumed in these exchangers.
The glycol regeneration unit is sized based on the glycol circulation rate with
adjustments for each method of achieving the required purity. The TEG
circulation rate is 0.036m
3
/kg of water removed. A conventional regeneration
unit includes a reboiled still, surge drum, flash tank, filters, glycol/glycol
exchanger and glycol trim cooler. An electric heater is assumed to provide the
heating duty. To achieve higher lean glycol purities, additional equipment is
required.
- Stripping gas: An addition stripping column between the surge drum
and the reboiler which uses fuel gas to strip water from the glycol.
- Cold finger: A cooling coil located in the surge drum which condenses
water from the gas phase above the liquid glycol. This acts as an
additional theoretical stage in the separation.
- Drizo: Uses a solvent wash system to improve the purity of lean glycol.
The solvent is composed of C
5
+ components normally absorbed by the
glycol from the gas stream. Additional vessels are required to condense
overhead vapours and recover the solvent.
Dewpoint control
The dewpoint control unit achieves the removal of heavier hydrocarbons by
chilling the gas. The options available are:
Refrigeration (Propane)
JT valve
Turbo-expander/recompressor unit.
In order to calculate the amount of liquids recovery a Gas Composition Based on
Molecular Weight is assumed for the inlet gas.
By default, refrigeration will be selected for low pressure units (<40 bar) and a JT
valve to achieve the gas reinjection specification. Turbo-expanders are used to
achieve pipeline, gas grid or LNG specifications provided that the flow is greater
than 50 MMScfd. Below this JT valves are used and QUE$TOR checks that there
is enough pressure to achieve the dewpoint specification then sets a minimum
pressure in the low temperature separator of 20 bar. If the specification cannot
be met through the JT valve or turbo-expander alone, then a refrigeration unit
will be added upstream of the valve or turbo-expander.
QUE$TOR Help
116
The weight for the refrigeration unit includes for a two stage propane loop and
includes the compressor, condenser and flash drum. QUE$TOR calculates the
required refrigeration loop pressures allowing a 10C approach temperature
between the propane evaporation and the required process.
The weight of the JT valve is not specified separately from the exchangers and
low temperature separator. The exchangers are assumed to be aluminium plate
fin exchangers up to an operating pressure of 100 barg and shell and tube
exchangers above this. The low temperature separator is a vertical vessel
including a demister pad for efficient liquids removal.
To achieve higher levels of liquids recovery a turbo-expander is used to reduce
the temperature and provide pressure recovery.
The recompressor discharge pressure is calculated using the following equation:
where:
P
r
= recompressor discharge pressure (bar)
P
out
= turbo-expander outlet pressure (bar)
P
in
= turbo-expander inlet pressure (bar)
An upstream scrubber is used to prevent liquids knocked out in the gas/gas
exchanger from entering the expander.
The minimum pressure in the low temperature separator for either the JT valve or
Expander options is set to 20 bar. If the required temperature cannot be met by
reducing the pressure to 20 bar, a chiller and propane refrigeration unit is
installed upstream to cool the gas before pressure reduction.
Stabiliser
The stabiliser is used to remove lighter components from the NGL to produce a
bottom liquids product of dead condensate suitable for injecting into an
oil/condensate pipeline. The overhead stream is a fuel gas stream (C
3
and lighter
components). The operating pressure of the stabiliser is 8 bara.
Metering
Fiscal metering of the gas using orifice plates is automatically included if there is
gas export. If gas is re-injected or flared there is no fiscal metering. The weight
includes the metering skid and meter prover.
Gas Compression
QUE$TOR Offshore
117
The Gas compression sub-component is only available if the Compression function
has been selected. It calculates the weights of all the topsides compression
facilities, including flash gas, export, injection and lift gas compression.
Clicking on Gas compression in the topsides inputs panel opens the Gas
compression form.
Flash Gas
Flash gas compression takes off-gas from the second and third stages of
separation and compresses it to the first stage separation pressure.
Export Gas
Export compression takes suction from the first stage separation pressure less
allowances for the gas processing selected and compresses the gas to the gas
pipeline inlet pressure calculated above.
The export compressor power is dependent on the pressure drop along the export
pipeline. The discharge pressure for the export compressors is calculated as the
inlet pressure of the export pipeline. An allowance of an extra 1 bar is included if
gas metering is selected in gas processing, to allow for pressure drop across the
metering skid.
To allow easy adjustment of the pipeline size, in optimising the balance of
compressor/pipeline cost, you can access the export pipeline sizing routine by
clicking on Pipeline sizing.
Pipeline Sizing
The pipeline sizing form, shown below, is a view of the Pipeline sizing tab in the
gas export Pipeline component. Its operation is identical and adjustments can be
QUE$TOR Help
118
made to it either in the gas export sub-component or in the pipeline component
itself. For more details on see offshore pipelines.
The pipeline sizing form allows you to resize your gas export line, to alter the
pressure drop along it and change the power requirements of the export
compressors. Click on Resize Pipeline to recalculate all unlocked values. The
new compressor outlet pressure and power requirement etc are automatically
calculated when you click OK and exit the form.
Note: It is not possible to change the length of the pipeline in this dialog
box. To do this go to the relevant pipeline link.
Gas Lift and Gas Injection
Gas lift and gas injection compressors take suction from the discharge of the
export gas compressor if gas disposal is by pipeline or from the first stage
separator pressure if all gas is reinjected.
Discharge pressures for gas lift and gas injection compressors are based on the
operating pressures set in the manifolds section with allowances for pressure drop
over an aftercooler.
Compressor Duty
The throughput, suction pressure, discharge pressure and calculated power of
each of the compression systems is displayed. The power for gas export, lift and
injection compressors is based on the molecular weight of the gas out of gas
processing. The flash gas compressor molecular weight is a weighted average
based on the 1
st
2
nd
and 3
rd
stage separator gas flows and molecular weights.
Derated power
QUE$TOR Offshore
119
A derating factor is applied to any gas turbine drivers duty to allow for reduced
efficiencies at ambient air temperatures above 60F (15.6C). This factor can be
overwritten and the derated power recalculated if desired.
The derated power is the calculated power divided by the derating factor. For
electric motor driven compressors the derated power is greyed out as it is not
applicable.
Driver type
Either electric motor or gas turbine drivers can be selected along with the training
and sparing requirement. If Turbine is selected, a drop down box will be active
displaying the name of the lowest rated driver selected by QUE$TOR to provide or
exceed the derated power. Alternative drivers may be selected from the drop
down list. Default selection is electric for gas compression powers up to 4MW;
gas turbine above 4MW.
The limit for electric drivers is 5MW while gas turbine drivers can be used up to
40MW per train. The input data for any of the compressors may be modified and
the power recalculated using the Recalc button.
Driver Rating
The driver rating is the ISO power output, i.e. power output at 60F (15.6C) for
the selected gas turbine and is displayed for information only.
Training and Sparing
Training and sparing shows the number of compressor sets for each duty and the
percent of the design quantity through each. Export compressors have spare sets
as the export gas is assumed to be a revenue stream. All other compressor sets
have no sparing unless the power >40MW, in which case multiple units are
required.
Weights
The weights of compressors, scrubbers and coolers required for each system are
displayed. The compressor weight includes a skid-mounted package containing
the driver, the compressor(s), base plate, seal and lube oil systems, inlet and
exhaust systems for gas turbine drivers.
One scrubber and cooler per stage is included using a compression ratio of 3 per
stage (all stages are located on the same shaft). Coolers are water cooled, shell
and tube exchangers.
If the default inputs are adjusted click Recalc to update the driver type and
compressor set weights.
Water Injection
The water injection sub-component is only available if the water injection capacity
is greater than zero in the topsides primary inputs. Water injection sizes the
pumps used to inject the water.
QUE$TOR Help
120
Clicking on Water injection in the topsides inputs panel opens the water
injection form.
Water Injection Pump Capacity
Taken as the water injection capacity specified on the primary tab of the topsides
inputs.
Water Injection Delivery Pressure
Taken as the delivery pressure from the Manifolding sub-component.
Water Injection Pump Duty
The required pumping power to raise the water from the seawater lift pressure to
the delivery pressure is calculated assuming a pump efficiency of 70%.
Driver Type
The driver motor type and configuration for the water injection pumps.
Configuration
QUE$TOR includes the seawater lift and coarse filtration in the utilities section
and fine filtration using sand filters (with automatic backwashing) is only included
here if required. De-aeration uses a vacuum column and vacuum pump to
achieve a residual oxygen in water content of 5ppm (after addition of oxygen
scavenger).
Control and Communications
QUE$TOR Offshore
121
Clicking on Control and communications in the topsides inputs panel opens the
form. Control and communications allows selection of the process control system
and remote monitoring as well as on and off platform communications options.
The program default selection is based on the topsides configuration and systems
selected.
For monitoring and control and telemetry system the option buttons allow one
choice. For on-platform communications and off-platform communications the
check boxes allow one or more choices.
Monitoring and Control
Three options are available, the default is based on the size and complexity of the
platform and processing functions. Each option includes for main process/utility
control, ESD, fire & gas and associated interface panels.
- Basic local control: Suitable for small unmanned platforms or wellhead
platforms
- Conventional control room: Suitable for medium-sized platforms where
one centralised control room is required
- Distributed control system: Suitable for the larger platform where a
main control room and several local equipment rooms are necessary. This
is especially so where large modules are to be pre-commissioned onshore
before loadout and installation.
Telemetry System
Two options are available, the default depends on whether the platform operates
as a stand-alone facility or as a satellite from another platform or onshore.
- Remote monitoring only: Suitable where some remote indication of the
status of systems is required either on another platform or onshore
QUE$TOR Help
122
- Remote monitoring and control: Suitable where both remote
monitoring and control of the platform systems are required from an
adjacent platform or onshore.
On-Platform Communications
Three possible choices are available, the default depends on whether or not the
platform is manned.
- Operational voice radio: Automatically included for all options. This is
for on- and off- platform communications and includes statutory
emergency radios, P.A. system, etc
- Entertainment and TV: Automatically included where accommodation
has been selected for the topsides
- PABX telephone etc: Appropriate for platform communications. It may
not be required on small platforms such as simple wellheads.
Off-Platform communications
Choose between options for the method of communication to other platforms and
to shore.
- Cable: Selection of this item assumes that off-platform communications
are handled by a bridge-connected platform or via a control umbilical
- Microwave Radio: This selection assumes that off-platform
communications are handled using a microwave link. This method of
communication is limited to line of sight, i.e. to a distance of
approximately 30 km
- Satellite: This assumes that a satellite system will be used to handle the
off-platform communications.
It should be noted that the total cost in the cost estimate is not weight related,
but dependent on the form selections.
Drilling Facilities
The drilling facilities sub-component is not available if the associated substructure
is a tanker or semi-submersible or if the Drilling function is de-selected. Tankers
are assumed not to include drilling and semi-submersible vessels either have
existing drilling rigs (if conversions) or the cost of the rig is included in the new-
build vessel price.
Clicking on Drilling facilities in the topsides inputs panel opens the Drilling
Facilities form. This allows specification of the drilling facilities installed on a
platform during the drilling activities.
QUE$TOR Offshore
123
This form allows the choice of one or two drill rigs, whether a tender-assist vessel
is used during drilling operations and whether the drilling facilities include their
own dedicated diesel generation units (self contained) or if power is supplied from
the platform generators (integrated).
Three options are available for performing drilling activities on a fixed platform:
- A permanently installed self-contained drilling rig
- A skidded rig which is installed only during drilling periods which relies on
a temporarily bridge-linked tender assisted semi-submersible rig for mud
handling, consumables and utilities
- A jack-up rig operating in cantilever mode.
The choice of drilling type is an economic one depending on the number of wells,
the frequency and complexity of well workover requirements, and the day rates
currently being charged for the lease of tender assist and jack-up drilling vessels.
All three options can be modelled within QUE$TOR.
By default the number of platform rigs is one for up to 40 wells and two for >40
wells. If the drilling facilities are selected in the topsides input panel, the default
configuration is for a permanently installed rig and the capital cost of purchasing
and installing the rig is included in the estimate.
Selecting tender-assisted drilling will reduce the drilling rig weight included in the
platform estimate. By default QUE$TOR assumes that this skidded rig is also
purchased at the start of field life but the costs for the tender-assist vessel and its
utility systems are included in the Drilling component.
If the drilling rig is to be leased and not purchased, the drilling facilities unit rate
on the cost sheet should be manually set to zero. This ensures that adequate
QUE$TOR Help
124
support steel is included in the platform design to accommodate the later addition
of the skidded rig.
Note: In this case the day rate for drill rig in the drilling component must
be manually updated to include for the lease of a skid-on rig. Allowance will also
need to be made in the drilling component for transporting the rig out to the
platform.
To allow for cantilever drilling, drilling facilities should not be selected in the
topsides input panel as neither equipment nor support steel is required on the
platform.
The weight for a drill rig is dependent on the reservoir depth (drilling reach) and
is based on a modularised package including, typically, the derrick package
(comprising derrick, derrick substructure, top drive, drill floor, dog house,
turntable, crown block, etc), piperack, drill string/bits, mud pumps/consumable
storage/mud mixers, Koomey unit, handling equipment and utilities to support
the drilling equipment. The utilities include power generation requirements (diesel
driven DC units), high pressure air and drill water system/storage facilities. If
two drill rigs are chosen then the rigs share the same mud handling and utility
systems.
For the tender-assisted drilling option, the derrick package (comprising derrick,
derrick structure, top drive, drill floor, dog house, turntable, crown block, etc),
piperack and drill strings/bits are included on the platform. All other items are
assumed to be supplied from the tender support vessel including utilities and
power.
Quarters
The Quarters sub-component calculates the weights of the quarters and the
helideck. If the Quarters function is not selected in the topsides input panel an
emergency shelter is included.
Clicking on Quarters in the topsides inputs panel opens the accommodation and
helideck form. There are four different forms for the quarters depending on the
topsides configuration selected. If quarters is selected on a jacket, GBS, TLP or
spar substructure then the quarters is considered to be a self-contained module.
This includes all recreational facilities, laundry, messing, office, arrival/departures
facilities (including helideck), HVAC, washing facilities and power distribution.
The weight includes all modular steel, architectural materials and associated bulks
and hence no additional bulks except module support frame steel and primary
steel are calculated. If quarters is selected on a FPSO/Semi-sub substructure,
then it is assumed that some accommodation already exists. Upgrade and
extension of these facilities can be selected.
If quarters is not selected on a jacket or GBS then the option to include a lighter
helicopter deck and temporary safe refuge (TSR) is provided. If a lightweight
substructure has been selected a lightweight aluminium helideck can be included.
Jacket, GBS, TLP and Spar Quarters
QUE$TOR Offshore
125
The accommodation and helideck weight form allows the option to choose
between one-man, two-man and four-man cabins and the size of helicopters to
be used in the field. The default cabin size is regional based on typical operators
practices. Small helicopters are taken to be capable of transporting up to 12 men,
for more men select large.
Floating Production Facilities Quarters
The floating platform accommodation form allows specification of the type of
FPSO/semi-sub that the topsides is to be installed on, whether a new helideck is
required and whether the existing accommodation is to be upgraded.
QUE$TOR Help
126
The number of beds provided on trading tankers over the last few years has
reduced significantly to about 25 due to the increased level of automation. The
default number of existing beds included when an FPSO has been selected has
been revised accordingly.
Platforms with No Quarters
Where no quarters have been included, the emergency shelter & helideck form is
displayed. This allows inclusion of a small lightweight helicopter deck (suitable
for Bell 212 helicopters or equivalent) and an emergency shelter to be included.
This shelter will normally also house the radio communications centre and any
control room functions required during maintenance visits.
QUE$TOR Offshore
127
Manning
Clicking on Manning opens the manning form. The crew requirements are
estimated by referencing the process systems incorporated and number of trains
for separation, gas processing, compression, etc.
QUE$TOR Help
128
A breakdown between base crew (OIM, Radio Operator, Safety Officer),
operations staff and maintenance staff is made. The operations staff level also
reflects the level of control chosen. Added to this is the drill crew if permanent
platform rigs are used and a marine crew for FPSO/Semi-sub operation.
Additional crew are provided for catering and cleaning. below.s are given
separately for day and night crew levels which are added together to give the
total crew level. Spare beds are provided for visitors. The total number of beds
is simply the total crew level plus the number of spare beds.
The tender-assisted drilling option assumes that drilling personnel are located on
the tender assist vessel and therefore no allowance is included in the
accommodation calculation.
The quarters weight and helideck weight are combined and the total is added to
the cost estimate.
Utilities
The Utilities sub-component calculates the weights of all the topsides utilities
systems.
Clicking on Utilities in the topsides inputs opens the utilities form as shown
below. The design capacities frame details the design capacities for the major
utilities (produced water, heating and cooling medium, flare and vent and
seawater lift). These are calculated from flowrates and requirements set in the
process systems sub-components.
QUE$TOR Offshore
129
The weights frame lists all the utilities systems typical for offshore platforms.
QUE$TOR sets the utility systems required based on the defined process systems
and substructure type. For GBS substructures, some utilities, such as seawater
lift and firewater pumps are included in the shafts. For FPSOs and semi-
submersibles it is assumed that storage, firewater pumps, cranes, lifeboats and
some power generation are supplied with the vessel and are therefore not
calculated here. The weights of the minor utilities are calculated from factors
applied to process system weights. Utilities can be added or removed from the
cost estimate by using the check boxes.
The details of each utility system are as follows:
- Produced water: For clean-up of the produced water from the process
separation systems to allow disposal overboard. The weight includes for
an HP hydrocyclone, an MP hydrocyclone, a produced water flash drum
and oil water recycle pumps
- Heating medium: Where heating is required to meet vapour pressure
specifications of exported oil/condensate or to aid oil/condensate & water
separation. The heating medium flowrate is calculated in the oil
processing module. The weight includes for a fired heater package, a
heating medium make-up tank, a heating medium make-up pump, an
expansion vessel and heating medium circulation pumps
- Cooling medium: Required in conjunction with heating medium to cool
oil or condensate before input to the export pipelines and for compression
inter- and aftercooling. The weight includes for a closed circuit cooling
water (CCCW) expansion/make-up tank, seawater/CCCW exchangers and
CCCW circulation pumps
- Flare and vent: The weight includes for an HP flare drum, HP flare drum
pumps, an LP flare drum, LP flare drum pumps, a vent KO drum, HP flare
tip, LP flare tip, vent tip, a flare ignition package and a halon snuffing
system
QUE$TOR Help
130
- Seawater lift: Provided for seawater cooling, seawater injection and
potable water manufacture. Water for seawater injection is taken
downstream of seawater cooling users. The weight includes for seawater
lift pumps, a chlorination package and a coarse seawater filter package
- Fuel gas: Provided for gas treatment prior to use in turbines. The weight
includes for a fuel gas KO drum, a fuel gas heater and fuel gas filters
- Lifeboats: Freefall lifeboats dependent on the number of personnel or
additional beds if the topsides is on a semi-submersible or a tanker
- HVAC: Provided for all enclosed modules
- Mechanical handling: Includes all platform cranes and local lifting
devices
- Firefighting: The weight includes for dedicated lift pumps (diesel driven),
firewater lift caissons, diesel day tanks, firewater jockey pumps, hose reels
plus monitors and hydrants
- Closed drains: For treatment of pressurised hazardous fluids. The weight
includes for a closed drains vessel, closed drain pumps, a reclaimed oil
tank and a reclaimed oil returns pump
- Open drains: Separate systems for treatment of deck drains from
hazardous and non-hazardous areas. The weight includes for an oily
water tank, an oily water returns pump, a non-hazardous open drains
caisson with associated returns pump, a hazardous open drains caisson
with associated returns pump and an oily water separation tank
- General: Includes diesel storage, aviation fuel, chemical storage,
instrument and plant air, inert gas, potable water system, sewage
treatment and hydraulic power supply.
Flare
The flare sub-component is available for all platforms containing production or
compression. Clicking on Flare in the topsides input panel opens the flare form.
QUE$TOR Offshore
131
Gas Design Capacity
The flare gas rate is assumed to be the maximum gas rate through a single
separation or compression train, whichever is the greater. This allows production
to continue whilst a spare compressor is started or the problem solved. It is
assumed that blowdown cases will incorporate sequencing facilities so as not to
exceed that rate.
Flare Type
This allows the choice between a the available flare types, the default is based on
the platform configuration, water depth and flare rate.
The weight of flare booms, towers and vents takes account of typical radiation
shielding arrangements and the location of the point of interest with respect to
the base of the flare structure with the minimum weight equivalent to a gas flow
rate of 10 MMscf/day.
Flare lengths have been calculated assuming the maximum radiation level at the
point of interest in an emergency relief situation is:
- Vent - 6300 W/m
2
(2000 Btu/hr ft
2
)
- Tower - 6300 W/m
2
(using a low emissivity tip)
- Boom - 12500 W/m
2
(using a low emissivity tip and radiation shielding).
In the case of a boom the weight of the other bulks has been increased to allow
for the weight of the radiation shielding.
Flare Tower Type
If a tower flare is selected this can be either a platform tower or a tripod tower,
the default selection is based on the water depth and the flare rate.
QUE$TOR Help
132
Note: If a flare tower is installed on a tripod, QUE$TOR includes an
allowance for the interconnecting bridge but not the tripod structure itself. The
weight and cost of the tripod should be calculated using the jackets component.
Power
The Power sub-component calculates the weights of the standard and emergency
generators as well as the power distribution system. Clicking on Power in the
topsides input panel opens the power form.
Power Requirement
The power requirements frame shows a load schedule of the powers that have
been calculated in all other equipment sizing sub-components. The list identifies
the loads for each system, as shown below, which can be changed by overwriting
the stated load with a new figure.
QUE$TOR Offshore
133
- Oil/condensate processing: Includes the electrical load associated with
any electrostatic coalescers/desalters.
- Oil/condensate export pumps: Electric motor drive except for S.E. Asia
where gas engines may be used
- Gas processing: Includes air fin cooler fan powers, TEG regeneration in
the dehydration unit and auxiliary power in the dewpoint control unit
- Gas compression: gas compression powers plus allowance for auxiliary
drivers (seal and lube oil systems) if electric motor driven. If compressor
is turbine driven then power is for auxiliary drivers only (taken as 2% of
the gas compressor duty)
- Water injection power: Included if electric motor driven pumps selected
- Quarters: Power for heating, lighting, cleaning, cooking etc. FPSOs and
semi-submersibles typically come with some quarters and the power
generation equipment to meet this duty. QUE$TOR assumes that there is
an additional topsides power load if the manning exceeds the number of
beds provided by the tanker or semi-sub. In this case the quarters power
load is based on the number of additional beds provided.
- Drilling: The total drilling power only applies when drilling power
generation has been selected to be integrated with the processing power
requirements. Some emergency and small power requirements are met
from the platform supply when drilling is self-contained
- Downhole equipment: This only applies if electric submersible pumps
(ESPs) have been selected in the associated drilling component
- Utilities: Utility powers are calculated from the utility definitions
previously specified.
- Seawater lift: based on the seawater lift flowrate specified in the utilities
sub-component.
- Base load: Includes for platform lighting, control systems, communication
systems and navigational aid systems. No base load is added for FPSOs or
semi-subs because it is assumed that these vessels have some spare
capacity in the existing on-board power generators.
Emergency Power
Covers the power required by essential systems should the main power supply be
disrupted and is set to the base load requirement.
Generation and Distribution / Distribution only Radio bButtons
The radio buttons dictate whether the cost of power generation is included or if
only distribution is considered. Emergency power generation is required in both
cases.
- Generation and distribution: covers both distribution and generation
systems. When selected all the boxes that are used to size the generators
and drivers will become active i.e. Derating factor, Duty and Driver type.
Costs are included for the generator sets and the power distribution
equipment.
- Distribution only: assumes that power is being imported to the
production facility and includes transformers, all buses, power cabling
between switchboards, switchboards and ancillary controls. This is
selected when the Manifolding is the only function of the production
facility.
QUE$TOR Help
134
Derating Factor
This is the factor applied to the gas turbines to calculate the ISO equivalent
power, and is dependent on the ambient temperature and elevation. For diesel /
gas engines no derating is applied.
Capacity
This displays the derated and design powers, along with the number of
generators and the percentage of the design power each generator is providing.
Changes to the powers, the number of generators or the percentage each is
providing are immediately reflected in the total power load and system weights.
- Total power (derated): the Total demand divided by the Derating
factor.
- Design factor: gives a power surplus to allow for demand fluctuations.
By default this is set to 1.2.
- Design power: is the Total power (derated) multiplied by the design
factor.
- Number of generators: specifies the number of parallel generator sets
installed. By default the value is such that there is one spare generator.
If modified, the program recalculates the generator weight.
- Design duty/generator: the capacity of each generator set as a
proportion to the total generator power, e.g. 100%, 50% or 33%.
Combined with the Number of generators this specifies how many spare
units are installed.
Note: Changing the number of generators will also initially change the
design duty/generator if unlocked, to ensure there is always a spare generator.
Driver Type
Covers the drivers used to generate the Design power.
- Gas turbine: gas turbines are used to generate the required design
power. This is selected when the design power is greater than 1MW.
When selected the derating factor becomes active to take into account the
effect that the Ambient temperature and Elevation have on the power
available from the turbine driven generator.
- Diesel / gas engine: diesel or gas engines are used to generate the
required design power. This is selected when the design power is less
than 1MW (1,340hp).
- Type: selects the type of turbine driver and is only active when Turbine is
selected. A default is automatically selected from a number of available
turbine driver types based on the smallest driver that will provide the
design power. You can overwrite the turbine type via a drop-down list
box, if desired.
Weights
This displays the three possible weights for the power generation / distribution
system:
QUE$TOR Offshore
135
- Power generation weight: the weight of the gas turbines plus
generator(s) or the diesel driven generator(s) depending on the driver
type selected
- Power distribution weight: the weight of the power distribution
system. This includes transformers, switchgear and motor control units
- Emergency power weight: the weight of the diesel generator set(s) for
black start up and emergency use.
Equipment Costs
centre.
Freight
This cost is assumed by QUE$TOR to be a percentage of the total cost of the
equipment identified in the systems listed above. It includes the cost of
packaging and transporting equipment from the manufacturer to the construction
yard. You can modify the freight percentage, the default is dependent on where
the equipment is procured (in region or out of region).
Bulk Materials Costs
This includes costs for all bulk materials permanently installed on the topsides.
The costs cover delivery, insurance, guarantees and duties. Costs for
consumables and materials for construction aids and temporary works are
included in fabrication.
Steel
The weight of structural steel uses one of three calculations, for modular or
integrated construction or for direct installation on a FPSO/semi-sub deck.
Jacket, GBS, TLP and spar substructures can have either modular or integrated
deck configurations while tankers, semi-submersibles and barges have small
modules and packages installed on to the vessel deck.
Modular construction: Module steel includes for all support steel, module frames,
access ways, ladders, etc contained within the modules.
This is based on the process and utilities equipment and bulk materials weight.
module support frame (MSF) steel includes for a deck support frame on to which
QUE$TOR Help
136
the modules are lifted. The calculation of MSF steel is based on the weight of all
modules including drilling and quarters modules.
Integrated deck construction: Secondary steel includes for all equipment support
access platforms etc. Primary steel includes for deck steel and main supports
calculated on the weight of all equipment, bulks drilling and quarters module.
FPSOs and semi-subs: Only secondary steel is included on FPSOs and semi-subs,
with equipment modules and packages installed directly on the deck.
The unit rate for steel materials includes allowances for cutting, wastage and
surface coatings.
Piping
The piping bulk weights are calculated by applying factors to each individual
equipment weight identified on the topsides cost estimate sheet to give a weight
of piping per system. These system weights are totalled and entered into the
piping bulk weight cell. The factors relate tonnes of equipment to tonnes of
piping and are stored in regional databases to reflect different design practices
and materials of construction. The weights include for all pipe supports, flanges
and fittings and valves but excludes control valves and emergency shutdown
valves (which are included in instrument bulks).
Electrical bulks
The electrical bulks are calculated by applying factors to each individual
of electrical bulks per system. These system weights are then totalled and
entered into the electrical bulks weight cell. The factors relate tonnes of
equipment to tonnes of electrical bulks.
The weights include for all cabling, cable trays, supports, terminations, glands,
gland transits, junction boxes, lighting and small power systems (e.g.
batteries/life support power).
Instrument bulks
The instrument bulks are calculated by applying factors to each individual
of instrument bulks per system. These system weights are then totalled and
entered into the instrument bulks weight cell. The factors relate tonnes of
equipment to tonnes of instrument bulks. The weights include all instrument
cabling, pneumatic tubing, terminations, glands, gland penetrations, supports,
control valves, relief valves and ESD and blowdown valves.
Wellhead chokes and manifold valves are included in manifolding equipment.
Others
This includes all additional bulk system weights associated with the HVAC and
safety systems plus painting and architectural bulks.
HVAC bulks are calculated as a factor of the equipment system weights. It
includes for ducts, duct supports, insulation, flow dampers and grilles.
QUE$TOR Offshore
137
Safety system bulks are calculated as a factor of the equipment system weights.
It includes for fire monitors, hose reels, deluge valves, fire and gas sectors, halon
and CO
2
systems, portable fire extinguishers, lifebuoys, life jackets, survival suits,
fire blankets, fireman's equipment and fire protection of structural members.
Architectural bulks are calculated as a factor of those equipment systems
requiring architectural items.
This includes costs for all partitioning, fire walls, flooring, floor finishes, acoustic
insulation, wind cladding, weather louvres, furnishings and platform doors. It
does not include any items which are considered as part of the quarters.
These items are then totalled up to give an overall weight which is entered under
the item other bulks.
Freight
This cost is a percentage applied to the total cost of all bulk items. It includes the
cost of packaging and transporting the steel and bulks from the place of
manufacture to the construction yard. The default is dependent on where the
equipment is procured (in region or out of region).
Fabrication Costs
including any off-site fabrication (not vendor-supplied skids).
Clicking on the hyperlinked fabrication heading will open up the fabrication
breakdown form giving details of how the fabrication costs are calculated, see
Fabrication Details for more information.
Load out and Seafasten
A fixed percentage applied to the total fabrication cost to include for all necessary
fixing and fittings and preparation required to make safe equipment/modules, etc
QUE$TOR Help
138
for sea transportation from the construction yard to the offshore installation
location.
Installation Costs
Installation costs include transport of the topsides modules or deck from the
fabrication yard to the installation site or deck mating area and installation costs
of lifting the modules or deck on to an installed jacket, mating a deck with a GBS
or TLP substructure or installation of modules on to a semi-submersible or tanker
deck in a yard.
The cost of all vessels required to transport the modules/equipment to the
offshore installation site are summarised and split into two components, tugs and
barges.
The calculated transport spread durations are based on the number of modules
and the average duration per installation operation. These numbers are
obviously significantly reduced for floaters and GBSs, where modules can be
installed inshore or in the construction yard.
Tugs Transport Spread
The Tugs transport spread includes the cost of the tugs required to deliver the
topsides to the installation site. The costs include labour, fuel, consumables,
weather downtime and support. The mobilisation / demobilisation time assumed
for the spread is given separately.
Barge Transport Spread
The Barge transport spread duration allows for barges that will be hired for
considerably longer than the tugs transport spread, including time for
refurbishment at quayside, seafastening and grillage. For lightweight
substructures no barge transport spread is included as installation is assumed to
be carried out by the drilling rig. The costs include labour, consumables, and
weather downtime. The mobilisation / demobilisation time assumed for the
spread is given separately.
Installation Spread
QUE$TOR Offshore
139
The cost of all vessels required at the offshore installation site, to transfer the
topsides, i.e. modules/equipment, from the transport barges on to the offshore
installation.
This includes heavy lift vessels at the offshore location with crew and support
costs, anchor handling vessels, supply boats, etc, and for labour, fuel,
consumables, downtime, support. This number is obviously reduced for floaters
and GBSs where a significant proportion of the installation is done inshore or at
the yard. For lightweight substructures a minimal installation is included as
installation is assumed to be carried out by the drilling rig.
The duration is calculated from the number of offshore lifts which are based on
topsides and nominal module weight. Separate lifts are included for quarters,
drilling facilities and flare booms.
No allowance is included for mobilisation/demobilisation by default as it is
assumed that the installation occurs in the same period as the jacket installation
and vessels are already mobilised/ demobilised.
If a topsides is being costed without any jacket or the jacket has been pre-
installed, an allowance for mobilisation/ demobilisation of 8 days will be added.
Hook-up Costs
Hook-up costs can be Atshore, Inshore or Offshore. The percentage (by weight)
of HUC that occurs atshore, inshore and offshore is dependent on the
substructure type.
Atshore HUC
Covers HUC work which can be carried out in the yard where systems can be
tested and commissioned in situ, prior to the topsides leaving the yard.
Inshore HUC
Covers the cost of hook-up testing and commissioning which can be carried out
away from the construction yard but at a location close to shore, e.g. deepwater
sites used for deck mating. It includes for labour, support services (supply boat,
etc) onshore accommodation and catering and onshore supply base costs.
Inshore hook-up therefore reduces the cost of transporting personnel and
equipment to the hook-up location and applies to TLP and GBS platforms.
The costs include all HUC activities possible without having hydrocarbons
available.
This includes connection of modules/equipment (e.g. pressure testing, loop
testing of cabling, run up of turbines on propane, testing of compressors, etc).
It includes allowance for salaries, consumables, overheads, temporary
construction aids/lifting aids, construction plant and small tools, specialist
subcontractors, contractors own supervision and management.
QUE$TOR Help
140
Offshore HUC
Covers the costs of hook-up, testing and commissioning which are carried out at
the offshore location. It includes for labour, support services (supply boat,
helicopter, etc) temporary accommodation and catering and onshore supply base
costs. The costs include all hook-up and commissioning activities to achieve first
oil, all modules/equipment fully performance tested using crude from the field
and all systems on-line and available for production. The costs include all
salaries, consumables, overheads, temporary construction aids/lifting aids,
construction plant and small tools, specialist subcontractors, contractors own
supervision and management. There is also an allowance for additional shift
changes, travelling time, etc.
General Costs
The general costs cover all other expenditures associated with the topsides. They
include design, project management, certification, insurance and a contingency
and are shown below.
Design
The number of hours required to carry out the design of the topsides. The
number of hours is related to the calculated topsides functions and weight. It
covers the hours required for detailed design and the design hours required in the
yard.
Equipment+bulks, steelwork, quarters and drilling have individual tables of man-
hours per tonne vs weight in the cost database. The number of man-hours is
then calculated by looking up the man-hour per tonne value and multiplying it by
the weight.
The costs include project specification, special studies, detail design, site surveys,
follow on engineering, purchasing, expediting and inspection services, project
control, QA and documentation during the detailed design phase.
QUE$TOR Offshore
141
The rates include wages, salaries and other benefits paid to personnel, payroll
burdens, insurance, general overheads (office facilities, utility services,
depreciation of facilities and equipment and administration), project expenses and
equipment. Also included are vendor drawings and data, delivery of items to the
yard, vendors installation and commissioning services, commissioning spares,
insurance up to delivery, guarantees and import duties.
Project Management
The project management hours required for all operator company personnel and
any project management team costs, to manage, monitor and control all phases
of the development and includes management, prospect evaluation and
economics, project engineering, project control and planning, design and
construction supervision, quality assurance and third party liaison. This covers
from the conceptual design phase, through completion in the yard, to first oil
offshore.
The project management man-hours are calculated by looking up the project
management man-hours to design man-hours ratio (based on topsides dry
weight) and multiplying it by the calculated design man-hours.
Operations supervision, product sales, etc are excluded from this cost centre, as
are contractors own management costs.
Certification
A percentage of the total topsides component costs, covers the certification costs
of the design, equipment, materials and construction of the development by a
recognised certifying authority (e.g. Lloyd's, ABS or DNV). Certification is only
included by default for European and North American countries where it is
common practice. A certification percentage is included in the Canadian, North
Sea and U.S. cost databases. All other cost databases have a zero cost for
certification.
Insurance
A percentage of the overall topsides cost, insurance covers project components
during transport, construction, installation, HUC, etc up to first oil. Personnel
liability insurances are assumed to be covered by corporate policies.
Contingency
installation, HUC, design, project management, insurance and certification costs
to bring the component cost estimate to a P50 level. For a fuller explanation see
Hints on Developing Topsides Projects
Modelling small wellhead platforms
QUE$TOR is ideally suited to the evaluation of small wellhead platforms where
facilities are kept to an absolute minimum.
QUE$TOR Help
142
The topsides should be run specifying only the wellhead function in the topsides
input panel, with no quarters specified. Usually there will be no production,
drilling or compression.
The topsides cost estimate is performed normally with only allowance for
wellhead equipment and a test separator. As no accommodation has been
selected, the quarters form will display weight allowances for emergency quarters
and helideck.
Modelling split processes
The interactive nature of QUE$TOR provides the capability for its imaginative use
in modelling less conventional approaches to offshore design.
For example, if two topsides are specified and run normally, by inspecting each
cost sheet, equipment may be deleted from any area and moved to another
simply by overwriting the weights. Bulk weights, fabrication costs, installation,
etc are automatically recalculated to reflect the changes.
Thus, utility equipment can be grouped on one platform and power generation
equipment can be grouped on one platform to service, say, production and
quarters platforms.
PAUs on FPSOs
A number of users have asked how to model an FPSO with topsides equipment in
pre-assembled units (PAUs) on the deck of the tanker.
The QUE$TOR bulk steel weights for a topsides on an FPSO are based on the use
of a pancake type of arrangement with the equipment built directly on to an
elevated deck (which is considered as part of the tanker). There is a trend to
move away from this approach towards PAUs which are effectively mini modules.
This can most readily be seen in the recent FPSOs in the North Sea which have
two or three decks of equipment and look much more like traditional platforms.
If a PAU construction is required, an additional weight for modular steel needs
to be added. We recommend you use one of the following two approaches:
1. If you want to have no integration with the tankers own power generation
system, utility systems or quarters:
- Select TLP as the substructure in the topsides configuration input tab.
- Run the topsides as if it was a modular construction and specify nominal
module weights of 1000 tonne.
- In the tanker component set the elevated deck weight to zero to prevent
double-dipping.
2. If you want to retain some integration with the tankers own power
generation system, utility systems and/or quarters:
- Select FPSO as the substructure in the topsides configuration input tab
and run the component as normal
- Print off a hard copy of the topsides cost estimate sheet
QUE$TOR Offshore
143
- Add a 2
nd
topsides component to the schematic (it doesnt have to be
located on a substructure)
- Open the new topsides and ensure the capacities in the primary inputs tab
are the same as for Topsides 1.
- Select TLP as the substructure in the topsides configuration input tab
- Run the 2
nd
topsides as if it was a modular construction and specify a
nominal module weight of 1000 tonne
- Where necessary overwrite the equipment weights on the 2
nd
topsides cost
estimate sheet so they match the equivalent weights for Topsides 1
- Note the primary steel and secondary steel weights
- Go back to Topsides 1 (on the FPSO) and overwrite the primary and
secondary steel weights with the values from Topsides 2
- In the tanker component, set the elevated deck weight to zero
- Delete Topsides 2 from the schematic you dont want to double-dip on
the topsides costs in the overall CAPEX.
The above approach should give a close approximation to the actual weights and
costs.
Adding Equipment
QUE$TOR gives the ability to assess the impact of incremental change to a
design. For example, a topsides component may be run conventionally with zero
export compression. This gives zero weight in the corresponding line entry. A
hard copy record may then be obtained of this.
You may then add export compression, all the bulks, fabrication and HUC costs
are adjusted to reflect this change.
A record of its effect can be maintained.
The bulk material (and other system) weights can then be locked and the export
compression removed. You will then be left with a platform without the
compressor but with all other secondary systems ready for its installation.
Sour Gas Service
This is handled automatically by entering CO
2
and H
2
S quantities in the field level
details. The appropriate unit costs for systems and equipment will be
incorporated automatically. CO
2
is entered as a percentage and H
2
S in ppm.
Gas lift projects
QUE$TOR Offshore does not currently allow you to specify gas lifted wells at a
concept level but you can add gas lift facilities manually if needed. QUE$TOR
follows certain rules when dealing with gas lift facilities, these are listed below:
If gas lift is included in a subsea component:
QUE$TOR Help
144
- Linked topsides components will pick up the flowrate and include gas lift
compression.
- If gas lift capacity in a topsides is greater than zero:
- All platform and remote wells are assumed to be gas lifted in the
manifolding sub-component.
If gas lift is included on a wellhead platform tied back to a full production platform
and you add a gas lift pipeline flowing from the main topsides to the wellhead
topsides:
- The main topsides picks up the gas lift flowrate and includes gas lift
compression.
- The export/flared gas flowrate at the wellhead topsides will be increased
equal to the gas lift flowrate to reflect the extra volume of the circulated
gas.
- The two phase pipeline linking the two topsides will be resized according to
the new flowrates.
Jacket
About Jackets
The Jacket component provides costs for jacket steelwork and all appurtenances
including piles, pile guides, anodes, conductor guides, riser guides, J tubes and
lifting/installing aids. It does not include conductor costs (which are included in
the Drilling component) or export risers (which are included in the Pipelines
component).
Cost estimates for three, four, six or eight leg platforms are available with
detailed input of environmental conditions. Optional installation methods include
lift, launch or float.
Three types of lightweight jackets/structures, guyed caissons, braced
monotowers and lightweight jackets are available for minimum cost solutions, see
Lightweight structures.
Other appurtenances such as walkways, mud mats, etc are included as part of
the basic jacket weight and are not identified separately.
For launched jackets, the weight for installation aids, i.e. buoyancy tanks,
additional bracing and controls is calculated.
The algorithm calculates dimensions and weights of the jacket legs, all braces,
conductor and riser guides (if appropriate) and pile guides as functions of the
topsides weight, water depth, environmental conditions and the number of legs,
conductor, risers and J tubes. An allowance is made for the effect of marine
growth.
Calibration of jacket weights
QUE$TOR Offshore
145
There are many aspects of jacket design which influence the ultimate weight of a
jacket. Only a few the most influential - can be taken into account in an
approximate weight-estimating algorithm. As a consequence, discrepancies can
occur in the predicted jacket weights that become evident when they are
compared with actual weights.
To compensate, a calibration is performed in which the estimated weights are
factored to minimise these differences. This is a two-stage procedure. A global
factorisation is performed, within the algorithm, based on the large database of
jackets available in the Northern North Sea and using the default severe
environmental conditions for the Northern North Sea. The calibrated algorithm is
then applied to each world region considered by QUE$TOR, using the local default
severe environment and an additional regional factor established for that region
to give a best fit to published jacket weights. The exception to this occurs with
the separate global calibration performed for the Southern North Sea which has
its own large database of jackets. The regional factors for the Northern and
Southern North Sea regions are 1.0.
The algorithm should not be used for studying jacket weight trends outside the
bounds of the calibration and, in particular, over wide ranges of the
environmental input parameters. This can be misleading and it can lead to
erroneous results. You should ideally accept the QUE$TOR default severe
environmental conditions, noting that any deficiency in these is compensated for,
in part, by the calibration process. Small adjustments to the environment will,
however, provide a guide to their effect on jacket weights.
User Interface
On entering the Jacket component the input panel is shown in the bottom left of
the screen with the cost estimate sheet on the right hand side. QUE$TOR will
choose appropriate values for every parameter based on linked components and
field level data. Some inputs may also be dependent upon high level inputs
within the same component, for example the default wave height is dependent on
the environmental conditions selected. The cost estimate displays a breakdown
of every cost item included in the component. The Jacket inputs are used to
calculate the quantities shown on the cost estimate; these are then multiplied by
unit rates determined by the procurement strategy to give the total costs.
apply all changes and exit a component, click on OK. To exit a component
without saving your changes click on Cancel.
QUE$TOR Help
146
Inputs
The Jacket inputs are shown below.
Jacket Type
Seven types of jackets are available in QUE$TOR. Three, four, six or eight leg
conventional jackets can be chosen as well as the following lightweight
structures: guyed caissons, braced monotowers and lightweight jackets.
For three legs jackets, the calculation is based on a simple tripod structure
comprising a central column and three inclined bracings from the column to a
triangular seabed frame carrying pile guides. The three-legged jacket is strictly
limited to shallow water (150 m), low topsides weight (2,000 tonnes) and
fields with not more than ten wells. The structure is suitable for estimating very
small unmanned platforms, bridge support platforms and flare tripods.
Lightweight structures are explained in more detail.
Water Depth
This defaults to the field level data water depth. Four, six and eight leg
conventional jackets have been calibrated to water depths of up to 500m. Three
leg jackets are calibrated to 150m and lightweight structures to 90m.
QUE$TOR Offshore
147
Note: QUE$TOR will accept water depths up to a maximum of 1000m. If a
water depth >1000m is entered then it will be reset to the maximum acceptable
value of 1000m.
Topsides Operating Weight
The operating weight of the associated topsides. The jacket design algorithm has
calibrated for a Maximum Topsides Weight. If you exceed these weights a range
warning will be displayed.
Default topsides weights for substructure types
Installation Method
Three installation methods are available in QUE$TOR:
- Launch: The jacket is transported to the field on a barge but is launched
rather than lifted into position. This installation method is typically used
when the jacket weight exceeds the capacity of available lift spreads.
- Float: Buoyancy aids are attached to the jacket and it is wet towed to the
field.
- Lift: The jacket is transported to the field on a barge and lifted into
position.
- QUE$TOR chooses the installation method based on a jackets type and its
installation weight:
- Guyed caissons are typically capped at both ends and wet-towed from the
fabrication yard so the default installation method is float.
- Lift is the default installation method for all other jacket types as long as
their installation weight does not exceed the maximum lift of cranes
available in the region. The maximum lift is defined in the regional
technical databases.
- If the installation weight precludes Lift then Launch is selected unless the
jacket is a braced monotower when Float is selected. The structure of a
braced monotower makes launching it difficult.
The installation weight of a jacket is calculated by applying an installation factor
to its steel weight. This factor is different to the regional steel factor. The factor
determines how much extra weight is required at installation time to handle up-
ending the jacket into position. So if the jacket weight is say 2600 te and the
regional maximum crane lift capacity is say 2500 te then as 2600 x 0.95 = 2470
the jacket can still be lifted. The Jacket Installation Factor is dependent on the
installation method.
Whilst the default factors are the same for every region, they can be modified in
the regional databases.
Jacket attachments
Conductors: the number of jacket conductors is set as the number of
platform wells from the associated topsides manifolding. The conductors
are not costed within the jacket component (they are included in the
Drilling component) but they affect the calculation of wave forces used in
estimating the jacket steel weight.
QUE$TOR Help
148
Risers: as with conductors, the number of risers is used to calculate the
wave forces. The number of risers is set as the number of remote risers
from the associated topsides manifolding with an extra allowance for
product export. The number of remote risers in the associated topsides is
the number of import pipelines plus the number of risers from subsea
components linked to the topsides.
J-Tubes: can be added to allow for future installation of additional import
and export pipelines. The default number of J-tubes is zero. The number
of J-tubes is used in calculating the wave forces on the jacket.
Soil conditions
The soil condition is used to calculate the piling requirements of the jacket. Three
choices are available.
Good: the soil has high load bearing capacity with reduced piling
requirements
Average: the soil has average load bearing capacity
Poor: the soil has low load bearing capacity and requires additional piling.
Depending on the selection the pile weight is factored up or down from the weight
calculated for average soil conditions.
Option selection is made by selecting from the dropdown menu.
Environmental conditions
Nominally severe environmental conditions are stored for each region. Each
value may be individually modified.
Wave height: QUE$TOR jacket weights are calibrated assuming the
highest individual wave with a 50 year return period. QUE$TOR uses the
specified value unchanged. The significant wave height (50 year return
period) is often known and return values can be estimated for design
purposes as follows:
50 year return wave height = 1.86 x significant wave height.
Given a 100 year return value, the corresponding 50 year Design Wave Height
for use in QUE$TOR can be estimated by factoring by 1.86/1.95 = 0.95.
The algorithm calculates an associated wave period assuming a 1:11 wave
slope. Wave velocities are calculated from the Airy wave theory.
Wind speed: the wind speed is the value measured at a reference height
of 10 m above stillwater and for a 50 year return period.
QUE$TOR jacket weights are estimated assuming a design wind speed
appropriate to a 5 second gust which currently is the value which must be
entered.
QUE$TOR Offshore
149
Frequently, mean wind speeds averaged over 1 hour or 1 minute are known.
The corresponding 5 second value (m/s) can be estimated using a Wind Speed
Lookup.
The 50 year return wind speed can be estimated from the 100 year return
period as:
50 year speed = 100 year speed/1.05
Tidal current (surface): the tidal current is a surface value. The
algorithm estimates a value for the storm surge current (surface value) as
3% of the wind speed. The assumed tidal current profile follows a 1/7th
power law from the seabed to half the water depth and from there to the
surface the current is uniform. If this profile is not appropriate to the
region being considered, then some judgement will be required to define
an equivalent tidal current which can be expected to result in jacket load
contributions of the correct magnitude.
The tidal current rarely exceeds 0.3 m/s along any open coastline (Ref API RP
2A) but local shoreline or seabed features can increase values to 1.0 m/s or
more. In more restricted waters (e.g. North Sea) values between 0.2 and 0.8
m/s are typical.
Regional jacket steel factor
This is a regional factor which gives a best fit to published jacket weights. More
detail on this calibration is given in About Jackets.
Materials Costs
Materials costs are calculated by applying a cost per tonne to the weights of steel,
piles, etc that QUE$TOR has calculated using its technical algorithms. The
materials section of the cost estimate is shown below.
Jacket Steel
The total weight of steel required in the jacket including allowances for conductor
guides, riser guides, pile guides, walkways and mud mats.
The technical algorithm used to calculate the steel weight allows for
environmental conditions, water depth, topsides configuration, and numbers and
QUE$TOR Help
150
sizes of conductors, risers and J tubes. The unit rate includes an allowance for
steel wastage, procurement margins and surface coatings.
Piles
The weight of piles and pile guides needed. It is calculated as a factor of the
jacket steel weight, taking into account the soil conditions specified, and is based
on through leg piling.
Anodes
The weight of sacrificial anodes and anode supports used for cathodic protection
of the jacket is calculated as a percentage of the jacket steel weight.
Installation aids
If the jacket is to be installed using lift or launch methods, a weight for
installation aids is included. The weight includes all additional appurtenances for
lifting or launching a jacket, including installation aids, buoyancy tanks, additional
bracing and controls.
Freight
A percentage of the total cost of materials (steel, piles, anodes and installation
aids). It includes the cost of packaging and transportation of the materials from
the stockists yard to the construction yard. The default is dependent on where
the materials are procured (in region or out of region).
Fabrication Costs
including any off-site fabrication.
Load-out and Sea Fastenings
QUE$TOR Offshore
151
The cost of load-out barges, vessels, heavy lift vessels, and any additional
materials required to make the structure safe for transportation at sea and to
transport the structure on to the load-out barge or to launch. This is a fixed
percentage of the total fabrication cost.
Installation Costs
The installation section of the cost estimate is shown below.
Tugs Transport Spread
The Tugs transport spread includes the cost of two tugs required to deliver the
structure to the installation site including towing a jacket or a barge to location.
The costs include labour, fuel, consumables, weather downtime and support. For
each jacket, the duration depends on the region, taking into consideration
location of fabrication and fields. The mobilisation / demobilisation time assumed
for the spread is given separately.
Barge Transport Spread
The Barge transport spread includes the tug spread, refurbishment at quayside,
seafastening and grillage. The costs include labour, consumables, and weather
downtime. The mobilisation / demobilisation time assumed for the spread is
given separately.
Installation Spread
The Installation spread is the daily cost of hiring vessels to assist with the
installation of the jacket including lift barges where required. It includes labour,
fuel, consumables, weather downtime and support costs. The mobilisation /
demobilisation time assumed for the spread is given separately.
General Costs
The general costs cover all other expenditures associated with the component.
They include design, project management, certification, insurance and a
contingency and are shown below.
QUE$TOR Help
152
Design
The number of man-hours required to perform the design of the jacket and the
design hours required in the yard. The man-hours include project specification,
special studies, detail design, site surveys, follow on engineering, purchasing,
expediting and inspection services, project control, QA, and documentation in the
The unit rate includes wages and other personnel expenses, insurance, general
overheads (office facilities, utilities, depreciation and administration), project
expenses and equipment. It includes allowances for vendor data, deliveries of
items to the yard, insurance up to delivery, guarantees and import duties.
Project Management
The project management hours required for operator company personnel and any
project management team involved with managing, monitoring and controlling all
phases of the development.
It includes hours for management, project engineering, project control and
planning, design and construction supervision, quality assurance and third party
liaison. The time span covered is from the conceptual design phase to the first
delivery of hydrocarbons offshore.
Certification
A percentage of the total jacket cost to cover all certification costs for the
approval of the design, materials and construction of the jacket by a recognised
certifying authority (e.g. Lloyds, ABS or DNV). Certification is only included by
default for European and North American countries where it is common practice.
A certification percentage is included in the Canadian, North Sea and U.S. cost
databases. All other cost databases have a zero cost for certification.
Insurance
A percentage of the overall component cost to cover insurance during all phase of
the project up to first oil including construction, transportation and installation.
Contingency
QUE$TOR Offshore
153
installation, design, project management, insurance and certification costs to
bring the component cost estimate to a P50 level. For a fuller explanation see
Lightweight Structures
Cost estimates are available for three types of lightweight structures: Guyed
caisson, Braced monotower and a Lightweight jacket with detailed input of
environmental conditions. Lightweight structures are of a minimal design and are
not considered to be suitable for harsh environmental conditions. The design
algorithm has only been calibrated for water depths up to 90m.
The inputs along with the material, fabrication, installation and general costs are
described in the previous jacket sections.
Guyed Caisson
The guyed caisson is composed of an underwater anchor pile and cable guying
assembly that supports a well protector caisson and the topsides component.
The maximum recommended topside weight is 320 tonne and the maximum
number of conductors recommended is six.
The technical algorithm used to calculate the caisson weight allows for topsides
weight, and numbers and sizes of conductors, risers and J tubes. The unit rate
includes an allowance for steel wastage, procurement margins and surface
coatings. Three anchor piles are costed, each attached to two guying cables.
The cable size is dependent on the topside weight and the cable length is a
function of water depth. The cable termination assembly and the cable
tensioning system costs are included under guying components. Conductor
guides and anode/riser clamps are costed individually.
The materials and fabrication sections of the cost estimate change when guyed
caissons are selected to include items specific to the guyed caisson, such as the
guying components. The materials and fabrication cost estimates for a guyed
caisson are shown below.
QUE$TOR Help
154
The guyed caisson can be capped at both ends, towed out by tugs and then
installed via the drilling rig. Consequently, the default installation method is
Float.
Braced Monotower
The braced monotower consists of a central caisson piled via steel support
bracings, rather than the steel cable that is included for the guyed caisson. The
maximum recommended topsides weight is 500 tonne with up to eight
conductors.
Lightweight Jacket
The lightweight jacket is a modular tower for minimum facilities platforms. The
recommended maximum topsides weight is 1600 tonne and no more than 12
conductors are recommended.
QUE$TOR Offshore
155
Gravity Base Structure
About Gravity Based Structures
The Gravity Based Structure (GBS) component includes costs for the concrete
gravity base together with all reinforcement, the transition piece, mechanical
outfitting, grouting and ballasting systems and oil storage facilities.
GBS costs are based generally on the concrete volume of the structure with a
choice between conventional 3 leg condeep and slimline monotower designs. The
concrete volume is calculated from the water depth, topsides operating weight
and storage capacity. Weights for reinforcing steel, pre-stressed steel and
ballasting are calculated from the concrete volume.
Mechanical outfitting costs, including ballast and grout systems, oil storage
system where appropriate, transition steelwork, internal shaft steelwork and
conductor guides (but excluding conductors and risers) are also included.
A choice between inshore deck mating and float out of the complete platform or
substructure installation, followed by topsides lift installation can be made.
User Interface
On entering the GBS component the input panel is shown in the bottom left of the
screen with the cost estimate sheet on the right hand side. QUE$TOR will choose
appropriate values for every parameter based on linked components and field
level data. The cost estimate displays a breakdown of every cost item included in
the component. The GBS inputs are used to calculate the quantities shown on
the cost estimate; these are then multiplied by unit rates determined by the
procurement strategy to give the total costs.
Inputs
The GBS inputs are shown below.
QUE$TOR Help
156
GBS Type
Two options are available in QUE$TOR: a conventional 3 leg condeep design (e.g.
Troll, Gullfaks C) and a monotower (e.g. Draugen). Designs are based on those
used in the Norwegian North Sea.
Water Depth
The Water depth at the installation site defaults to the specified field water
depth. The GBS calculations are valid for water depths between 30 and 350m.
The associated topsides operating weight is passed in if the GBS is connected to a
topsides. If there is no associated topsides a default topsides operating weight of
10,000 tonnes is assumed.
Storage Capacity
A default value of zero is assumed here. Storage requirements, other than the
default value should be overwritten. QUE$TOR has been calibrated up to 2.5
million barrels (400,000 m
3
).
Inshore Deck Mating
This should be checked for inshore deck mating or unchecked for installation of
the topsides in the field. The GBS design includes sufficient buoyancy to allow it
to be floated and towed out to the field for installation. If inshore deck mating is
selected then additional buoyancy is included to counter the topsides weight
whilst the GBS is towed from the mating site to the field. This increased
buoyancy requirement results in a larger GBS. You should ensure that this
selection is consistent with the topsides hook-up and commissioning locations. If
there is any inshore hook-up and commissioning specified in the associated
topsides then the GBS will default to inshore deck mating.
Materials Costs
The calculated volume of concrete, weights of steel reinforcing, solid ballast and
mechanical outfitting are included in this section as shown below. The concrete
volumes are taken from designs applicable to North Sea waters and East Canada,
as GBS use outside these regions has been limited to date. The ballast and steel
QUE$TOR Offshore
157
quantities are calculated using live relationships in the cost sheet, and will be
automatically recalculated if the concrete volume is overwritten.
Concrete
This is the volume of concrete required to support the topsides weight in the
specified water depth and provide the required storage capacity.
Additional allowances have been made for float out of the platform after topsides
mating if it has been specified. In arctic regions a factor is applied to account for
the additional mass of concrete to withstand potential iceberg impact.
The concrete volume is determined from a series of look-up curves as a function
of GBS type, water depth and topsides operating weight, there are separate
curves for Tripod GBS Concrete Volume and Monotower GBS Concrete Volume.
The Available Storage Capacity in a GBS is a function of the topsides operating
weight. If the storage capacity required exceeds the corresponding topsides
operating weight the equivalent operating weight used to determine the concrete
volume is increased.
Steel
The quantity of reinforcing steel which is added to the concrete during
construction is broken down into two types. The pre-stressed steel is of higher
quality than the reinforcing steel.
Solid Ballast
This is the quantity of solid ballast (rocks, etc) required to maintain stability of
the structure on the seabed. The inclusion of solid ballast is dependent on the
storage capacity in the base of the GBS and the water depth in which it is to be
installed.
Mechanical Outfitting
This includes costs of all ballasting, drainage and ventilation systems required for
the installation and operation of the GBS. The cost includes all pumps,
instrumentation, piping, valves, manifolds, ladders, walkways and lifts within the
GBS substructure. When storage is selected, additional product pumps and
piping are included.
Freight
QUE$TOR Help
158
A percentage of the total cost of the concrete, steel, mechanical outfitting
equipment and ballast covers the cost of any packaging and transportation of
these materials to the fabrication yard. The default is dependent on where the
equipment is procured (in region or out of region).
Fabrication Costs
GBS
This is the cost of concrete slip forming construction in the yard. The unit rate
includes labour, site and consumable charges related to the construction and is
directly related to the concrete volume.
Mechanical Outfitting
This is the additional cost covering the mechanical outfitting of the structure.
This includes all labour, materials, plant, tools and equipment required for the
installation of the mechanical systems.
Installation Costs
The GBS installation cost estimate is shown below.
QUE$TOR Offshore
159
Deck Mating
A lump sum cost is included, if inshore deck mating has been selected, for mating
the deck to the structure. The cost includes transportation of the GBS to a
deepwater inshore site (e.g. a fjord), ballast and deballasting trials and mating
the topsides to the substructure.
Deck/Shaft HUC
The cost covers hook-up of all the support systems in the shaft with those on the
deck. The cost is based on the topsides operating weight.
Tow Out
The cost of all vessels/tugs, etc required to tow the structure, with or without the
topsides, to its installation site. This includes labour, fuel, consumables,
downtime, support and mobilisation/demobilisation.
Installation
The cost of vessels required to install the GBS at the field location. This includes
labour, fuel, consumables, downtime, support and mobilisation/demobilisation.
General Costs
Design
This item includes the number of man-hours required to carry out the design of
the GBS and the design hours required in the yard. The man-hours include
project specification, special studies, detail design, site surveys, follow on
engineering, purchasing, expediting and inspection services, project control, QA
QUE$TOR Help
160
and documentation during the detailed design phase. The design hours are
related to the concrete volume.
The unit rate includes wages, salaries and other benefits paid to personnel,
payroll burdens, insurance, general overheads (office facilities, utility services,
depreciation of facilities and equipment, administration etc), project expenses
and equipment.
Project Management
The project management hours required for the operator's company personnel or
project management team required to monitor and control all phases of the
development.
The man-hours include: management, project engineering, project control and
planning, design and construction supervision, quality assurance and third party
liaison. The unit rate includes all costs as for design.
Certification
This is a percentage of the total GBS cost. It includes all certification costs for
the approval of the design, materials and construction by a recognised certifying
authority (e.g. Lloyd's, ABS or DNV). Certification is only included by default for
European and North American countries where it is common practice. A
certification percentage is included in the Canadian, North Sea and U.S. cost
Insurance
A percentage of the overall GBS component cost to cover insurance during all
phase of the project up to first oil including construction, transportation and
installation.
Contingency
Offshore Pipelines
About Offshore Pipelines
The offshore pipelines component allows calculation of pipeline sizes, wall
thicknesses, materials, fittings, installation, design and project management costs
for pipelines and riser systems. The pipelines can include single phase or
multiphase product export, water injection, gas injection and gas lift lines to
shore, to new or existing platforms (fixed or floating) and to existing pipelines for
tie-in. The materials costs include for linepipe, flexible risers and support
systems, steel risers (new or retrofit), shore approaches, corrosion protection,
weight coating, cathodic protection, insulation, fixtures and fittings. Installation
QUE$TOR Offshore
161
can be by a range of vessels suitable for the combination of pipeline diameter and
water depth. Installation vessels include the lay barge, reel ship or heavy lift
vessel as well as DSVs for tie-ins and testing, trenching and survey vessels.
Pipeline Links
Double clicking on a pipeline link in the field development schematic (FDS) will
open the pipeline link form, as shown below. There can be multiple pipelines in
each link. All pipelines in a link are assumed to follow exactly the same route,
although they can flow in either direction. To change flow direction, use the
From and To drop-down lists. If you wish to add pipelines with different routes
or lengths, use the FDS to insert a new pipeline link.
Additional pipelines can be added to the link by clicking Add or deleted by clicking
Remove. To cost a pipeline, select the desired pipeline and click Cost, this will
bring you through to the user interface for the pipeline. Clicking on close will
take you back to the FDS.
To access the decommissioning cost estimate select the desired pipeline and click
Decommission. For more information on Pipeline decommissioning see Pipeline
decommissioning.
Length
The length of the pipeline link is used for sizing and pressure drop calculations as
well as material and installation cost. For automatically generated export
pipelines this defaults to the value specified as the Distance to delivery point in
the concept selector.
QUE$TOR Help
162
Water depth
This defaults to the field water depth, but should be overwritten if necessary with
the deepest depth through which the pipeline will pass. It is used to calculate the
required wall thickness to withstand the external hydraulic pressure.
Flow type
The flow type can be selected from the dropdown menu; options available are:
- Oil: Single phase oil flow.
- Gas: Single phase gas flow.
- Gas injection: Single phase gas flow for gas injection.
- Gas lift: Single phase gas flow for gas lift.
- Methanol: Methanol line.
- Two phase: Two phase liquid and gas flow.
- Water injection: Single phase water injection flow.
- Liquid: Any other single phase liquid flow such as chemicals, ethanol,
etc.
Water and gas injection pipelines should always be specified as injection lines
rather than gas or liquid lines. During pipeline sizing QUE$TOR increases the
diameter if inlet pressures exceed default ANSI flange ratings. Higher default
ratings are used in sizing high pressure injection lines than for export and free-
flow lines. See Pipeline Sizing for more details.
To / From
Pipelines in a link can run in either direction, these boxes specify the direction of
the flow and can be altered by you.
User Interface
Selecting a pipeline and clicking Cost in the pipeline link form opens the pipeline
inputs and cost sheet. The input panel is shown in the bottom left of the screen
with the cost estimate sheet on the right hand side. You can navigate between
the inputs using the three tabs. QUE$TOR will choose appropriate values for
every parameter based on linked components and field level data. Many inputs
are also dependent upon higher level inputs within the same component, for
example diameter is dependent on flowrates. The cost estimate displays a
breakdown of every cost item included in the component. The Pipeline inputs are
used to calculate the quantities shown on the cost estimate; these are then
multiplied by unit rates determined by the procurement strategy to give the total
costs.
QUE$TOR Offshore
163
Note: Unlike other inputs those on the pipeline sizing tab are not
automatically recalculated. You must click Resize pipeline to recalculate the
unlocked variables when a variable is adjusted.
Pipeline Sizing
The pipeline sizing tab, shown below, allows the diameter and wall thickness of
the pipeline to be calculated. QUE$TOR calculates the diameter and wall
thickness of the pipeline and the pressure drop along its length. To do this either
the inlet pressure or the outlet pressure must be specified and locked. QUE$TOR
does not allow the input and output pressures to be locked at the same time. For
export pipelines QUE$TOR locks the outlet pressure by default. You can lock the
inlet pressure instead if required. You can also specify and lock the diameter and
calculate a new inlet or outlet pressure. If any of the inputs are changed, click on
Resize pipeline to recalculate the unlocked values.
The Beggs and Brill correlation is used for all flow types, single phase and
multiphase. For gas export pipelines the outlet pressure defaults to 76 bara
(default gas grid pressure). For oil export it defaults to the pressure of the last
stage of separation (or 1.5 bara if a reboiled stabiliser is used) to prevent vapour
breakout in the oil export lines.
Pressure drop calculations do not take in to account any variation in elevation
(except in the case of a pipeline tie-in) as flows are generally from one topsides
to another or to shore.
QUE$TOR Help
164
The initial sizing of pipelines is based on 50% of erosional velocity. The diameter
is then incremented up if inlet pressure exceeds the following limits:
For oil, gas, liquid & two phase lines
- If inlet pressure > 135 bara then line size is incremented up (one size at a
time) until inlet pressure < 135 bara or diameter reaches maximum
(60). This is designed to comply with an ANSI 900# flange rating on the
oil export pump/gas export compressor and allows for a 15% head rise to
shut off.
For gas injection, gas lift, water injection & methanol lines:
- If delivery pressure <= 210 bara and inlet pressure > 235 bara then line
size is incremented up (one size at a time) until inlet pressure <= 235
bara or the diameter reaches a maximum of 60. This is designed to
comply with an ANSI 1500# flange rating on the water pump/gas
compressor and allows for a 15% head rise to shut off.
- If delivery pressure > 210 bara then line size is incremented up (one size
at a time) until inlet pressure <= 400 bara or the diameter reaches a
maximum of 60. This is designed to comply with an ANSI 2500# flange
rating on the water pump/gas compressor and allows for a 15% head rise
to shut off.
If you wish to exceed these flange ratings you can easily reduce the pipeline
diameter by overwriting it. The diameter will then be locked and the flange rating
limits will no longer be used. Click on Resize pipeline to calculate the new
pressure profile and wall thickness.
Material
Three materials are available in QUE$TOR Carbon Steel, Duplex stainless steel
and CRA (Corrosion Resistant Alloy). The default is API 5L Grade X60 carbon
steel (density 7800 kg/m
3
, allowable stress 298 MPa, corrosion allowance 3 mm)
unless acid gas has been specified when duplex is selected (density 7900 kg/m
3
,
allowable stress 327 MPa, corrosion allowance 0 mm). CRA should be used for
pipelines susceptible to pitting corrosion e.g. seawater lines with high chloride
concentrations (density 7900 kg/m
3
, allowable stress 402 MPa, corrosion
allowance 0 mm).
Liquid Flowrate
The liquid flow through the pipeline (at standard conditions).
Gas Flowrate
The gas flow through the pipeline (at standard conditions).
Note: Changing the liquid or gas flowrates will not update the flow type
listed in the pipeline link form.
Pressure in
QUE$TOR Offshore
165
The pipeline inlet pressure. By default this is unlocked and calculated for export
pipelines.
Pressure out
The pipeline outlet pressure. For gas export pipelines this will default to the gas
grid pressure specified in the technical database (76 bara). For oil export
pipelines this will default to the operating pressure of the last stage of separation,
or 1.5 bara if a reboiled stabiliser is used.
Temperature
This is the seabed temperature and is used in calculating the fluid properties in
the pipeline. The pipeline hydraulics are calculated assuming the pipeline is
isothermal at the seabed temperature.
Buckle Arrestors
When calculating the wall thickness QUE$TOR considers internal pressure,
external pressure and buckle propagation stress. The design internal pressure is
set to 110% of the inlet pressure. Where the wall thickness required to prevent
buckle propagation is greater than that required by internal and external
pressure, QUE$TOR will include buckle arrestors by default. The displayed wall
thickness is then based on the greater of either internal or external pressure. De-
selecting buckle arrestors will remove them from the design and recalculate the
wall thickness based on all three criteria.
If buckle arrestors are included the pipeline weight (and hence unit rate) is
increased by 20% to account for the thicker sections of pipewall.
Nominal Diameter
The nominal diameter by which line pipe is marketed. For diameters of 14 inches
and above it is the outer diameter, for smaller diameters it is approximately the
inner diameter of lines with standard wall thickness. In both cases the actual
inner diameter is dependent on the wall thickness. QUE$TOR's range is a
minimum diameter of 4 inch and a maximum diameter of 60 inch.
Note: If you wish to change the pipeline diameter, remember to click on
Resize pipeline to calculate the new pressure profile and wall thickness.
Corrosion Allowance
The corrosion allowance to be included in the wall thickness. The default values
for each is dependent on the pipeline material.
Wall Thickness
When calculating the wall thickness QUE$TOR considers internal pressure,
external pressure and buckle propagation stress and selects the greater wall
thickness calculated. The design internal pressure is set to 110% of the inlet
pressure. Where the greatest wall thickness is calculated to prevent buckle
propagation, QUE$TOR will include buckle arrestors by default so that the wall
thickness is based on the greater of either internal or external pressure.
QUE$TOR Help
166
The calculated figure can be overwritten if you want to use a specific value. If
the pipeline is to be designed for a much higher design pressure than operating
pressure, e.g. for well shut-in pressure, then the diameter should be calculated
using the operating pressure and then the wall thickness should be recalculated
using the design pressure.
The wall thickness includes the corrosion allowance.
QUE$TOR employs a minimum wall thickness of 6 mm (0.236 inch).
Pipeline Installation
The installation tab enables you to specify the spread used for installation. It also
allows you to specify pipeline coatings and insulation.
Lay Vessel
The type of vessel used to install the pipeline. For each type of vessel QUE$TOR
contains lay rates and limitations according to water depth and pipeline
diameter. The available options are:
- Reel ship/steel: Suitable for smaller, short length pipelines. Reels are
prefabricated onshore and laid using an S-lay or J-lay technique allowing
installation in water depths up to 3000m. Additional time is allowed for
change over of reels for longer pipelines. The maximum pipeline diameter
is 16 and then only in water depths up to 500m
- S-lay without DP: A pipelay barge operating on anchors. Pipelengths are
welded onboard and laid using a stinger in an S-lay configuration. The
water depth limit for lay barges using anchors is 1000m
QUE$TOR Offshore
167
- S-lay with DP: A pipelay barge using S-lay configuration but maintaining
position using dynamic positioning. The lay capacity for both S-lay vessels
is determined by the pipe weight that can be supported from the stinger
during lay operations. The maximum water depth for an SDP lay is 2000m
- J-lay: A heavy lift crane vessel converted for pipelay using a vertical J-lay
stinger. The vertical configuration of the stinger allows a lower tension to
be used to support the pipe during the lay operation and allows pipelay in
much deeper waters than the S-lay technique. There is a minimum water
depth for J-lay operation depending on the pipeline diameter. The
maximum water depth for a J-lay is 4000m
- Solitaire: The latest generation of pipelay barge. This is a converted bulk
carrier designed to operate in S-lay mode. Due to the large size of this
vessel and by adjustment of the stinger angle, large diameter pipelines
can be laid in deepwater. It should be noted that at present this is the
only vessel capable of laying large diameter pipelines in deepwater up to
4000m.
QUE$TOR chooses a default vessel based on the water depth, the pipeline
diameter and length. This can be changed using the dropdown list.
Day rates include an allowance for pipe barges and tugs required to supply pipe
to S-lay without DP, S-lay with DP and J-lay vessels.
Pipeline Crossings
The default is determined according to the length of the pipeline specified. If the
actual number is known then this figure should be entered. The default is one
crossing approximately every 60 km, with a maximum of six in shallow waters
and a default of no crossings for deepwater. Pipeline crossings are estimated by
adding an equivalent duration to the lay vessel to cover for installation of
mattresses or crossing frame. The duration is dependent on the pipeline
diameter.
Buried Length
For pipelines to shore the default buried length is 5 km if the export end water
depth is deeper than 200 m. If the export end water depth is less than or equal
to 200m then the entire length of the pipeline is assumed to be buried. All other
pipelines have a default buried length of 0 km if both the export and receiving
end water depths are deeper than 200m. If either the export or receiving end
water depth is less than or equal to 200m then the entire length of the pipeline is
assumed to be buried. Pipelines are buried to protect them from damage by
commercial fishing fleets.
Diver Connections
This specifies whether divers are used to make the final connections via flanged
spool pieces. If un-checked, diverless mechanical connectors are assumed to be
used. The default maximum water depth for diver connections is specified in the
regional technical databases.
Coating
Includes an external three layer polypropylene coating in the cost calculation.
The default selection is for coating to be included for all pipelines. Polypropylene
is suitable for wall temperatures up to 100C.
QUE$TOR Help
168
Weight Coat
Includes weight coating in the cost calculation. By default, QUE$TOR only
includes a weight coating on pipeline sizes greater than 14 inch diameter down to
a water depth of 1000m. Below 1000m the default is no weight coat for all
pipeline sizes. The weight coating is a 50-75 mm thickness layer of concrete.
Weight coating is not available when the pipeline is fully buried.
Cathodic Protection
By default QUE$TOR includes cathodic protection for carbon steel lines only.
QUE$TOR calculates the weight of sacrificial anodes required to be installed on
the pipeline according to its diameter and length. The anode weight is calculated
assuming 1 kg of anodes per square metre of external pipe surface area.
Insulation
The default is not to include insulation. The dropdown list allows a choice of 15,
25 or 50mm thickness of polyurethane foam to be included in the cost estimate.
Pipeline Risers
The risers input tab, shown below, allows you to specify the risers at either end of
the pipeline and includes shore approaches for pipelines to shore.
The water depth, the riser type and whether or not a subsea ESD valve is
included are used to estimate the riser cost at both the export and receiving end.
Dependent on the type, the riser length is calculated as a factor of the water
depth (which defaults to the value from the field level details). Steel risers
include an allowance for the freeboard section.
QUE$TOR Offshore
169
Subsea ESD Valve
An emergency shut down (ESD) valve is included at the base of the riser if this is
selected. QUE$TOR includes ESD valves by default for new and retrofitted rigid
steel risers with gas or two phase pipelines.
Water Depth
The water depth is used to calculate the risers length. The riser profile used is
dependent on the riser type chosen.
Type
The types of riser available in QUE$TOR are listed below, selection is made using
the dropdown list.
- Rigid Steel: riser to a new fixed platform. Assumes connection to riser
pre-installed on the jacket or GBS.
- New steel (retro): fitting a new rigid steel riser to an existing platform.
Installation includes welding of riser support clamps to the jacket.
- Flexible S-lay: flexible riser laid in lazy S configuration.
- Hot tap: tie-in to existing pipeline. Installation includes for the extended
set-up time required when hot tapping into an existing pipeline.
- Pipeline to Y piece: tie-in to new pipeline or existing Y piece.
- Pull-in to manifold: this requires diverless connections. Installation
includes laying pipeline to a target area close to the manifold and pulling
the pipeline into place for final connection via mechanical connectors.
- Lay-away connection: from a manifold or template. Connection to
manifold or template is made above water before installation. The lay
barge is on station during the manifold installation and then continues
laying away from the manifold.
QUE$TOR Help
170
- Catenary steel: suitable for deepwater J-lay only. Pipeline is handed
directly over from lay vessel to platform with final connection made
topsides.
- Shore approach: for receiving end only. Specify the type of shore
approach using the shore approach dropdown menu.
Shore Approach
The type of shore approach can be selected using the dropdown list. The options
available are: shelving beach, cliff/seawall or fjord. If the installation region does
not have fjords, the Fjord shore approach option will not be available.
Materials Costs
Materials costs relate to the pipeline dimensions, anodes, valves, fittings,
connectors and risers.
Linepipe
The linepipe unit rate is a composite rate per unit length determined from the
pipeline material and wall thickness. It includes an allowance for buckle arrestors
if selected. The pipelines are assumed to be seamless for 14 inch diameter and
below and seam welded for 16 inch diameter and above. All pipes include an
epoxy anti-corrosion coat. A percentage of the pipeline cost is added for Onshore
Fabrication when a Reel Ship is used for pipelay, this covers for welding the pipe
and winding it on to reels.
Coating, weight coating and insulation unit rates include the cost of supply and
coating the linepipe. See Pipeline Installation for details of what is included for
each type of material.
QUE$TOR Offshore
171
Anodes includes for the anode material and fittings required to provide cathodic
protection.
Emergency Shutdown Valve Systems
Surface emergency shut down valves (ESDV) are included for all export lines as
part of the topsides instrumentation bulks. A pipeline ESDV includes all
necessary valves and fittings required to install a subsea ESDV system some
100m or so from the base of either the export or receiving risers, i.e. outside the
drop object zone. This is installed by diver or ROV depending on the water depth.
It includes the ESDV, non return valves, isolation valves and umbilical for
operation. Materials are assumed to be compatible with the pipeline. A
differential is made for high pressure (above ANSI 600# rating [>100 bar]) and
low pressure (below ANSI 600# [<100 bar]).
Risers
The calculated length of each riser and unit rate is used to give an overall riser
cost. A riser system including a riser base, arch and buoy is included for flexible
risers.
Spools, flanges & fittings includes the cost of all spools, flanges and fittings or
mechanical connectors required for the pipeline. A set is included for each end of
the pipeline unless shore approach or lay-away connections are specified.
Materials are assumed to be compatible with the pipeline material selection. A
differential for high pressure (above ANSI 600# [>100 bar]) and low pressure
(below ANSI 600# [<100 bar]) ratings is made.
Freight
This cost is assumed by QUE$TOR to be a percentage of the total material costs.
It includes the cost of packaging and transporting equipment from the
manufacturer to the construction yard. You can modify the freight percentage;
the default is dependent on where the equipment is procured (in region or out of
region).
Installation Costs
The installation costs are calculated based on the spreads required to install the
specified pipeline. They include a lump sum for shore approach if selected.
QUE$TOR Help
172
Pipelay Spread
The pipelay spread estimates the duration taken to lay the pipeline and is
dependent on the length of pipeline and speed of the lay vessel. Allowances for
weather downtime and additional time added for pipeline crossings if specified.
For each lay vessel the duration is calculated from the speed at which that class
of vessel operates and is dependent on the pipeline diameter, water depth and
the material of construction. The unit rate cost for each class of vessel includes
labour, fuel, consumables and vessel support systems. The mobilisation /
demobilisation time assumed for the spread is given separately.
Diving Support Vessel Tie-ins
The Diving Support Vessel (DSV) duration at the location for the installation and
tie-in of the export and receiving risers (either steel or flexible), shore approach,
tie-in to a pipeline and diverless connectors. The DSV also installs ESD valves
when selected, including setting up, connecting and tieing back the umbilical,
testing, installation of protection structure, clearing up and moving away. The
DSV unit cost includes for support services, labour, waiting on weather and
consumables. The mobilisation / demobilisation time assumed for the diving
support vessel is given separately.
Diving Support Vessel Test and Commissioning
The additional duration that the DSV is required on station for testing and
commissioning of the pipeline. The duration is related to the diameter and length
of the pipeline and includes flooding with inhibited seawater, hydrotesting,
dewatering, drying and moving on and off station. The DSV unit cost includes for
support services, labour, waiting on weather and consumables. The mobilisation
/ demobilisation time assumed for the diving support vessel is given separately.
Testing and Commissioning Equipment
An allowance for the cost of the equipment required on the DSV during testing
and commissioning. It uses the duration for which the DSV is required, including
mobilisation / demobilisation. Additional time is allowed for waiting and
preparation.
QUE$TOR Offshore
173
Dredging and Rock Dumping
A duration should be manually added if it is considered that the ground conditions
require dredging and rock filling. No duration is calculated automatically. The
mobilisation / demobilisation time assumed for the diving support vessel is given
separately.
Trenching
An allowance for a trenching vessel required when some or all of the pipeline is
buried. The trenching duration is dependent on the buried length of the pipeline
and whether there is a shore approach. The mobilisation / demobilisation time
assumed for the trenching vessel is given separately.
Surveying
A composite duration and all inclusive dayrate for the survey vessels that are
required. It includes predesign survey, preinstall survey, post lay survey and
post trench survey. The sail and return time assumed for the survey vessel is
given separately.
Shore Approach
A lump sum to cover the cost of a shore approach. This is based on the type of
shore approach selected and includes the cost of blasting if cliff or fjord is
selected.
General Costs
contingency.
Design
QUE$TOR Help
174
The number of man-hours required to carry out the design of the pipeline. It
covers the hours for project specification, special studies, detail design, follow on
and documentation during the detailed design phase.
The unit rate incorporates all wages, salaries and other benefits paid to
personnel, payroll burdens, insurance, general overheads (office facilities, utility
services, depreciation of facilities and equipment and administration) project
expenses and equipment.
It includes vendor data delivery of items to the yard, insurance up to delivery,
guarantees and import duties.
The design hours are related to the length of the pipeline risers, a base figure and
the number of pipeline crossings, with an additional value added for ESDVs if
selected.
Project Management
The project management includes all the project management man-hours
required for the operator company personnel and any project management team
to manage, monitor and control all phases of the development. It includes
management, project engineering, project control and planning, design and
construction supervision, quality assurance and third party liaison.
This covers the period from the conceptual design stage through to first oil.
The management hours are related to the length of the pipeline, risers, a base
figure and the number of pipeline crossings with an additional value added if
ESDVs are selected.
Certification
A percentage of the total pipeline component cost to cover certification of the
design, materials and construction of the development by a recognised certifying
authority (e.g. Lloyd's, ABS or DNV). Certification is only included by default for
Insurance
A percentage of the total pipeline cost to cover insurance during all phase of the
project up to first oil including transportation, construction, installation, testing
and commissioning. Personnel liability insurances are covered in the respective
cost centres.
Contingency
A contingency is added as a percentage of the total material, installation, design,
project management, insurance and certification costs to bring the component
cost estimate to a P50 level. For a fuller explanation see Contingency Definitions.
QUE$TOR Offshore
175
Semi-submersible
About Semi-submersibles
The semi-submersible is one of five types of floating production substructures
available in QUE$TOR. Other floaters available include monohull shipshape
(tanker) vessels, TLPs (Tension Leg Platforms), spar buoys and barges. The cost
of purchasing a suitable semi-submersible drilling rig and converting it for
permanent production can be estimated as can the cost of a new-build. The
semi-submersible component includes costs for the vessel purchase, mooring
system, accommodation units, upgrading of converted vessels, installation and
project management.
User Interface
On entering the semi-submersible component the input panel is shown in the
bottom left of the screen with the cost estimate sheet on the right hand side.
QUE$TOR will choose appropriate values for every parameter based on linked
components and field level data. Some inputs may also be dependent upon high
level inputs within the same component, for example the default wave height is
dependent on the environmental conditions selected. The cost estimate displays
a breakdown of every cost item included in the component. The semi-
submersible inputs are used to calculate the quantities shown on the cost
estimate; these are then multiplied by unit rates determined by the procurement
strategy to give the total costs.
Primary Inputs
The semi-submersible inputs are shown below.
QUE$TOR Help
176
Semi-submersible Type
Costs for a new-build semi-submersible include those for the hull, complete with
marine/ballast, deck, drilling rig, primary steelwork, quarters, control rooms,
lifeboats, and all other systems not normally included with topsides. Costs are
given as lump sum values for each generation of semi-submersible. These costs
will vary depending on precise specifications, fabrication, location and prevailing
market conditions, so care should be exercised. Mooring lines are included as a
separate cost item.
Costs for conversion cover the purchase and upgrade of an existing semi-
submersible drilling vessel to a condition ready to receive production facilities.
The costs for purchase of the vessel are given as a lump sum value, which is
subject to variation depending on market conditions, age and condition of vessel
and the current certification situation. The weights and costs for upgrading allow
for strip-out of redundant facilities (such as drilling facilities if removed), and
modification or renovation of existing systems.
These weights and costs are based on analysis of detailed conversion estimates,
for conversion of a vessel up to 5 years old, in average condition. They may vary
depending on vessel condition. Conversions include general and safety upgrades
and additional buoyancy, i.e. rocket columns or sponsons for semi-submersibles.
Upgrades to mooring systems and an extension to the mooring lines are included
for vessels if necessitated by water depth or environmental conditions.
Semi-submersible Generation
Semi-submersible platforms are based on four generations whether new-build or
conversions and can include drilling facilities.
Selection of the Default Semi-Submersible generation is based on the additional
load and water depth. The additional load is dependent on the topsides weight,
number of risers, upgrade material weight, weight of moorings and whether
drilling facilities are retained or removed.
QUE$TOR Offshore
177
For a given generation of semi-submersible buoyancy aids are added if the
supported load exceeds the Maximum Supported Load. The weight of
Recommended Maximum Buoyancy Weights vary for 2
nd
, 3
rd
, and 4
th
generation
semi-submersibles. If the calculated weight of buoyancy aids exceeds these
limits then a later generation will be picked by default, although you can still
select an earlier generation if desired. If the water depth exceeds the Maximum
Water Depth for the selected generation of semi-submersible the length of the
moorings is increased, using either wire or rope. The number of chains
corresponds to the mooring system supplied for drilling service. When operating
as a production semi-submersible this is upgraded to a 12-point mooring in all
cases see Mooring systems.
The operating weight is passed from the associated topsides (if any) and is used
to select the generation of semi-submersible required.
Water Depth
Defaults to the field development water depth but may be modified for the
location of the semi-submersible. This is used to calculate mooring costs.
Number of Risers
The number of flexible risers is automatically picked up from the associated
topsides component with an allowance for product export. The number of risers
is used to calculate the additional load on the semi-submersible and from this any
additional buoyancy requirements. The semi-submersible is assumed to be
required to support up to 100m of each riser. Sections of riser extending deeper
than this are assumed to be supported by their own riser arch and buoy
arrangement.
Conversion Upgrades
The following upgrades are only applicable to conversions, for new-builds they are
set to zero.
- General upgrade: Upgrade to existing quarters, control rooms, deck
cranes, utility systems, power generation systems and safety systems.
- Marine upgrade: Materials required for upgrades to ballast, navigation
and propulsion systems.
- Drilling upgrade: Materials required to modify an existing drilling
derrick. If no drilling facilities are included then this is the weight of
materials required to install a light-weight wireline derrick.
Length of Sea Trials
The duration of the vessel sea trials including inclination testing and final
commissioning of marine systems. The cost includes allowances for support
vessels, marine and commissioning crew.
Additional Load
This is the supported load in excess of the maximum supported load without
buoyancy. This is used to calculate the additional buoyancy aid required. The
supported load is the sum of the following:
QUE$TOR Help
178
- Topsides operating weight.
- Supported risers weight, this is assumed to be 50 tonnes for each riser to
allow a supported length of 100m.
- General upgrade weight, this is only added for conversions and is
dependent on the generation.
- Marine upgrade weight, for conversions only.
- Drilling upgrade weight, this is 100 tonnes if the rig is retained or 300
tonnes if the rig is removed, it is for conversions only.
- Supported mooring lines weight, this is the weight in water of the mooring
lines selected.
- If drilling is removed, 500 tonnes is subtracted from the calculated load.
If additional facilities, not identified in the topsides, are to be added to the vessel
(e.g. a future temporary load) and the vessel is required to accommodate this,
then add an allowance to the additional load to recalculate the buoyancy
requirements.
Buoyancy Aid
Buoyancy aids, such as rocket columns and sponsons, are included by default if
the additional load exceeds the capacity of the semi-submersible generation
selected. The weight of buoyancy aids is calculated by applying a factor to the
additional load.
Drilling Facilities
For new-build vessels drilling facilities are assumed to be included. The check
box should be checked if a drilling rig is required.
Mooring System
The mooring system tab allows the mooring system to be specified.
QUE$TOR Offshore
179
Mooring Type
Three options are available: chain, chain and wire and chain and rope.
Chain only mooring lines follow a natural catenary profile and can be anchored to
the seabed using either drag embedded anchors (DEA) or suction piled anchors
(SPA). For water depths less than 300m the mooring system will default to chain
only moorings as the benefits of using rope or wire for the middle section are
typically offset by the cost of the terminations. When calculating the line length,
QUE$TOR allows for a length of chain on the seabed. This chain is used as an
additional weight to provide restoring force to the vessel and reducing the force
applied to the anchor. SPAs can withstand a greater force before any movement
of the anchor occurs than DEAs and consequently require less chain on the
seabed.
Chain and wire mooring lines follow a semi-taut catenary profile and can be
anchored to the seabed using either drag embedded anchors (DEA) or suction
piled anchors (SPA). Chain and wire mooring lines are assumed to be composed
of three sections:
- Top Section: 80m of chain which connects the vessel and the wire
section. This chain reduces wear on the wire in the splash zone and
prevents it from being exposed to the air. The chain extends from the
chain locker over the windlasses down to sea level and includes a section
to take it below the splash zone. If a drilling rig is included an additional
20m of chain is included in the lockers to increase manoeuvrability.
- Middle Section: This section is the main wire length. It is attached to the
chain at the top and bottom using mooring terminations. Wire is
significantly lighter than chain and so requires less buoyancy to be built
into a vessel. The proportion of wire varies as a function of water depth,
increasing as the water depth increases.
- Bottom Section: A length of chain that connects to the wire some
distance above the seabed and terminates at the anchor. This chain is
QUE$TOR Help
180
used as an additional weight to provide restoring force to the vessel and
reduce the force applied to the anchor. It also minimises wear on the wire
in the thrashing zone on the seabed. SPAs can withstand a greater force
before any movement of the anchor occurs than DEAs and consequently
require less chain on the seabed.
Chain and polyester rope mooring lines have a taut profile, but can still be
considered to be composed of three sections. Due to the taut fashion of the
mooring lines DEAs are not suitable for use with chain and rope moorings and
SPAs will always be used:
- Top Section: Similar to chain and wire mooring, again it is highly
undesirable for the rope to be exposed to air and sufficient chain is
allowed in the locker to allow the vessel to manoeuvre.
- Middle Section: The main length of rope. The rope is attached in a taut
fashion to the suction piled anchor with sections of chain at the top and
bottom to protect the rope. The rope is used in part as a restoring force as
the elasticity of the rope pulls the vessel back into position should it
move. The proportion of rope varies as a function of water depth,
- Bottom Section: A length of chain that connects to the rope some
distance above the seabed and terminates at the anchor.
Anchor Type
QUE$TOR includes costs for drag embedded anchors or suction piled anchors.
Suction piled anchors are always selected for chain and rope moorings. Drag
embedded anchors are selected by default for chain and chain and wire moorings
in water depths up to 500m. In deeper waters, suction piles are selected in all
regions except South America and the North Sea for chain and wire moorings as
large anchor handling tugs are routinely available for these regions.
Environmental Conditions
Typical mild, moderate and severe environmental conditions are stored for each
region. Selection of severe, moderate or mild conditions updates the default
wave height, wind speed and tidal current. By default severe conditions are
chosen.
Wave height: QUE$TOR mooring lines are calibrated assuming the
highest individual wave with a 50 year return period. QUE$TOR uses
the specified value unchanged. The significant wave height (50 year
return period) is often known and return values can be estimated for
design purposes as follows:50 year return wave height = 1.86 x
significant wave height
Given a 100 year return value, the corresponding 50 year Wave Height
for use in QUE$TOR can be estimated by factoring by 1.86/1.95 = 0.95.
Wind speed: The wind speed is the value measured at a reference
height of 10m above stillwater and for a 50 year return
period.QUE$TOR mooring lines are estimated assuming a design speed
appropriate to a 5 second gust. Frequently, mean wind speeds
averaged over 1 hour or 1 minute are known. The corresponding 5
second value (m/s) can be estimated using a Wind Speed Lookup. The
QUE$TOR Offshore
181
50 year return wind speed can be estimated from the 100 year return
period as: 50 year speed = 100 year speed/1.05
Tidal current: The tidal current is a surface value. The algorithm
estimates a value for the storm surge current (surface value) as 3% of
the wind speed. The tidal current rarely exceeds 0.3 m/s along any
open coastline (Ref API RP 2A) but local shoreline or seabed features
can increase values to 1.0 m/s or more. In more restricted waters (e.g.
North Sea) values between 0.2 and 0.8 m/s are typical.
Soil Condition
The soil condition is used to calculate the size of the anchors required. Three
- Good: the soil has high load bearing capacity.
- Average: the soil has average load bearing capacity.
- Poor: the soil has low load bearing capacity.
Option selection is made by selecting from the dropdown menu. Depending on
the selection anchor weight is factored up or down from that calculated for
average conditions.
Mooring Chain Size
The mooring chain size is determined based on the environmental conditions and
on generation of semi-submersible selected. If chain and wire mooring lines are
used then the wire size is assumed to be the same as the chain size. If chain and
rope mooring lines are used then the Rope Size is selected according to chain
size.
The chain size does not vary with small changes in environmental conditions, only
a large change will affect an increase or decrease in chain size. Combinations of
effect are not taken into account, i.e. a large increase in any one condition will
cause a change in size but a moderate change in all three conditions would not
cause a change although it may require one in reality.
Note: QUE$TOR only holds cost data for the chain and rope sizes shown in
Table 11.4, no other sizes can be costed.
Number of Lines
By default 12 mooring lines are included for all types of semi-submersible. If this
is overwritten the mooring lines are resized to provide the required load bearing
capacity, although you should note that the chain size will never exceed 6.5
inches. If the mooring chain size is altered, the number of mooring lines is
recalculated to maintain a constant load bearing capacity.
Equipment Costs
The equipment cost estimate is shown below.
QUE$TOR Help
182
Vessel Purchase
The cost identified here is a lump sum cost for the purchase of the semi-
submersible. It is either the cost of a new-build cost or an existing vessel
suitable for conversion.
- New-builds: The cost includes allowances for the construction and
certification of the vessel to a condition ready to accept skid mounted
topsides facilities, (including additional utilities for process support), safety
systems and base power generating normally associated with an FPSO. For
a new-build semi-submersible the cost includes components for the hull,
complete with marine/ballast deck primary steelwork, winches and
windlasses for a 12-point mooring system, quarters, control rooms,
lifeboats and utility systems. A drilling rig is assumed to be included in
the cost of a new build semi-submersible; if it is not required you should
reduce the purchase cost as appropriate.
- Conversions: The cost of existing vessels fluctuate depending on the
economic climate, vessel condition and country of origin.The cost for an
existing semi-submersible is a lump sum cost for a drilling semi-
submersible assumed to be approximately 5 years old and of average
condition. It is assumed to have all drilling facilities (including derrick,
derrick substructure and mud pumps/storage), utility systems to support
drilling, power generation, quarters, and propulsion and an 8-point
mooring system.
Anchors
The cost of either suction piled or drag embedded anchors depending upon the
choice made in the inputs. The anchor weight is dependent on the type of anchor
selected, the number of mooring lines, the hull weight and the soil conditions on
the seabed.
Materials Costs
Upgrade material values are only applicable to conversions. The weights
calculated or entered in the Inputs are carried forward and a cost per tonne unit
rate from the procurement strategy applied to generate the materials cost
estimate.
QUE$TOR Offshore
183
General Upgrade
Materials required for upgrade to existing quarters, control rooms, deck cranes,
utility systems, power generation systems and safety systems.
Marine Upgrade
Materials required for upgrades to ballast, navigation and propulsion systems.
Drilling Upgrade
Materials required to modify an existing drilling derrick. If no drilling facilities are
included then this is the weight of materials required to install a light-weight
wireline derrick.
Mooring Upgrade
This is the cost of four winches and fairleads for the additional mooring lines
required to convert from an 8-point to a 12-point mooring system.
Mooring Chain
This is the total amount of new chain required for a 12-point mooring system and
is dependent on the water depth and generation of semi-submersible. See
Mooring system for more details.
Converted semi-submersibles are assumed to have an existing 8 point mooring
system. If the size of the existing mooring chains is equal to or greater than that
calculated by the mooring algorithm then they are re-used, with the wire section
extended if necessary. If chain and polyester mooring is selected then only the
chains are re-used (if of sufficient size). When the existing mooring system is re-
used 4 additional mooring lines are added to increase it to a 12 point system. If
the chain size of the existing mooring system is below that required by the
environmental conditions then all lines are scrapped and the cost of a new 12
point mooring system is included.
For new build semi-submersibles the length and cost given is for all 12 mooring
chains.
Mooring Wire
QUE$TOR Help
184
The total amount of wire required for a 12-point mooring system is dependent on
the water depth and generation of semi-submersible. See Mooring system for
more details.
For converted semi-submersibles with re-used mooring systems if the water
depth exceeds the value given in Semi-submersible properties for the selected
generation of semi-submersible wire is used to extend the existing mooring lines
to the overall mooring length required for the specified water depth. The wire
has the same diameter as the chain and this varies with the generation of semi-
submersible selected.
For new build semi-submersibles and new mooring lines for converted semi-
submersibles the length of wire is the overall mooring length minus the chain
length.
Mooring Polyester Rope
The total amount of polyester rope required for a 12-point mooring system is
dependent on the water depth and generation of semi-submersible. See Mooring
system for more details.
Converted semi-submersibles are assumed to have chain and wire mooring lines
and so if chain and rope is selected all wire is assumed to be discarded and the
cost of new rope is included for all lines. If the existing chain is equal to or larger
than the size specified in the inputs then this is re-used.
For new build semi-submersibles the cost of new rope is included for all lines.
Mooring Terminations
When a combination of chain and wire or chain and rope has been used a single
section of wire or rope connects the upper length of chain with the section of
chain on the seabed for each mooring line. A mooring termination fitting is
provided at each end of the wire/rope.
Buoyancy Aid
The weight of materials installed on the vessel to provide the additional buoyancy
requirements, such as the addition of rocket columns or sponsons.
Freight
A fixed percentage of the total cost of materials to cover the cost of packaging
and transportation from the stockists/vendors to the construction yard.
Fabrication Costs
QUE$TOR Offshore
185
Strip Out
This is the cost of stripping out existing drilling facilities and other material which
needs to be upgraded.
General Upgrade
The cost to install the upgrades to existing quarters, control rooms, deck cranes,
utility systems, power generation systems and safety systems.
Marine Upgrade
The cost to install the upgrades to ballast, navigation and propulsion systems.
Drilling Upgrade
The cost to modify an existing drilling derrick if drilling is retained.
Mooring Upgrade
The cost to install four winches and fairleads for the additional mooring lines
required to convert from an 8-point to a 12-point mooring system.
Buoyancy Aid
The cost to install the additional buoyancy requirements, such as the addition of
rocket columns or sponsons.
Installation Costs
The semi-submersible installation cost estimate is shown below.
QUE$TOR Help
186
Mob / Demob and Tow out
This incorporates an allowance for the cost of all vessels required to transport the
semi-submersible from the construction yard to the offshore location. The
duration is estimated based on the time to mobilise and demobilise the transport
spread and a regionally dependent distance from the construction yard to the
offshore location. The unit cost is a composite cost incorporating vessel hire,
labour, fuel, consumables, downtime and onshore support.
Installation
This includes an allowance for the cost of all vessels required to install the
anchors, deploy the mooring, attach the mooring lines to the vessel and prove
the mooring system is secure. The duration is dependent on the type of anchor
selected and the water depth.
Hook-up and Commissioning Costs
The semi-submersible hook-up and commissioning cost estimate is shown below.
Sea Trial and Marine Commissioning
Includes duration for sea trials and final commissioning of the marine systems on
the vessel. The unit cost is a composite cost incorporating labour, fuel,
consumables, downtime, support and mobilisation/ demobilisation.
General Costs
contingency.
QUE$TOR Offshore
187
Design
The man-hours required to carry out the design of the semi-submersible. The
duration includes project specification, special studies, detail design, site surveys,
control, QA and documentation during the detailed design phase. It also includes
wages, salaries and other benefits paid to personnel, payroll burdens, insurance,
general overheads (office facilities, utility administration), project expenses and
administration. It includes vendor drawings and documentation, delivery of items
to the construction yard, vendor's installation and commissioning services,
commissioning spares, insurance up to delivery, guarantees and import duties.
The total hours are related to the generation of semi-submersible selected and
whether it is a new-build or conversion.
Project Management
Includes all the man-hours required by the operator's personnel and any project
management team to manage, monitor and control all phases of the semi-
submersible and includes project engineering, project control and planning,
design and construction supervision, quality assurance and third party liaison.
This covers the conceptual design through to first oil.
Certification
This is a fixed percentage of the total semi-submersible costs. It includes all
certification costs of the design, equipment, materials and construction of the
semi-submersible by a recognised approval authority (e.g. Lloyd's, ABS or DNV).
Certification is only included by default for European and North American
countries where it is common practice. A certification percentage is included in
the Canadian, North Sea and U.S. cost databases. All other cost databases have
a zero cost for certification.
Insurance
Contingency
QUE$TOR Help
188
Spar Buoy
About Spar Buoys
The spar buoy is one of five types of floating production substructure available in
QUE$TOR. Other floaters available include monohull shipshape (tanker) vessels,
TLPs (Tension Leg Platforms), semi-submersibles and barges.
Three types of spar buoy are available in QUE$TOR: Caisson, Cell and Truss
spars.
The spar buoy component includes costs for the hull, mooring system, risers
materials and fabrication plus installation, design and project management.
User Interface
On entering the spar buoy the input panel is shown in the bottom left of the
level data. Some inputs may also be dependent upon high level inputs within the
same component, for example the default wave height is dependent on the
environmental conditions selected. The cost estimate displays a breakdown of
every cost item included in the component. The spar inputs are used to calculate
the quantities shown on the cost estimate; these are then multiplied by unit rates
determined by the procurement strategy to give the total costs.
Primary Inputs
QUE$TOR Offshore
189
The Spar buoy primary inputs are shown below.
Spar Type
Three types of spar buoy are available in QUE$TOR: caisson, cell and truss spars.
The caisson spar is the classic spar design and has now been used for many
deepwater developments, in particular in the Gulf of Mexico. It consists of a
single cylindrical hull with helical strakes to suppress vortex-induced vibration.
The upper steel buoyancy tanks in the QUE$TOR caisson spar extend to a depth
of 87 m (285 feet).
The truss spar is a design which is becoming increasingly favoured as a lighter
and cheaper alternative to caisson spars. The top section of the hull is a
cylindrical steel structure similar to the caisson design, which extends to a depth
of 61 m (200 feet) in the default QUE$TOR design. It provides most of buoyancy
for the spar and contains variable-ballast tanks. Helical strakes attached to the
hull wall suppress vortex-induced vibration. The middle truss section of the hull
consists of an X-braced space frame similar to conventional jackets and has 3
horizontal plates to dampen the heave response. The lower keel section provides
buoyancy at float-off and in tow. This section is flooded to upend the hull and
filled with ballast after upending.
The cell spar design is a new alternative to caisson and truss spar designs that
offers a simplified design which is easier to fabricate. A major advantage of the
cell design is that many regional yards are capable of building cell spars and their
fabrication is not limited to Finland (as is the case with classic spar designs). The
upper hard tank section of the hull consists of seven cylindrical tubes that extend
to a depth of 61 m (200 feet) in the default QUE$TOR design and provide the
buoyancy for the spar. They also contain variable-ballast tanks and have helical
strakes to suppress vortex-induced vibration. The legs, which form middle
section of the hull, are an extension of three of the seven cylindrical tubes.
Horizontal heave plates dampen the heave response in a similar fashion to the
truss design. The lower section of the hull, the keel is permanently ballasted.
QUE$TOR Help
190
Riser Wall Type
This can be either Single or Double. If Single is chosen 9
5
/
8
risers are assumed.
If Double is chosen 9
5
/
8
risers inside 12 conductors are assumed. The spar
buoy component includes the cost of the risers: the choice of riser wall type will
determine the weight used to calculate their cost.
Number of Platform Wells
This is passed from the associated topsides component. Provision is made for
one spare slot. This input should relate to the number of platform wells only and
is used to size the well bay.
Water Depth
location of the spar. The water depth is used to calculate mooring costs. Spars
are not recommended for water depths shallower than 300 metres, where other
production concepts tend to be more attractive economically.
Distance to Joining Site
The distance from the fabrication yard where the spar hull is fabricated in two
pieces to the joining site where the pieces will be welded together. For caisson
and truss spars QUE$TOR assumes that the hull is transported in two pieces from
a fabrication yard in Finland to a joining facility near the installation site. For cell
spars QUE$TOR assumes that all fabrication is completed in a regional yard and
so distance to joining site defaults to zero. If caisson or truss spars are to be
transported in one piece, the distance to joining site should be set to zero.
Distance to Installation Site
The distance from the joining site or fabrication site for cell spars to the
installation site on the field.
Topsides operating weight
The operating weight of the associated topsides is used in determining the hull
size and mooring system. The weight of the conductors associated with the
platform drilled wells does not influence the topsides payload as each production
riser has its own buoyancy can sized to support the riser weight. However, if a
large number of subsea wells are tied back to the spar the Topsides operating
weight should be manually adjusted to account for the additional payload
associated with the flexible risers. A further adjustment should be made to
account for the additional payload associated with large numbers of product
export risers.
Mooring System
Clicking on the Mooring System tab allows the mooring system to be specified.
QUE$TOR Offshore
191
Mooring Type
(SPA). Spars are not recommended for the water depths shallower than 300m
where chain only mooring lines are most suitable.
Chain and wire mooring lines follow a semi-taut catenary profile and are anchored
to the seabed using SPAs by default. DEAs can be selected but they are not
recommended for use with spars. Chain and wire mooring lines are assumed to
be composed of three sections:
- Top Section: 80m of chain which connects the spar and the wire
- Middle Section: this section is the main wire length. It is attached to the
into a spar. The proportion of wire varies as a function of water depth,
- Bottom Section: a length of chain that connects to the wire some
used as an additional weight to provide restoring force to the spar and
QUE$TOR Help
192
- Top Section: similar to chain and wire mooring, again it is highly
undesirable for the rope to be exposed to air.
- Middle Section: the main length of rope. The rope is attached in a taut
the elasticity of the rope pulls the spar back into position should it move.
The proportion of rope varies as a function of water depth, increasing as
the water depth increases.
Bottom Section: a length of chain that connects to the rope some
Anchor Type
Suction piled anchors are selected by default for spars.
chosen.
- Wave height: QUE$TOR mooring lines are calibrated assuming the highest
individual wave with a 50 year return period. QUE$TOR uses the specified
value unchanged. The significant wave height (50 year return period) is
often known and return values can be estimated for design purposes as
follows:
- 50 year return wave height = 1.86 x significant wave height
- 100 year return wave height = 1.95 x significant wave height.
Given a 100 year return value, the corresponding 50 year Wave Height for use
in QUE$TOR can be estimated by factoring by 1.86/1.95 = 0.95.
- Wind speed: The wind speed is the value measured at a reference height
of 10m above stillwater and for a 50 year return period. QUE$TOR
mooring lines are estimated assuming a design speed appropriate to a 5
second gust. Frequently, mean wind speeds averaged over 1 hour or 1
minute are known. The corresponding 5 second value (m/s) can be
estimated using a Wind Speed Lookup. The 50 year return wind speed can
be estimated from the 100 year return period as: 50 year speed = 100
year speed/1.05
- Tidal current: The tidal current is a surface value. The algorithm
estimates a value for the storm surge current (surface value) as 3% of the
wind speed. The tidal current rarely exceeds 0.3 m/s along any open
coastline (Ref API RP 2A) but local shoreline or seabed features can
increase values to 1.0 m/s or more. In more restricted waters (e.g. North
Sea) values between 0.2 and 0.8 m/s are typical.
Soil Condition
QUE$TOR Offshore
193
average conditions.
Mooring Chain Size
on spar buoy selected. If chain and wire mooring lines are used then the wire
size is assumed to be the same as the chain size. If chain and rope mooring lines
are used then the Rope Size is selected according to chain size.
Number of Lines
By default 12 mooring lines are included for all types of spar buoy. If this is
overwritten the mooring lines are resized to provide the required load bearing
capacity, although you should note that the chain size will never exceed 6.5
inches. If the mooring chain size is altered, the number of mooring lines is
recalculated to maintain a constant load bearing capacity.
.
Materials Costs
The spar buoy materials cost estimate is shown below.
QUE$TOR Help
194
Hull Structure
The hull is sized based on the well bay area and the buoyancy required to support
the operating topsides and mooring lines weight. The outer diameter of the hull
is determined by first calculating the diameter required to provide the well bay
area, which is calculated based on the number of risers. The diameter is then
increased until there is sufficient buoyancy to support the topsides and mooring
lines. Each spar design has a default buoyant length of hull as described below.
The amount of structural steel in the hull is proportional to the outer diameter.
Single-hull requirements are assumed to apply; if a double hull is required, the
hull steel should be increased accordingly. Three types of spar are available:
The caisson spar is the classic spar design and has now been used for many
deepwater developments, in particular in the Gulf of Mexico. It consists of a
single cylindrical hull with helical strakes to suppress vortex-induced vibration.
The upper steel buoyancy tanks in the QUE$TOR caisson spar extend to a depth
of 87 m (285 feet).
The truss spar is a design which is becoming increasingly favoured as a lighter
and cheaper alternative to caisson spars. The top section of the hull is a
cylindrical steel structure similar to the caisson design, which extends to a depth
of 61 m (200 feet) in the default QUE$TOR design. It provides most of buoyancy
for the spar and contains variable-ballast tanks. Helical strakes attached to the
hull wall suppress vortex-induced vibration. The middle truss section of the hull
consists of an X-braced space frame similar to conventional jackets and has 3
horizontal plates to dampen the heave response. The lower keel section provides
buoyancy at float-off and in tow. This section is flooded to upend the hull and
filled with ballast after upending.
The cell spar design is a new alternative to caisson and truss spar designs that
offers a simplified design which is easier to fabricate. A major advantage of the
cell design is that many regional yards are capable of building cell spars and their
fabrication is not limited to Finland (as is the case with classic spar designs). The
upper hard tank section of the hull consists of seven cylindrical tubes that extend
to a depth of 61 m (200 feet) in the default QUE$TOR design and provide the
buoyancy for the spar. They also contain variable-ballast tanks and have helical
strakes to suppress vortex-induced vibration. The legs, which form middle
section of the hull, are an extension of three of the seven cylindrical tubes.
QUE$TOR Offshore
195
Horizontal heave plates dampen the heave response in a similar fashion to the
Truss design. The lower section of the hull, the keel is permanently ballasted.
Hull Outfitting and Marine Systems
Major components for hull outfitting and marine systems are sized in proportion
to the hull structural steel weight. The hull component does not include riser
tensioning equipment, since buoyancy cans are used to tension the risers and
they are considered part of the riser system.
Mooring Chains
This is the total amount of chain required by the mooring system. See Mooring
system for more details on this.
Mooring Wire/Polyester Rope
This is the total amount of wire/rope required by the mooring system. See
Mooring system for more details on this.
When a combination of chain and wire or chain and rope has been used a single
section of wire or rope connects the upper length of chain with the section of
chain on the seabed for each mooring line. A mooring termination fitting is
provided at each end of the wire/rope.
Anchors
choice made in the Inputs. The anchor weight is dependent on the type of anchor
the seabed.
Riser Pipe (conductors)
The risers are supported by buoyancy cans that surround the risers at their top
and are located in guides within the hull. Risers can either be single-wall or dual-
wall designs, with the weights associated with the dual-wall design considered to
be a factor of 2.5 larger than the single-wall design.
Riser Connectors and Buoyancy Cans
The weights of the riser pipe, connectors, and buoyancy cans are proportional to
water depth and the number of risers.
Riser Components
The weights of other production riser components such as the keel joint, the
stress joint, and the bottom connector are proportional only to the number of
risers.
Fabrication Costs
QUE$TOR Help
196
Hull Structure
Based on current practice, we have assumed that fabrication of the hull takes
place in Finland for caisson and truss spars. For cell spars fabrication is assumed
to take place in a regional yard. Cell spars have a lower fabrication cost due to
their simpler design.
Hull Outfitting and Marine Systems
Fabrication includes hull outfitting (e.g. ballast piping, bilge pumps and piping,
ladders and anodes) and adding marine systems (e.g. ballast control) into the
hull.
Riser Pipe (conductors)
Riser pipe fabrication involves the welding of connectors to the ends of the pipe to
form riser joints.
Hull Joining
For caisson and truss spars, hull joining costs cover the floating operation of
welding a two-piece hull together at a location near the installation site.
Fabrication of cell spars is assumed to be achieved in one operation at the
regional yard used for hull fabrication and so hull joining defaults to zero for cell
spars.
Installation Costs
For caisson and truss spars, installation includes transporting the spar in two
pieces from the fabrication yard to a joining facility near the installation site,
transporting the full spar from the joining site to the installation site, installing
the anchor piles and mooring lines and upending/installing the spar at the site.
Installation for cell spars differs in that the spar is assumed to be completely
fabricated at a regional yard and does not need joining at a separate facility. The
spar buoy installation cost estimate is shown below.
QUE$TOR Offshore
197
Hull Transport to Joining Site
The transportation cost is based on fixed and variable components. The fixed
component is assumed to be 7 days for mob/demob and the variable component
is estimated from the transport distance from the fabrication yard (Finland by
default) to the joining site at an assumed vessel speed. If the hull diameter is
greater than 130ft (40m), the two spar sections are assumed to be transported in
two trips using the same vessel, therefore the transport cost is simply doubled. If
a second vessel is used, then you should adjust the costs to reflect any increase
in mob/demob. A day rate for the vessel is applied to the estimated number of
days to obtain this part of the transport costs. For cell spars it is assumed that all
fabrication is completed in a regional yard and so distance to joining site defaults
to zero.
Hull Transport to Installation Site
The cost of the single trip from the joining site, or fabrication site for cell spars, to
the installation site. A fixed component of 7 days is again assumed but the vessel
speed varies with the location.
Hull Installation Duration
The duration of the hull installation at the site is dependent on the number of
mooring lines. The fixed cost component is covered by an effective duration of 3
days for mob/demob and 3 days for upending. The variable component of cost is
proportional to the number of mooring lines. The installation spread rate is
applied to the duration of installation at the site to determine the cost for the
operation.
Anchor and Mooring Installation
The duration of operations for installing the anchor piles and mooring lines is
dependent on the number of mooring lines. Fixed mob/demob costs are covered
by an effective duration of 4 days. Variable costs are based on the actual number
of days required for the installation which is linearly proportional to the number of
mooring lines and also dependent on the water depth.
General Costs
QUE$TOR Help
198
Design
This cost includes project specification, special studies, detail design, site surveys,
follow-on engineering, purchasing, expediting and inspection services, project
control, QA, and documentation during the detailed design phase. It also
includes wages, salaries, and other benefits paid to personnel, payroll burdens,
insurance, general overheads (office facilities, utility administration), project
expenses and administration.
It includes vendor drawings and documentation, delivery of items to the
construction yard, vendors installation and commissioning services,
The total engineering costs are a percentage of the total project cost that relates
to the practices of the operator and the practices associated with the regions of
the world in which the spar is to be built and installed.
Project Management
The project management costs include all the man-hours required by the
operators personnel and any project management team to manage, monitor, and
control all phases of the spar construction and includes project engineering,
assurance and third party liaison. This covers the conceptual design through to
first oil.
The total project management costs are a percentage of the total project cost
that relates to the practices of the operator and the practices associated with the
regions of the world in which the spar is to be built and installed.
Certification
A certification cost is added as a percentage of the total project cost. It includes
all certification costs of the design, equipment, materials, and construction of the
spar by a recognised approval authority (e.g., Lloyds, ABS or DNV) and costs for
obtaining permits from government authorities (MMS, HSE, etc). Certification is
only included by default for European and North American countries where it is
certification.
QUE$TOR Offshore
199
Insurance
A percentage of the total spar buoy cost to cover insurance during all phases of
the project up to first oil, including construction, transport, installation HUC, etc.
Contingency
bring the component cost estimate to a P50 level. Contingency reflects cost
increases that have an unknown source but that are known to occur based on
historical project cost data. The contingency percentage is related to the
maturity of the technology, the experience of the operator with the technology,
the maturity of the regions where the project is being built and installed, and the
experience of the operator in those regions. For a fuller explanation see
Tanker
About Tankers
The tanker component should be used to model FPSOs. It is one of five types of
floating production substructure available in QUE$TOR. Other floaters available
include twin hull semi-submersibles, TLPs (Tension Leg Platforms), spar buoys
and barges. The cost of purchasing a suitable oil tanker and converting it for
permanent production can be estimated as can the cost of a new-build ship shape
vessel or a new-build custom designed barge shape vessel. The tanker
component includes costs for the vessel purchase, mooring system, quarters (for
marine crew), vessel upgrades, installation and project management.
Tanker based production systems use either single point turret or spread mooring
systems depending on the number of risers and the field location. Product
storage is also included.
User Interface
On entering the tanker component the input panel is shown in the bottom left of
of every cost item included in the component. The tanker inputs are used to
QUE$TOR Help
200
Primary Inputs
The Tanker Primary Inputs are shown below.
Tanker Type
Costs for a new-build ship shape vessel or a new-build custom designed barge
shape vessel include the vessel itself along with all conventional tanker systems
apart from propulsion. They exclude production facilities. The costs for the ship
are based on the vessel size and mooring type chosen. The size of the vessel is
determined by the storage capacity required, as additional loads are not a major
influence.
The costs for the vessel may vary significantly, depending on construction
location and prevailing market conditions.
QUE$TOR Offshore
201
Costs for a conversion include the purchase of an existing crude carrying tanker,
and upgrading to a condition ready to receive production facilities. The cost for
the purchase of the vessel is based on a 5 to 10 year old ship (depending on the
region selected) in average condition. The cost will fluctuate depending on the
economic climate, vessel condition and original country of registry. It is assumed
that no major strip-out operations are required. The costs are based on vessels
of typical sizes.
The cost of modification to FPSO service is added for conversions and new-build
ship shape tankers. This includes vessel strengthening, addition of a turret
mooring systems and an elevated deck. For new-build custom designed barges
no modification work is required.
Tanker Size
For tankers the required size is based on the Storage Capacity required and
presented as vessel deadweight tonne (dwt) ranges.
Water Depth
location of the tanker. This is used to calculate mooring costs.
Production Rate
The oil production capacity of the associated topsides facilities. This is used in
conjunction with the Days of storage to select the Tanker size. It is also used to
calculate the number and size of flow paths through the fluid swivels.
Water Injection Rate
The associated topsides design capacity rate, used to calculate the number and
size of flow paths through the fluid swivels.
Gas Export/Injection
The associated topsides design capacity rates, used to calculate the number and
size of flow paths through the fluid swivels.
Days of Storage
Allows specification of the storage capacity required. The tanker size will be
updated if the days of storage are changed.
Number of Risers
Allows you to specify the number of flexible risers. This is automatically picked
up from any associated topsides component with an allowance for product
export. It affects the turret weight or riser porch cost.
General Upgrade
Includes all materials for the upgrade of existing quarters, control rooms,
mechanical handling and safety systems. This is only applicable to a converted
tanker.
Marine Upgrade
QUE$TOR Help
202
The weight of materials required to upgrade the marine facilities and the existing
crude offloading facilities. It includes ballasting, tank washing, inert gas systems,
water treatment and export pumps. The export metering system is included with
the topsides facility. This is not required for a new-build custom designed vessel.
Tanker Strengthening
The weight of materials required to strengthen an existing or new-build hull to
accommodate the turret and in regions where ice flows are common additional
steel to ice strengthen the hull. This is not required for a new-build custom
designed vessel.
Length of Sea Trials
The number of days required for sea trials.
Mooring Option
The four Single Point Mooring Options are as follows:
- Internal Turret: A turret is mounted in the bow allowing the tanker to
weathervane. The fluid swivels are mounted above the turret and the
chain table at the base of the turret. A maximum of 50 flexible risers are
handled by increasing the diameter of the turret and number or size of
fluid swivels. The mooring system is designed to withstand the 100 year
storm
- External Turret: The fluid swivels and chain table are mounted on a large
yoke connected to the bow or stern of the tanker. A maximum of 50
flexible risers can be handled by this type of turret. The mooring system
is designed to withstand the 100 year storm
- Riser Turret: The riser turret is similar to the external turret in that the
fluid swivels are mounted on a yoke connected to the bow or stern of the
tanker. In this case the flowlines are disconnectable and in severe storm
or typhoon conditions the tanker can sail away from the riser turret. The
chain table is located subsea at the base of the riser turret which has
enough buoyancy to float when disconnected from the tanker. A
maximum of 50 flexible risers can be handled and are manifolded within
the riser turret
- Buoyant Turret: This is similar to the internal turret except that the chain
table is mounted on a small buoy. This buoy is disconnectable from the
turret in severe storm and typhoon conditions and sinks to a
predetermined level below seawater. The tanker can then winch the buoy
back into place and reconnect the risers once calmer weather returns. A
maximum of 20 flexible risers can be handled by this type of turret.
In addition to single point moored systems it is possible to select a spread
mooring for a tanker. Spread moorings are only suitable in regions where
relatively benign environmental conditions with currents from one direction are
encountered and the risers do not require to be disconnected; namely in West
Africa.
In the case of spread moorings all risers are attached to a riser porch or riser
hang-off platform on one side of the vessel with a number of guides per riser.
This arrangement prevents the vessel from weathervaning. There are no
QUE$TOR Offshore
203
practical constraints on the number of risers which can be accommodated other
than the vessel length.
Added Production Facilities Weight
The topsides operating weight, this is used to calculate the weight of the elevated
deck required.
Elevated Deck
Includes the provision of an elevated deck for the additional production facilities.
Gas Lift
If the production wells are gas lifted an additional path is included in the single
point mooring system swivels.
Mooring System
Mooring Type
QUE$TOR Help
204
- Bottom Section: a length of chain that connects to the rope some
Anchor Type
QUE$TOR Offshore
205
chosen.
individual wave with a 50 year return period.QUE$TOR uses the specified
follows:
year speed/1.05
Soil Condition
average conditions.
Mooring Chain Size
on the size of the tanker selected. If chain and wire mooring lines are used then
the wire size is assumed to be the same as the chain size. If chain and rope
mooring lines are used then the Rope Size is selected according to chain size.
QUE$TOR Help
206
Number of Lines
The number of lines is calculated based on the size of the tanker and on the
mooring option selected. If this is overwritten the mooring lines are resized to
provide the required load bearing capacity, although you should note that the
chain size will never exceed 6.5 inches. In a similar fashion, which maintains a
constant load bearing capacity, the number of mooring lines is recalculated if the
mooring chain size is changed from the calculated value.
Equipment Costs
The tanker equipment cost estimate includes for the tanker purchase, the swivels
and disconnects and the anchors.
Vessel Purchase
The cost identified here is a lump sum cost for the purchase of the vessel. It is
either a new-build cost or the cost of an existing vessel suitable for conversion.
- New-Builds: It is assumed that the cost covers the construction and
certification of the vessel to a condition ready to accept skid mounted
topsides facilities, (including additional utilities for process support). The
cost includes for marine/ballast systems, deck primary steelworks, crew
quarters, control rooms, lifeboats, utility systems and base power
generation normally associated with a tanker. A propulsion system is not
included.
- Conversions: The cost for an existing tanker is a lump sum cost for an
existing crude carrying tanker. It is assumed to be 5 to 10 years old
(depending on the region selected), double hulled, and of average
condition. It is assumed to include utility systems to support normal
tanker operations, power generation, crude shipping pumps, crew quarters
and a propulsion system. The cost of existing vessels will fluctuate
depending on economic climate, vessel condition and country of origin.
Swivels/Disconnect
The number of fluid swivels for production, water or gas injection and gas lift is
based on flowrates possible through 12 and 6 sizes. Mechanical disconnect
QUE$TOR Offshore
207
systems for each flow path through the swivels are included for riser turret and
buoyant turret systems. The fluid swivels are 5000 psi (345 bar) rated.
The cost includes for mooring winches mounted in the turret, during the
construction phase in the yard. The turret cost allows for installation in the hull,
including swivels, transfer piping and turret handling systems.
It also includes the vendors cost to cover fabrication of the equipment, any
procurement of subcomponents, any subvendors, submission to the certifying
authority and testing at his works.
Anchors
choice made in the inputs. The anchor weight is dependent on the type of anchor
the seabed. The cost of new anchors is included by default for both conversions
and new-builds, any existing anchors are assumed to be scrapped.
Materials Costs
The materials include those required for conversion upgrades and the materials
costs involved in the turret and mooring systems.
The materials required to strengthen an existing or new-build hull to
accommodate the turret and in regions where ice flows are common additional
steel to ice strengthen the hull.
Marine/Offloading
QUE$TOR Help
208
The materials required to upgrade the marine facilities and the existing crude
offloading facilities. It includes ballasting, tank washing, inert gas systems, water
treatment and export pumps. The export metering system is included with the
topsides facility.
General Upgrade
Includes all materials for the upgrade of quarters, control rooms, mechanical
handling and safety systems. This is only applicable to a converted tanker.
Mooring Chain
The chain for all lines required to moor the tanker. It is dependent on the water
depth, vessel size and type of mooring. See Mooring system for more details.
The cost of new mooring lines is included by default for both conversions and
new-builds.
The total quantity of wire or rope required. You can specify whether wire or rope
is used in the mooring system inputs and should see Mooring system for more
details.
The number of terminations connecting sections of chain to wire/rope. When a
combination of chain and wire/rope has been used a single section of wire/rope
connects the upper length of chain with the section of chain on the seabed for
each mooring line. A mooring termination fitting is provided at each end of the
wire/rope.
Frame/Mooring Arm
A frame for internal turret and buoyant turret mooring or a mooring arm (yoke)
for external turret and riser turret mooring.
The cost includes materials, the vendor's cost for fabrication of the equipment,
procurement of subcomponents, any subvendor's submission to the certifying
Turret/Riser
An internal turret or external riser turret connecting the fluid swivels to the chain
table. This is not required for external turret mooring where the chain table is
connected directly to the fluid swivels. This includes the cost of integrated chain
tables for internal turret and riser turret mooring.
Chain table/Buoy
A discrete chain table is required for external turret mooring and buoyant turret
mooring. For buoyant turret mooring the chain table is mounted on a small
buoy. For internal turret or riser turret mooring the chain table is integrated into
the turret and its cost is included under turret/riser.
QUE$TOR Offshore
209
Riser Porch
Riser porches are used for spread moored tankers. This includes the materials for
the riser porch/riser hang off platform and the riser guides between each level of
the porch. Costs are calculated on a per riser basis.
Elevated Deck
The quantity of steel to provide an elevated deck 3 m above the main deck of the
tanker. All process equipment will be installed on this deck to remove the
hazardous area from the main deck.
Freight
A percentage added to the total cost of materials to cover the cost of packaging
and transportation from the stockist/vendor to the construction yard.
Fabrication Costs
Strengthening an existing or new-build hull to accommodate the turret and in
regions where ice flows are common additional steel to ice strengthen the hull.
Marine/Offloading
QUE$TOR Help
210
Upgrading the marine facilities and the existing crude offloading facilities.
Includes ballasting, tank washing, inert gas systems, water treatment and export
pumps.
General Upgrade
Upgrading quarters, control rooms, mechanical handling and safety systems.
This is only applicable to a converted tanker.
Turret
Adding a turret, riser turret, lifting frame or yoke to a new or existing tanker
depending on the single point mooring system chosen.
Riser porch
Adding riser porch/riser hang off platforms and the riser guides between each
level of the porch. Costs are calculated on a per riser basis.
Elevated deck
Adding an elevated deck 3m above the main deck of the tanker. All process
equipment will be installed on this deck to remove the hazardous area from the
main deck.
Installation Costs
Tanker installation includes the costs of towing the tanker to the field and
installing it.
Mob / Demob and Tow out
This incorporates an allowance for the cost of all vessels required to transport the
tanker from the construction yard to the offshore location. The duration is
estimated based on the time to mobilise and demobilise the transport spread and
a regionally dependent distance from the construction yard to the offshore
location. The unit cost is a composite cost incorporating vessel hire, labour, fuel,
consumables, downtime and onshore support.
Installation
This includes an allowance for the cost of all vessels required to install the
anchors, deploy the mooring, attach the mooring lines to the vessel and prove
the mooring system is secure. The duration is dependent on the type of anchor
selected and the water depth.
QUE$TOR Offshore
211
Hook-up and Commissioning Costs
Sea Trial and Marine Commissioning
Includes duration for sea trials and final commissioning of the marine systems on
the vessel. The unit cost is a composite cost incorporating labour, fuel,
General Costs
contingency.
Design
The man-hours required to carry out the design of a custom built barge type
tanker or the modifications for a ship shape vessel. The duration includes project
specification, special studies, detail design, site surveys, follow on engineering,
purchasing, expediting and inspection services, project control, QA and
documentation during the detailed design phase. It also includes wages, salaries
and other benefits paid to personnel, payroll burdens, insurance, general
overheads (office facilities, utility administration), project expenses and
QUE$TOR Help
212
The total hours are related to the tanker size selected and whether it is a new-
build or conversion.
Project Management
management team to manage, monitor and control all phases of the tanker and
includes project engineering, project control and planning, design and
the conceptual design through to first oil.
Certification
This is a percentage of the total tanker costs. It includes all certification costs for
the appraisal of the design, equipment, materials and construction of the tanker
by a recognised certifying authority (e.g. Lloyd's, ABS or DNV). Certification is
only included by default for European and North American countries where it is
certification.
Insurance
Contingency
A contingency is added as a percentage of the total equipment, material,
fabrication, installation, HUC, design, project management, insurance and
certification costs to bring the component cost estimate to a P50 level. For a
fuller explanation see Contingency Definitions.
Tension Leg Platform
About Tension Leg Platforms
The TLP (Tension Leg Platform) component is one of five types of floating
production substructure available in QUE$TOR. Other floaters available include
monohull shipshape (tanker) vessels, twin hull semi-submersibles, spar buoys
and barges.
Two types of TLP are available in QUE$TOR: a conventional TLP and a mini TLP.
The conventional TLP hull is assumed to have four columns arranged in a square
with a ring pontoon at the base of the columns. The topsides, including the deck,
sits on the columns and a group of tethers attached to each column terminates at
the seabed in a piled foundation. Tensioned steel risers are assumed.
The mini TLP hull is assumed to have a single central column supporting the
topsides. Three radial pontoons project out from the bottom of the column and
these are tapered with height decreasing towards the tip. The tendons are
QUE$TOR Offshore
213
attached to the hull at the tip of each pontoon and terminate at the seabed in a
piled foundation. Tensioned steel risers are assumed to run through the
monopool of the central column.
The TLP component includes the costs of the steel structure, foundations, hull,
tendons and moorings.
User Interface
On entering the TLP component the input panel is shown in the bottom left of the
level data. Some inputs may also be dependent upon high level inputs within the
same component, for example the default wave height is dependent on the
environmental conditions selected. The cost estimate displays a breakdown of
every cost item included in the component. The TLP inputs are used to calculate
the quantities shown on the cost estimate; these are then multiplied by unit rates
determined by the procurement strategy to give the total costs.
Inputs
The TLP inputs are shown below.
QUE$TOR Help
214
TLP Type
You can pick either a conventional TLP or a mini TLP.
The conventional TLP hull is assumed to have four columns arranged in a square
with a ring pontoon at the base of the columns. The topsides, including the deck,
sits on the columns and a group of tethers attached to each column terminates at
the seabed in a piled foundation. Tensioned steel risers are assumed.
The mini TLP hull is assumed to have a single central column supporting the
topsides. Three pontoons project out from the bottom of the column and these
are tapered with height decreasing towards the tip. The tendons are attached to
the hull at the tip of each pontoon and terminate at the seabed in a piled
foundation. Tensioned steel risers are assumed to run through the monopool of
the central column.
This value is the operating weight of the associated topsides; it includes facilities
and the deck steel but does not make any allowance for the weight of riser deck
equipment (tensioners, etc).
A value you enter manually MUST be interpreted in this way. Within the
algorithm, and only for use within the algorithm, the topsides weight is adjusted
to include an additional weight proportional to the number of risers ultimately to
be installed.
Water Depth
This defaults to the field level water depth. The TLP sizing algorithms are based
on TLPs installed in water depths ranging from 130 1500m. QUE$TOR will
estimate the cost of TLPs in other water depths but misleading weights may
result.
QUE$TOR Offshore
215
Number of Wells
The total number of platform wells (including pre-drilled wells) is passed from the
associated topsides. Allowance for tensioned risers is made within the TLP cost
estimation and in calculating the hull buoyancy requirements.
Number of Pre-installed Risers
This defines the number of risers installed during the TLP installation operations,
i.e. pre-drilled wells and product export risers. These and the tendons all
contribute to the TLP mooring forces during the sizing and weight estimation.
The other risers, yet to be installed, influence the algorithm through their
contribution to the net vertical load to be supported by the TLP buoyancy.
Typical environmental conditions are shown for each region considered by
QUE$TOR. These default to the severe conditions that are used to calibrate the
weight estimating algorithms. Each value may be modified individually but
should only be changed with caution. The algorithms within QUE$TOR are
intended only to provide environmental sensitivities close to the calibration
conditions and not to wide ranges of these parameters.
Note: The environmental input data is nominally that for the 50-year storm
condition. However, the TLP algorithm upgrades the wave height and wind speed
to the 100-year storm condition prior to use.
- Wave height: This is measured from crest to trough. It influences the
TLP freeboard and TLP weight. TLP dynamic loads are proportional to the
wave height and so affect the tether sectional area and the foundation
loads. The associated design wave period is obtained within the algorithm
from the wave height assuming a wave slope of 1:11. Wave velocities are
calculated from the Airy wave theory.
- Tide: The tide is the height range between high and low water at the TLP
location, including the storm surge. This affects the TLP freeboard.
- Wind speed: This is the wind speed associated with the mean 5 minute
gust measured at a reference height of 10 m (33 feet) above sea level.
This is used to estimate the TLP offset and wind overturning moment to be
handled by the tendons.
- Tidal current: This is the surface current at the TLP location with a
linearly varying profile to zero at a depth of 500 m (1640 feet). Only the
current in the depth range covering the submerged section of the TLP hull
is used by the algorithm.
Soil Conditions
The soil condition is used to calculate the foundation piling requirements. Three
- Good: The soil has high load bearing capacity with reduced piling
requirements.
- Average: The soil has average load bearing capacity.
- Poor: The soil has low load bearing capacity and requires additional piling.
QUE$TOR Help
216
the selection the pile weight is factored up or down from the weight calculated for
average soil conditions.
Materials Costs
The TLP materials cost estimate is shown below.
Hull
The TLP hull weight has been found to be closely related to the total hull volume
which is dependent upon the freeboard and the buoyancy required to support the
topsides weight, hull steel weight, tendon pretension, riser tension and ballast.
Foundations
Many types of foundations have been used to handle the TLP tendon loads. The
algorithm assumes that piled foundation templates are located at each corner.
Pile sizes required to handle the total vertical static and dynamic tendon load are
estimated and the associated pile weight is factored in a calibration against
existing TLPs. The weight includes for the templates, piles and cathodic
protection.
Tendons
The algorithm works mainly with the corner tendon group cross-sectional area
required to ensure that the TLP heave natural period is less than 4 sec and that
the static and dynamic loads are handled while ensuring that the allowable
stresses are not exceeded. An iterative calculation is performed on the individual
tendon sectional dimensions in which the diameter/wall thickness ratio is modified
progressively while ensuring that the group sectional area remains unchanged,
that hydrostatic collapse is avoided and that the tendon diameter does not exceed
1 m (3.3 feet). This calculation provides the number of tendons (3 or 4 per
column/pontoon) required by the TLP. While this number does not affect the
total tether weight, it does affect the installation costs.
The tendon weight estimated by the algorithm is based on a uniform section
along the entire length and is factored to include an allowance for the increased
QUE$TOR Offshore
217
weight of the connectors and to calibrate against the tendon weights of existing
TLPs. This net weight is used for costing but excludes the costs of the tensioning
equipment.
Tendon Connectors
A fabricated cost is included for the flexible connectors between the tendons and
foundations. These allow for lateral movement on the TLP. The cost is
dependent on the number of tendons.
Production Risers
Risers are assumed to be 9.625 OD x 8.65 ID (47 lb/foot) except for a nominal
90 m (300 feet) section per riser where extra heavy wall pipe is required in the
very high stress areas at the top and bottom. The riser length shown is the total
for all wells associated with the TLP and includes an allowance for the section of
riser between still water and the hull deck plus some restricted lateral movement
of the hull. The cost includes an allowance for end connections between each 18
m (60 feet) long section of riser pipe, coating and anodes.
Tensioning Equipment
A fabricated cost is included for tensioning equipment, tensioner joint and load
ring, tempered stress joint and hydraulic tie-back system for each production
riser.
Buoyancy
At water depths greater than a critical depth at which the riser mean stress
exceeds a pre-set value, supplementary buoyancy is assumed to be required.
This is provided by steel cans.
Freight
A percentage is added to the total cost of materials to cover the cost of packaging
and transportation from the stockist/vendor to the construction yard. The default
is dependent on where the equipment is procured (in region or out of region).
Fabrication Costs
QUE$TOR Help
218
Based on current practice, we have assumed that construction of the hull takes
place in European or the Gulf of Mexico yards but other outfitting activities are
carried out in the selected region. Fabrication includes hull outfitting and marine
systems into the hull. Tendon fabrication involves welding and heat treating
sections of pipe together to form the tendons. Production riser fabrication
involves the welding of connectors to the ends of the pipe to form riser joints.
Installation Costs
The installation of a TLP is broken down into a number of activities. The dayrate
for each activity is a composite cost incorporating vessel hire, labour, fuel,
Hull Transport
The hull is transported either by wet tow or dry tow on barges from the
fabrication yard to the deck mating site. The deck mating is included within the
topsides component.
Foundation Install
The steel foundation templates are installed and piled using a heavy lift crane
vessel. Each template takes one day to install plus five days to pile. A further
allowance is included for weather downtime and mobilisation/demobilisation.
TLP Transportation
Includes the tow out of the TLP, hull and topsides, from the mating site to the
final field location.
Tendon Install
Tendons are made up at the installation from short lengths using a crane vessel.
Once the tendon has been completed it is hung from porches on the TLP column.
Each tendon takes one day to complete with weather downtime factors based on
the water depth.
TLP connect/Tension
QUE$TOR Offshore
219
Includes the final connection of tendons to the foundations and their tensioning.
General Costs
contingency.
Design
The man-hours required to carry out the design of the TLP. The duration includes
project specification, special studies, detail design, site surveys, follow on
and documentation during the detailed design phase. It also includes wages,
salaries and other benefits paid to personnel, payroll burdens, insurance, general
overheads (office facilities, utility administration), project expenses and
The total hours are related to the size and type of TLP selected.
Project Management
management team to manage, monitor and control all phases of the TLP and
includes project engineering, project control and planning, design and
the conceptual design through to first oil.
Certification
A percentage of the total TLP cost to cover all certification costs for the approval
of the design, materials and construction of the TLP by a recognised certifying
authority (e.g. Lloyds, ABS or DNV). Certification is only included by default for
QUE$TOR Help
220
Insurance
Contingency
Offshore Loading
Description
The offshore loading component estimates the cost of single point mooring
systems for oil export via shuttle tanker. There are three offshore loading
systems available in QUE$TOR: Catenary Anchor Leg Mooring (CALM) buoys,
Single Articulated Leg Moorings (SALMs) and Floating Loading Platforms (FLP). A
cost estimate for a permanently moored storage tanker is included if required.
Short flexible pipelines are also included if the offshore loading component is
connected to a floating production platform 2 km or less away.
User Interface
On entering the Offshore Loading component the input panel is shown in the
QUE$TOR will choose appropriate values for every parameter based on linked
components and field level data. Some inputs may also be dependent upon high
level inputs within the same component, for example the default wave height is
dependent on the environmental conditions selected. The cost estimate displays
a breakdown of every cost item included in the component. The Offshore Loading
inputs are used to calculate the quantities shown on the cost estimate; these are
then multiplied by unit rates determined by the procurement strategy to give the
total costs.
QUE$TOR Offshore
221
Primary Inputs
The offshore loading primary inputs are shown below.
Loading type
- CALM: A catenary anchor leg mooring consisting of a buoy supporting
fluid swivels anchored using a spread pattern of four or six chains.
Connection to the tanker is via floating hose if only shuttle tankers are
used and via rigid yoke if a permanent storage tanker is used.
- SALM: A single articulated leg mooring based on the EMH articulated
column design. The mooring system consists of a piled or gravity base, a
solid or lattice construction articulated tower, rigid riser, rotating head and
extended boom to support the loading hose. Temporary quarters and
helideck are included.
- FLP: A floating loading platform. This is similar in principle to the CALM
buoy but is on a larger scale and includes temporary quarters and
helideck.
FLPs are not recommended in water depths less than 50m. In shallow water,
(<25m), it is not possible to install a SALM or FLP and therefore CALM is the only
recommended option. SALMs are not recommended for water deeper than 250m.
Water Depth
The water depth at the offshore loading buoy. This is used to cost the buoys
mooring system and receiving riser.
Export Rate
The oil/condensate export rate from the production facility to the offshore loading
facility. This value is used to size the storage requirements and the flowlines,
risers etc and so should be the maximum daily field production if flowing to a
storage tanker or the maximum offloading rate if flowing directly to a shuttle
tanker. The default is the oil processing capacity from the associated topsides.
This may be increased if spare capacity for future expansion is required.
Platform Type & Distance to Platform
The platform type refers to the platform that the oil export is coming from.
QUE$TOR assumes that a rigid steel pipeline is used if the platform is fixed or
more than 2 km from the buoy. The cost of the pipeline and risers is then
included in the pipeline component. If the platform is floating and 2 km or less
away from the buoy then QUE$TOR assumes a flexible pipeline is used to connect
them. In this case the cost of the pipeline and risers is included in the offshore
loading component. The length of the flexible pipeline is taken as the distance to
platform.
QUE$TOR Help
222
Flexible Pipeline
When checked the cost of a flexible pipeline is included in the offshore loading
cost estimate along with flexible risers at the platform and at the buoy. When
un-checked the cost of a steel connecting pipeline and steel or flexible risers
should be estimated in the pipeline component.
If you manually include a flexible pipeline you should remove the default steel
pipeline to prevent double-dipping. QUE$TOR does not do this automatically.
Similarly you will need to add a steel pipeline in the pipeline component if you
remove a flexible pipeline included by default. Where flexible pipelines are used,
the offshore loading component does not automatically pick up data from a linked
topsides, this can be overcome by including a pipeline and setting its cost to zero.
Diameter & Number
The Diameter of the flexible pipeline and risers, it is calculated based on the
Export rate. For flexible flowlines and risers The maximum diameter of flexible
flowlines and risers in QUE$TOR is 16. If a larger diameter is required then
multiple lines are included ensuring at least the same flow area as the required
line size.
Riser Length at Buoy
The length of a flexible riser is calculated assuming a lazy S configuration using
the specified water depth. For deepwater locations (>300m) a large U shaped
mid water configuration is used with buoyancy on the flowline portion. The riser
length is then calculated assuming the horizontal section is located 300 m below
sea level. In shallower waters the riser length is always calculated from the
seabed.
Water Depth at Platform
This enables the platform water depth to be specified if it is different from the
water depth at the offshore loading system and is used to calculate the Riser
length at platform.
Riser Length at Platform
This is calculated in the same way as Riser length at buoy but is based on the
Water depth at platform.
Storage Required
Check the storage required box if you wish to include a permanently moored
tanker in the cost estimate. The estimate will include for the purchase, upgrade
and installation of a suitably sized second-hand tanker.
By default storage is required for all buoy types if the substructure the exporting
topsides are located on does not provide storage.
Days Storage
The number of days storage used to size the storage tanker. The storage
duration should be longer than the period between shuttle tanker visits.
Storage Capacity
QUE$TOR Offshore
223
The default capacity is calculated by multiplying the days storage by the oil
production capacity of the associated topsides.
Tanker Size
Four tanker sizes are available in QUE$TOR, the default is selected based on the
Storage Capacity.
When a storage tanker is chosen, shuttle tankers are used to transport oil to
shore, shuttle tankers are tandem moored to the storage tanker using on board
thrusters to maintain position.
Mooring System
QUE$TOR Help
224
- Bottom Section: a length of chain that connects to the rope some
Anchor Type
chosen.
individual wave with a 50 year return period.QUE$TOR uses the specified
follows:
QUE$TOR Offshore
225
year speed/1.05
Sea) values between 0.2 and 0.8m/s are typical.
Soil Condition
average conditions.
Mooring Chain Size
on the size of the tanker selected. If chain and wire mooring lines are used then
the wire size is assumed to be the same as the chain size. If chain and rope
mooring lines are used then the Rope Size is selected according to chain size.
Number of Lines
The number of lines is calculated based on the size of the tanker and on the
mooring option selected. If this is overwritten the mooring lines are resized to
provide the required load bearing capacity, although you should note that the
QUE$TOR Help
226
chain size will never exceed 6.5 inches. In a similar fashion, which maintains a
constant load bearing capacity, the number of mooring lines is recalculated if the
mooring chain size is changed from the calculated value.
Equipment Costs
The equipment cost estimate is shown below.
Loading Buoy
A lump sum cost dependent on the selection of buoy type made on the input
panel and if storage is required. The cost includes the buoy or structure and
product transfer system. SALM and FLP options additionally include the cost of
temporary quarters and helideck. The cost includes for all equipment materials
and fabrication.
Anchors
The cost of anchors is included for CALMs and FLPs.
Storage Tanker
A lump sum cost based on the quantity of storage required to cover the purchase,
conversion and strengthening of a five or ten year old, double hulled tanker
(depending on the region). The cost includes modification to the ballast systems,
clean up, installation of metering and export pumping systems, the addition of a
bow mounted mooring system to enable the tanker to be permanently moored
and additional manifolding to allow import of crude onto the tanker.
Materials Costs
The materials cost estimate is shown below.
QUE$TOR Offshore
227
Mooring Chain
The chain for all lines required to moor the tanker. It is dependent on the water
depth, vessel size and type of mooring. The cost of new mooring lines is included
by default; any existing mooring lines are assumed to be scrapped.
is used in the mooring system inputs.
The number of terminations connecting sections of chain to wire/rope. When a
combination of chain and wire/rope has been used a single section of wire/rope
connects the upper length of chain with the section of chain on the seabed for
each mooring line. A mooring termination fitting is provided at each end of the
wire/rope.
Flexible Riser at Buoy
The cost of the flexible riser(s) to import crude onto the offshore loading system.
The unit cost includes the cost of materials and fabrication of the riser and
delivery from the vendor's site to the port. The riser is assumed to be
constructed from steel-reinforced flexible rubberised pipe. Risers are only
incorporated for the CALMs and FLPs if a flexible pipeline is used, otherwise all
riser costs are estimated in the pipeline component.
Riser System at Buoy
The cost for the flexible riser systems at the buoy. It includes the cost of
materials, fabrication, testing and delivery to port for the riser base, riser support
and connections at the buoy.
Pipeline (flexible)
The cost of a flexible pipeline including materials, fabrication, testing and delivery
to port. It is selected if crude is being exported from a floating production facility
2 km or less away. The cost relates to the distance between production facility
and the offshore loading system.
QUE$TOR Help
228
Riser at Platform
The cost of a flexible riser at the production platform if selected. It includes all
materials, fabrication, testing and delivery to port of the riser. Risers are only
incorporated if a flexible pipeline is used, otherwise all riser costs are estimated
in the pipeline component.
Riser System at Platform
The cost for the flexible riser systems at the production platform. It includes riser
base, riser support arch and connections.
Installation Costs
The installation cost estimate is shown below.
Tug Spread
The cost of tugs to tow the offshore loading system from its fabrication yard to
the offshore location. It includes time for mobilisation/demobilisation, towing and
waiting on weather. The unit rate includes for support services, labour and
consumables.
DSV
The number of days a diving support vessel is required on location to complete
the installation, hook-up, test and commission the pipeline and risers selected in
this component. It also includes a mobilisation/demobilisation time. The diving
support vessel unit cost includes support services, waiting on weather, labour and
consumables.
General Costs
QUE$TOR Offshore
229
Design
Includes the number of man-hours required to carry out the design of the
offshore loading system. The duration includes project specification, special
studies, detail design, site surveys, follow on engineering, purchasing, expediting
and inspection services, project control, QA and documentation during the
detailed design phase. The unit rate includes wages, salaries and other benefits
paid to personnel, payroll burdens, insurance, general overheads (office facilities,
utility services, depreciation of facilities and equipment and administration),
project expenses and administration. It includes vendor drawings and
documentation, delivery of items to the construction yard, vendor's installation
and commissioning services, commissioning spares, insurance up to delivery,
guarantees and import duties.
The total hours are related to the type of mooring selected.
Project Management
Includes all the project management hours required by the operators personnel
and any project management team to manage, monitor and control all phases of
the development. It includes project engineering, project control and planning,
design and construction supervision, quality assurance and third party liaison.
This item covers the period from the conceptual design through to first oil.
Certification
This is a percentage of the total cost. It includes all certification costs for the
approval of the design, equipment, materials and construction of the offshore
loading system by a recognised certifying authority (e.g. Lloyd's, ABS or DNV).
Insurance
QUE$TOR Help
230
Contingency
Offshore Drilling
About Offshore Drilling
The drilling component estimates the drilling costs including rig hire (for jack-up
and semi-submersible rigs), drill crew, well equipment, consumables, materials,
conductors, etc. For a tender assisted platform rig the rig hire includes only for
the hire of the tender assist vessel and its marine crew.
For each well a profile is specified and the total measured depth calculated.
Durations are determined from depth versus duration curves for both the drilling
and completion operations and from drilling learning factor curves. The eighth
well in a drilling operation is assumed to be the technical well with a learning
factor of 1.
There are three possible methods of drilling included in QUE$TOR:
- Platform based rigs (permanent with full facilities, skidded or tender
assisted and TLP/spar mounted).
- Jack-up rigs.
- Semi-submersible rigs.
It is also possible to specify predrilled wells with topsides completions.
Several drilling operations can be specified on a development and the total drilling
operations can be a combination of platform wells, subsea wells and
exploration/appraisal wells. However, if a combination of rig types is required,
then each should be costed as a separate drilling component.
Exploration and appraisal wells should also be costed in their own drilling
component to allow them to be accurately scheduled.
User Interface
On entering the drilling component the input panel is shown in the bottom left of
within the same component, for example the well true vertical depths (TVDs) are
dependent on the reservoir depth. The cost estimate displays a breakdown of
QUE$TOR Offshore
231
every cost item included in the component. The drilling inputs are used to
Inputs
The drilling input panel allows the high level parameters of the drilling campaign
to be specified. To edit the individual well details, click on View/edit drilling
profiles. To edit the time depth curves and learning factors used to calculated
drilling durations, click on View/edit drilling curves.
QUE$TOR Help
232
Rig
The available options are:
- Fixed platform (full): The wells are drilled from a permanently installed
platform rig with full mud handling facilities.
- Fixed platform (with TSV): The wells are drilled from a rig on the
platform, either permanently installed or skidded on, but require the
assistance of a Tender Support Vessel (TSV).
- Fixed platform (jack-up): The wells are drilled from a jack-up rig in
cantilevered mode. The maximum water depth for jack-up operation
varies depending on the region.
- Subsea wells (floater): Subsea wells drilled from a floating drilling rig.
- Subsea wells (jack-up): Subsea wells drilled from a jack-up rig.
- TLP/Spar platform: The wells are drilled from a permanently installed
platform rig with full drilling facilities on either a TLP or a Spar buoy
- Exploration/appraisal (floater): Wells drilled before development
begins from a semi-submersible. These wells are not completed.
- Exploration/appraisal (jack-up): Wells drilled before development
begins from a jack-up. These wells are not completed.
Generation
If the rig type chosen is floater then QUE$TOR allows a choice of semi-
submersible generation. The default selection is based on water depth as follows:
- 2
nd
generation < 450m (< 1500 ft).
- 3
rd
- 4
th
- 5
th
generation > 1500m (> 5000 ft).
Note: If a drill ship is required, a 5
th
generation semi-submersible should
be selected to give the best cost estimate.
Profile
There are four Drilling profiles in QUE$TOR, described below. QUE$TOR assumes
the first well and all exploration/appraisal wells are drilled vertically. All other
wells have a build and hold profile by default. Alternative profiles (build and drop
or horizontal at true vertical depth) can be selected using the dropdown list.
- Build and drop: wells are drilled on a build and drop profile, allowing
multiple wells to be drilled from the same wellpad. This profile is never
selected as a default.
- Build and hold: wells are drilled on a build and hold profile, allowing
multiple wells to be drilled from the same wellpad. This profile is selected
as default when the number of production, water injection or gas injection
wells is greater than one.
- Horizontal at true vertical depth: wells are drilled on horizontally once
the well depth is reached, allowing multiple wells to be drilled from the
same wellpad. This profile is never selected as a default.
QUE$TOR Offshore
233
- Vertical: wells are drilled vertically from individual wellpads. The first
well and all exploration/appraisal wells are drilled assumed to always be
vertically drilled.
Well Details
The well details frame allows you to specify the number of production, water
injection and gas injection wells to be included in the drilling component. The
flowrate refers to the total flowrate for each well category and is used to select
the size of tubing, wellheads and Xmas trees required. Flowrates are not
required for exploration / appraisal wells, as it is assumed they are not
completed.
The flowrate is linked to the number of wells and changing the number of wells
will change unlocked flowrates proportionally. If the project has multiple drilling
components, adding wells to one drilling component will reduce the number of
wells in other components if unlocked. See well and flow distribution for more
details.
Drilling Details
Water Depth
Defaults to the field water depth but can be changed as required. Water depth is
referenced to lowest astronomical tide (LAT).
Reservoir Depth
Defaults to the field reservoir depth but can be changed as required. It is
referenced to water depth at LAT not the rig table. If several different reservoir
depths are to be exploited in the same campaign you can do one of the following:
- Click on View/edit drilling profiles and specify the depth of each well
individually.
- Use a different drilling component for each reservoir, remembering to
adjust the mob/demob durations and learning factors to prevent double
dipping.
Reservoir Pressure
Defaults to the field level reservoir pressure but can be changed as required.
Maximum Allowable Stepout
Defaults to the value specified in the field level details but can be changed as
required.
Longest Stepout
The longest stepout is the calculated maximum horizontal displacement from the
drilling centre. This assumes a rectangular reservoir with dimensions as entered
in the field level details and the number of drilling centres as defined by the
concept selector. The default number of drilling centres is calculated so that the
longest stepout does not exceed the maximum well stepout entered in the field
level details.
QUE$TOR Help
234
The first well is assumed to be vertical and the remaining wells are assumed to be
laid out in concentric rings centred on the drill rig. The number of concentric
rings is dependent on the total number of wells per drilling operation. For 2 to 7
wells there is a single ring, for up to 19 wells there are two rings, for up to 37
wells there are three rings, for up to 61 wells there are four rings, etc. The
horizontal stepout of the outer ring is set to the Longest stepout. This takes into
account the radius of the well drainage area per well.
Trip Speed
The regional default drilling speeds are independent of the water depth. When
drilling in deep water, additional time is required to make up extra lengths of 30
foot drillpipe singles to reach the seabed, run and pull the extra length of drillpipe
stands (assuming 90 foot triples) between bit changes and run the extra length of
15 foot sections of casing to the seabed. This additional time is dependent on the
time to make up a joint of drillpipe (assumed to be 3 minutes/joint) and the rate
at which the drillpipe is tripped (300 m/hr by default). Alternative trip rates can
be entered if required.
The time to run and pull the extra length of drillpipe stands is also applied to the
calculated completion time in deepwater situations.
Rate of Build
The angle by which the deviation angle below the well kick-off point can change
in 30 m. This applies to all deviated wells and defines the radius of bends used in
the drilling profiles.
Acid Gas
This identifies whether acid gas is to be taken into consideration in the drilling
cost calculations. If so, QUE$TOR uses higher grade materials for tubing, Xmas
trees, wellheads, completions and downhole ESPs. By default this is selected if
the CO
2
content of the wellstream fluid is above 3 mole %.
Use ESPs
Electric submersible pumps can be selected by clicking on the Use ESPs check
box. This option is only available for production wells if the project main product
is oil. If selected, all production wells are assumed to have downhole pumps.
The number of downhole ESPs can be edited in the equipment cost estimate. The
pump power requirement will be included in the associated topsides electrical
load list. If the wells are subsea, the subsea component will include electrical
cables in the umbilicals to power the ESPs.
Every time Apply is clicked the drilling profiles are recalculated.
Note: Once you have reviewed the Drilling profile window the values in the
Well details frame are shown as locked and read only. In addition the Protect
current profile box at the bottom of the input panel will be checked to preserve
any changes you have made. If you deselect this check box the well count by
type will revert back to the default as defined by the well distribution logic and
you can then overwrite values. Any changes you made to the drilling profiles will
be lost.
QUE$TOR Offshore
235
Drilling Profiles
Clicking on View/edit drilling profiles opens the Drilling profiles window. This
window allows the type, bottom hole location (as defined by the TVD, horizontal
shift and horizontal section length), profile type, completion and drilling duration
of each well to be specified individually.
Changes made in this window result in the Drilling profile is protected check
box in the input panel being ticked and the well count by type being updated.
A well bottom hole location configuration is generated by QUE$TOR for each
drilling component. This assumes that the first well is drilled vertically and
subsequent wells are drilled radially from the centre with increasing horizontal
offsets. Intermediate rings are laid out such that the horizontal shift between
successive rings is the same. The profile of each well and the bottom hole
location can be readily modified.
If there are any gas injection wells these are assumed to have the minimum well
stepout as they are likely to be in the gas cap. The remaining production and
water injection wells are laid out assuming a spot pattern well flood arrangement.
Well Type
The well type of any well can be changed by using the dropdown box. There are
five options here; Production, Water inj., Gas inj., Prod. host, and Prod. Multi.
The first three options are specified by within the well details on the Details tab.
The Prod. host and Prod. multi options allow multilateral wells to be specified.
- Prod. host: Specifies that the well will be used to host multilateral
production wells.
QUE$TOR Help
236
- Prod. multi.: The well is a multilateral production well drilled from the
host. The kick off, horizontal shift, profile type, horizontal section and
maximum deviation are uneditable as they are set by the host well.
In the example shown above, well 4 was specified as the host well, automatically
selecting the next production well, well 5, as a multilateral. When you change a
wells type to host one multilateral is automatically included. The number of
multilaterals added per host well can be adjusted using the dropdown list for
Multilaterals per production host, with four being the maximum.
Note: The multilaterals are designated as the next n number of production
wells after the host well
Well Profile
The Drilling Profile of each well is described as follows:
- TVD: True vertical depth of the well bottom hole location below Lowest
Astronomical Tide (LAT) - substantially the same as sea level. By default
this is the same as the specified reservoir depth for all wells.
- Kick off: the distance below the seabed at which deviated wells kick-off
from the vertical.
- Horizontal shift: the horizontal distance (offset) between the drilling
centre and the bottom hole location excluding any horizontal portion.
- Profile type: a choice of drilling profile to reach the bottom hole location
specified by TVD, horizontal displacement and horizontal length. Four
types of profile are available: Build and hold (BH), Build and drop (BD),
Horizontal at TVD (HVTD) and Vertical. Option selection can be made
using the dropdown lists. In the build and drop option the return to
vertical point is set at 90% (TVD water depth).
Horizontal Section
An additional horizontal length drilled through the reservoir. This can only be
included for the Horizontal at TVD profile.
To modify the drilling profile of any well, type in a new TVD, kick off, horizontal
shift or horizontal section and the measured depth and maximum deviation are
automatically recalculated.
There are combinations of profile parameters that are not compatible. The
diagrams below show those locations which are accessible for each profile type
and those which are not.
Note: Situations where the bottom hole location is not achievable given the
specified well profile parameters typically result in a calculated measured depth
which is larger than expected.
QUE$TOR Offshore
237
Vertical well (bottom hole locations)
Build and hold well (bottom hole locations)
QUE$TOR Help
238
Build and drop well (bottom hole locations)
Horizontal at TVD well (bottom hole locations)
Measured Depth and Deviation
The measured depth and maximum deviation columns are calculated
automatically from the drilling profile specified.
QUE$TOR Offshore
239
For a multilateral well the measured depth is the total length of the multilateral
section measured from the host well.
A total depth summing the measured depth for all wells is displayed but cannot
be edited.
The maximum deviation angle is the angle from the vertical (angle o) you need
to achieve to reach the specified horizontal displacement given the true vertical
depth, kick-off point, profile and rate of build (degrees/30 m) of a well. It is
given for information only and cannot be overwritten.
Drilling/Completion Rig
These are identifiers that specify whether the well is drilled and completed from a
platform drill rig (Plat), semi-submersible (Semi), or jack-up rig (J-U).
QUE$TOR's initial selection is the rig specified in the drilling input panel. To
modify the selection, use the dropdown list.
For all platform completed wells, QUE$TOR includes the cost of conductors in the
drilling component.
To specify predrilled wells, change Plat (for platform rig) in the Drilling rig column
to J-U (Jack-up) or Semi (semi-submersible or drill ship). The combination of
drilling by a mobile rig and completion by a platform rig identifies a well as
predrilled. QUE$TOR automatically assigns the costs to both rig types and
includes the cost of a drilling template. QUE$TOR also includes the cost of a
drilling template if a well is drilled and completed from the same type of mobile
rig.
If you include predrilled wells and platform drilled wells in the same component,
they will be scheduled to be drilled consecutively. If you wish to schedule an
interval between the end of predrilling and the start of platform drilling, you
should use two drilling components. In this situation you can simply delete the
completion days, wellheads etc in the predrilling component and delete the
drilling days in the platform component.
Completion Type
A default completion type of cased hole is assumed for all wells. The completion
type selected affects both the equipment cost and the installation duration.
QUE$TOR includes data for the following types of completion:
- Open hole: the casing and tubing finish at the top of the pay zone
- Cased hole: the tubing extends into the pay zone and is perforated
- Slotted: the tubing ends at the top of the pay zone but a section of very
closely woven mesh extends into the pay zone. This method is often
applied in the case of horizontal wells to prevent the holes from collapsing
- Gravel pack: the gap between the drilled section and the production
tubing in the pay zone is filled with fine, very uniformly sized sand (not
gravel). Quite often the tubing section is a 'slotted liner'
- Frac pack: similar to a gravel pack but a sand containing a 'propant' is
pumped into the fractured fissures to prevent them collapsing (prop them
open)
QUE$TOR Help
240
To modify the selection, use the dropdown list.
Drilling Durations
A drilling and completion duration for each well is automatically calculated based
on time versus depth curves in QUE$TORs databases. These can be edited by
clicking on View/edit drilling curves in the drilling inputs.
Add Well / Remove Well
These buttons can be used to revise the well count.
To add a well, select the well immediately above where you want to add the new
well (the whole row for the selected well is highlighted) and then click the Add
well button. By default a production well will be added. To change the well type
use the dropdown list.
To remove a well, click on the well number (the whole row for the selected well is
highlighted) and then click the Remove well button. You will be asked to
confirm you wish to remove the selected well.
Drilling Curves
Click on View/edit drilling curves to open the drilling curves window. These
time vs depth curves are extracted from the relevant regional database and are
used to calculate drilling durations. A different curve is used for each region, rig
type, well type (deviated or non-deviated) and drill stage. Modifications to these
curves can be made using the table below the graph.
QUE$TOR Offshore
241
Use the dropdown lists to select which curve to view or edit and modify the
durations in the table below the graph. Changes made to the table are
automatically reflected in the graph.
The drilling stage duration includes for all drilling activities for the complete well,
including weather downtime, replacing drill bits, etc.
Note: The depth for these curves is from seabed, i.e. it is the formation
drilled depth, not the measured depth as displayed in the drilling profiles
window.
The completion curves show the depth dependent duration assuming cased holes
but exclude the incremental time dependent on the completion type or time to
install ESPs.
The drilling learning factors can also be viewed/edited by selecting Learning
from the stage dropdown list, as shown below.
This factor is a multiplier applied to the drilling duration to take account of the
improvement in drill rate typically achieved as more wells are drilled in reservoir.
Equipment Costs
The number of each type of item of drilling equipment is summed and a cost per
item applied. The unit cost is determined from the database and is selected on
throughput, location (topsides or subsea) and pressure of each well. The peak
daily throughput is multiplied by a factor of 1.3 in determining the equipment
size. This is to account for well decline over the year. High pressure wells are
QUE$TOR Help
242
rated above 345bar (5000psi). Low pressure are rated at 345 bar (5000psi) and
below.
The configuration of the Xmas trees is typically subsurface safety valve, lower
master valve, upper master valve, choke valve, wing valve and (if subsea) tree
cap.
The wellhead sits below the Xmas tree and typically includes a casing hanger,
casing head spool, tubing hanger, tubing spool and seals.
Completion equipment costs vary dependent on the type of completion selected.
ESP costs include for the downhole equipment plus the topsides electrical
equipment. The downhole equipment typically includes the pump, motor and seal
assembly, a packer, motor lead extension cable and a nominal 2000m of power
cable per pump. The topsides electrical equipment includes for a step-up
transformer, junction box and variable speed controller. If the wells are subsea,
the subsea component will include electrical cables in the umbilicals to power the
ESPs.
Materials Costs
The material cost estimate is shown below.
QUE$TOR Offshore
243
Drilling/Completion
The drilling material costs are depth related. The length of each casing/tubing
size shown on the cost sheet is the total based on the individual well drilled depth
and the typical Casing Programme.
With dry trees on fixed platforms all casing is assumed to be run to the wellhead
on the cellar deck. The casing length allows for the water depth and freeboard.
The exception to this is multilaterals where the length of 7 liner and production
tubing is set equal to length of the multilateral section.
Cement, mud, brine and bit unit costs are averaged over the total drill depth. For
subsea wells, depth is calculated from the mud line. For platform wells the
cement, mud and brine depths are calculated up to the cellar deck but the bit
depth is calculated from the mud line. Mud costs are based on the use of a
typical mud system with a mixture of seawater polymer, KCl polymer and pseudo
oil-based muds. Brine costs are based on the use of a mixture of 1.5 and 1.8 SG
brines. Bit costs assume the use of new bits for every run.
Conductors
The cost for 30 x 1 wall thickness screw thread conductors is included for
fixed platform drilled or completed wells. It comprises a weight for the total
length of conductors calculated. In the case of TLP/Spar drilled wells the cost of
the conductor is set to zero as it is included as part of the substructure cost.
Drilling Template
A drilling template is automatically included by QUE$TOR when predrilled wells
are specified or wells are drilled and completed by a mobile rig. The template
includes wellhead base and protective structure. The weight increases stepwise
as standard size templates (multiples of 4 wells) are assumed.
QUE$TOR Help
244
Installation Costs
The installation cost estimate is shown below.
From Semi-submersible or Jack-up
The cost sheet shows the combined duration for drilling and completing all the
wells from the vessel as calculated in the drilling profiles window. The numbers
include an allowance for weather downtime and for mobilisation/demobilisation.
The duration assumes the latest generation of top drive units is used.
The bare rig charter rate excludes any allowance for marine crew or a supply
base.
The drill crew numbers are based on a typical crew for the region and include
both the drill crew (tool pusher, tyre pusher, drillers, assistant drillers and
roughnecks) and the engineering/maintenance crew (engineers, mechanics,
welders and oilers). The number given is for the crew on the rig at any one time
and covers both shifts but exclude any catering/cleaning crew. The marine crew
for a jack-up rig include the installation manager, a medic, wireless operator,
crane driver and roustabouts. For a semi-submersible rig a captain, mate/barge
operator and control room operators are also required.
The consumables include diesel, utilities, etc. required to support the drilling
operation. Helicopter services cover the cost of transporting the drill and marine
crew to and from a shore base at the end of each crew change.
Supply boat costs include for transporting the drilling and vessel consumables
from a supply base out to the field. Supply base costs include for an onshore
warehouse for spares plus some head office costs for engineering design and
project work, human resources, purchasing, accounting and administration.
From Platform
QUE$TOR Offshore
245
The cost sheet shows the combined duration for drilling and completing all the
wells from the platform as calculated in the drilling profiles window. The duration
assumes the latest generation of top drive units is used.
both the drill crew (tool pusher, tyre pusher, drillers, assistant drillers and
roughnecks) and the engineering /maintenance crew (engineers, mechanics,
welders and oilers). The number given is for the crew on the rig at any one time
and covers both shifts but exclude any catering/cleaning crew (as these are part
of the topsides crew).
The consumables include diesel, utilities, etc required to support the drilling
operation. Helicopter services cover the cost of transporting the drill crew to and
from a shore base at the end of each crew change.
Supply boat costs include for transporting the drilling consumables from a supply
base out to the field.
Supply base costs include for an onshore warehouse for spares plus some head
office costs for engineering design and project work, human resources,
purchasing, accounting and administration.
If a TSV was selected the rig charter will include the hire cost of the supporting
jack-up or semi-submersible vessel.
Specialist Services
Specialist services include the crew cost plus hire of equipment to perform the
specific operation on a per well basis. Only exploration and appraisal well wells
are assumed to be logged and tested by default. All wells require the services of
the cementing crew.
Transport
The duration to tow the rig to the drilling location. QUE$TOR assumes one
movement of the rig to the site location except for exploration wells when the rig
is moved between each well. For semi rigs 3 x 10-14,000 bhp anchor handling
tugs are assumed. For jack-up rigs only 2 tugs are assumed. During this period
the drill crew and specialist services are not required and there are no
consumables (other than fuel for the tugs and supplies for the marine crew). The
tug day rate already includes an allowance for fuel. The net effect is a reduction
in the rig rate. The day rate shown is the standard rig rate minus the saving due
to reduced manning and consumables.
Site preparation
The duration to prepare each drilling location prior to commencing drilling
exploration wells.
General Costs
QUE$TOR Help
246
Design
Includes allowance for the hours required to carry out the design of the drilling
requirements and pattern.
This includes project specification, special studies, detail design, site surveys,
control, QA and documentation during the detailed design phase. It also includes
wages, salaries and other benefits paid to personnel, payroll burdens, insurance,
general overheads (office facilities, utility services, depreciation of facilities and
equipment and administration) project expenses and equipment. It includes
costs for vendor drawings and data, delivery of items to the yard, vendor's
installation and commissioning services, commissioning spares, insurance up to
delivery, guarantees and import duties.
The design duration is based on the quantity and total measured depth of all
wells.
Project Management
Includes all the project management hours required for all operator company
personnel and any project management team costs to manage, monitor and
control all phases of the drilling and includes management, prospect evaluation
and economics, project engineering, project control and planning, design and
from the conceptual design phase through completion to completion of drilling.
The project management hours are based on the quantity and total measured
depth of all wells.
Certification
A percentage of the total drilling component costs. It includes all certification
costs of the design, equipment, materials and construction used during the
QUE$TOR Offshore
247
drilling, by a recognised certifying authority (e.g. Lloyd's ABS, or DNV).
Insurance
A percentage of the total drilling component cost to cover insurance for all drilling
operations and materials up to first oil.
A contingency is added as a percentage of the total equipment, material,
Subsea
About Subsea
The subsea component provides costs for all subsea equipment and materials
including:
- Clusters, templates and satellites
- Commingling and riser base manifolds
- Production, test, injection and gas lift flowlines
- Risers and riser systems
- Umbilicals
- Platform controls
Drilling and Xmas tree costs are covered by drilling operations.
QUE$TOR generates a subsea configuration automatically. This can be easily
adjusted using the subsea schematic. This schematic allows complex
arrangements containing many wells, templates, flowlines and manifolds to be
rapidly specified. QUE$TOR keeps track of the flowrates and automatically
resizes manifolds and flowlines.
QUE$TOR allows you to estimate subsea development costs in water depths down
to 4000m.
User Interface
On entering the subsea component the input panel is shown in the bottom left of
QUE$TOR Help
248
within the same component, for example flowline diameters are dependent on
flowrates. The cost estimate displays a breakdown of every cost item included in
the component.
Clicking on a blue hyperlinked heading in the cost sheet will open a more detailed
cost breakdown for the selected item or link. Modifications can be made to the
calculated quantities and unit rates. Clicking OK returns you to the cost estimate
saving any modifications and updating the overall estimate. Clicking Cancel
returns without saving modifications and leaves the overall cost estimate
unaltered.
The subsea inputs are used to calculate the quantities shown on the cost
estimate; these are then multiplied by unit rates determined by the procurement
strategy to give the total costs.
Inputs
The subsea input panel, shown below, allows high level, general parameters to be
specified for the subsea component.
QUE$TOR Offshore
249
You can navigate between the inputs using the tabs. Clicking on Flowlines,
Umbilicals or Installation will similarly allow you to specify each of these for
the whole component. Clicking on Display subsea schematic will open the
subsea schematic. This enables you to change the default configuration and
allows the number of wells, manifolding, flowline lengths, water depths and
diameters etc. to be specified.
Wells and Type
Changing the inputs on this tab generates a new subsea configuration when you
click Apply. Any adjustments you have made in the subsea schematic are lost.
If you want to change the number of wells without deleting the existing
configuration you should make changes in the subsea schematic.
Wells and Flowrates
The number of each type of well included in the subsea configuration. The
number of spare slots can also be specified, although this always defaults to zero.
The flowrate is calculated by pro-rating the total field flow by the number of
subsea wells assuming an equal flowrate for all wells of the same type. The
number of wells displayed here will update automatically if you add or remove
wells in the subsea schematic and will be shown as locked.
If a subsea component is connected to a drilling component it will automatically
pick up the number of wells in the drilling component. If a subsea component is
added to the FDS without a drilling component it will automatically be assigned an
equal proportion of wells as any other drilling or subsea component. Changing
the number of wells in a drilling component will change the number of wells in
any linked subsea component, but the reverse situation does not apply.
Therefore, we recommend you adjust the well count in the drilling components.
The flowrate is linked to the number of wells and changing the number of wells
will change unlocked flowrates proportionally. See Well and flow distribution for a
full explanation of how wells and flowrates are distributed.
Development Type
The default development type is Cluster manifold but Template manifolds and
individual Satellite wells are also available. The selected development type is
used to generate the default subsea configuration. Selecting Cluster or Template
QUE$TOR Help
250
does not mean that satellite wells will not be included as the default configuration
is derived based on matching the exact well count. A combination of clusters,
templates and satellites can be specified in the subsea schematic. Any changes
made in the subsea schematic will not update the development type.
Maximum Wells per Cluster / Template
This dictates the maximum number of wells per template or cluster manifold in
the subsea layout. The default is a maximum of 4 well slots per template /
cluster manifold to negate the requirement for heavy lift vessels during
installation.
Note: Once you have reviewed the subsea schematic window the Wells
values are shown as locked and read only. In addition the Lock configuration
box at the bottom of the input panel will be checked to preserve any changes you
have made. If you deselect this check box the well count by type will revert back
to the default as defined by the well distribution logic and you can then overwrite
values. Any changes you made to the subsea schematic will be lost.
Features 1
The Features 1 tab is shown below.
These inputs will be applied to the whole of any configuration. If, for example,
you require a test line in one flowline group but not in another then this can be
achieved by ticking the Test service check box and editing the flowlines in the
subsea schematic. These inputs are used when new subsea configurations are
generated. Any changes made in the subsea schematic will not be reflected here.
Through Pigging
Includes a minimum of two production flowlines of equal size to allow round trip
pigging from the host facility when a new subsea configuration is generated. If a
test/service line is present this forms one of the flowlines.
Chemical Injection
QUE$TOR Offshore
251
Includes chemical injection flowlines to all templates, clusters or satellite
production wells when a new subsea configuration is generated. Chemical
injection lines can be included in the umbilical so this should only be selected if a
larger diameter chemical injection flowline (in addition to the chemical tubes in
the umbilicals - typically 1 diameter) is required for batch dosing the wells.
Test Service
Includes a test/service line in every flowline group when a new subsea
configuration is generated.
Gas Lift
Allows for all production wells to be gas lifted and includes a gas lift flowline in
every flowline group when a new subsea configuration is generated.
Gas Lift Rate
The required ratio of gas lift to produced oil, used to size lift and production lines.
This only becomes active if Gas lift is selected and defaults to 600 scf/bbl.
Features 2
The Features 2 tab is shown below.
Design Pressure
Used to set the manifold and flowline design pressures. Three Pressure Ratings
are available in QUE$TOR and the default is dependent on water depth.
Soil Conditions
The soil condition is used to calculate the pile weight required for the cluster,
template, satellite and riser base manifolds. Three choices are available:
QUE$TOR Help
252
The default soil conditions is Average. Depending on the selection, the pile
weight is factored up or down from that calculated for average conditions.
Trawler Protection
Includes for a steel protection frame over templates and manifolds. Typically,
below 200 m QUE$TOR assumes trawl protection is not required.
Acid Gas
Includes the higher cost of materials required for production manifolds in acid gas
conditions. This is selected by default if the CO
2
content in the Gas data frame at
field level is >3 mol %.
Diverless Systems
Includes the cost of diverless connectors at all manifolds, templates and flowline
connections when the subsea items are located in deep water. All items are
designed to allow installation, inspection and maintenance by remotely operated
vehicle (ROV).
Intervention Tools
Includes the purchase cost of one set of intervention tools for dedicated use in
the subsea development.
Retrievable Subsea
Templates and manifolds are designed to allow retrieval of modules and
components to the surface for repair and replacement.
Flowlines
Clicking on Flowlines in the Subsea input panel, opens the Subsea flowlines form
as shown below.
Lay Vessel
QUE$TOR Offshore
253
The type of vessel used to install the flowlines. For each type of vessel QUE$TOR
contains lay rates and limitations according to water depth. The available options
are:
- Reel ship/steel: Suitable for smaller, short length flowlines. Reels are
prefabricated onshore and laid using an S-lay or J-lay technique allowing
installation in water depths up to 3000 m. Additional time is allowed for
change over of reels for longer flowlines. The maximum flowline diameter
is 16 and then only in water depths up to 500 m
- S-lay without DP: A pipelay barge operating on anchors. Pipe lengths are
welded onboard and laid using a stinger in an S-lay configuration. The
water depth limit for lay barges using anchors is 1000 m
- S-lay with DP: A pipelay barge using S-lay configuration but maintaining
position using dynamic positioning. The lay capacity for both S-lay vessels
is determined by the pipe weight that can be supported from the stinger
during lay operations. The maximum water depth for an SDP lay is 2000
m
- J-lay: A heavy lift crane vessel converted for pipelay using a vertical J-lay
stinger. The vertical configuration of the stinger allows a lower tension to
be used to support the pipe during the lay operation and allows pipelay in
much deeper waters than the S-lay technique. There is a minimum water
depth for J-lay operation depending on the flowline diameter. The
maximum water depth for a small diameter J-lay is 4000 m
- Solitaire: The latest generation of pipelay barge. This is a converted
bulk carrier designed to operate in S-lay mode. Due to the large size of
this vessel and by adjustment of the stinger angle, large diameter
flowlines can be laid in deepwater. It should be noted that at present this
is the only vessel capable of laying large diameter flowlines in deepwater
up to 4000 m.
QUE$TOR chooses a default vessel based on the water depth, the pipeline
diameter and length. Selection of an alternative type of vessel can be made from
the drop-down list.
Day rates include an allowance for pipe barges and tugs required to supply pipe
and consumables to S-lay without DP, S-lay with DP and J lay vessels.
Flowline
Select from Flexible or Steel flowlines. Risers are defined separately. QUE$TOR
always defaults to steel flowlines and when selected the steel type can be
selected for each flow type. Flexible flowlines are steel reinforced rubber pipe,
each diameter has a maximum water depth which limits their application.
Flowline material, thermal insulation, weight coat, cathodic protection and coating
are not available if flexible flowlines are selected.
Buried Lines
Includes the cost of a spread to bury all flowlines in the installation cost
estimate. QUE$TOR defaults to buried flowlines in water depths shallower than
200m.
Material
QUE$TOR Help
254
Three grades of steel can be chosen for the available flowlines: Carbon steel,
Duplex steel and CRA (Corrosion Resistant Alloy). The default is API 5L Grade X60
carbon steel (density 7800 kg/m
3
, allowable stress 298 MPa, corrosion allowance
3 mm) unless acid gas has been specified when duplex is selected (density 7900
kg/m
3
, allowable stress 327 MPa, corrosion allowance 0 mm). CRA should be used
for flowlines susceptible to pitting corrosion (density 7900 kg/m
3
, allowable stress
402 MPa, corrosion allowance 0 mm). QUE$TOR assumes that water and gas
injection flowlines are always carbon steel.
Cathodic Protection
Includes cathodic protection in the cost calculation. By default QUE$TOR includes
cathodic protection for carbon steel lines only. If cathodic protection is selected,
QUE$TOR calculates the weight of anodes required to be installed on the pipeline
according to its diameter and length.
Weight Coat
Includes weight coating in the cost calculation. The weight coating is concrete
based on a 50-75 mm thickness.
Coating
Includes an external three layer polypropylene coating in the cost calculation.
The default selection is for coating to be included for all flowlines. Polypropylene
is suitable for wall temperatures up to 100C.
Thermal Insulation
If insulation is required QUE$TOR allows a choice of 15, 25 or 50 mm thickness of
polyurethane foam or pipe-in-pipe insulation. The default is no insulation.
Umbilicals
Clicking on Umbilicals in the Subsea input panel, opens the subsea umbilicals
form. The specifications chosen in this form apply to all umbilicals within the
component. QUE$TOR assumes a composite umbilical(s) containing all services,
electrical signal cables, hydraulics and chemicals.
Control System
QUE$TOR Offshore
255
QUE$TOR defaults to electrohydraulic controls but also allows hydraulic controls
to be selected. When electrohydraulic controls are selected four 2.5 mm
2
electrical signal cables are included per link. With hydraulic controls, there are
two 2.5 mm
2
electrical cables per link.
Control Tube Material
Four materials are available for control tubes in the umbilical: carbon steel,
thermoplastic, duplex and super duplex. The default is Duplex.
Inhibitor Chemicals
If Inhibitor chemicals is selected, QUE$TOR includes a number of control tubes in
each umbilical to provide hydrate inhibitor chemicals, e.g. methanol or mono
ethylene glycol.
Power Cables
This refers to power cables needed for electric submersible pumps (ESPs). If
ESPs have been selected in a linked drilling component then Power cables will be
selected by default. If selected QUE$TOR includes power cables to all producers.
The cables are assumed to be bundled with the umbilicals and the cost is included
in the relevant link and riser cost breakdowns. Each ESP is assumed to have a
power demand of 250 kW. 95 mm
2
(6.6kV) cables are included for connections
supplying up to 8 ESPs, 150 mm
2
supplying up to 16 ESPs, 240 mm
2
supplying more than 16 ESPs.
Clicking OK is an inherent Apply, i.e. any changes made automatically update
quantities and unit rates if applicable unless they have been locked.
Installation
Clicking on Installation in the Subsea input panel, opens the Subsea installation
days window.
QUE$TOR Help
256
This form gives a breakdown of spread duration by activity. It allows you to view
and edit the number of days in the field and mob/demob days for each spread.
The durations include the time to install all templates, manifolds, flowlines and
risers and to make all connections between components.
Six categories of spread are available in QUE$TOR:
DSV: a diving support vessel.
SSCV: a semi-submersible crane vessel.
SSDV: a semi-submersible drilling vessel.
Laybarge: this can be a reel ship, S-lay without DP, S-lay with DP, J-lay or
Solitaire. The type can be chosen in the Flowlines form.
Trench: a trenching/burial spread.
Survey: a survey vessel.
By default small templates and clusters (6 wells or less) are installed by SSDV
with an SSCV only brought in for larger structures. Umbilical and flowline
connections are made from a DSV using either divers in shallow water or
remotely operated vehicles (ROVs) in deeper waters. Flowlines, umbilicals and
risers are installed using the laybarge. Flowline trenching is performed using a
trenching spread.
The calculated durations include for positioning the installation vessel, lowering
each item to the seabed, positioning and levelling, piling (4 piles per manifold, 2
piles per guide base/satellite) and then returning back to sea level. A regionally
specific vessel weather downtime factor is applied to the total duration for each
vessel. All flowline and umbilical connections to a given manifold are assumed to
QUE$TOR Offshore
257
be made in a single operation. The duration for each connection is dependent on
the diameter and water depth.
Flowline lay rates and riser installation durations are consistent with the
algorithms used in the pipeline component.
Mob/demob times are specified for each spread and assume all installation is
accomplished in one campaign.
Subsea Configuration
Clicking on Display subsea schematic in the subsea input panel, opens the
subsea configuration window. This allows you to see the default configuration
generated by QUE$TOR and to change the configuration as desired.
The subsea development is displayed with icons representing the various subsea
items. The properties of each item can be viewed and modified by double-
clicking on the icon.
Default Configuration
QUE$TOR automatically draws a default configuration including templates,
clusters, satellite wells, flowlines, manifolds and risers. By default a cluster
configuration is assumed. The distribution of wells is based upon the maximum
drilling stepout and the field dimensions specified in the field level details. The
field is divided into sectors, each of which requires one drilling centre to drain it.
A group of subsea wells is then allocated to each sector. If the project includes
wells drilled from a platform, the host platform is assumed to be in the centre of
QUE$TOR Help
258
the field. Subsea wells are then assumed to be arranged around the extremities
of the field to drain parts of the reservoir that cannot be reached from the host
platform.
The default configuration is dependent on the length of the sector and the
distance to the host facility. The size and quantity of clusters/templates and
satellites is set to exactly match the well count and depends on the development
type chosen. If the distance to the host facility exceeds 10 km an in-field
commingling manifold tied back to the host platform is included to reduce the
overall flowline length.
Items can be moved by clicking on an icon and holding down the left mouse
button. The selected icon can then be dragged across the screen to a new
position.
To generate a new default configuration, for example with a different number of
wells, use the main input panel.
The Print button at the bottom of the subsea schematic windows allows you to
print out a copy of the input data along with a copy of the schematic. The
Preview button allows you to preview this report before printing it. The Copy
image button allows you to copy an image of the subsea schematic to a clipboard
as a bitmap file so you can paste it into an another application, e.g. Word or
PowerPoint, for reporting purposes.
Adding Items
Items can be added to the configuration using the Subsea Toolbar located at the
top of the subsea schematic window. This contains a series of icons representing
the items that can be included in the estimate. To add an item, left click on an
icon on the Subsea Toolbar. A ghosted image of the selected item is shown
allowing you to position it where required in the schematic then left click again to
add it . The flowrate is linked to the number of wells and changing the number of
wells will change the flowrates proportionally.
Deleting Items
An item can be deleted by selecting it and hitting the Delete key or right clicking
on the item and selecting Delete. To delete a number of items either hold down
the Ctrl key and select them or use the mouse cursor to group them and then
select the Delete key.
Item and Link Names
Items and links are numbered sequentially, e.g. Item 01, Item 02 and Link 01,
Link 02. Each can be renamed by either doubling left clicking on the item/link
name or right clicking on the item and selecting Rename and then entering the
new name/identifier using the Rename form.
Item and link labels can be re-positioned on the schematic by left clicking on the
label and dragging and dropping them to the new location.
Clusters, Templates & Satellites
The properties form for a 8 well cluster manifold is shown below. The same form
is used for templates and satellites and it can be viewed by double clicking on the
QUE$TOR Offshore
259
relevant item in the subsea schematic. The number of production, gas injection,
water injection and spare slots can be viewed and edited. QUE$TOR checks the
total number of wells corresponds to the number for the selected size of manifold
and displays an error message if this is not the case when the OK button is
clicked. The water depth will default to that entered in the field level details but
can be adjusted if the manifold is located in deeper or shallower water. Chemical
injection, test service, and gas lift are displayed for information only and indicate
if these flowlines are attached to the item.
Note: QUE$TOR does not allow you to have a development with 3 (or more)
commingling manifolds in a circular arrangement.
Linking Items
To add a link, left click on the flowline group icon in the Subsea Toolbar then left
click first on the item you want production to flow from and secondly on the item
the production will flow to. Each link represents a bundle of flowlines, umbilicals
and control and power cables. You can link most subsea items together.
However, limitations include:
- Production loops cannot be modelled.
- A template or cluster manifold cannot be linked to a satellite well.
When items are linked in a daisy chain configuration, the flow from an item is the
sum of any upstream flows plus the flow from wells at that item.
Links
Double clicking on the link will open up a form displaying the general properties
of the link.
QUE$TOR Help
260
The Subsea link general properties form allows the link length to be defined.
Clicking on Details opens up the Subsea link properties form where you can view
and edit the individual flowlines and umbilicals within the bundle.
The form allows you to specify the number of production, water injection and gas
injection flowlines. The flows are shown for information only. They can only be
changed by revising the values in the Wells and type tab of the input panel. By
using the check boxes, gas lift, test service and chemical injection lines can either
be included or excluded from the link. The diameter of the flowlines is based on
the gas and liquid flowrates and the operating pressure.
Multiple flowlines are used for a given fluid; production, water or gas injection, if
the calculated diameter exceeds 16 for flexible or 24 for steel flowlines.
The umbilicals frame allows you edit the number and diameter of tubes in the
link. These depend on the number of wells controlled/served by the umbilical
link. Tubes diameters between 0.5 (12.7 mm) and 1.25 (31.7 mm) are
available from the drop-down list for both control and chemicals. In addition to
the control and chemicals tubes the umbilicals include signal cables if the well
QUE$TOR Offshore
261
control system is electrohydraulic. QUE$TOR assumes one 2.5 mm
2
cable for
every two wells controlled by the umbilical link.
The type of umbilicals is displayed in the frame titles. This can be changed by
clicking on Umbilicals in the Subsea input panel.
To resize a flowline click on the symbol to the right of the flowline of interest.
This opens the Size flowline form.
See Offshore Pipelines for details on pipeline/ flowline sizing.
For production flowlines the associated gas or condensate flows are based on the
primary fluid flow and the associated fluid GOR or LGR (defined at field level).
Tie-back and Riser Type
The selection of tie-back component and riser type can be selected by double
clicking on the tie-back component.
QUE$TOR Help
262
The default tie-back selection is based on the field development schematic but
any of the offshore components or a riser base manifold can be selected.
If fixed platform is selected you can choose between flexible lazy S, steel
catenary, top tension, J-tube, steel fixed and steel retro-fit risers. J-tube, steel
fixed and steel retro-fit risers are not available if fixed platform is de-selected as
they are not suitable for floating platforms. Where J-tube or steel risers are used
the steel grade is assumed to be the same as for the flowlines, i.e. carbon steel,
duplex or CRA.
- Flexible Lazy S: Steel reinforced flexible rubber pipe in a lazy S
configuration.
- Steel catenary: Suitable for deepwater J-lay only. Flowline is handed
directly over from lay vessel to platform with final connection made
topsides.
- Top tension: Jointed pipe sections with stress relief devices at each end
(e.g. flexible joint, tapered stress joint) to reduce stresses induced by
vessel motions and offsets. Risers are tensioned using either a rig type
tensioning system on the vessel or, in the case of spars, by providing
individual buoyancy cans around the top end of each riser.
- J-tube: Steel riser pulled up through a pre-installed J-tube which is part
of the steel jacket structure.
- Steel fixed: Rigid steel risers fitted to a new platform in the yard before
jacket (or GBS) installation.
- Steel retro-fit: Rigid steel risers fitted to an existing fixed platform. The
unit rate includes the cost of clamps and guides fitted to the existing
platform.
If a landfall or a sink with shore approach is selected the water depth, riser
systems and riser length are hidden as they are not relevant.
Note: When tying back subsea to shore there is no allowance for
manifolding the lines at shore if connected to a single onshore pipeline. You can
either include offshore manifolding in the subsea component or include an
onshore production facility (manifold only). If the latter option is selected you
will also have to include pipelines for each fluid in the link between the landfall
and manifold station.
QUE$TOR Offshore
263
The optimum riser type depends on the water depth and environmental
conditions but in QUE$TOR the default riser type is set depending on the type of
substructure it is connected to.
The following default riser types are assumed:
- Steel jacket: J-tube.
- GBS: Steel retrofit.
- Semi-submersible: Steel catenary.
- FPSO and Barge: Flexible.
- TLP and Spar: Top tensioned.
Note: If the riser type is locked and unsuitable for the selected tieback it
will be unlocked and forced to the default.
Equipment Costs
The equipment cost estimate includes the costs of all manifolds, intervention tools
and controls in the component.
Intervention Tools
Includes the purchase cost of one set of intervention tools for dedicated use in
the subsea development
Platform Controls Main
A main control unit on the platform.
Platform Controls Additional
Incremental control modules for each well.
Freight
QUE$TOR Help
264
This cost is assumed by QUE$TOR to be a percentage of the total cost of the
equipment. It includes the cost of packaging and transporting equipment from
the manufacturer to the construction yard. You may modify the freight
percentage; the default is dependent on where the equipment is procured (in
region or out of region).
Detailed Item Cost Breakdown
Clicking on the blue hyperlinked names in the equipment cost estimate will open
a new window.
Main Structure
The subsea installation is constructed as a tubular steel structure.
- Structure: The weight of the structure including landing and levelling
equipment, surface protection and anodes
- Guide Base: Supplied for each well slot of a template and satellite well
- Protection Structure: An over-trawlable steel structure providing
protection from fishing activities and dropped objects
- Piles: Weight of piles to secure installation on the seabed.
QUE$TOR Offshore
265
Manifolding (Piping & Valves)
For each flow type a manifold is sized based on the flowrate, design pressure and
number of connections. The weight includes for branch lines and isolation valves.
Flowline Connectors/Pull-In
For each flowline, jumper and umbilical to or from a template, cluster or manifold
a connector is included. For diver connect installations this covers flanges and
spool pieces, while for diverless connections it covers mechanical connectors and
pull-in tools.
Cluster Satellites
If clusters have been specified, this includes the associated costs for guide base,
a steel protective structure, piles, flowlines/jumpers required between wells and
manifold point and the umbilicals from the manifold.
Control and Testing
Subsea Controls: The cost of subsea controls required per well including the
subsea control pod.
System Testing: A cost covering the equipment and controls testing required
for each well.
Materials Costs
The materials cost estimate includes costs for all flowlines, umbilicals and risers.
Clicking on the blue hyperlinked name of link or riser will open a new window
giving a detailed cost breakdown.
Riser Systems
When flexible risers are included, the cost for a riser support system consisting of
an arch and buoy is included. Each system can support up to five risers. The
number of riser systems required is determined assuming the maximum total
diameter of risers that can be handled by any one system is 40 inch.
Links
QUE$TOR Help
266
Each link is a flowline and umbilical group between two manifolds. An example of
a detailed cost breakdown for a flowline group is shown below. All flowlines and
umbilicals in the link are displayed.
Gas lift, chemical and injection lines are always assumed to be carbon steel (if the
flowline type is steel). Steel production and test lines can be specified as carbon
steel, duplex or CRA.
Umbilicals
QUE$TOR Offshore
267
Includes the total length of umbilicals required for the specified subsea
configuration. Umbilicals are run in parallel with flowlines assuming the same
lengths. The cost of a direct hydraulic umbilical is for a seven function umbilical,
assuming a combination of hydraulic lines, twisted pairs of wire and a small
diameter chemical injection line. The cost for an electrohydraulic umbilical
assumes a cable of various twisted pairs controlling hydraulic actuators subsea on
the template.
Risers
An example of a detailed cost breakdown for a flowline group is shown below.
Installation Costs
The installation costs include all vessels required to install the templates,
manifolds, flowlines and risers and to make all connections between components.
The cost estimate displays a summary of the durations for a Diving Support
Vessel (DSV), semi-submersible crane vessel (SSCV), semi-submersible drilling
vessel (SSDV), lay vessel and trenching/burial spread. Five types of lay vessel
are available in QUE$TOR and the type can be specified by within the Flowlines
sub-component. A more detailed breakdown of vessel duration by activity can be
seen in the Installation sub-component.
QUE$TOR Help
268
By default small templates and clusters are installed by SSDV with an SSCV only
brought in for the larger structures. Riser installation, umbilical and flowline
connections are made from a DSV or SSDV either using divers in shallow water or
ROVs in deeper waters. If an SSDV is used to install the manifolds then the same
vessel is used for flowline and umbilical connections. If an SSCV is used for the
manifolds then the connections are made using a DSV.
The calculated durations include for positioning the installation vessel, lowering
each item to the seabed, positioning and levelling, piling (4 piles per manifold, 2
piles per guide base/satellite) and then returning back to sea level. A regionally
specific vessel weather downtime factor is applied to the total duration for each
vessel. All flowline and umbilical connections to a given manifold are assumed to
be made in a single operation. The duration for each connection is dependent on
the diameter or type and water depth.
General Costs
contingency.
QUE$TOR Offshore
269
Design
This component includes the quantity of hours required to carry out the design of
the subsea facility. It covers the hours for detailed design through to installation
at the location.
This includes project specification, special studies, detail design, follow-on
and documentation during the detailed design phase. It incorporates all wages,
salaries and other benefits paid to personnel, payroll burdens, insurance, general
overheads (office facilities, utility services, depreciation of facilities and
equipment and administration), project expenses and equipment. It includes
vendor data delivery of items to the yard, insurance up to delivery, guarantees
and import duties.
The design hours are calculated as a factor of the number of subsea installations
(i.e. number of templates or satellite wells), with a reduction in man-hours for
each repeat design.
Project Management
Project management includes all the project management hours required for the
operator company personnel and any project management team costs to
manage, monitor and control all phases of the subsea development. It includes
management, project engineering, project control and planning, design and
from the conceptual design stage through to first oil.
The management hours are calculated as a factor of the number of subsea
installations (i.e. number of templates of satellite wells) with a reduction in man-
hours for each repeat design.
Certification
This is a percentage of the total component cost. It includes all certification costs
for the approval of the design, materials and installation by a recognised
certifying authority (e.g. Lloyd's, ABS or DNV). Certification is only included by
Insurance
Contingency
QUE$TOR Help
270
Barge
About Barges
It is anticipated that the barge component will only be used in relatively shallow
waters (50m or less) and in a benign environment. For deeper waters and non-
benign environments the tanker component is strongly recommended in place of
the barge. Other floaters available include twin hull semi-submersibles, TLPs
(Tension Leg Platforms) and spar buoys.
Barges are simple flat bottomed vessels with a minimum of facilities and with no
self propulsion.
Developments with Barges
It should be noted that barges are probably most suitable to shallow
water/swamp regions. As such they are most applicable in the Far East/African
regions. Some geographical databases have no suitable areas for barge
installation and are not provided with barge cost data, e.g. North Sea regions. If
it is required that a barge is to be used in such a region, the cost data should be
manually entered.
User Interface
On entering the Barge component the input panel is shown in the bottom left of
of every cost item included in the component. The Barge inputs are used to
Primary Inputs
QUE$TOR Offshore
271
The Barge Primary Inputs are shown below.
Storage Required
If storage is required the box should be checked. The required storage will be
calculated by multiplying the peak oil production rate by the days requested. The
required storage is then used to determine the barge size. If storage is not
needed the storage required box should be unchecked.
Note: There is a maximum storage capacity of 1,000,000 bbl.
Production Rate
This is the peak oil production rate and is passed from the associated topsides. It
is used in conjunction with the days storage required to calculate the total
storage requirement.
The operating weight of the associated topsides. This is used to size the barge if
no storage is required.
Barge Size
If the barge has storage, QUE$TOR determines its size based on the storage
volume required. In this situation, three Barge Sizes with Storage are available
in QUE$TOR. The cost of these three barges includes all systems necessary for
oil storage.
Where storage is not required, the barge size is determined by the topsides
operating weight. In this situation two Barge Sizes without Storage are available
in QUE$TOR as shown in the table below, these barges are assumed to have no
storage systems.
QUE$TOR Help
272
Water Depth
This is used to calculate the mooring lines required. Barges are not
recommended for water depths greater than 50 m. In deeper waters alternative
floating substructures are recommended such as tankers.
Mooring System
The mooring system inputs are shown below. The algorithms used allow
moorings to be specified in up to 4000m of water, however barges are not
recommended for water depths deeper than 50m and in deeper water the tanker
component is more suitable.
Similarly chain and wire and chain and rope mooring lines are available to select
but chain only lines will typically remain technically and economically superior at
all water depths suitable for this component.
Mooring Type
(SPA). When calculating the line length, QUE$TOR allows for a length of chain on
the seabed. This chain is used as an additional weight to provide restoring force
to the vessel and reducing the force applied to the anchor. SPAs can withstand a
greater force before any movement of the anchor occurs than DEAs and
consequently require less chain on the seabed.
QUE$TOR Offshore
273
Chain and wire and chain and rope mooring lines are available to select but not
recommended in water depths suitable for this component, see Tanker mooring
systems, covering the tanker component for more information on these if
required.
Anchor Type
Drag embedded anchors are selected by default for barges.
chosen.
individual wave with a 50 year return period. QUE$TOR uses the specified
follows:
- Wind speed: The wind speed is the value measured at a reference
height of 10m above stillwater and for a 50 year return period.
QUE$TOR mooring lines are estimated assuming a design speed
appropriate to a 5 second gust. Frequently, mean wind speeds
averaged over 1 hour or 1 minute are known. The corresponding 5
second value (m/s) can be estimated using a Wind Speed Lookup. The
50 year return wind speed can be estimated from the 100 year return
period as: 50 year speed = 100 year speed/1.05
Soil Condition
average conditions.
QUE$TOR Help
274
Mooring Chain Size
on the barges size.
The chain size does not vary with small changes in environmental conditions; only
Number of Lines
An eight point mooring system is assumed for all barges. If this is overwritten
the mooring lines are resized to provide the required load bearing capacity,
although you should note that the chain size will never exceed 6.5 inches. In a
similar fashion, which maintains a constant load bearing capacity, the number of
mooring lines is recalculated if the mooring chain size is changed from the
calculated value.
Equipment Costs
The equipment cost estimate includes the cost of purchasing the barge and the
anchors and is shown below.
Barge Cost
The barge cost is for a new build flat bottomed vessel with a minimum of facilities
that is not self propelled.
Anchors
choice made in the Inputs. The anchor weight is dependent on the type of anchor
the seabed.
Materials Costs
The material cost estimate includes the cost of the risers and mooring lines and is
shown below.
QUE$TOR Offshore
275
Mooring Chain
The chain for all lines required to moor the barge. It is dependent on the water
depth and size of barge.
is used in the mooring system inputs.
Note: At water depths suitable for the barge component, chain only
mooring lines are likely to be preferable.
The number of terminations connecting sections of chain to wire/rope.
Freight
This cost is assumed by QUE$TOR to be a percentage of the total materials cost.
It includes the cost of packaging and transporting equipment from the
manufacturer to the construction yard. You may modify the freight percentage;
the default is dependent on where the equipment is procured (in region or out of
region).
Installation Costs
Installation includes the costs of towing the barge to the field and installing it and
can be seen below.
Tow out and Installation
This is the duration taken to tow the barge to the installation location including
mobilisation/demobilisation, waiting time and site survey. The unit rate is based
QUE$TOR Help
276
on two tugs/anchor holding vessels and includes labour, fuel, consumables,
downtime and support. Tow out time is assumed to be three days.
Sea trials and marine commissioning
Sea trials and marine commissioning includes for reception of the barge from the
yard and checking and testing of the marine systems.
General Costs
Design
The estimated number of hours required to carry out the design of the barge. It
covers the hours required for detailed design and the design hours required in the
yard. Activities included are project specification, special studies, detail design,
site surveys, follow on engineering, purchasing, expediting and inspection
services, project control, QA and documentation during the detailed design
phase. The unit rate includes wages, salaries and other benefits to personnel,
payroll burdens, insurance, general overheads (office facilities, utility services,
depreciation of facilities and equipment and administration), project expenses and
equipment. Allowance is made for vendor data, delivery of items to the yard,
insurance up to delivery, guarantees and import duties.
The design hours calculated are related to the deadweight of the barge.
Project management
The estimated number of project management hours required for the operator
company personnel and any project management team to manage, monitor and
control all phases of the development. This includes management, project
engineering, project control and planning, design and construction supervision,
QUE$TOR Offshore
277
quality assurance and third party liaison. The period covered is from the
conceptual design phase to first hydrocarbons offshore.
The project management hours calculated are related to the deadweight of the
barge.
Certification
This is a fixed percentage of the total barge costs. It includes all certification costs
of the design, equipment, materials and construction of the barge by a recognised
approval authority (e.g. Lloyd's, ABS or DNV). Certification is only included by
Insurance
Contingency
A contingency is added as a percentage of the total material, installation, HUC,
design, project management, insurance and certification costs to bring the
component cost estimate to a P50 level. For a fuller explanation see Contingency
Definitions.
Offshore User Defined
About User Defined
The User Defined component is a blank cost estimate where you enter all
quantities and unit rates for items within each cost centre. This facility allows
components not covered by any other component to be included as part of the
overall cost estimate. User Defined components are included in the total project
costs and CAPEX schedule, but have no operating costs automatically associated
with them.
You can build up a library of User Defined components which can be used across
all projects, e.g. a 50m bridge, a 100m bridge, a subsea separation unit, etc.
Cost Estimate
On entering the User Defined component, a blank cost estimate will be displayed
with the same format and cost centre breakdown as the other component cost
estimates. An example of the equipment section of this sheet is shown below.
This sheet allows you to enter data into all cells on the sheet except in the total
QUE$TOR Help
278
costs column. By entering quantities and unit rates the total cost for each item,
cost centre and component are automatically calculated.
Once user defined components have been created, they can be saved in a
library. This makes them available to any other projects run. The panel in the
bottom left of the screen, shown below, has a dropdown list which enables
previously saved user defined components to be selected.
To use a previously saved user defined component, select the desired component
from the dropdown list and click Apply.
Note: QUE$TOR will not check that the currency of any imported user
defined components matches the project currency. You must ensure the project
currency and the user defined component currency match.
If you wish to save a new user defined component to the library, click on Add,
once the cost estimate is completed. The component will be saved under its
defined name.
To delete saved user defined components from the library, select the desired
component from the dropdown list and click Delete.
Offshore Decommissioning
About Decommissioning
QUE$TOR retains the identity of the individual components as created during the
capital cost calculation and applies a component decommissioning cost estimate
to each component. There are detailed bottom-up decommissioning algorithms
for Topsides, Jackets and Pipelines which consider the dismantling, removal and
QUE$TOR Offshore
279
disposal tasks. Decommissioning for the other components is based around
percentages of the component CAPEX values; this option can be used in
preference to the detailed algorithms if desired.
The decommissioning parameters are set at the project level through the use of
decommissioning scenarios. There is a single default scenario for all regions
within QUE$TOR, however you can adjust the parameters and save these
preferences as a new scenario.
Component Decommissioning
To access the decommissioning details of a component, right-click the desired
component and select Edit/view decommissioning. For pipelines, select the
pipeline from the pipeline link form and click Decommission.
The cost sheet is shown on the right hand side of the screen, for components with
detailed algorithms the input panel is shown in the bottom left of the screen.
For details of the detailed decommissioning algorithms, see the Topsides, Jacket
and Pipeline decommissioning sections.
Cost estimate
The cost sheet for the component is shown on the right hand side of the screen.
The subsea cost sheet is shown as an example below.
The cost estimate sheet displays a breakdown of the costs. The costs are based
on a simple CAPEX x Percentage = Cost relationship. The CAPEX values are read
from the component's CAPEX estimate, with the Percentage read from the
QUE$TOR Help
280
selected decommissioning scenario. It is possible to go to any blue number in the
cost sheet and make any appropriate changes.
Scrap
The modules transported to shore may be assigned a scrap value. A negative
value should be entered for income or a positive value if disposal onshore invokes
a cost. You should overwrite this to reflect current and local conditions.
Topsides Decommissioning
Inputs
The topsides decommissioning input sheet is based on the data from the topsides
component.
Distance to Disposal Site
The distance between the jacket installation site and disposal site, i.e. the
distance to the deepwater dumping site or to the breakers yard onshore.
Temporary Piping Weight
Is the weight of temporary piping fitted during the decommissioning of equipment
components and systems. Individual vessels are isolated for individual cleaning.
The temporary piping weight is a fixed percentage of the module weight.
Padeyes Weight
Is the weight of the lifting padeyes which have to be attached to each module.
The padeye weight is a fixed percentage of the module weight. The net cost is
QUE$TOR Offshore
281
obtained through the use of a combined materials design and fabrication cost per
unit weight.
Crane Size
Specifies the size of the lifting frame or crane used during the heavy lift operation
to transfer the modules of the topsides onto the transportation spread. There are
three options; each has a maximum lift weight.
- Small: up to 2500 te.
- Medium: up to 6000 te.
- Large: up to 8000 te.
Maximum Lift Weight
The maximum lift weight of the selected crane. This is set by the crane size but
can be edited.
Number of Lifts
The number of lifts is dependent on the topsides weight and the maximum lift
weight. It is assumed that each lift is utilised fully to minimise the number of
lifts.
Weights
Clicking on Weights in the topsides decommissioning inputs panel opens the
weights form.
QUE$TOR Help
282
The weights are taken from the topsides cost estimate and are broken down into
Equipment and Material weights.
Hazardous Volumes
Clicking on Hazardous volumes in the topsides decommissioning inputs panel
opens the hazardous volumes form.
QUE$TOR Offshore
283
Covers hazardous waste fluids from the decommissioning process including
hydrocarbons, chemicals, fuel, drilling muds and cement. The volumes are based
on each system weight and are broken down into Equipment and Material
volumes.
Flushing / Inerting
Clicking on Flushing / inerting in the topsides decommissioning inputs panel
opens the flushing / inerting time form.
QUE$TOR Help
284
Flushing Days
Covers the time required for the flushing of the topsides vessels and is dependent
on the volume of the vessels and piping to be cleaned and the nature of their
contents.
Inerting Days
Covers the time required to inert the hazardous vessels and pipelines and
includes for removal, sealing and transport. The number of days is dependent on
the volumes.
Dismantle / Removal
QUE$TOR Offshore
285
Clicking on Dismantle / removal in the topsides decommissioning inputs panel
opens the dismantle / removal time form.
Cost Sheet
The topsides decommissioning cost estimate sheet is displayed on the right hand
side of the screen when topsides decommissioning is open. The cost estimate
sheet displays a breakdown of every cost item included. The decommissioning
inputs are used to calculate the quantities shown on the cost estimate. The unit
rates are determined by the procurement strategy. The costs are generally based
on a simple weight x unit rate = cost relationship. It is possible to go to any
QUE$TOR Help
286
blue number in the cost sheet and make any appropriate changes to the
calculated weights or the unit rates.
Materials
This covers the materials required for the decommissioning and includes padeyes,
temporary piping, lifting frames and seafastenings as well as the transportation
costs.
- Padeyes: allows for the lifting padeyes which have to be attached to
each module. The padeye weight is dependent on the module weight.
The net cost is obtained through the use of a combined materials design
and fabrication cost per unit weight.
- Temporary piping: allows for temporary piping fitted during the
decommissioning of equipment components and systems. Individual
vessels are isolated for individual cleaning. The temporary piping weight
is dependent on the module weight.
- Bracing / lifting frames: used during the heavy lift operation to
transfer the module from topsides to the transportation spread and
dependent on the module weight.
- Seafastenings: module seafastenings on the transportation spread are
taken to be a fixed percentage of the module weight.
QUE$TOR Offshore
287
- Freight: a fixed percentage applied to the total cost of the materials. It
includes the cost of packaging and transport from the place of
manufacture to the fabrication yard.
Fabrication
This covers the fabrication of the above materials at the topsides.
Decommissioning / removal
This covers the cost of the labour, vessels and disposal during the
decommissioning process. Further details are given below.
- Labour: is the total welding, fitting, cutting and dismantling man-hours
for decommissioning, preparation for removal and fitting. The unit rate is
taken from the technical database. This does not include the man-hours
of the flushing and inerting crews.
- Pumping / flushing: the total number of days for flushing and pumping.
This is specified in flushing / inerting time form.
- Inerting: total number of days for inerting. This is specified in flushing /
inerting time form.
- Multipurpose / DSV: offers general support, including manpower, for
flushing, inerting and lifting operations. The support vessels transport
small items of secondary structure and equipment after removal.
- Tanker: is on station to take discharges of washings and residues from
the vessel and pipework flushing and cleaning. The duration is equal to
that of the total flushing duration.
- Crane spread: heavy lift vessel loads each module on to the
transportation barge. A duration per lift is assigned from the technical
database.
- Transport spread: covers the cost of all vessels required to transport
the modules and large items of equipment to the onshore disposal site,
i.e. for barges and tugs. The unit day rate allows for mobilisation /
demobilisation, hire of vessels and crews, consumables, downtime, etc.
- Landing / dumping: a cost allowance for either landing onshore or
dumping at sea of materials and waste from decommissioning.
- Waste disposal: covers the processing and disposal of waste material
onshore, particularly the washings and residue from the decommissioning
operation. The default allowance is zero, this should be edited to reflect
local conditions and requirements.
Design and Project management
This covers the quantity of hours required to carry out the design and
management of the decommissioning. Design man-hours are factored from the
weights and project management man-hours are factored from the design man-
hours.
- Design: includes the quantity of hours required to carry out the design of
the decommissioning. It covers the hours from conceptual design time
through to deconstruction and transportation. This includes feasibility
studies, project execution plans, conceptual design, project specification,
special studies, detail design, follow-on engineering, purchasing,
QUE$TOR Help
288
expediting and inspection services, project control, QA and documentation
during the design phase. It incorporates all wages, salaries and other
benefits paid to personnel, payroll burdens, insurance, general overheads
(office facilities, utility services, depreciation of facilities and equipment
and administration), project expenses and equipment. It includes vendor
data delivery of items to the yard, insurance up to delivery, guarantees
and import duties. Design man-hours are factored from the weights.
- Project management: includes all the project management hours
required for the operator company personnel and any project management
team costs to manage, monitor and control all phases of the
decommissioning. It includes management, project engineering, project
control and planning, design and construction supervision, quality
assurance and third party liaison.
Insurance
A fixed percentage of the decommissioning cost, includes insurance for all project
components during transportation and deconstruction. Personnel liability
insurance is covered in the respective cost centres.
Certification
A fixed percentage of the decommissioning cost, includes all certification costs of
the design, materials and construction of the development by a recognised
certifying authority.
Contingency
This is a fixed percentage of the total above costs and brings the cost estimate to
a P50 level. For a fuller explanation see Contingency Definitions.
Scrap
a cost. The user should overwrite this to reflect current and local conditions.
Jacket Decommissioning
Inputs
The jacket decommissioning input sheet is based on the data from the jacket
component.
QUE$TOR Offshore
289
Removal
The removal frame specifies the method used for the removal of the jacket and
contains two options.
- Cut and lift: one, several or all jacket frames are removed in a number
of lifts depending on the crane lift and clearance capacity set within the
technical database. A three-legged jacket (tripod) is lifted as a single unit.
- Float: the jacket piles are cut at the mudline and two of the legs sealed
to provide buoyancy. Any shortfall of buoyancy is provided by bolt-on
buoyancy tanks, two per frame. This option is not available for three-
legged jackets.
Disposal
The removal frame specifies the method used for the removal of the jacket and
contains two options. The options are only available when float is selected in the
Removal frame.
- Dump: the jacket structure is disposed of by dumping at a deepwater
location.
- Scrap: the jacket structure is taken onshore and sold for its scrap value.
- Distance to disposal site: the distance between the jacket installation
site and disposal site, i.e. the distance to the deepwater dumping site or
to the breakers yard onshore.
Lifts
The lifts frame contains details of the lifting frame or crane used during the heavy
lift operation to transfer the modules onto the transportation spread. This is only
available when cut and lift is selected as the removal option.
- Crane size: specifies the size of the crane. There are three options; each
option has a maximum lift weight.
QUE$TOR Help
290
- Small Up to 2500 te.
- Medium Up to 6000 te.
- Large Up to 8000 te.
- Maximum lift weight: the maximum lift weight of the selected crane.
This is set by the crane size but can be edited.
- Number of lifts: the number of lifts is dependent on the jacket weight
and the maximum lift weight. It is assumed that each lift is utilised fully
to minimise the number of lifts.
Details
Clicking on Details in the jacket decommissioning input panel opens the details
form.
The details form specifies the details of the jacket and attachments.
Jacket
Specifies the details of the jacket including type, size, weights and marine
growth.
Attachments
Specifies the attachments to the jacket such as risers and J-tubes.
QUE$TOR Offshore
291
Cost Sheet
The jacket decommissioning cost estimate sheet is displayed on the right hand
side of the screen when jacket decommissioning is open. The cost estimate sheet
displays a breakdown of every cost item included. The decommissioning inputs
are used to calculate the quantities shown on the cost estimate. The unit rates
are determined by the procurement strategy. The costs are generally based on a
weights or the unit rates.
Materials
This covers the materials required for the decommissioning and includes padeyes,
seafastenings, temporary platforms and flotation and ballast systems.
- Padeyes: only included if the Cut and lift removal option has been
selected. Four padeyes per lift are assumed and they are not reusable.
- Flotation tanks: only included if the Float removal option has been
selected. Covers supplementary buoyancy tanks and leg bulkheads.
- Ballast system: covers the supply and fitting of all necessary valves,
pipework and ballast control system for ballasting / deballasting of the legs
and supplementary buoyancy tanks.
QUE$TOR Help
292
- Seafastenings: tethers used to secure the jacket frames to the barge
during transportation to the disposal location. The weight is taken as a
fixed percentage of the jacket frame weights.
- Access platform / temporary bracing: temporary diver access
platforms required when cutting the jacket legs and bracings. These are
also used as temporary bracing to support and control the deflections of
the severed jacket frame ends. One access platform/bracing is required
for each leg but they are reusable at different jacket levels.
- Freight: a fixed percentage of the total cost of materials to cover the cost
of packaging and transport of material to the fabrication yards.
Fabrication
This covers the fabrication of the above materials.
Decommissioning / removal
This covers the cost of the labour, vessels and disposal during the
decommissioning process. Further details are given below.
- Cutting spread: required for both removal options. The legs and braces
at the base of each frame, or group of frames, are severed in the Cut and
lift option while all piles must be cut at the mudline in both cases. The
technical database assigns a duration to each cluster of cuts and QUE$TOR
determines a total duration which includes the man-hours to install access
platforms and temporary bracings.
- Crane spread: only required when the Cut and lift removal option is
selected. The number of lifts depends upon the crane lift and reach
capacity. The technical database contains a duration for commissioning,
each lift including time to attach lifting padeyes, rigging, lifting structure
on to barge and decommissioning.
- Multi-service / DSV: provides general support, accommodation and
diver support throughout the decommissioning procedure.
- Transportation spread: covers all barges and tugs for transportation of
the jacket or jacket sections to the disposal site. The transportation
spread is on location during the lifting operations and this duration
includes for loading, unloading, seafastening and stand by. Only tugs are
required for the Float removal option.
- Landing/dumping: covers the cost of landing the jacket sections from
the barge at the breakers yard or the flooding of the jacket legs and
ballast tanks at the offshore dump site.
Design and Project Management
This covers the quantity of hours required to carry out the design and
management of the decommissioning. Design man-hours are factored from the
weights and project management man-hours are factored from the design man-
hours.
QUE$TOR Offshore
293
Insurance
Certification
Contingency
Scrap
Pipeline Decommissioning
Pipeline Decommissioning
The pipeline decommissioning input sheet is based on the data from the pipeline
component.
QUE$TOR Help
294
Removal
The removal frame specifies the method used for the removal of the pipeline and
contains two options.
- Partial: only part of the installed length of pipeline is removed, leaving
the remainder in place on the seabed. The length removed is specified.
- Complete: removal of the entire pipeline length after decommissioning.
Any buried length is jetted free and the pipeline is cut at all crossings.
- Partial removal length: is the length of pipeline removed and is only
available when Partial is selected.
Disposal
The removal frame specifies the method used for the disposal of the pipeline and
contains two options. The disposal can be omitted using the checkbox.
- Dump: the removed pipeline is dumped at a deepwater location.
- Scrap: the removed pipeline is transported to shore for disposal as scrap.
- Distance to disposal: the distance between the pipeline installation site
and disposal site, i.e. the distance the pipeline is transported before
disposal.
Cleaning
QUE$TOR Offshore
295
The cleaning frame specifies the method used for the cleaning of the pipeline and
contains three options. The cleaning costs can be omitted using the checkbox.
- Flushing: all pipelines except water injection lines are flushed. The pipe
washings are stored in a tanker prior to treatment and disposal.
- Pigging: additional cleaning by the use of scraping pigs.
- Chemical: additional cleaning by the use of chemicals, all pipelines must
be flushed prior to chemical cleaning.
Details
Clicking on Details in the pipeline decommissioning input panel opens the details
form.
This form gives the details of the pipeline including the flow type, length, material
and wall thickness. These details are taken from the pipeline being
decommissioned.
Pipeline Decommissioning Cost Sheet
The pipeline decommissioning cost estimate sheet is displayed on the right hand
side of the screen when pipeline decommissioning is open. The cost estimate
sheet displays a breakdown of every cost item included. The decommissioning
QUE$TOR Help
296
inputs are used to calculate the quantities shown on the cost estimate. The unit
rates are determined by the procurement strategy. The costs are generally based
on a simple weight x unit rate = cost relationship. It is possible to go to any
blue number in the cost sheet and make any appropriate changes to the
calculated weights or the unit rates.
Decommissioning / Removal
There are no additional materials or fabrication costs associated with pipeline
decommissioning therefore all costs are associated with the vessels used to
perform the removal, cleaning and disposal operations. Unit rates for all
vessels/spreads include equipment and vessel hire, support services, crew,
consumables and mobilisation/demobilisation.
- DSV: the durations include seabed pipeline disconnections (two per
pipeline), cutting the pipeline on each side of a pipeline crossing, general
support, mobilisation and demobilisation.
- Pigging and pumping: pigging of the pipeline during cleaning requires
independent pumping. The duration is a function of pipeline length, type
and diameter.
- Flushing and chemicals: flushing and chemical cleaning requires
independent pumping. The duration is a function of pipeline length, type
and diameter.
QUE$TOR Offshore
297
- Jetting: buried pipelines are jetted free before lifting. The jetting
spread's duration allows for mobilisation/ demobilisation, a duration per
buried kilometre of pipe (taken from the Input Data sheet and weather
downtime).
- Pipelay: pipe lifting operation is essentially the reverse of laying. The
duration allows for mobilisation/demobilisation, lifting, removal of areas of
coatings prior to cutting, inerting and weather downtime.
- Tanker: is on station for the duration of the pipeline cleaning and takes
all pipeline washings and residues.
- Surveys: a survey is required of the whole pipeline length prior to lifting.
A duration and cost are assigned as a function of length.
- Waste disposal: covers the cost of treatment and disposal of the
pipeline washings and residue. The cost should be assigned by the user to
reflect local conditions. The default cost is zero.
Design and Project Management
- This covers the quantity of hours required to carry out the design and
management of the decommissioning. Design man-hours are factored
from the weights and project management man-hours are factored from
the design man-hours.
Insurance
Certification
Contingency
QUE$TOR Help
298
Scrap
299
QUE$TOR Onshore
Modelling an Onshore Field
QUE$TOR Structure
QUE$TOR is structured around a field development schematic (FDS) which allows
users to create a visualisation of the development. The FDS is driven by a
number of high level inputs which allow the development conditions to be
specified. The basic program calculation sequence followed in QUE$TOR to
generate a full life-cycle field or prospect development cost estimate is shown
below.
To define the new project, QUE$TOR presents you with a series of forms that
allow high level parameters of the development to be specified. Once you have
QUE$TOR Help
300
reviewed and adjusted as necessary the default inputs in each form, click on OK
to apply the inputs and move on to the next form. Click on Cancel to go back to
the previous form and adjust any changes made.
On starting each new project you will be led through the first four stages shown
above. Each of these stages will be populated with default values based upon
your choices in the previous stage.
When the concept selector is completed, QUE$TOR will generate a complete cost
estimate immediately made up of a series of components, e.g. production facility,
terminal facility, wellpad groups, drilling and pipelines.
These components are all live linked to each other so that a change to one
component will change all dependent components, e.g. terminal facility cost is
dependent on the production facility exports. You can enter and update these
components and fix inputs so that they are no longer updated by the program.
This is called locking. Although you can edit components in any order you
should try to follow a logical path to avoid locking variables based on incorrect
data. For example you should not lock the wellpad groups number of wells until
the drilling is fully defined. QUE$TORs order of calculation is explained more
fully in Data flow and locking.
OPEX and Scheduling take data from all components to generate field operating
costs (OPEX) and schedule the calculated capital and operating costs along with
the production profile to give an overall project investment profile.
Once on the FDS
such as production facilities and drilling. Each of these components will influence
or be dependent on the design of associated components. Components are linked
to those components from which they require data. There are also high level
parameters defined within QUE$TOR, such as reserves, which influence all
components.
field level data.
Project Properties
About Project Properties
QUE$TOR Onshore
301
The project properties is the starting point for defining a new project. It enables
you to specify the location of the project, the procurement strategy and technical
database to be used in the project and the preferred units.
Note: it is not possible to make changes in this screen once a project is
created. However the project editor does allow the procurement strategy and the
technical database to be changed once the project is saved.
Name: enter a name for the project here. This will be the default file name
when you save the project.
Units of Measure
The units of measure define the units that will appear, both in the project and the
reports. QUE$TOR has three built in unit sets, metric, imperial and oilfield which
are selected from the dropdown list.
QUE$TOR Help
302
Custom unit sets can be defined using the unit editor. To select a user defined
unit set, select the use custom unit set option button and use the Browse button
to locate it. The default location for custom unit sets is: My Documents \IHS
\QUE$TOR \Procurement Strategies.
Once in a project the units can be easily changed, for every input QUE$TOR
provides a choice of relevant units. However the units in the reports are fixed by
the choice of unit set.
Main Product
The main product can be either oil or gas, the volume of the secondary product,
e.g. associated gas when oil is selected, is defined by a ratio on the Field level
data form.
The default product type is set to the choice made in the last project you created,
or to oil when QUE$TOR is shipped.
Location
QUE$TOR contains a database of typical field characteristics, extracted from the
IHS IRIS21 E&P database. These are broken down on a basin by basin basis and
provide the default properties for the field. Whilst you can overwrite all these
characteristics, they can be useful if some data is unavailable.
Procurement Strategy
This allows you to select the regional databases to be used for each of the cost
centres for the new project. For example equipment could be sourced from North
America and design performed in Europe. The currency of the cost estimate can
also be defined.
The box displays existing procurement strategies which can be chosen by
selection.
To look for existing procurement strategies in a different folder, click on Browse.
Click on New to create a procurement strategy. When you create a new
procurement strategy QUE$TOR bases the default regional database on the
location selected. See Creating procurement strategies for more information.
Click on View to look an examine procurement strategy.
Click on Delete to delete the selected procurement strategy.
Note: QUE$TOR does not ship with any built in procurement strategies.
Technical Database
The technical database contains regional specific technical data such as
environmental data. QUE$TOR includes template databases for every onshore
region worldwide. The default database is based on the location chosen. To
change to a different database, click on Browse.
QUE$TOR Onshore
303
You will be prompted to choose whether you want to use a template database
supplied with QUE$TOR or use a custom database. See Technical Databases for
further information.
Once you have adjusted all inputs as necessary, click OK. This applies your
Creating Procurement Strategies
Procurement strategies allow you to choose different regional cost databases for
each cost centre. They can also be used to choose the currency for the cost
estimate. The cost data in each regional database is stored in either US dollars or
the local currency (for the UK, Norway and the Netherlands). When cost
databases are brought in to the procurement strategy QUE$TOR converts them
all in to US dollars. You can edit the exchange rate used for this conversion. You
can then choose a currency for the cost estimate and enter the exchange rate
from US dollars to this currency.
To create a new procurement strategy
1. Click Create new procurement strategy in the project properties form.
This opens the form shown below.
QUE$TOR Help
304
2. Select a region and country.
3. By default the cost database will be assigned a title which is the same as the
country selected. This can optionally be overwritten.
4. Click OK.
5. The procurement strategy definition form is displayed.
6. QUE$TOR has built in defaults for every country which it uses to choose
where cost centres are sourced from. To adjust the default region use the
dropdown lists.
QUE$TOR Onshore
305
7. Check the exchange rate for each database. Some cost databases are in
local currencies. In creating a procurement strategy QUE$TOR converts all
costs to US dollars. A default exchange rate is entered if the cost database is
in local currency but this should obviously be treated with care and edited to
reflect expected exchange rates. The rate should be in the form of local
currency to 1 US dollar, e.g. UK0.55 = US$1.
8. Define the currency in which you wish to cost your project. Enter a name
and a symbol (the symbol can have up to three characters). Enter an
exchange rate from US dollars. The rate should be in the form of the
specified currency to 1 US dollars, e.g. UK0.55 = US$1.
9. Click OK.
10. The new procurement strategy will now be available for selection in the
procurement strategy frame in the project properties form.
Field Level Data
About Field Level Data
The field level data form opens after the project properties if you are creating a
new project. If you are in an existing project you can open it by selecting Field
level data from the Project menu or clicking in the toolbar.
The field level data form allows specification of the overall field and reservoir
characteristics. All inputs have default values based on your chosen basin. These
are useful if you do not have some data available although the more accurate the
data the more accurate your cost estimate will be. The form has three tabs; Field
characteristics, Fluid / profile characteristics and Miscellaneous.
Once you have adjusted the input data on all tabs as necessary, click OK. This
applies your changes and closes the form to move on. Cancel will clear all
entries in the form and take you back a step.
Field Characteristics
The onshore field characteristics tab is shown below.
QUE$TOR Help
306
- Reserves: the total recoverable reserves for the field(s) covered by your
project. If you have specified the main product as gas, this is the gas
recoverable reserves. For oil projects it is the oil recoverable reserves.
- Condensate gas ratio / Gas oil ratio: for gas projects enter the
condensate gas ratio (CGR) and for oil projects the gas oil ratio (GOR).
The ratio should be in terms of recoverable reserves and is used to
determine the reserves and production profile of your secondary product
based on those of the main product.
- Reservoir depth: used to calculate drilling costs.
- Reservoir pressure: used in calculating wellhead and injection
pressures.
- Reservoir length and Reservoir width: used in conjunction with the
maximum drilling stepout to calculate the number of drilling centres
required to fully drain the reservoir.
- Water depth: measured from the lowest astronomical tide (LAT) and
strongly influences the development concept chosen.
- Terrain: the terrain type primarily affects the construction cost. The
terrain can be revised using the dropdown list box. Terrain options
available are; Arctic/Tundra, Desert, Grassland, Jungle, Mountain, Swamp
or Urban.
- Elevation: elevation of the field above sea level. This is used to
determine the pipeline hydraulics and decide the ISO rated power
available from gas turbine drivers.
QUE$TOR Onshore
307
Fluid / Profile Characteristics
The fluid/profile characteristics tab is shown below.
Liquid Data
- Oil density: the crude or condensate API at stock tank conditions is used
in conjunction with the GOR/LGR and the gas molecular weight to
generate a pseudo composition for the wellstream fluid. This is used in
the topsides component for sizing the separators.
- Waxy crude: when selected pig launchers will be selected for within the
wellpad group component.
Gas Data
- Gas molecular weight: used to define the gas composition in the oil and
gas processing modules of the topsides.
Note: The gas molecular weight entered is for the hydrocarbon
plus acid gas components. If you change the default acid gas
QUE$TOR Help
308
content you should consider adjusting the gas molecular weight as
increasing the acid gas content without increasing the gas molecular
weight effectively decreases the molecular weight of the hydrocarbon
portion of the gas.
- CO
2
content and H
2
S content: the gas H
2
S and CO
2
contents are used
in the topsides component for selection of the materials (carbon steel or
stainless steel), corrosion allowances and the gas sweetening option.
They are also used to choose casing, conductor and Xmas tree costs in
drilling. Here stainless steel is used in preference to the cheaper carbon
steel if CO
2
content is greater than 3%.
Well Data
- Productivity: used to generate the production well count and relates to
the total production of a well over the field life.
- Peak well flow: used to determine the plateau production rate which is
also based on the percentage of reserves extracted at peak and estimated
drilling durations. The peak well flow should be entered on a daily basis.
Miscellaneous
The miscellaneous tab is shown below.
QUE$TOR Onshore
309
Miscellaneous Items
- Distance to operations base: used to determine the cost of logistics
(transportation of men and consumables) in OPEX.
- Distance to delivery point: used in the concept selector to determine
the export route.
Layout
- Maximum well deviation: used in conjunction with the reservoir extent
to determine the number of drilling centres required to drain the whole of
the reservoir.
- Maximum drilling stepout: used in conjunction with the reservoir
extent to determine the number of drilling centres required to drain the
whole of the reservoir.
Artificial Lift
Artificial lift can be carried out using either gas lift or by using pumps and is only
available when oil is selected as the primary product.
If gas lift is selected then the gas lift capacity is set to achieve a GOR at the
surface of 1000scf/bbl. When pumps are selected their is a choice between three
pump types; downhole electric, downhole hydraulic and beam.
QUE$TOR Help
310
Temperature
- Minimum ambient air temperature: used in the hydraulics calculation
for liquid pipelines.
- Maximum ambient air temperature: used to calculate a derating
factor for gas turbine driven compressors and power generation
packages. The calculated power requirement is then divided by the
derating factor to calculate the ISO equivalent power requirement for any
gas turbines.
Production Profile
About Production Profiles
The production profile opens after the field level data if you are creating a new
project, if you are in an existing project you can open it by selecting Production
Profile from the Project menu or clicking in the toolbar.
The production profile consists of a series of five forms which allow you to define
the production profile as well as the capacities of your facilities, the number of
wells and the wellhead conditions.
Once you have completed adjusting each form click OK. This applies your
Production Profile Edit
QUE$TOR will generate a default profile based on the reserves, well productivity
and well peak flow rate. The initial ramp-up duration is calculated based on 8
wells being drilled a year whilst plateau production is assumed to last until 55%
of the recoverable reserves have been produced. QUE$TOR assumes that the
field will be on-stream for 350 days a year, allowing for an annual two week
maintenance period. The production profile edit form, shown below, allows you
to modify QUE$TORs initial estimates to shape the generated production profile
as required.
QUE$TOR Onshore
311
Once these values have been adjusted, click OK to progress to the production
profile. You can still go back to the production profile edit form by clicking on
Modify Profile below the production profile.
Production Profile
The production profile form gives the user a visual representation of the
production profile as specified in the production profile edit form.
QUE$TOR Help
312
The production profile is displayed in a graphical and tabular format. Click on the
appropriate tab to display either the liquid or gas profiles. Use the dropdown lists
to select which graph is displayed on each tab. The tabular data can be
overwritten either individually or by pasting in a profile from a spreadsheet.
Tip: Ensure that the field life specified in the production profile edit form is
the same as that of the profile you are pasting in. You cannot overwrite the
cumulative row of the table. You can also copy the data in the production profile
and paste it into an external spreadsheet.
If you wish to change the reserves or any other field level data, click on Field
data to go back to the field level data form.
In an oil project, changes to the oil profile are automatically reflected in the gas
profile (using the input GOR) and similarly with gas projects the liquids profile
reflects the numbers input for gas. The reverse is not true, i.e. the oil is not back
calculated if a new gas profile is entered in an oil project.
Note: The daily production rate is based on 350 onstream days, unless
otherwise specified in the Production profile edit form.
To preview a printout of the graphs and tables, click above the Oil and Gas
tabs then click in the print preview toolbar to print the selected graph and
QUE$TOR Onshore
313
table. Alternatively the profiles can be printed by clicking on above the Oil
and Gas tabs. Clicking OK continues with the development configuration.
If the production profile entered results in cumulative production differing by
>1% from the total recoverable reserves entered in the field level data a warning
will be displayed when you click OK, shown below. Click OK to continue with the
entered profile or Cancel to go back and edit the values. If you continue with the
profile, the recoverable reserves entered in the field level data will be ignored.
Design Flowrates
The design oil and gas processing and injection rates are set on the Design
flowrates form, see below. Here the daily average from the peak production year
is brought forward from the production profile. A design factor (for oil projects)
or a swing factor (for gas projects) is applied to calculate the design capacity
used for equipment sizing. Entering a new design factor or swing factor
automatically recalculates the design rates.
QUE$TOR Help
314
Reservoir pressure maintenance can be specified as either water injection or gas
injection by entering the relevant flowrates. Set the flowrate to zero if it is not
required.
For oil projects gas injection is selected as the default method of gas disposal if
the daily associated gas production rate is between 5 and 200 MMscf/day. Water
injection is selected by default as the means of reservoir pressure maintenance
for oil projects.
The water injection capacity factor is a multiplier applied to the design oil
production flowrate to calculate the water injection design flow, this defaults to
1.2 for an oil project.
Neither gas or water injection are included by default for gas projects.
Number of Wells
The number of development wells form, shown below, provides the estimated
number of wells required across the field to achieve the specified profile but you
can modify the well count. The default number of production wells is based on
the well lifetime productivity. The default number of water injection wells
assumes an average of two injectors for every five oil production wells. Gas
injectors are based on an average flowrate of 30 MMscf/day per well.
Wellhead Conditions
The Wellhead conditions form, shown below, provides the conditions of all the
possible wellhead steams.
QUE$TOR Onshore
315
- Design wellhead pressure: calculated from the reservoir pressure
assuming a homogeneous mixture of oil and gas for a no flow condition.
- Flowing wellhead pressure: calculated from the reservoir pressure
assuming a homogeneous mixture of oil and gas allowing for a frictional
pressure drop in the production tubing.
- Flowing wellhead temperature: calculated based on the reservoir
depth. With an allowance for a geothermal gradient of 2C per 100m.
- Water injection pressure: set at 60% of the reservoir pressure and is
used to in production facilities when sizing the water injection pumps.
- Gas injection pressure: based on the reservoir pressure with an
allowance for the hydraulic pressure of the gas injection column and an
over pressure allowance. It is used to in production facilities when sizing
the gas injection compressors.
- Gas lift pressure: based on the reservoir pressure with an allowance for
the hydraulic pressure of the gas injection column. It is used to in
production facilities when sizing the gas lift compressors.
Concept Selector
About the Concept Selector
The concept selector opens after the production profile if you are creating a new
project. If you are in an existing project you can open it by selecting Concept
selector from the Project menu or clicking in the toolbar.
It must be recognised that whilst QUE$TORs default concept selection is very
useful, the software does not take all the factors into account that would
ultimately influence a final concept selection. In some instances a concept may
be returned that, based on the generic software logic, is very reasonable but
when compared to your real life field situation might appear somewhat
surprising. Having said that, time and effort has gone into making the selection
process as comprehensive and realistic as possible.
QUE$TOR Help
316
Concept Selection for New Projects
The concept selector form, shown below, gives you the option to define your own
concept or use a predefined concept.
QUE$TOR will choose a default concept based on the field level data and
production profile. You can change this to another of the 6 Predefined concepts
using the list box. Alternatively you can select Blank Concept from the list box
and use the field development schematic to create your own concept. The key
input parameters that influence the selection most are: hydrocarbon type,
reservoir extent, water depth, distance to delivery point, and the number of wells.
The gas export and oil export frames allow you to specify the oil and gas export
method from the main platform. Again QUE$TOR will choose a default concept
QUE$TOR Onshore
317
but you can select an alternative using the list boxes. Distances to delivery point
should also be entered for pipeline export to determine length of the export
pipelines.
Once you have completed adjusting the form click OK. This applies your
changes, closes the form and opens the field development schematic. Cancel
will clear all entries in the form and take you back a step.
Concept Selection for Existing Projects
When the concept selector is opened from an existing projects it has two tabs,
New and Last selected, as shown below.
QUE$TOR Help
318
The Last selected tab is not editable but displays the concept being used by
QUE$TOR at that time.
The New tab will display QUE$TORs default concept selection. This may be
different to the last selected concept if you have changed the field level data or
production profile. The New tab also allows you to choose a different concept. To
use the concept selected on the New tab click OK. This will delete all existing
components and create a new set of components. To exit without changing the
concept click Cancel.
Note: When you create a new concept you will lose any changes you have
made to the components in the original field development plan.
The concept is never changed automatically. If you make changes to the field
level data or production profile that trigger a change to QUE$TORs default
concept the concept will only be changed if you open the concept selector and
click OK on the New tab. A warning is displayed, see below, to caution you that
you have chosen to replace the current development concept with the new
concept. The warning then gives a description of the new concept selected in
brackets
If you want to use the new concept click Yes. If you want to keep your existing
development concept click No, to return you to the previous form, then Cancel.
This is to prevent QUE$TOR deleting your changes to components in the field
development schematic (FDS). Any changes to the field level data or production
profile are passed automatically to all components in the FDS, e.g. changing the
plateau production rate will change the production capacity of the topsides, but
the concept will remain fixed.
About Component Level Data
QUE$TOR calculates capital costs based on default inputs for every component as
soon as it is added to the field development schematic (FDS). You can then open
any of these components and adjust the inputs to refine the cost estimate. The
default inputs are chosen based upon the region selected, your inputs in the field
level details and other linked components. The default inputs are designed to
give you a reasonable cost estimate in the absence of further data.
QUE$TOR Onshore
319
The components are all live linked to each other so that a change to one
component will change all dependent components. You can enter and update
these components and fix inputs so that they are no longer updated by the
program. This is called locking. Although you can edit components in any order
you should try to follow a logical path to avoid locking variables based on
incorrect data. QUE$TORs order of calculation is explained fully see Data flow
and locking.
Cost Summary Tree
The cost summary tree can be seen in the panel to the left of the FDS. This
displays a running total of the total project cost together with a breakdown of
each component cost. By default, the tree is displayed in expanded format, i.e.
for all components the cost for each cost centre is displayed. If you want to see
just the total cost of each component right click in this panel and select Collapse
all.
The tree is updated automatically as components are added, deleted and
adjusted.
Component Toolbar
The components toolbar displays the components which can be used to create a
development configuration. There are three tabs available in the components
QUE$TOR Help
320
toolbar Offshore, Onshore and LNG Regasification. When starting a new
project QUE$TOR will acquire only the licence for the type of development being
created. This initial licence is called the primary licence, the example below
illustrates a new offshore project. The green circle indicates the active
procurement strategies that QUE$TOR is currently using. The example below
illustrates an offshore only project and therefore only the offshore tab has a
green circle.
The Offshore tab displays the offshore components available in QUE$TOR the
Onshore tab however will not yet contain any components since the licence has
not been activated.
To add onshore components the licence must be activated, to do this click Add
onshore project. QUE$TOR will locate the onshore licence, when it is located
the onshore components will become active and the Onshore tab will now display
the onshore components.
A green circle has now appeared on the Onshore tab to indicate an onshore
procurement strategy is selected and is ready to be used. As LNG regas onshore
uses the onshore procurement strategy a green circle will appear on the LNG
regas onshore tab as well.
Note: Once acquired QUE$TOR will not release a licence until the program
is closed.
Similarly, to add a LNG regasification component, the licence must be activated.
To do this click Add LNG regasification onshore project, QUE$TOR will
locate the LNG regasification licence, when it is located the LNG regas onshore
tab will become active and will display the LNG regas onshore components.
Some components have a drop down next to them, these can have one of two
functions:
QUE$TOR Onshore
321
- Some components are available in different variations e.g. a spar buoy
component can be a caisson, truss or cell spar buoy. To change the
component type selected use the dropdown arrow to the right of the
component button, the type selected is indicated by the marker dot. The
components this applies to are: Jackets, GBS, TLP, Spar Buoy, Offshore
Loading and Terminal Facilities.
- For Topsides, Production facilities and Regasification terminal facilities this
dropdown allows the functions of the component to be defined. This can
also be done within these components. To change the component type
selected use the dropdown arrow to the right of the component button,
the functions present are ticked.
Field Development Schematic
The field development schematic gives a graphical representation of the project
and allows the selected concept to be refined.
To add components to the FDS
Select a component from the Component toolbar by left clicking on it. If you
require a different component type to that selected, use the dropdown button to
change the type before clicking on the component button. Move the cursor onto
the FDS and left click again to drop the component in the required position.
To select a group of components on the FDS
Groups of components can be selected by left clicking with the mouse and holding
down to drag over all required components before releasing. These groups can
be moved or deleted.
To move a component or group of components
QUE$TOR Help
322
Left click on a component or group of components and hold down to drag to a
new position.
To delete a component or group of components
Either select the component(s) with a left mouse click and hit delete or right click
on the component and select Delete. You will be asked to confirm any deletions
to prevent any components being inadvertently deleted.
To open a component
To open and adjust a components cost estimate, double click on it or right click
on it and select Edit/View Cost Estimate. See the relevant component chapter
for more information.
Pipelines & Linking Components
The Link button enables components to be linked together. This can represent
pipelines e.g. between platforms but can also be used as an information link e.g.
linking drilling to a wellpad group. To link two components:
- Ensure the two components you wish to connect are on screen.
- Select the link button in the components toolbar.
- Left click the first component you wish to connect in the link then click
again on the second component.
The order in which components are linked should generally follow the sequence of
oil/gas production, i.e. drilling to wellpad group or production facility and not the
other way round. If you cant complete a link, hit the escape key and retry in the
opposite direction.
The link will be displayed in one of three colours:
- Black: A pipeline link. There can be one or more pipelines in each link.
- Blue: Used to link wellpad group components to production facilities. This
link is for passing data only. All flowline costs are included in the wellpad
group component.
- Green: Used to link drilling components to wellpad groups. This link is for
passing data only
Links become red when selected and can be deleted by hitting delete or right
clicking and selecting Delete link.
Pipelines
To add a pipeline to a link, double click on the link and click on Add in the
Pipeline linking form, shown below. The form enables you to specify the pipeline
length and maximum water depth. Pipelines can then be sized and costed by
selecting them and clicking Cost. For more information, see Onshore Pipelines.
There can be multiple pipelines in each link. All pipelines in a link are assumed to
follow exactly the same route. Pipelines in the same pipeline link can flow in
QUE$TOR Onshore
323
either direction. To change flow direction or fluid type right click on the link and
select Show all pipelines in the link or double click on the link.
Well and Flow Distribution
QUE$TOR divides the wells and flows specified in the production profile between
the components in the field development schematic. Wells are divided up first
and flows are then allocated on a per well basis.
Production, water injection and gas injection wells are divided equally between all
drilling components. The three projects shown below, all have a total of 11
producers specified in the production profiles. The well distribution is illustrated
in each figure.
QUE$TOR Help
324
This shows a project with two drilling components. The wells are split between
the two drilling components with the extra well going to the first drilling
component..
This shows a the same project but the number wells has been fixed at eight for
the second drilling rig. Therefore the remaining three wells have been given to
the remaining drilling component.
Note: Changes to the number of wells or the flowrates in a wellpad group
component will not be passed to any linked drilling component but they will be
passed to any linked production facility.
QUE$TOR Onshore
325
Water and gas injection wells are allocated on the same basis as production wells.
Adding a new drilling component or adding wells to an existing drilling
components will re-allocate the wells and reduce the number of wells in all other
unlocked drilling components. The total number of wells will be maintained at the
number specified in the production profile. If there is only one drilling component
or if all other drilling components are locked then adding wells will increase the
total wells. Deleting wells follows the same methodology in reverse. Any change
to the total wells in the drilling and subsea components will not be passed back to
the production profile but will be included in all capital and operating cost
estimates. See Data flow and locking for more information on the calculation
hierarchy.
Flowrate allocation is done on a per well basis. The design capacities specified in
the production profile are divided by the number of wells in the production profile
to give a flowrate per well. If you increase the total wells in the field schematic
then the total flowrate will be increased as the flow per well is based on the
number of wells and design capacity specified in the production profile. The same
applies in reverse if you decrease the total wells in the field schematic.
Flows from drilling components are passed from component to component in the
direction of production. Gas injection and water injection flowrates are handled in
the same fashion despite physically flowing in the opposite direction. Their
flowrates are determined in the drilling component and passed in the direction of
production to calculate the injection facilities required at the relevant production
facility.
Note: The flowrates from the manifold will not be passed to the main
production facility unless there is an appropriate pipeline in the link, the flowrate
will be automatically used to size the pipeline.
If a production facility with only manifolding has a water injection pipeline coming
from a main (full) production facility then QUE$TOR assumes that all pumping is
at the main facility. If you add water injection to the manifold then QUE$TOR will
reduce the pumping capacity at the main facility accordingly. Gas injection and
gas lift compression is always assumed to be done exclusively at the main facility.
Note: Even though injection fluids physically flow from the main platform to
the reservoir information on their flowrates is passed in the opposite direction. If
you wish to change injection flowrates change them in the drilling components
and the topsides component will be automatically updated.
Onshore Cost Centres
Onshore components costs are broken down into seven cost centres which are
used to divide the cost sheet. Each of these cost centres is described below with
the corresponding section of the cost sheet from the onshore user defined
component i.e. a blank cost sheet.
Equipment Costs
QUE$TOR Help
326
used in areas where high acid gas contents are experienced.
Equipment costs cover the vendor's cost for fabrication of the equipment, any
procurement of sub-components and sub-vendor's submission to approval
authorities and testing at the vendor's works. Direct procurement costs are
included in the design cost centre.
A freight cost is then added which is assumed by QUE$TOR to be a percentage of
the total cost of the equipment identified in the systems listed above. It includes
the cost of packaging and transporting equipment from the manufacturer to the
construction yard. You can modify the freight percentage, the default is
dependent on where the equipment is procured 'in region' or 'out of region' i.e. is
the item being procured from the same region as the field location.
Materials Costs
Material costs cover all the bulk materials permanently installed with the
component. The costs cover delivery, insurance, guarantees and duties.
There are six main categories for the bulk materials:
- Steel: covers all the necessary steelwork to erect and install the
equipment specified. This includes all prefabricated skids, main truss
framing, outfitting steel for walkways, platforms etc.
QUE$TOR Onshore
327
- Piping: covers the cost of all necessary piping and manually operated
valves required to connect all the equipment together. It includes a range
of pipeline sizes and different materials and includes all pipe rack and pipe
supports required. The piping cost is calculated by applying factors to
each of the equipment system weights, summing these and applying a
unit rate dependent on material selection to give a total cost.
- Electrical: Covers cost of all necessary electrical cabling required to
connect the equipment together. It includes all junction boxes but
excludes transformers and switch gear which are included in the item
'power generation distribution'. It also includes all cabling racking and
ties. The electrical cost is calculated by applying factors to each of the
equipment systems weights, summing these to give a total weight and
applying a unit rate to get the total cost.
- Instrument: Covers the cost of all necessary instrumentation to operate
and control the equipment. It includes all control valves, sensors, gauges,
instrumentation, control panels and instrumentation cabling. The
instrument cost is calculated by applying factors to each of the equipment
systems weights, summing these to give a total weight and applying a unit
rate to get the total cost.
- Others: Covers HVAC, architectural, insulation and painting. The others
cost is calculated by the program by applying factors to each of the
equipment systems weights, summing these and applying a unit rate to
give a total cost.
- Civils: Covers all the bulk materials necessary to construct the
foundations, buildings and vehicular access areas including all concrete,
reinforcement hardcore, gravel, surfacing, etc. The unit rate is dependent
on the relative areas for foundations, roads and general civils preparation.
A freight cost is added to these in a similar method to the equipment freight
costs.
Prefabrication Costs
The prefabrication weights are defined by the type and percentages specified in
the Prefabrication tab of the component user interface, and are updated in the
cost estimate sheet as each sub-component is adjusted. The prefabrication costs
include all prefabrication activities, from receipt and storage of materials,
fabrication, assembly, testing and precommissioning to weighing, including any
off-site fabrication (not vendor-supplied skids).
QUE$TOR Help
328
The line items identified cover equipment and the six material costs. Unit rates
for each identified group are retrieved from the procurement strategy. Clicking
on the hyperlinked prefabrication heading will open up the prefabrication
breakdown giving details of how the prefabrication costs are calculated, see
Prefabrication Details for more information.
A percentage is applied to these costs to cover the load out and transportation
costs associated with getting the items to the development site from the
prefabrication site.
Construction Costs
The construction costs cover all on-site construction and are updated in the cost
estimate sheet as each sub-component is adjusted. Unit rates for each identified
group are retrieved from the procurement strategy.
The construction costs vary by component but some line items are common to
most onshore components, these are:
- Site preparation: covers the preparation of the site and is a total area
based on the area calculated in the civils sub-component. The cost
includes for all preparation work required prior to construction, e.g.
clearing and levelling of jungle.
- Civils: covers the construction of all equipment specified and is a based
on the total foundations area.
- Skid/spool erection: covers the construction of prefabricated items and
is based on the total weight of all equipment and materials identified as
prefabricated.
- Steelwork: covers the construction of the associated equipment
steelwork and is based on the total weight of steelwork minus that
proportion which is prefabricated.
- Piping: covers the construction of the associated equipment piping and is
based on the total weight of piping minus that proportion which is
prefabricated.
- Electrical: covers the construction of the associated equipment
electronics and is based on the total electrical weight minus that
QUE$TOR Onshore
329
- Instruments: covers the construction of the associated equipment
instruments and is based on the total weight of instruments minus that
- Others: covers the construction of the other associated equipment and is
based on the total weight of others minus that proportion which is
prefabricated.
Clicking on the hyperlinked prefabrication heading will open up the prefabrication
breakdown giving details of how the prefabrication costs are calculated, see
Design and Project Management Costs
Covers the hours of the component designers and project management:
- Design hours: Covers the design hours required from conceptual design
time through to installation at the location. This includes project
specification, special studies, detail design, follow-on engineering,
purchasing, expediting and inspection services, project control, QA and
documentation during the detailed design phase. It incorporates all
wages, salaries and other benefits paid to personnel, payroll burdens,
insurance, general overheads (office facilities, utility services, depreciation
of facilities and equipment and administration), project expenses and
equipment. It includes vendor data delivery of items to the yard,
insurance up to delivery, guarantees and import duties. Design man-
hours are factored from the weight of equipment and bulk materials, the
storage capacity and civils area.
- Project management hours: Covers the project management hours
team costs to manage, monitor and control all phases of the component.
It includes management, project engineering, project control and
planning, design and construction supervision, quality assurance and third
party liaison. This covers from the conceptual design stage through to
first oil. Project management man-hours are factored from the design
man-hours.
Insurance and Certification Costs
Covers the costs of insuring and certifying the components
QUE$TOR Help
330
- Insurance: Covers insurance for all project components during
transportation, construction, installation and testing and commissioning.
Personnel liability insurance is covered in the respective cost centres.
- Certification: Covers all certification costs of the design, materials and
construction of the development by a recognised certifying authority.
Contingency
The contingency is a fixed percentage of the total above costs and brings the cost
estimate to a P50 level. For a fuller explanation see Contingency Definitions.
There are four possible tabs: Onshore, Offshore, LNG regas onshore plus a
types in use in QUE$TOR. If it is an onshore only development then the onshore
sheet will be displayed. If both onshore and offshore developments are present
then an offshore, an Onshore and a summary tab will be displayed.
QUE$TOR Onshore
331
Print Preview: activates the report builder wizard to preview the reports.
Applying a Change to a Range of Cells
A number of the calculations within OPEX use the same calculation for each year
of the operation, with the option to change each year's basis individually. To
allow quick duplication of this change to other years a change to a cell within
OPEX can be applied to other cells within a row using the "fill right" or "fill left"
options.
To use this feature options:
1. Make the desired change to the cell.
2. Select the range of cells that you want to apply the change to.
3. Right click on these cells and select "fill right" to apply the value in the
leftmost cell to the range of cells or "fill left" to apply the value in the
rightmost cell to the range of cells.
The OPEX module released differs significantly from the rest of QUE$TOR. It is
not live linked into other parts of QUE$TOR. If changes are made to any
QUE$TOR Help
332
component you must create a new OPEX analysis to bring these changes into the
OPEX analysis. This will mean losing any changes you have made to the
operating costs. The same principles apply if components are added or deleted or
if the production profile is changed. All default values in the OPEX analysis are
taken from the databases specified in the procurement strategy.
you adjust defaults in the databases for faster results
field schematic.
Operating Personnel
This covers the permanent manning levels required by the developments. In
onshore developments wellpad, production facility, terminal facility and pipeline
manning requirements are specified. These numbers are shown in the Operating
taken from the procurement strategy. The wellpad groups and production
facilities operating personnel sheet is shown below.
QUE$TOR Onshore
333
The permanent manning levels on each facility are passed from the production
facility components. These numbers are shown in the Operating personnel
window along with the Shift rotation pattern and annual Cost per man taken from
the procurement strategy. The drilling crew and associated support staff are
excluded from these numbers as their costs are included within the drilling day
rate used in the drilling components.
The operating personnel cost is based on the number of permanent crew onsite
with allowance for a replacement crew or crews on leave according to the rotation
pattern. The Days onsite 2 and Days offsite 2 inputs allow you to specify more
than one shift pattern. The Cost per man covers salaries, expenses, payroll
burden, etc but excludes transport to and from the platform.
Inspection and maintenance window.
QUE$TOR Help
334
Maintenance.
Inspection is based on contract labour or services to complete periodic inspection
and includes for equipment vendor representatives and specialist inspection staff
in addition to the permanent maintenance crew. For pipelines inspection
specialist teams and equipment are hired.
Clicking on Logistics and consumables in the OPEX summary opens the
Logistics and consumables summary window.
Clicking on Consumables costs in the OPEX summary opens the Consumables
window.
QUE$TOR Onshore
335
Fuel Gas
The electrical power load and gas turbine driver duties for all facilities are brought
forward from the component estimates. From these power loads, fuel gas
requirements are calculated using typical efficiencies for power generation sets
and gas turbine drivers and the number of onstream days. The cost of fuel gas is
only included for projects where gas is exported and is then charged at sales gas
value. Where all produced gas is flared or re-injected into the reservoir it is
assumed the gas has no value.
Diesel
generators, cranes, fire pump testing, etc.
Chemicals
The cost of chemicals consumed in the field is split into three operations:
production chemicals with consumption based on the oil flowrate for oil projects
and the gas flow rate for gas projects, water injection chemicals, with
consumption, based on the water injection rate, and well chemicals with
consumption based on the number of wells. Consumption rates are taken from
the operating expenditure technical database.
cost database.
Clicking on Logistics costs in the OPEX summary opens the Logistics window.
QUE$TOR Help
336
Transportation
The personnel transportation costs for each grade are dependent on the Distance
travelled from their home, the Frequency with which each trip is made, the
Method of transport and the Number of Men. The first three values are picked up
from the regional technical database. The number of men is picked up from the
Operating Personnel sheet. To revise the method of transportation click on the
dropdown arrow against Method and select either Road, Rail or Air.
The cost to transport consumables to the field is dependent on the Transportation
(% of consumable cost) and the Cost of Consumables. The first value is picked
up from the regional technical database and varies according to the method of
transportation selected for other labour. The cost of consumables (excluding
fuel gas and power from the grid) is picked up from the Consumables sheet.
Messing
Messing costs (cost of providing food and cleaning) are dependent on the Cost
per man day and the Total Men at Site. The first value is picked up from the
regional technical database and the second from the Operating Personnel sheet.
Vehicles
Vehicle lease costs are dependent on the Cost per vehicle and the Number of
Vehicles. The first value is picked up from the regional technical database and is
based on a vehicle pay back period of three years, the second is dependent on
the number of personnel in the field.
QUE$TOR Onshore
337
Well Costs
The cost of well operations such as wirelining and workover for each type of well
(oil producer, gas producer, water injector or gas injector) are calculated. The
cost and duration of each activity is dependent on the type of rig used to perform
the operation.
This shows the annual cost for all routine and non-routine well maintenance
operations. Non routine well maintenance includes all activities which require a
rig to pull the production tubing, e.g. workovers. Routine well maintenance
covers the cost of maintaining all well systems such as kill and control and
includes through tubing workovers (TTWO), pressure seal test, tubing caliper
runs, tubing clean out and downhole surveys.
The well costs window contains the Material cost per operation, the Rig rate,
Interval between operations, and the Duration of each operation. All wells are
assumed to be in operation from year 1, and the interval period starts counting
from that date. The duration includes for weather downtime but excludes
mobilisation/ demobilisation.
The rig rate includes for vessel hire, labour, consumables, and logistics for each
of the drilling options.
Insurance
Annual insurance costs are determined as a percentage of the capital costs. The
percentages are applied to the total component capital cost, assuming complete
QUE$TOR Help
338
component replacement with an identical item and can be viewed and modified
by clicking on Insurance costs. This displays the Insurance window.
Field/Project OPEX
Support
QUE$TOR Onshore
339
- Administration: covers the cost of supervising and pay-rolling the
operating crews. The cost is determined as a percentage of personnel
costs.
- Warehousing: includes for a secure warehouse and open storage area to
store key spare equipment, piping and valves. The rate includes labour
costs and office accommodation. The cost is determined as a percentage
of personnel costs.
- Corporate support: covers on going project support by management and
engineering staff at head office. The cost is determined as a percentage of
personnel costs.
- Personnel costs: are read from the personnel cost section of the OPEX
sheet.
- Infrastructure support: covers the annual maintenance and repair of
the infrastructure. The cost is determined as a percentage of the
infrastructure capital costs.
Land Costs
Land Costs are dependent on the area and whether the land is purchased, rented
or acquired at no cost. To revise the method of payment click on the dropdown
arrow against Land Costs and select either Rent, Purchase or None. If the land is
purchased a one-off payment in Year 1 is assumed.
Land Cost per m
2
is dependent on the method of land payment and applied
equally to all land.
The areas shown for production facilities and wellpad groups, terminals and
pipeline booster stations are the total Site Preparation areas read from the
corresponding component cost sheets.
Over-writing any input value automatically results in the costs being updated.
Tariffs
oil and gas profiles on which tariffs can be paid. These default to the field export
profiles but you can overwrite them. You can also include profiles on which tariffs
can be received.
Oil transportation tariffs are included by default if export is via an existing
pipeline.
processing and transportation of the oil and gas streams.
QUE$TOR Help
340
CAPEX Scheduling
contracting techniques and practices.
Project menu.
QUE$TOR Onshore
341
QUE$TOR Help
342
Distributions
QUE$TOR Onshore
343
Intra-component Relationships
QUE$TOR includes default relationships between each activity within a
component. In the example shown above, procurement of jacket materials lags
the beginning of jacket design by three months; jacket fabrication lags the
beginning of design by six months and jacket installation starts at the end of
fabrication. Jacket project management begins with start of the first activity and
ends with the end of the last activity. Whilst different components have different
activities the same principles still apply.
The start date and duration of each activity can be edited by either adjusting the
values in the table or moving or resizing the scheduling bars. If you change an
activity on which the start dates of other components are dependent then all
these activities will move to maintain the default lag.
These default relationships only apply in one direction. In the example above,
moving design will move all other activities. Moving materials will move
fabrication, installation and project management but will not affect design. In
general each activity is dependent on an activity that starts before it. Moving an
activity will affect all dependent activities that start after it but will break any
links with activities that start before it. Project management has slightly different
rules in that it will always start when the first activity starts and end when the
last activity ends.
Note: The default schedule for the user defined component uses the
defaults for a lightweight topsides. You will probably need to adjust it.
Inter-component Relationships
QUE$TOR Help
344
QUE$TOR considers a default set of relationships between components when
generating a project schedule. These relationships between components are
considered as links between activities within each component. The object of
these default relationships is to delay expenditure on each component as far as
possible without pushing back the first oil date. For example in a typical platform
development, the time to first oil will generally be the time from design to final
commissioning of the main topsides. So in this situation QUE$TOR will schedule
pipeline installation to finish at the same time as topsides hook-up. Inter-
component relationships behave in a similar fashion to intra-component
relationships. Moving an activity will move all dependent components but the link
will not apply in reverse. Moving an activity will break any relationships with
activities in other components on which that activity is dependent.
To use the topsides and pipeline example, delaying the topsides by a year will
automatically delay the pipeline by a year but delaying the pipeline by a year will
not affect the topsides.
To reschedule a component with respect to the other components click on the
Project Management bar and slide it backwards or forwards as required. The
duration for all activities within the component remain as previously specified but
their start date changes.
In projects with multiple topsides QUE$TOR tends to schedule all pipelines to
finish with the main topsides. Delaying a wellhead platform may not delay the
pipelines linking it to the main topsides as you would expect. In these projects
you should be careful to review QUE$TORs scheduling assumptions and
potentially delay some in-field pipelines.
Locking
First Oil
QUE$TOR Onshore
345
Timescale
st
schedule will be lost.
QUE$TOR Help
346
About the Investment and Production Profile
QUE$TOR Onshore
347
The investment and production profile summarises the project costs: scheduled
CAPEX, OPEX and decommissioning costs along with the production profile. An
OPEX analysis and a CAPEX schedule will be automatically generated if you have
not already edited them.
and may be edited.
QUE$TOR Help
348
QUE$TOR Onshore
349
Onshore Components
About Onshore Components
On entering a component the input panel is shown in the bottom left of the
screen with the cost estimate sheet on the right hand side, the cost tree will
display the open component.
QUE$TOR Help
350
Cost Summary Tree
Input Panel
The input panel displays the inputs of the components and behave in a similar
manner to forms. Some input panels contain arrow buttons ( ) which when
clicked will open up a sub-component form e.g. Production facility Manifolding,
allowing more detailed specification. When new inputs are entered the cost
estimate and any other dependent values are not updated until Apply is clicked.
Apply will only be active if changes have been made to the inputs.
Cost Estimate Sheets
The cost estimate sheet displays a breakdown of every cost item included in the
component which are broken down under the QUE$TOR cost centres. The costs
are broken down into a quantity, usually a weight, and a unit rate. The
component inputs are used to calculate the quantities and the unit rates are
determined by the procurement strategy. The costs are generally based on a
quantities or the unit rates.
Some sheets have blue underlined values. Clicking on these will open a more
detailed cost estimate sheet in a new window.
QUE$TOR Onshore
351
Clicking on OK will apply all changes to the component, close it and return you to
the FDS. Clicking on Cancel will exit the component without applying any
changes and return you to the FDS.
Production Facility
About Production Facilities
QUE$TOR defines a production facility as any series of unit operations which alter
the chemical or physical properties of the wellstream fluids.
The production facility component covers processing facilities for oil or gas
including manifolding, oil processing, gas processing, product storage, liquid
export and metering, gas compression and metering, water and gas injection,
utilities, power generation and distribution, control and communications, safety
systems, bulk materials, prefabrication, construction, design and project
management and insurance and certification.
from which weights are derived. The equipment weights are combined into
system weights and the associated utilities and power requirements calculated.
Bulk factors are applied to system and individual equipment items to determine
the steel, piping, electrical, instrumentation, architectural and safety bulk
material costs. Civils materials costs are calculated based on the plot area.
Prefabrication and construction costs are determined based on the percentage of
prefabrication, the equipment and bulk material weights, plot area, labour rates
and productivities.
Differences between oil and gas producing regions are reflected in both the
technical algorithms and cost databases.
The cost estimate is completed by calculating design and project management
man-hours and adding allowances for insurance, certification and contingency.
User Interface
On entering the production facility component the input panel is shown in the
QUE$TOR Help
352
Inputs
The production facility input panel is shown below. QUE$TOR will choose
level data. Many inputs are also dependent upon higher level inputs within the
same component.
You can navigate between high level inputs using the tabs. To adjust one of the
available facilities, such as product export, click on the relevant arrow button.
Each facility can be considered as a sub-component within the production facility.
All of these sub-components are recalculated when unlocked if high level inputs
(e.g. oil inlet flow) are changed. In a similar fashion if you adjust product export
then, as long as it is unlocked, power generation will be recalculated based on the
new power requirements.
When the high level inputs in the tabs are adjusted, click Apply to update the
terminal facility sub-components and the cost estimate.
Facilities
QUE$TOR Onshore
353
The facilities frame contains links to each of the production facility sub-
components (e.g. oil processing) available in QUE$TOR. Clicking on the arrow
button next to each label allows the design details to be reviewed and optionally
adjusted. All of these sub-components are recalculated when unlocked if a high
level input (e.g. input flows) is changed. In a similar fashion if you adjust oil
processing then, as long as it is unlocked, power generation will be recalculated
based on the new power requirements.
This does not apply in reverse. You should also note that once an input is locked
in a facility, the input and its dependent values will no longer be updated by the
program if higher level inputs are adjusted. For example if you adjust and lock
power generation then you must ensure that any subsequent changes you make
to higher level facilities do not result in a power demand that cannot be met by
the selected generators. This problem can be solved by returning to power
generation and unlocking the values.
The data flow between the facilities within a production facility is illustrated
below. The flowchart is designed to give a broad view of the relationships
between sub-components. Any changes to a sub-component may affect all sub-
components downstream of it in the flowchart. This does not apply to every
parameter of a sub-component and neither does it mean that every downstream
sub-component will be influenced by changes to an upstream component.
Cost Estimate
QUE$TOR Help
354
The cost estimate displays a breakdown of every cost item included in the
component. The production facility inputs are used to calculate the quantities
shown on the cost estimate. The unit rates are determined by the procurement
strategy. The costs are generally based on a simple weight x unit rate = cost
any appropriate changes to the calculated quantities or the unit rates.
Modifications to the equipment weights will be immediately reflected in the bulk
materials, pre-fabrication, construction and design costs if these are unlocked.
Primary Inputs
The Primary tab defines the highest level production facility design specifications.
Terrain
The terrain type primarily affects the construction cost. The default is the same as
selected when defining the Field level data. The terrain at the production facility
can be revised using the dropdown list box. Terrain options available are;
Arctic/Tundra, Desert, Grassland, Jungle, Mountain, Swamp or Urban.
Elevation
The elevation of the production facility above sea level. This is used to determine
the pipeline hydraulics and decide the ISO rated power available from gas turbine
drivers.
Functions
The production facility can consist of any or all of three functions; Manifolding
Production and Compression. Selecting a function will include all associated
QUE$TOR Onshore
355
systems in the cost estimate and allow you to open and edit the associated sub-
components.
The functions include the following:
- Manifolding: selection of this incorporates production, test, water and
gas injection and gas lift manifolds. It also includes a well kill manifold, a
well control package with its associated panels and a hydraulic power unit
for well control. It does not include Xmas trees which are included in the
drilling component.
- Production: selection of this will include production and test separation,
oil or condensate processing, oil export facilities, gas processing and water
injection facilities. Detailed specifications of the processing facilities are
made interactively in the relevant sub-components.
- Compression: selection of this includes flash gas, gas export, gas
reinjection and lift gas compression packages along with the associated
suction scrubbers and aftercoolers.
Utilities, power generation and distribution systems and civils area are calculated
for all production facilities and are based on the process systems included.
Capacities
The capacities include flows to or from other components and are used to size
separation, processing and export facilities. They include the design margins
specified in the production profile section.
- Fluid capacities: covers the inlet hydrocarbon flows from linked wellpad
group and production facility components. See Fluid Capacities for further
details.
- Water injection: the total water injection flowrate leaving the production
facility to linked wellpad group and production facility components.
- Export/flared gas: the flowrate of gas leaving the production facility via
flare, gas or multiphase pipelines.
- Gas injection: the flowrate of gas leaving the production facility for gas
injection. This includes gas going to linked wellpad groups and production
facility components.
- Gas lift: the flowrate of gas leaving the production facility for gas lift.
This includes gas going to linked wellpad groups and production facility
components.
Fluid Capacities
Clicking on Fluid capacities in the production facility inputs panel opens the fluid
capacities form. Fluid capacities covers the inlet hydrocarbon flows from linked
wellpad group and production facility components.
QUE$TOR Help
356
Inlet High Pressure Fluids
Covers well stream fluids that arrive directly or have received primary separation
only.
Arrival Temperature
The temperature at which the high pressure fluids arrive at the production
facility. If the inlet temperatures differ then the mixed temperature of the
streams is taken.
Arrival Pressure
The pressure at which the high pressure fluids arrive at the production facility. If
the inlet pressures differ then the lowest pressure is taken.
Well Stream Fluids
Any multiphase fluids arriving at the production facility i.e. any untreated well
stream flows. Oil / condensate, produced water and gas define the make up of
the well stream fluids.
Separated Fluids
Separated fluids are the products from another production facility with limited oil
processing, i.e. only primary separation. The fluids arrive at the production
facility in two separate streams, a liquids stream i.e. oil / condensate and water,
and an inlet gas stream i.e. unprocessed gas.
Inlet Medium Pressure Fluids
Covers well stream fluids that have had prior processing but are not at the
desired product specification.
QUE$TOR Onshore
357
- Arrival temperature: the temperature at which the medium pressure
fluids arrive at the production facility.
- Arrival pressure: the pressure at which the medium pressure fluids
arrive at the production facility.
- Partially stabilised fluids: are the products from another production
facility that have been processed but require further processing to reach
the desired specification. The fluids arrive at the production facility as
separate streams, an oil / condensate stream, a produced water stream,
and a gas stream.
Total Capacities
These values are the total flows used to size the components within the
production facility and are the sum of the high and medium pressure fluids.
Design Conditions
The Design conditions tab allows you to specify the reservoir pressure, maximum
air temperature and acid gas / high temperature / high pressure conditions.
Reservoir Pressure
The reservoir pressure is used to determine default gas lift, water and gas
injection pressures.
Acid gas / High T / High P
This allows you to specify whether there is acid gas or if the reservoir is high
temperature / high pressure. If the box is selected QUE$TOR will automatically
use more costly, higher grade materials.
QUE$TOR Help
358
If the CO
2
content of the gas specified 1.5 mol% then carbon steel is used for
the oil/gas separation and processing equipment with a corrosion allowance of 1.5
mm (1/16th inch). If the CO
2
content 3 mol% then carbon steel is still used but
the corrosion allowance is increased to 3 mm (1/8th inch). If the CO
2
content >3
mol% then acid gas materials, typically stainless steel lining, are used for
pressure vessels and pumps etc with no corrosion allowance.
Max. Ambient Air Temperature
power generation packages and is taken from the technical database. The
calculated power requirement is then divided by the derating factor to calculate
the ISO equivalent power requirement for any gas turbines.
Prefabrication
The Prefabrication tab allows users to specify the level of prefabrication of the
production facility.
- Module: the prefabrication is modular and an overall percentage is
applied.
- Other: allows the percentage of piping spools and steelwork that is
prefabricated to be independently specified.
- None: this dictates that there is no prefabrication and all construction is
on-site.
Winterisation
QUE$TOR Onshore
359
The Winterisation tab allows users to specify the level of winterisation at the
production facility. If Arctic/Tundra is selected as the terrain for the production
facility on the Primary inputs tab then the boxes will be checked, at all other
times they are unchecked.
- Increased depth of gravel bases: when checked the depth of the
gravel bases under the equipment is increased by 50%.
- Winterisation of facilities: when checked there is increased thermal
insulation around temperature sensitive equipment and pipelines.
Manifolding
Clicking on Manifolding in the production facility inputs panel opens the
manifolding sub-component. This is only available if the Manifolding function has
been selected.
A manifold is a system of piping and associated equipment used to gather
produced fluids and to distribute injected fluids. The associated equipment
includes valves, connectors for pipeline interfaces and chokes for flow control.
The manifold system also includes a control system, i.e. the distribution system
for hydraulic and electrical functions as well as the interface connections to
control modules. Manifolds are included for Production, Test, Water injection,
Gas injection and Gas lift flowlines.
Notes:Chemical injection is used to control product foaming, or to inhibit
the development of scale in piping, break oil/water emulsions etc.
Test manifolds handle produced fluids from a single well so that flowrates, fluid
properties etc, can be measured.
Manifolding will be included for each of these flows if the total number of attached
wellpads and production facility components > 1 and their flowrate in the fluid
capacities / primary inputs > 0. Additional weights for a Well kill manifold,
Control package, and Hydraulic power unit are included if required. Manifolding
for a particular flow can be added or removed using the check boxes.
QUE$TOR Help
360
Number of Flowlines
The number of flowlines is passed from all linked wellpad group, production
facility and topsides components.
Operating Pressure
QUE$TOR calculates the manifold operating pressures as follows:
- Production & Test: 35 bara (508 psia) for oil projects and 80 bara
(1160 psia) for gas projects.
- Water injection: 55% of the reservoir pressure. This percentage has
been set based on an analysis of a large number of field developments
where reservoir pressure maintenance is by water injection.
- Gas injection: based on the reservoir pressure, an allowance for the
hydraulic head of gas between the production facility and the reservoir, a
nominal pressure drop in the gas injection well and an overpressure to
ensure the gas injection pressure at the bottom of the tubing exceeds the
reservoir pressure.
- Gas lift: 50% of the reservoir pressure.
- Well kill: Equal to the reservoir pressure.
Design Pressure
QUE$TOR calculates the manifold design pressures as follows:
- Production & Test: Based on the calculated well shut-in pressure.
QUE$TOR selects the lowest possible standard ANSI class to allow for
wellhead shut-in in the event of an emergency shutdown.
- Water injection, Gas injection, Gas lift & Well kill: QUE$TOR selects
the lowest ANSI class with a working pressure greater than 108.5% of the
operating pressure. If this pressure exceeds the ANSI 2500# class the
design pressure is set to 108.5% of the operating pressure.
QUE$TOR Onshore
361
Weight
The manifold weight is ultimately determined from the number and size of
flowlines, the field configuration and the design pressure rating for each
manifold. For high carbon dioxide (CO
2
) concentrations, i.e. >3 mol % stainless
steel is assumed to be the material used. For lower CO
2
concentrations, carbon
steel is chosen. The application of NACE is governed by the consideration of the
partial pressure of hydrogen sulphide calculated at the production facility inlet
pressure and guidelines from NACE Standard MR-01-75 for sour gas systems.
Manifolding lengths are calculated based on the Number of flowlines allowing 1 m
per slot with 3 m for each branch line. Manifolding diameters are determined
based on the total flow of the corresponding fluid at the operating pressure
assuming the velocity does not exceed 50% of the erosional velocity. QUE$TOR
assumes an equal productivity for all wells.
The manifold sizing includes spare slots according to the number of connections
to it as follows:
< 5 connections - no spare slots (minimum 2 connections).
5 to 10 connections - 1 spare slot.
> 10 connections - 2 spare slots.
The manifold weights are calculated based on the calculated length, diameter and
design pressure and include for non-return and isolation valves.
Note: Xmas trees are not included in this system as they are costed as part
of the drilling component.
Oil Processing
The oil processing sub-component is only available if the Processing function has
been selected. It calculates the weights and dimensions of oil/gas separation
equipment (separators and reboiled stabilisers), heat exchangers (heaters and
coolers) and oil treatment equipment (dehydrators and desalters).
It allows flexibility in the equipment configuration and a mass balance is
performed internally using the Peng-Robinson equation of state based on user
defined operating conditions and an inlet stream defined by the oil Specific
Gravity, gas molecular weight and gas/oil ratio (specified in the Field level data).
Clicking on Oil processing in the production facility input panel opens the oil
processing form. The example shown below is specified to produce a production
quality/fully stabilised oil export stream.
QUE$TOR Help
362
The colour scheme in the oil processing schematic is as follows:
- Green - Oil stream.
- Red - Gas stream.
- Blue - Water stream.
Oil Processing Configurations
A default oil processing configuration is generated based on the feed conditions
and product specification. Stream numbers are automatically assigned to each
stream. The product specifications available are; Refinery/fully stabilised,
Terminal/fully stabilised, Pipeline/partially stabilised, Production facility/Live
export and Combined gas + condensate (gas/condensate projects only).
There are separate default configurations for oil projects and gas projects.
Note: All separators are 3 phase except for the live export and combined
gas condensate product specification where 2 phase separators are selected.
QUE$TOR will automatically assign a product specification by looking at the
oil/condensate export route entered on the FDS. This product specification can
be changed via the drop down menu at the top of the oil processing form.
If you wish to accept the configuration click the OK button at the bottom. If you
wish to define your own configuration, components can be added and deleted by
using the Toolbar Buttons.
QUE$TOR Onshore
363
To delete a component, right click on it from within the oil processing schematic
and then select the Remove option. To add a heat exchanger or a separator,
select the point in the flow scheme where you wish to add the item (the selected
line is highlighted) then select the item on the toolbar. The item is added to the
schematic and the stream numbers automatically updated. To add a dehydrator,
desalter or reboiled stabiliser click the relevant button on the toolbar. These
components will appear automatically in the oil processing schematic in a logical
position.
Note: QUE$TOR allows a maximum of three stages of separation plus a test
separator. Wellstream heaters (upstream of the first stage separator) are not
allowed.
Stream Properties
The stream properties can be viewed by double clicking on any stream (but not
the stream number itself). The stream form will appear on screen.
The oil volumetric flow is shown at operating conditions (@ T&P). This is typically
higher than the oil production capacity entered in the component input data form
as the production capacity is a stock tank flow, i.e. measured at atmospheric
pressure and 60 F (15.6 C).
In an oil project the default water flow is set to 10% of the oil flow at stock tank
conditions. In a gas project the default water flow is set to 1% of the condensate
flow at stock tank conditions.
QUE$TOR allows you to edit the Water flow, Temperature and Pressure in Stream
1. All other stream properties will then be recalculated when you click Close.
The flowrates and operating conditions of all other streams are calculated values
and cannot be edited. They can be manipulated by changing the operating
parameters of upstream processing units.
Note: To see the recalculated flowrates when you change the operating
conditions of stream 1 you need to edit the conditions, close the form and then
reopen it. The flowrates do not update dynamically.
Equipment Sizing
QUE$TOR Help
364
By double clicking on a component in the oil processing schematic the component
data form will appear on screen. As an example, the separator properties form is
shown below.
The type of separator type can be changed via the drop down menu. The
following options are available; 3 Phase (Horizontal), 2 Phase (Horizontal) and 2
Phase (Vertical).
- Operating pressure: can also be changed to recalculate the size and
weight of the vessel plus internals. Similar forms exist for heaters,
coolers, dehydrators and reboiled stabilisers.
- Number of trains: QUE$TOR calculates the number of oil and gas
separation trains based on restricting the vessel diameter and wall
thickness to 4 m (13 ft) and 100 mm (4 inch) respectively. If either
maximum is exceeded, QUE$TOR increments the number of trains by one
until both criteria are met. The value can be overwritten (up to a
maximum of 20) to tailor the oil and gas separation configuration to your
specific requirements.
- Design capacity/train: allows the basis for sizing each individual
separator to be adjusted. The percentage entered is applied to the flow of
the inlet stream. By default, the design capacity per train is (100/Number
of trains).
More details of each item can be seen by clicking on the Details button in the
properties form. This gives details of the input data being used for sizing and the
calculated weights, heat loads and dimensions. The Separator details form is
shown below.
QUE$TOR Onshore
365
QUE$TOR includes a default slug volume in the first stage separator. The default
is dependent on water depth, varying from 3-5 m
3
.
The surge factor applies to the volumetric fluid flowrates and defaults to zero.
The separator sizing is based on the inlet liquid and gas flows increased by the
surge factor percentage.
All input variables on the Separator details form can be changed. The weight and
dimensions are recalculated dynamically. Similar forms exist for heaters, coolers,
dehydrators and reboiled stabilisers. In all cases, changes can be made to the
design variables to recalculate the equipment size and weight.
The oil processing flow schematic and a table of the following stream properties
can be printed by clicking the printer button in the oil processing schematic
toolbar; Pressure, Temperature, Oil flow, Water flow, Gas flow, Oil SG and Gas
MW (molecular weight).
Gas Processing
The gas processing sub-component is only available if the Processing function has
been selected. It calculates the weights and dimensions of sweetening,
dehydration, dewpointing and NGL stabilisation systems.
Clicking on Gas processing in the production facility inputs panel opens the gas
processing sub-component. This consists of a series of linked forms which
represent different gas processing unit operations (cooling, sweetening,
dehydration, dewpoint control/NGL recovery, and stabiliser). These can be
QUE$TOR Help
366
turned on and off using the check boxes. The gas processing specifications and
the process used can be changed from within the forms.
A minimum gas processing inlet pressure of 35 bar has been set in QUE$TOR in
order to reduce the diameter of the gas sweetening and gas dehydration vessels
and the loading on the dehydration unit. If the inlet pressure is less than 35 bar
QUE$TOR will automatically include booster compression to reset the inlet
pressure to 35 bar. The booster compressor duty is accommodated by reducing
the export gas compression suction pressure accordingly.
QUE$TOR chooses a default gas processing system configuration based on the
Product Gas Specifications required to achieve gas export or disposal as selected
in the Export inputs tab. This initial selection is displayed in the top right-hand
corner of the screen.
The gas product specification can be modified either by selecting a new Gas
product spec. from the drop down list or by directly editing the values in each
specification.
A change in the overall Gas product spec. will automatically re-default the
process selections required to achieve that specification and reset the stream
data.
If an alternative process is required to that selected automatically by QUE$TOR,
this can be selected from the drop down list for that process unit. The minimum
number of acid gas removal, dehydration and dewpoint control trains required to
process the gas is calculated and displayed. Additional trains can be estimated by
overwriting the number shown.
At all times, a mass balance is maintained over the gas processing module and
numbered buttons. Each of the conditions may be edited on any stream and the
complete gas process module is automatically recalculated.
QUE$TOR Onshore
367
If any gas processing unit spec is changed click Recalc. to update the unit
operation sizes.
The gas processing unit operations available are explained below.
Cooling
The gas inlet stream is cooled to assist in the dehydration of the gas stream.
Cooling is applied if the feed temperature is above 50C or 11C greater than the
ambient air temperature.
- Spec: the target outlet temperature.
The Process frame contains two cooling options:
- Water: the cooling is carried out by shell and tube heat exchangers with
the water on the shell side. A 20C water temperature rise and a 10C
minimum approach temperature is used to calculate the required heat
transfer areas for shell and tube weights.
- Air: the cooling is carried out by air cooled exchangers based on 9.1m
long tubes, 25.4mm diameter, 1.65mm thick on a 57 mm pitch. The
number of tubes is calculated from the exchanger duty, log mean
temperature difference and an overall heat transfer coefficient calculated
according to the pressure. The weight of the exchanger includes for steel
headers, tubes, plenum and aluminium fins, fan, motor and support steel.
When Air is selected the Ambient air temp. is required. This is the
maximum monthly average temperature and is contained within the
technical database.
Acid Gas Removal
Covers the removal of acid gases, CO
2
and H
2
S, from the gas stream.
- Spec: the target outlet concentration of the CO
2
and H
2
S
The process frame contains the alternative processes for acid gas removal along
with the size and capacity of these systems.
- Process: there are six choices in the drop down list; Amine (MEA, DEA or
MDEA), Selexol (physical solvents), Sulfinol (combination), Zinc oxide
(solid bed).
The default selection is dependent on the quantities of H
2
S and CO
2
to be
removed. If the gas flow does not exceed 50 MMscf/d, no CO
2
removal is
required and the daily quantity of H
2
S removed is less 60 kg then a zinc oxide
process is selected by default. For other gas flows and quantities of H
2
S and CO
2
the choice is dependent on whether there is Simultaneous H
2
S and CO
2
removal,
H
2
S removal only or CO
2
removal only.
Amine and Sulfinol units are assumed to contain the same process equipment
items: inlet scrubber, contactor and regeneration unit. The Selexol unit is similar
except that the regeneration unit contains three flash drums. A reboiled stripping
column assumed to be electrically heated, is required only if H
2
S is being
removed. The zinc oxide process uses solid beds to adsorb H
2
S from the gas
QUE$TOR Help
368
(CO
2
is unaffected) and must be regularly regenerated. This is normally
performed offsite by the zinc oxide vendor who will replace the spent material.
The contactor column used in solvent (amine or physical) process is sized based
on the gas throughput and is unaffected by the solvent circulation rate. The
diameter is calculated using the formula:
where:
D = contactor diameter (m)
Qg = actual gas flow at operating conditions (m
3
/s)
g
= gas density at operating conditions (kg/m
3
)
l
= solvent density (kg/m
3
)
M = design margin of 1.3
= gas load factor, 0.055 for bubble cap trays and 0.1 for structured packing.
The height of the contactor is based on 14 theoretical trays and a tray efficiency
of 60% for bubble cap trays. For structured packing an equivalent transfer unit
height is calculated based on the gas density and a specific area of packing equal
to 250 m
2
/m
3
.
The regeneration unit is calculated from the circulation rate of solvent (Amine,
Selexol or Sulfinol) required to achieve the acid gas removal, see Solvent Data for
further details.
A flash vessel is included if the operating pressure is greater than 30bar.
Otherwise solvent is fed directly to the regeneration column via the
solvent/solvent interchanger. For Selexol, two further flash vessels are included
bringing the pressure down to 1.5bar in the LP flash tank, this flashes the CO
2
from the Selexol. For amines, Sulfinol and in projects where Selexol is used to
remove H
2
S as well as CO
2
, a reboiled stripping column is used to regenerate the
solvent. Overhead gases from the stripper are routed to the sulphur recovery
unit if present. Lean solvent is pumped back to the contactor column via the
solvent/solvent interchanger and trim cooler. If the contactor operating pressure
is greater than 50 bar, then hydraulic turbines recover some of the pressure drop
lost between the contactor and regeneration section. In the amine systems, a
20% slipstream flows through a cartridge filter and an activated carbon filter pre-
and post-cooling. A sump/storage vessel provides surge volume in operation and
a drain point in case of process upset.
For small gas flows where relatively small amounts of H
2
S require removal from
the gas, a solid bed process will prove to be more economic than a solvent-based
process. Therefore zinc oxide beds are offered as an alternative process within
QUE$TOR.
QUE$TOR Onshore
369
The system requires 5 kg of zinc oxide per kg of H
2
S removed and is based on
replacing the zinc oxide every 60 days. The system includes adsorber(s) and an
after-filter. No on-site regeneration is included.
- Number of trains: specifies the number of parallel trains installed.
- Capacity / train: allows the basis for sizing each individual train to be
adjusted. The percentage entered is applied to the flow of the inlet
stream. By default, the design capacity per train is (100/Number of
trains).
Sulphur
Four options for sulphur removal exist. The default configuration is dependent on
the quantity and percentage of H2S in the feed stream and on the regional
requirements.
- Incineration: includes for an inlet scrubber, a furnace where the acid
gas stream is combusted and a flare stack.
- Claus unit: includes for an inlet scrubber, a furnace with waste heat
boiler plus two or three stage reactor process (depending on the sulphur
recovery level) with condensers and interstage reheaters.
- Claus unit with tail gas clean-up: essentially the Claus unit as above
(without inlet scrubber) plus a reducing gas generator, hydrogenation
rector, contact condenser and amine absorber/regenerator unit.
- Tail gas unit only: as above but without the Claus unit.
A Claus unit converts 95% of the H2S to sulphur while the addition of the tail gas
unit improves this to 99.5%. If the feed stream to the recovery unit contains less
than 20% H2S, the use of a Claus unit is not possible and a tail gas treatment
unit is used instead.
Dehydration
Covers the removal of the water from the saturated gas stream.
- Spec: the target water content of the outlet stream. This can be defined
in one of two ways, either the dewpoint can be fixed at a specified
pressure, or the water concentration as a weight to volume ratio can be
given.
The process frame contains the alternative processes for acid gas removal along
with the size and capacity of these systems.
- Process: there are five choices in the drop down list, these can be split
into two distinct groups; Molecular sieve or Tri-ethylene glycol contacting
with a choice of regeneration systems (Cold finger, Conventional, Drizo
and Stripping gas).
The Default Dehydration Process is based on the water dewpoint temperature at
the dehydration unit conditions.
The quantity of molecular sieve required to dehydrate the gas is based on the
amount of water in the feed stream (all water present will be removed).
QUE$TOR Help
370
Each train is composed of three adsorption vessels operating with two on line and
one being regenerated. Each adsorber operates cyclically with 8 hours on line
followed by 4 hours regeneration. Regeneration takes 10% of the dry gas, heats
it in a fired heater, and backflows through the off-line adsorber. Hot gas picks up
the water from the molecular sieve bed and is returned to the feed stream after
being cooled and free water knocked out.
The required TEG concentration is calculated based on the dewpoint depression
specified, with water content of the saturated feed gas and dry gas conforming to
data given in GPSA.
The TEG contactor column is gas phase sized based on a trayed column with
between 4 and 12 trays calculated from the lean glycol concentration required
and the effective fraction of dehydration,
where:
Y
in
= water content wet gas
Y
out
= water content dry gas
= effective fraction of dehydration
QUE$TOR then completes a mass and energy balance around the system using
recovery factors for each of the components calculated on the conditions in the
low temperature separator. Heat is assumed to be recovered from both the cold
gas and cold liquid streams. A 15C and 10C approach temperature respectively
is assumed in these exchangers.
The glycol regeneration unit is sized based on the glycol circulation rate with
adjustments for each method of achieving the required purity. The TEG
circulation rate is 0.036m
3
/kg of water removed.
- Conventional: includes a reboiled still, surge drum, flash tank, filters,
glycol/glycol exchanger and glycol trim cooler. An electric heater is
assumed to provide the heating duty. To achieve higher lean glycol
purities, additional equipment is required.
- Stripping gas: an additional stripping column is included between the
surge drum and the reboiler which uses fuel gas to strip water from the
glycol.
- Cold finger: a cooling coil is located in the surge drum which condenses
water from the gas phase above the liquid glycol. This acts as an
additional theoretical stage in the separation.
- Drizo: uses a solvent wash system to improve the purity of lean glycol.
The solvent is composed of C
5
+ components normally absorbed by the
glycol from the gas stream. Additional vessels are required to condense
overhead vapours and recover the solvent.
- Number of trains: specifies the number of parallel trains installed.
- Capacity / train: allows the basis for sizing each individual train to be
adjusted. The percentage entered is applied to the flow of the inlet
QUE$TOR Onshore
371
stream. By default, the design capacity per train is (100/Number of
trains).
Dewpoint Control
The dewpoint control unit achieves the removal of heavier hydrocarbons by
chilling the gas. The options available are; Refrigeration (Propane), JT valve or
Turbo-expander/recompressor unit.
In order to calculate the amount of liquids recovery a Gas Composition Based on
Molecular Weight is assumed for the inlet gas.
By default, refrigeration will be selected for low pressure units (<40 bar) and a JT
valve to achieve the gas reinjection specification. Turbo-expanders are used to
achieve pipeline, gas grid or LNG specifications provided that the flow is greater
than 50 MMScfd. Below this JT valves are used and QUE$TOR checks that there
is enough pressure to achieve the dewpoint specification then sets a minimum
pressure in the low temperature separator of 20 bar. If the specification cannot
be met through the JT valve or turbo-expander alone, then a refrigeration unit
will be added upstream of the valve or turbo-expander.
The weight for the refrigeration unit includes for a two stage propane loop and
includes the compressor, condenser and flash drum. QUE$TOR calculates the
required refrigeration loop pressures allowing a 10C approach temperature
between the propane evaporation and the required process.
The weight of the JT valve is not specified separately from the exchangers and
low temperature separator. The exchangers are assumed to be aluminium plate
fin exchangers up to an operating pressure of 100 barg and shell and tube
exchangers above this. The low temperature separator is a vertical vessel
including a demister pad for efficient liquids removal.
To achieve higher levels of liquids recovery a turbo-expander is used to reduce
the temperature and provide pressure recovery.
The recompressor discharge pressure is calculated using the following equation:
where:
P
r
= recompressor discharge pressure (bar)
P
out
= turbo-expander outlet pressure (bar)
P
in
= turbo-expander inlet pressure (bar)
An upstream scrubber is used to prevent liquids knocked out in the gas/gas
exchanger from entering the expander.
The minimum pressure in the low temperature separator for either the JT valve or
Expander options is set to 20 bar. If the required temperature cannot be met by
QUE$TOR Help
372
reducing the pressure to 20 bar, a chiller and propane refrigeration unit is
installed upstream to cool the gas before pressure reduction.
Gas Metering
Fiscal metering of the gas using orifice plates is automatically included if there is
gas export. If gas is re-injected or flared there is no fiscal metering. The weight
includes the metering skid and meter prover.
Deethaniser
The deethaniser column strips ethane and lighter components from the liquids.
Overhead gas is used for fuel gas and the bottoms liquids either exported as NGL
or fed to the stabiliser column. A deethaniser column is included when the
production facility is exporting either LPG or NGL; this is determined from the
pipeline links on the FDS. The column is a trayed column with reboiler and partial
reflux condenser.
Stabiliser
The stabiliser separates LPG (propane and butane) from the liquids if a
deethaniser is installed or removes all propane and lighter components if one is
not installed. In both cases the stabiliser column produces a bottom liquids
product of stabilised gasoline suitable for injecting into an oil/condensate pipeline
or as a separate gasoline stream. The stabiliser is included when the production
facility is exporting LPG or Gasoline/condensate; this is determined from the
pipelines on the FDS. The stabiliser removes lighter components from the NGL to
produce a bottom liquids product of dead condensate suitable for injecting into an
oil/condensate pipeline. The overhead stream is LPG (a combined C
3
, C
4
stream). If the stabiliser is preceded by a deethaniser or a fuel gas stream (C
3
and lighter components) if not. The operating pressure of the stabiliser is 8 bara.
Note: If NGL is being exported it is not possible to have a stabiliser.
Therefore if an NGL export pipeline is specified neither LPG or Gasoline will be
produced even if they have export pipelines.
The columns operate under two sets of conditions. The first is Single Operating
Conditions where only one of the columns are selected. The second is Dual
Operating Conditions, where both columns are selected.
Product Storage
Clicking on Product storage in the production facility inputs panel opens the
product storage form. Product storage covers the storage of the four products at
the production facility and is only intended as a buffer to allow for upstream
disruptions. The main product storage is at the terminal facility. On opening the
product storage sub-component there is a tab for each product produced from the
oil and gas processing. A storage cost will only be calculated for the products
present. Two types of storage are considered in QUE$TOR. They are:
QUE$TOR Onshore
373
- Atmospheric storage: caters for the storage of fully stabilised products
such as crude oil and gasoline.
- Pressurised storage: required for the storage of high vapour pressure
(volatile) products such as deethanised NGL and LPG. The pressurised
storage can be either bullets or spheres.
Atmospheric Storage Inputs
QUE$TOR provides full sizing of the required buffer storage for fully stabilised
products at the production facility. The inputs and calculated sizes are common
to the Oil and Gasoline storage tabs and are shown below.
- Storage time: the number of days storage required for each product.
The default for all products is one day as the storage at the production
facility is only intended as a buffer to allow for upstream disruptions.
- Storage capacity: the volume of storage required and is the storage
time multiplied by the inlet flowrate.
- Number of tanks: the number of tanks required to give the required
storage capacity. The default is always a multiple of two and the number
required is a function of the storage capacity.
- Design capacity / tank: gives the size of each of the tanks and is the
storage capacity divided by the number of tanks.
- Diameter and Height: give the geometry of each of the tanks and are
calculated so that the tank height does not exceed 18m with 0.5m
included in the height to take into account the dead space.
Pressurised Storage Inputs
QUE$TOR provides full sizing of the required buffer storage for volatile products.
The inputs and calculated sizes are common to the NGL and LPG storage tabs and
are shown below.
QUE$TOR Help
374
The default for all products is one day as the storage at the production
facility is only intended as a buffer to allow for upstream disruptions.
- Bullet / Sphere: the radio buttons determine whether the volatile liquid
is stored in bullets or spheres. By default if the storage capacity does not
exceed 4000bbl then bullets will be selected, above this capacity spheres
are selected.
- Number of vessels: the number of vessels needed to give the required
storage capacity. This is dependent on whether bullets or spheres have
been selected. The maximum capacity for a bullet is 2,000bbl and the
maximum capacity for a sphere is 75,000bbl.
- Vapour space: the volume above the maximum liquid level within each
vessel. For bullets this is 15%, and for spheres this is 5%.
- Design capacity / vessel: gives the size of each of the vessels and is
the storage capacity divided by the number of vessels.
- Diameter and Length: give the geometry of each of the vessels. The
length is only relevant when bullets are selected.
Product Export
Clicking on Product export in the production facility inputs panel opens the
product export form. Product export covers the export of the four products of the
production facility. On opening the product storage sub-component there is a tab
for each product produced from the oil and gas processing. An export cost will
only be calculated for the products present. The product export systems include
pumps and fiscal metering skids.
QUE$TOR Onshore
375
Export Rate
The export rate is the capacity of both the export pump and the pipeline. The
default export rates are calculated based on the export pipeline operating 24
hours/day.
Export Equipment
Size export pipeline: the pump differential pressure and pump power are
dependent on the pressure drop along the export pipeline and so clicking on this
button displays the pipeline sizing form.
QUE$TOR Help
376
This form allows you to resize the oil export line, or specify a diameter and
calculate the inlet or outlet pressure. This can change the pumping requirements
of the export pumps. Click on Resize pipeline to recalculate all unlocked
values. The new pump differential pressure and power requirement etc are
automatically calculated.
Note: The pipeline length is set by the connected export pipeline in the
FDS. If no export pipeline is connected to the production facility this is taken
from the regional technical database.
- Pump differential pressure: the difference between the suction
pressure (taken as the storage pressure) and the discharge pressure.
Allowances are included for pressure losses through the metering skid and
the loading arms, when appropriate, of 2.5 bar and 1.0 bar respectively.
- Total pump power: derived from the export rate and pump differential
pressure, assuming a 75% pump efficiency.
- Number of pumps: specifies the number of parallel pumps installed. By
default the value is such that there is one spare pump to ensure product
export can be maintained in the event of a pump failure. If modified, the
program recalculates the pump weight.
- Capacity / pump: the capacity of each pump as a proportion to the total
pump duty, e.g. 100%, 50% or 33%. Combined with the number of
pumps this specifies how many spare units are installed.
Note: Changing the number of pumps will also initially change
the capacity/pump if unlocked, to ensure there is always a spare
pump.
QUE$TOR Onshore
377
- Pump weight: derived from the pump power, based on standard motor
sizes, and is the total for the specified pump arrangement. The weight
includes a skid-mounted pump and fixed-speed motor.
- Metering weight: fiscal or custody transfer metering is required for all
liquid products at the transfer of ownership from one party to another with
a high degree of accuracy required. The liquid metering sub-system is
based on the use of a conventional fiscal turbine meter incorporating a
meter prover loop for operation within an ANSI Class 600 # rating.
Normally one spare metering run is included with each liquid product
considered separately.
- Total weight: the sum of the pump and metering package weight.
Gas Compression
The Gas compression sub-component is only available if the Compression function
has been selected. It calculates the weights of all the production facility
compression facilities, including flash gas, export, injection and lift gas
compression.
Clicking on Gas compression in the production facility inputs panel opens the
Gas compression form.
The gas compression sub-component handles the compression of four possible
gas streams. Costing of the compressors for each stream can be turned on and
off using the check boxes:
- Flash gas: the gas from the second and third stages of separation within
Oil processing. This is compressed to the first stage separation pressure
prior to Gas processing.
- Export gas: the gas being exported from the production facility,
consideration of the sizing of the export pipeline is therefore required.
- Gas lift: the gas leaving the production facility to provide artificial lift.
This includes gas going to linked wellpad group and production facility
components.
- Gas injection: the flowrate of gas leaving the production facility for gas
injection. This includes gas going to linked wellpad group and production
facility components.
QUE$TOR Help
378
Derating Factor
The power available from the turbine driver is affected by the air temperature and
elevation. This frame states the derating factor with together with the basis of
the factor.
- Derating factor: used to calculate the ISO equivalent power if gas
turbines are selected as the Driver type. For electric drivers no derating is
applied.
- Derated power based on: the maximum expected air temperature,
taken from the Design conditions tab.
- Elevation: the elevation of the production facility, taken from the Primary
tab.
Duty
The duty frame calculates the power required to drive the compressors for each
of the gas flows. The throughput, suction pressure, discharge pressure and
calculated power of each of the compression systems are displayed.
- Design quantity: the gas flowrate that the compressor is designed to
handle. For export gas, gas lift and gas injection this is set by the
flowrates on the Primary tab.
- Suction pressure: the inlet pressure for the compressors. For export
gas this is the pressure from the first stage separation less allowances for
the gas processing selected. For gas lift and gas injection this is the
discharge pressure of the export gas compressor if gas export is by
pipeline or from the first stage separator pressure if all gas is reinjected.
- Discharge pressure: the required outlet pressure from the
compressors. For export gas this is the pipeline inlet pressure which is set
QUE$TOR Onshore
379
by clicking on the pipeline sizing button, see below. For gas lift and gas
injection this is set by the operating pressures set within Manifolding, with
allowances for the pressure drop through the aftercooler.
Note: the design quantity, suction pressure and discharge
pressure for flash gas are worked internally within the oil processing
sub-component
- Power: the power required by the compressors. The power for gas
export, lift and injection compressors is based on the molecular weight of
the gas out of gas processing. The flash gas compressor molecular weight
is a weighted average based on the 1
st
, 2
nd
and 3
rd
stage separator gas
flows and molecular weights.
- Derated power: the ISO equivalent power if turbine drivers are
selected. It is the Power divided by the Derating factor.
- Number of compressors: specifies the number of parallel compressors
If modified, the program recalculates the compressor weight.
- Design duty/compressor: the capacity of each generator set as a
Combined with the Number of compressors this specifies how many spare
- Electric: electric motors are used to generate the required design power
with the power added to the demand of the production facility. Electric
drivers will be selected by default if the Power is less than 4MW. The
maximum size of electric motor considered is 5 MW.
- Turbine: gas turbines are used to generate the required design power.
This is selected when the Power is greater than 4MW. When selected the
derating factor becomes active to take into account the effect that the
Ambient temperature and Elevation have on the power available from the
turbine driven generator. Gas turbine drivers can be used up to 40 MW
per train.
box, if desired.
- Pipeline sizing: the pipeline sizing form allows you to resize your gas
export line, to alter the pressure drop along it and change the power
requirements of the export compressors. Clicking on Pipeline sizing in
the duty frame opens the pipeline sizing form.
QUE$TOR Help
380
The layout and functionality of the form is identical to the Pipeline sizing tab
within the Pipeline sizing. Adjustments can be made to the pipeline in either the
gas export sub-component or in the pipeline component itself. Click on Resize
Pipeline to recalculate all unlocked values. Clicking on OK will exit the form and
update the export gas Discharge pressure to the pipeline Pressure in and the new
compressor outlet pressure and power requirement etc are automatically
calculated. Clicking Cancel exits without altering gas compression.
Note: It is not possible to change the length of the pipeline in this form. To
do this go to the relevant pipeline link.
Weights
The weights of compressors, scrubbers and coolers required for each system are
displayed.
- Compressors: a skid-mounted package containing the driver, the
compressor(s), base plate, seal and lube oil systems. Inlet and exhaust
systems for gas turbine drivers are included if selected.
- Scrubbers: one scrubber per stage is included using a compression ratio
of 3 per stage (all stages are located on the same shaft).
- Coolers: one cooler per stage is included using a compression ratio of 3
per stage (all stages are located on the same shaft). The coolers are
water cooled, shell and tube exchangers.
Water Injection
QUE$TOR Onshore
381
Clicking on Water injection in the production facility inputs panel opens the
water injection form.
Totals
This provides the basis for the sizing of the water injection pumps.
- Water injection pump capacity: the water flowrate which the pump will
be designed to handle. It is set by the flowrates on the Primary tab.
- Water injection delivery pressure: the required water injection
pressure which is set from the water injection manifold operating
pressure.
- Water injection pump duty: the pumping power to raise the water from
the feed pressure to the delivery pressure, this is calculated assuming a
pump efficiency of 70%.
Note: the water injection feed pressure is set to 0 bara to allow for water
treatment in the vacuum deaerator.
Driver Type
- Electric motor: electric motors are used to generate the required design
power with the power added to the demand of the production facility.
Electric drivers will be selected by default if the power is less than 4MW.
The maximum size of electric motor considered is 5 MW.
power. This is selected when the power is greater than 4MW. When
selected the derating factor becomes active to take into account the effect
that the Ambient temperature and Elevation have on the power available
from the turbine driven generator. Gas turbine drivers can be used up to
40 MW per train.
QUE$TOR Help
382
- Number of pumps: specifies the number of parallel compressors
installed. This is set to the minimum number of possible pumps. If
modified, the program recalculates the compressor weight.
- Design duty/pump: the capacity of each pump set as a proportion to
the total generator power, e.g. 100%, 50% or 33%. Combined with the
Number of pumps this specifies how many spare units are installed.
Configuration
This specifies what treatment the water has prior to injection. There are two
types of treatment available, which can be selected independently.
- Fine filters: fine filtration using sand filters (with automatic
backwashing).
- Vacuum deaerator: uses a vacuum column and vacuum pump to
achieve a residual oxygen in water content of 5ppm (after addition of
oxygen scavenger).
Produced Water
Clicking on Produced water in the production facility inputs panel opens the
produced water sub-component. This is only available if the Production function
has been selected.
With the increasing political pressure of the environmental movement the oil/gas
industries are now subject to a far greater scrutiny on their emissions policies.
QUE$TOR accommodates the disparity between individual countries allowable
discharge levels by considering two distinct processing schemes.
The produced water treatment system weight is a function of the consent levels
for disposal of produced water. For an oil/water content disposal level of less
than 25ppm the system consists of a tilted plate separator (also known as a
corrugated plate interceptor), an induced gas flotation unit (otherwise known as a
depurator) and a flash drum. Each unit is sized on the basis of volumetric
QUE$TOR Onshore
383
throughput. In QUE$TOR the consent level is regionally dependent and therefore
the value may be adjusted by manually overwriting the appropriate value in the
regional technical database. For consent levels greater than 25ppm a simpler
system incorporating a flash drum and tilted plate separator is chosen.
Clicking on Control and comms in the production facility inputs panel opens the
control and communication form. Control and communications allows selection of
the process control system and communications options. The choice of the type
of control and communication system is inherently a function of the geography
and location of the production facility. For example in an isolated environment,
like a desert, a satellite would normally be used.
Control System
Three options are available; the default is based on the size and complexity of the
production facility. Each option covers main process/utility control, emergency
shut-down (ESD), fire & gas and associated interface panels.
- Distributed: suitable for larger production facilities where a main
computerised control room and several local equipment rooms are
necessary.
- Conventional: suitable for medium-sized production facilities where one
centralised control room is required.
- Basic: suitable for small, simple production facilities, in particular those
acting only as a manifold, where local control panels are the only
requirement.
Communications
Three options are available; the default is based on the size, location and
complexity of the production facility
- Satellite: assumes that a satellite system will be used to handle the
communications between the field and the operations centre.
- Microwave: assumes that communications are handled using a
microwave link. This method of communication is limited to line of sight,
i.e. to a distance of approximately 30 km.
QUE$TOR Help
384
- Cable / fibre: assumes communications are handled via a control
umbilical. This is usually only used over relatively short distances.
but dependent on the options selected.
Utilities
The Utilities sub-component calculates the weights of all the production facility
utilities systems.
Clicking on Utilities in the production facility inputs opens the utilities sub-
component form. The Utilities sub-component covers all the utilities systems
typical for the production facility. QUE$TOR sets the utility systems required
based on the defined product storage, export and control systems. The weights
are calculated from factors applied to the equipment sizes and weights. Utilities
can be added or removed from the cost estimate by using the check boxes.
Fuel gas: provided for gas treatment prior to use in turbines. The weight
includes for a fuel gas KO drum, a fuel gas heater and fuel gas filters.
QUE$TOR Onshore
385
Relief / flare: includes for an HP flare drum, HP flare drum pumps, an LP
flare drum, LP flare drum pumps, a vent KO drum, HP flare tip, LP flare tip,
vent tip, a flare ignition package and a halon snuffing system.
Closed drains: for treatment of pressurised hazardous fluids. The weight
includes for a closed drains vessel, closed drain pumps, a reclaimed oil tank
and a reclaimed oil returns pump.
Open drains: includes separate systems for treatment of drains from
hazardous and non-hazardous areas. The weight includes for an oily water
tank, an oily water returns pump, a non-hazardous open drains tank with
associated returns pump, a hazardous open drains tank with associated
returns pump and an oily water separation tank.
Inert gas: includes for inert gas storage and distribution systems
Instrument / plant air: includes for compressors, receivers, filters, driers and
the associated distribution networks.
Plant water: includes for plant water distribution and treatment costs.
Plant steam: includes for steam generation and distribution.
Heating medium: required to meet vapour pressure specifications of exported
oil/condensate or to aid oil/condensate & water separation. The heating
medium flowrate is calculated in the oil processing module. The weight
includes for a fired heater package, a heating medium make-up tank, a
heating medium make-up pump, an expansion vessel and heating medium
circulation pumps.
Cooling medium: Required in conjunction with heating medium to cool oil or
condensate before input to the export pipelines and for compression inter-
and aftercooling. The weight includes for a closed circuit cooling water
(CCCW) expansion/make-up tank, seawater/CCCW exchangers and CCCW
circulation pumps.
Chemical storage: includes for chemical storage, dosing pumps and
associated distribution systems.
Diesel fuel: required by diesel fuelled and emergency generators. The
weight includes for storage, transfer pumps and filters.
Power
The Power sub-component covers main and emergency generators as well as the
power distribution system.
Clicking on Power in the production facility input panel opens the power sub-
component form.
QUE$TOR Help
386
Power Requirement
This shows a load schedule of the powers that have been calculated in all other
equipment sizing sub-components. The list identifies the loads for each system,
as described below, which can be changed by overwriting the stated load with a
new figure.
- Wellpads: the power required by the wellpads connected to the
production facility. This will only apply if From production facility is
selected as the Power supply for the wellpad.
- Oil processing: the power required by the oil processing sub-component,
including the electrical load associated with any electrostatic coalescers /
desalters.
- Export pumping: the power required by the export pumps for each of
the four products of the production facility; oil, NGL, LPG and gasoline.
- Gas processing: the power required by the gas processing sub-
component. This is broken down into the individual processes within gas
processing.
- Compressors: the power required by the compressors within the gas
compression sub-component. This is broken down into the compressors
for the four gas streams.
- Water injection: the power required by the pumps within the water
injection sub-component.
- Produced water treatment and disposal: the power required for the
treatment and disposal of the water streams from the oil processing sub-
component.
- Control and comms: the power required by the systems defined within
the control and communications sub-component.
- Safety: the power required by the safety system, this comprises
firewater and foam systems and includes for all necessary pumping
requirements.
- Utilities: the power required by the systems specified within the utilities
sub-component.
QUE$TOR Onshore
387
- Base load: includes for lighting and security systems. It is defined as
10% of the sum of the power requirements listed above.
Emergency Power
disrupted and is defined as: 70% of utilities power + Control and comms power +
Safety power.
Generation and Distribution / Distribution only Radio Buttons
cases.
equipment.
production facility and includes transformers, all buses, power cabling
between switchboards, switchboards and ancillary controls. This is
selected when the Manifolding is the only function of the production
facility.
Derating Factor
Capacity
factor.
factor.
QUE$TOR Help
388
- Note: Changing the number of generators will also initially change
the design duty/generator if unlocked, to ensure there is always a spare
generator.
Driver Type
than 1MW (1,340hp).
box, if desired.
Weights
system:
type selected
Civils
The civils sub-component covers the plot area required by the production facility.
Clicking on Civils in the production facility input opens the civils plot area form.
QUE$TOR Onshore
389
Foundation Area
Foundation areas are calculated from the footprint area of each system with an
allowance for good access. These are summated to give the total foundation
area.
- Manifolding: the foundation area required by the manifolding.
- Oil processing: the foundation area required by the equipment within
the oil processing sub-component, this is broken down into the
components available within oil processing.
- Gas processing: the foundation area required by the equipment within
the gas processing sub-component. This is broken down into the
individual processes within gas processing.
- Storage: covers the storage tanks for the four products and is broken
down into atmospheric and pressurised storage.
- Export pumping: covers the export pumps that were sized in product
export with an area given for the pumps of each of the products.
- Metering: covers the metering equipment that was sized in the product
export sub-component with an area given for the metering of each of the
products.
- Other: covers the remaining sub-components, Gas compression, Water
injection, Power and Utilities. There is an area for produced water
treatment and disposal and for all the sub-components associated safety
systems.
- Total foundations area: is the sum of the above areas.
Plot Area
Covers the actual areas required for the production facility
- Vehicular access: covers the required roads and hard standings and is
determined by applying a factor to the Total foundations area
QUE$TOR Help
390
- Buildings: covers the required buildings within the production facility and
is determined by applying a factor to the Total foundations area
- Total plot area: the total area of the production facility and is used to
determine the cost of grading the site and the associated civil materials
cost. An area factor is applied to the Total foundations to give the
equipment plot area. The total plot area is the sum of equipment plot
area, buildings plot area and vehicular access plot area.
Equipment Costs
component is adjusted. Unit rates for each identified equipment item are
retrieved based on the procurement strategy and are also dependent on the
centre.
Safety
The safety system weight comprises firewater and foam systems. It includes for
all necessary firewater pumps, foam units, distribution systems, sprinkler
systems, fire suppressant, firewater storage tanks and necessary firefighting
equipment.
Freight
The freight cost is the cost of transportation of the equipment from the place of
procurement to its intended destination. It is a fixed percentage applied to the
equipment cost. The percentage is dependent on whether the equipment is
QUE$TOR Onshore
391
procured from the same region as the production facility Location or from out of
region.
Material Costs
The material weights are updated in the cost estimate sheet as each sub-
component is adjusted. Unit rates for each identified material item are retrieved
from the procurement strategy.
Steelwork
This item includes all necessary steelwork to erect and install the equipment
specified. This includes all prefabricated skids, main truss framing, outfitting
steel for walkways, platforms etc.
Piping
This item includes the cost of all necessary piping and manually operated valves
required to connect all the equipment together. It includes a range of pipeline
sizes and different materials and includes all pipe rack and pipe supports
required. The piping cost is calculated by applying factors to each of the
equipment system weights, summing these and applying a unit rate dependent
on material selection to give a total cost.
Electrical
This item includes the cost of all necessary electrical cabling required to connect
the equipment together. It includes all junction boxes but excludes transformers
and switch gear which are included in the item 'power generation distribution'. It
also includes all cabling racking and ties. The electrical cost is calculated by
applying factors to each of the equipment systems weights, summing these to
give a total weight and applying a unit rate to get the total cost.
Instruments
This item includes all necessary instrumentation to operate and control the
equipment. It includes all control valves, sensors, gauges, instrumentation,
control panels and instrumentation cabling. The instrument cost is calculated by
QUE$TOR Help
392
Others
This item includes HVAC, architectural, insulation and painting.
The others cost is calculated by the program by applying factors to each of the
equipment systems weights, summing these and applying a unit rate to give a
total cost.
Civils Materials
This item includes all the bulk materials necessary to construct the foundations,
buildings and vehicular access areas including all concrete, reinforcement
hardcore, gravel, surfacing, etc. The unit rate is dependent on the relative areas
for foundations, roads and general civils preparation.
Freight
This is the cost of transportation of the materials from the place of procurement
to its intended destination. It is a fixed percentage applied to the materials cost.
The percentage is dependent on whether the equipment is procured from the
same region as the production facility Location or from out of region.
the Prefabrication tab of the production facility user interface, and are updated in
the cost estimate sheet as each sub-component is adjusted. The prefabrication
costs include all prefabrication activities, from receipt and storage of materials,
breakdown form giving details of how the prefabrication costs are calculated, see
Loadout and Transport
QUE$TOR Onshore
393
A fixed percentage applied to the total prefabrication cost to cover the cost of
transporting the prefabricated equipment and bulk materials from the
prefabrication site to the field.
Construction Costs
Clicking on the hyperlinked construction heading will open up the construction
breakdown form giving details of how the construction costs are calculated, see
Construction Details for more information.
Site Ppreparation
This is a total site area based on the foundations area requirement of the
equipment previously calculated. The cost includes for all preparation work
required prior to construction, e.g. clearing and levelling of jungle.
Civil Construction
This includes the construction of all foundations, roads inside the perimeter fence,
buildings for storage, workshops, and general site construction activities. The
areas for roads and buildings are based on factors applied to the previously
calculated foundation area. General civils are applied to the overall site area.
General Costs
The general costs cover all other expenditures associated with the production
facility. They include design, project management, certification, insurance and a
contingency.
QUE$TOR Help
394
Design & Project Management
The design and project management cost is based on the number of man-hours
and the man-hour rates. Design man-hours are factored from the weight of
equipment and bulk materials, the storage capacity and civils area. Project
management man-hours are factored from the design man-hours.
- Design: this includes the quantity of hours required to carry out the
design of the facility. It covers through to installation at the location. This
includes project specification, project execution plans, detailed design,
special studies, follow-on engineering, purchasing, expediting and
inspection services, project control, QA and documentation during the
detailed design phase. It incorporates all wages, salaries and other
and import duties. Design man-hours are factored from the weight of
equipment and bulk materials, the storage capacity and civils area.
- Project management: the project management includes all the project
management hours required for the operator company personnel and any
project management team costs to manage, monitor and control all
phases of the component. It includes management, project engineering,
stage through to first oil.
Insurance
This is a fixed percentage of the production facility cost and includes insurance for
all project components during transportation, construction, installation and
testing and commissioning. Personnel liability insurance is covered in the
respective cost centres.
Certification
Includes all certification costs of the design, materials and construction of the
development by a recognised certifying authority.
QUE$TOR Onshore
395
Contingency
Terminal Facility
About Terminal Facilities
The terminal facility component covers the storage and export of oil plus any
liquid derivatives, i.e. Natural Gas Liquids (NGL), Liquefied Petroleum Gases
(LPG) or Gasoline, from upstream oil and gas processing facilities.
Two types of terminal facility are available in QUE$TOR, an inland terminal facility
and a coastal terminal facility. The inland terminal facility has three options for
the export method of each of the products; road, rail or pipeline. The coastal
terminal facility has an additional product export method, marine, and covers
costs for marine facilities such as a jetty or an offshore single point mooring
(SPM).
Technical algorithms are used to calculate storage capacities and equipment sizes
from which weights and volumes are derived. The equipment weights are
combined into system weights and the associated utilities and power
requirements calculated. Bulk factors are applied to systems and individual
equipment items to determine the steel, piping, electrical, instrumentation,
architectural and safety bulk material costs. Civils materials costs are calculated
based on the plot area.
and productivities.
Differences between oil and gas producing regions are reflected in both the
technical algorithms and cost databases.
User Interface
On entering the terminal facility component the input panel is shown in the
QUE$TOR Help
396
Inputs
The terminal facility input panel is shown below. QUE$TOR will choose
level data. Many inputs are also dependent upon higher level inputs within the
same component.
Each facility can be considered as a sub-component within the terminal facility.
All of these sub-components are recalculated when unlocked if high level inputs
(e.g. oil inlet flow) are changed. In a similar fashion if you adjust product export
then, as long as it is unlocked, power generation will be recalculated based on the
new power requirements.
Facilities
QUE$TOR Onshore
397
Each facility or sub-component has an associated arrow button, clicking on this
arrow button will open the sub-component form. Within the sub-component form
clicking OK will save any changes, close the form and update all unlocked
dependent inputs and costs. Clicking Cancel will exit without saving. Clicking
Resize pipeline, where available, will recalculate the pipeline hydraulics without
updating any other sub-component or the cost estimate; these will only be
updated when OK is clicked.
Cost estimate
component. The terminal facility inputs are used to calculate the quantities
any appropriate changes to the calculated quantities or the unit rates.
Primary Inputs
The Primary tab defines the highest level terminal facility design specifications.
Location
The terminal facility has several geographical factors that affect the cost. These
are:
QUE$TOR Help
398
- Inland / Coastal location: two types of terminal facility are available in
QUE$TOR, an inland terminal facility and a coastal terminal facility. The
radio buttons indicate which type the terminal facility is.
- Terrain: the default is the same as selected when defining the Field level
data. The terrain at the terminal facility can be revised using the
dropdown list box. Terrain options available are; Arctic/Tundra, Desert,
Grassland, Jungle, Mountain, Swamp or Urban. The terrain type primarily
affects the construction cost.
- Elevation: the elevation of the terminal facility site above sea level. This
is used to determine the pipeline hydraulics and decide the ISO rated
power available from gas turbine drivers.
Inlet flows
The inlet flows represent the maximum expected inlet flow from linked
components and are used to size the storage and export facilities. They include
the design margins specified in the production profile.
Export method
The method of export can be specified for each of the four possible export
products. The methods available are Road, Rail, Pipeline or Marine. Marine is
only an option when a coastal terminal is selected.
Marine transport
If the terminal is situated on the coast and marine export is selected the user is
given the choice of either a jetty or offshore SPM.
Jetty: located in sheltered harbours or waterways, jetties provide easy
access between a ship and terminal. When selected the length of the jetty
is specified.
SPM: an offshore single point mooring is a tanker berthing facility to
which a tanker is moored and through which it can load or discharge its
cargo. When selected the distance to the mooring from the shore is
specified.
Prefabrication
terminal facility.
QUE$TOR Onshore
399
applied.
- None: dictates that there is no prefabrication and all construction is on-
site.
Winterisation
terminal facility and is shown below. If Arctic/Tundra is selected as the terrain for
the terminal on the Primary inputs tab then the boxes will be checked, at all other
times they are unchecked.
QUE$TOR Help
400
insulation around temperature sensitive equipment and piping.
Facilities
The facilities frame contains links to each of the terminal facility sub-components
(e.g. product export) available in QUE$TOR. Clicking on the arrow button next to
each label allows the design details to be reviewed and optionally adjusted. All of
these sub-components are recalculated when unlocked if a high level input (e.g.
an input flow) is changed. In a similar fashion if you adjust product export then
power generation will be recalculated based on the new power requirements
provided it is unlocked.
Changes to lower level facilities do not affect higher level facilities. You should
also note that once an input is locked in a facility, the input and its dependent
values will no longer be updated by the program if higher level inputs are
adjusted. For example if you adjust and lock power generation then you must
ensure that any subsequent changes you make to higher level facilities do not
result in a power demand that cannot be met by the selected generators. This
problem can be solved by returning to power generation and unlocking the
values.
QUE$TOR Onshore
401
Product Storage
Clicking on Product storage in the terminal facility inputs panel opens the
product storage form as shown below. Product storage covers the storage of the
four products entering the terminal facility. On opening the product storage sub-
component there is a tab for each product with an inlet flow greater than zero. A
storage cost will only be calculated for the products present. Two types of
storage are considered in QUE$TOR. They are:
(volatile) products such as de-ethanised NGL and LPG. The pressurised
QUE$TOR provides full sizing of the required storage for fully stabilised products.
The inputs and calculated sizes are common to the Oil and Gasoline storage tabs.
o Storage time: the number of days storage required for each product.
This is dependent on the export method for each product. The default
number of days for each export method are:
o Pipeline - 2 days
o Road - 5 days
o Rail - 5 days
o Marine - 10 days.
o Storage capacity: the volume of storage required and is the storage
QUE$TOR Help
402
o Number of tanks: the number of tanks required to give the required
o Design capacity / tank: gives the size of each of the tanks and is the
o Diameter and Height: give the geometry of each of the tanks and are
QUE$TOR provides full sizing of the required storage for volatile products. The
inputs and calculated sizes are common to the NGL and LPG storage tabs.
o Storage time: the number of days storage required for each product and
is dependent on the export method for each product. The number of days
for each export method are:
o Pipeline - 2 days
o Road - 5 days
o Rail - 5 days
o Marine - 10 days.
o Storage capacity: the volume of storage required and is the storage
o Bullet / Sphere: the radio buttons determine whether the volatile liquid
are selected.
o Number of vessels: the number of vessels needed to give the required
QUE$TOR Onshore
403
o Vapour space: the volume above the maximum liquid level within each
o Design capacity / vessel: gives the size of each of the vessels and is
o Diameter and Length: give the geometry of each of the vessels. The
Product Export
Clicking on Product export in the terminal facility inputs panel opens the
product export form. Product export covers the export of the four products
entering the terminal facility. On opening the product export sub-component
there is a tab for each product with an inlet flow greater than zero. An export
cost will only be calculated for the products present. The product export systems
include pumps and fiscal metering skids.
Export rate
default export rates are calculated on the following basis:
- Pipeline - 24 hour/day operation
- Road - 8 hour/day operation
- Rail - 12 hour/day operation
- Marine - 10 days capacity in 24 hours.
Export equipment
QUE$TOR Help
404
- Size export pipeline: the pump differential pressure and pump power
are dependent on the pressure drop along the export pipeline and so
clicking on this button displays the pipeline sizing form.
FDS. If no export pipeline is connected to the terminal facility this is taken from
the regional technical database.
pressure (taken as the storage pressure) and the discharge inlet
pressure. Allowances are included for pressure losses through the
metering skid and the loading arms, when appropriate, of 2.5 bar and 1.0
bar respectively.
pump duty, e.g. 100%, 50%, 33%. Combined with the number of pumps
this specifies how many spare units are installed.
QUE$TOR Onshore
405
pump.
Total weight: the sum of the pump and metering package weight.
Clicking on Control and comms in the terminal facility inputs panel opens the
control and communication form. Control and communications allows selection of
the process control system and communications options. The choice of the type
of control and communication system is inherently a function of the geography
and location of the terminal facility. For example in an isolated environment, like
a desert, a satellite would normally be used.
Control System
terminal facility. Each option covers main process/utility control, emergency
shut-down (ESD), fire & gas and associated interface panels.
- Distributed: suitable for larger terminal facilities where a main
necessary.
- Conventional: suitable for medium-sized terminal facilities where one
- Basic: suitable for small terminal facilities where local control panels are
the only requirement.
QUE$TOR Help
406
Communications
complexity of the terminal facility
i.e. To a distance of approximately 30 km.
Utilities
The Utilities sub-component calculates the weights of all the terminal facility
utilities systems.
Clicking on Utilities in the terminal facility inputs opens the utilities sub-
component form. The Utilities sub-component covers all the utilities systems
typical for terminal facility. QUE$TOR sets the utility systems required based on
the defined product storage, export and control systems. The weights are
calculated from factors applied to the equipment sizes and weights. The default
selection of the utilities is dependent on the proximity of the terminal to an
existing production facility. If the terminal is within a kilometre of a production
station it is assumed that plant air, inert gas, plant water and plant steam
requirements are provided by the production facility. Utilities can be added or
removed from the cost estimate by using the check boxes.
QUE$TOR Onshore
407
- Fuel gas: provided for gas treatment prior to use in turbines. The weight
- Relief / flare: includes for an HP flare drum, HP flare drum pumps, an LP
flare drum, LP flare drum pumps, a vent KO drum, HP flare tip, LP flare
tip, vent tip, a flare ignition package and a halon snuffing system.
- Closed drains: for treatment of pressurised hazardous fluids. The
weight includes for a closed drains vessel, closed drain pumps, a reclaimed
oil tank and a reclaimed oil returns pump.
- Open drains: includes separate systems for treatment of drains from
water tank, an oily water returns pump, a non-hazardous open drains tank
with associated returns pump, a hazardous open drains tank with
associated returns pump and an oily water separation tank.
- Instrument / plant air: includes for compressors, receivers, filters,
driers and the associated distribution networks.
- Inert gas: includes for inert gas storage and distribution systems.
- Plant water: includes for plant water distribution and treatment costs.
- Plant steam: includes for steam generation and distribution.
- Chemical inj. / storage: includes for chemical storage, injection and
associated distribution systems.
- Diesel fuel: required by diesel fuelled and emergency generators. The
weight includes for storage, transfer pumps and filters.
QUE$TOR Help
408
Power
Clicking on Power in the terminal facility input panel opens the power sub-
component form.
The radio buttons at the top dictate whether the cost of power generation is
included or if only distribution is considered. Emergency power generation is
required in both cases.
and drivers will become active i.e. Derating, Capacity and Driver type.
equipment.
- Distribution only: assumes that power is being imported to the terminal
facility and includes transformers, all buses, power cabling between
switchboards, switchboards and ancillary controls.
Power Requirement
QUE$TOR Onshore
409
new figure.
- Export pumping: the power required by the export pumps for each of
the four product that the terminal facility can handle; Oil, NGL, LPG and
Gasoline
sub-component.
- Safety: the safety system comprises firewater and foam systems and
includes for all necessary pumping requirements.
- Total demand: the sum of the above power requirements.
Emergency Power
Safety power.
Derating Factor
Duty
factor.
factor.
QUE$TOR Help
410
Note: Changing the number of generators will also initially
change the design duty/generator if unlocked, to ensure there is
always a spare generator.
Driver Type
than 1MW (1,340hp).
box, if desired.
Weights
system:
type selected
Civils
The civils sub-component covers the plot area required by the terminal facility.
Clicking on Civils in the terminal facility input opens the Civils plot area form.
QUE$TOR Onshore
411
Foundation Area
Covers the equipment size with an allowance for access around each item within
the terminal facility. The total foundation area is given at the bottom and is the
sum of all the foundation areas.
- Storage: covers the storage tanks for the four products and is broken
down into atmospheric and pressurised storage.
- Export pumping: covers the export pumps that were sized in Product
export with an area given for the pumps for each of the products.
- Metering: covers the metering equipment that was sized in the Product
export sub-component with an area given for the metering of each of the
products.
QUE$TOR Help
412
- Product loading: covers the loading arms for each of the product export
methods. An area is only given when the export method is selected for a
product.
- Other: covers the remaining sub-components, Power and Utilities plus all
associated safety systems.
- Total foundations: is the sum of the above areas.
Plot Area
Covers the actual areas required for the terminal facility
determined by applying a factor to the Total foundations area.
- Buildings: covers the required buildings within the terminal facility and is
- Total plot area: the total area of the terminal facility and is used to
area, buildings plot area and vehicular access plot area.
Equipment Costs
centre.
QUE$TOR Onshore
413
Product Loading
Product loading is carried out by the use of loading arms which enable the flow of
product to be easily directed to tanker orifices. Each product has its own
dedicated loading arm(s). The number of loading arms is calculated via a
maximum flowrate through each arm. In general marine loading arms have a
greater capacity than rail loading arms which in turn have a greater capacity than
road loading arms.
- Road: Road loading arms have typical nozzle diameters of between three
and eight inches and have a maximum capacity of about 2,000 barrels per
hour per arm.
- Rail: Rail loading arms have typical nozzle diameters of between six and
twelve inches and have a maximum capacity of about 5,000 barrels per
hour per arm.
- Marine: Marine loading arms have typical nozzle diameters of between
eight and twenty-four inches and have a maximum capacity of about
55,000 barrels per hour per arm.
Safety
equipment.
Freight
procured from the same region as the terminal facility Location or from out of
region.
QUE$TOR Help
414
Material Costs
Steelwork
Piping
Electrical
Instruments
QUE$TOR Onshore
415
Others
total cost.
Offloading Buoy (marine)
If a single point mooring has been selected then a value will appear here. It is
the cost of a mooring (SPM) located offshore, where tankers will moor, to take on
liquid products. To evaluate this cost in more detail an offshore project may be
activated and linked to the onshore development.
Offloading Pipeline
This is a lump sum cost, dependent on the length of the pipeline from the
terminal to an SPM. It is the total cost of the materials required.
Jetty materials
This is the material cost for building a jetty to which a tanker can moor to take on
crude liquid products. It includes all necessary materials to build the jetty.
Civils Materials
Freight
same region as the terminal facility Location or from out of region.
the Prefabrication tab of the terminal facility user interface, and are updated in
QUE$TOR Help
416
Construction Costs
QUE$TOR Onshore
417
Site Preparation
This is a total area based on the foundations requirement of the equipment
previously calculated. The cost includes for all preparation work required prior to
construction, e.g. clearing and levelling of jungle.
Civil Construction
Buoy Installation
This is the number of days required to install an offshore buoy if specified.
Pipeline Installation
This is the number of days to install a pipeline from the land terminal to an
offshore buoy.
Jetty Construction
This is a cost dependent on the length of the specified jetty. The cost then
relates the numbers of man-hours per metre of jetty.
General Costs
The general costs cover all other expenditures associated with the terminal
facility. They include design, project management, certification, insurance and a
contingency.
QUE$TOR Help
418
Insurance
This is a fixed percentage of the terminal facility cost and includes insurance for
all project components during transportation, construction, installation and
testing and commissioning. Personnel liability insurance is covered in the
respective cost centres.
Certification
Contingency
Onshore Pipelines
About Onshore Pipelines
The onshore pipeline component allows calculation of pipeline sizes, wall
thicknesses, materials, fittings, installation, design and project management costs
for a pipeline. The pipeline component handles single phase or multiphase
product export, water injection, gas injection and gas lift lines. The pipeline can
handle fluid flowing between new or existing production facilities, terminal
facilities and existing pipelines for tie-in. The materials costs include for linepipe,
QUE$TOR Onshore
419
coatings, corrosion protection, insulation, fixtures and fittings. Construction costs
are based on terrain, construction type, line size, pipeline crossings and the
spread used to lay the pipeline. Costs for design, project management, insurance
and contingency are included. Booster and reducer station costs can be included
when required.
Pipeline Links
Double clicking on a pipeline link in the field development schematic (FDS) will
open the pipeline link form, as shown below. There can be multiple pipelines in
each link. All pipelines in a link are assumed to follow exactly the same route,
although they can flow in either direction. To change flow direction, use the
From and To drop-down lists. If you wish to add pipelines with different routes
or lengths, use the FDS to insert a new pipeline link.
Additional pipelines can be added to the link by clicking Add or deleted by clicking
Remove. To cost a pipeline, select the desired pipeline and click Cost, this will
bring you through to the user interface for the pipeline. Clicking on close will
take you back to the FDS.
To access the decommissioning cost estimate select the desired pipeline and click
Decommission. For more information, see Decommissioning.
Length
The length of the pipeline link is used for sizing and pressure drop calculations as
well as material and installation cost. For automatically generated export
QUE$TOR Help
420
pipelines this defaults to the value specified as the Distance to delivery point in
the concept selector.
Flow type
The flow type can be selected from the dropdown menu; options available are:
- Oil: single phase oil flow.
- Oil + water: single phase oil and water flow.
- Gas: single phase gas flow.
- Gas injection: single phase gas flow for injection.
- Gas lift: single phase gas flow for lift.
- Water: single phase water flow.
- Water injection: single phase water flow for injection.
- NGL: single phase gas flow for gas lift.
- LPG: single phase LPG flow.
- Gasoline / Condensate: single phase gasoline or condensate flow.
- Two phase: two phase liquid and gas flow.
Water and gas injection pipelines should always be specified as injection lines
rather than gas or liquid lines. During pipeline sizing QUE$TOR increases the
diameter if inlet pressures exceed default ANSI flange ratings. Higher default
ratings are used in sizing high pressure injection lines than for export and free-
flow lines.
To / From
Pipelines in a link can run in either direction, these boxes specify the direction of
the flow and can be altered by you.
User Interface
Selecting a pipeline and clicking Cost in the pipeline link form opens the pipeline
component, the input panel is shown in the bottom left of the screen with the
cost estimate sheet on the right hand side.
Clicking on a blue hyperlinked heading in the cost sheet will open a more detailed
cost breakdown for the selected item or link. Modifications can be made to the
calculated quantities and unit rates. Clicking OK returns you to the cost estimate
saving any modifications and updating the overall estimate. Clicking Cancel
returns without saving modifications and leaves the overall cost estimate
unaltered.
QUE$TOR Onshore
421
Pipeline Sizing
The Pipeline sizing tab defines the highest level pipeline design specifications.
There are two modes of operation for the pipeline sizing tab; the mode is
dependent on the number of sections.
When the pipeline is a single section it allows full pipeline sizing.
When there are multiple sections the pipeline sizing tab only defines the inputs
that apply to the entire pipeline.
QUE$TOR Help
422
For multiple sections the pipeline hydraulics calculations are shown in the Pipeline
sections form.
The Beggs and Brill correlation is used for all flow types, both single phase and
multiphase. The initial sizing of pipelines is based on 50% of erosional velocity;
the diameter is then incremented up if inlet pressure exceeds the following
limits. After making a change click Apply to recalculate the pipeline hydraulics.
For oil, gas, liquid & two phase lines:
If inlet pressure > 135 bara then line size is incremented up (one size at a time)
until inlet pressure < 135 bara or diameter reaches maximum (60 inch). This is
designed to comply with an ANSI 900# flange rating on the oil export pump/gas
export compressor and allows for a 15% head rise to shut off.
For gas injection, gas lift and water injection lines:
If delivery pressure <= 210 bara and inlet pressure > 235 bara then line size is
incremented up (one size at a time) until inlet pressure <= 235 bara or the
diameter reaches a maximum of 60 inch. This is designed to comply with an
ANSI 1500# flange rating on the water pump/gas compressor and allows for a
15% head rise to shut off.
If delivery pressure > 210 bara then line size is incremented up (one size at a
time) until inlet pressure <= 400 bara or the diameter reaches a maximum of 60
inch. This is designed to comply with an ANSI 2500# flange rating on the water
pump/gas compressor and allows for a 15% head rise to shut off.
If you wish to exceed these flange ratings you can reduce the pipeline diameter
by overwriting the calculated value. The diameter will then be locked and the
flange rating limits will no longer be used. Click on Apply to calculate the new
pressure profile and wall thickness.
Material
Specifies the construction material of the pipelines. Three materials are
available, which is selected is dependent on the fluid.
QUE$TOR Onshore
423
- Carbon steel: API 5L grade X60 carbon steel (density 7800 kg/m
3
,
allowable stress 298 MPa, corrosion allowance 3 mm). This is selected for
low-corrosion fluids.
- Duplex: stainless steel (density 7900 kg/m
3
, allowable stress 327 MPa,
corrosion allowance 0 mm). This is selected when acid gas has been
specified.
- CRA: corrosion resistant alloy (density 7900 kg/m
3
, allowable stress 402
MPa, corrosion allowance 0 mm). This should be selected when pipelines
are susceptible to pitting corrosion e.g. seawater lines with high chloride
concentrations.
Liquid Flowrate
The liquid flow through the pipeline at standard conditions.
Gas Flowrate
The gas flow through the pipeline at standard conditions.
QUE$TOR calculates the diameter and wall thickness of the pipeline and the
pressure drop along its length. To do this either the inlet pressure or the outlet
pressure must be fixed. The radio buttons dictate which value is fixed. For
export pipelines QUE$TOR fixes the outlet pressure by default.
- Pressure in: the pipeline inlet pressure. For export pipelines this is
calculated from the pressure out.
- Pressure out: the pipeline outlet pressure. For gas export pipelines this
will default to the gas grid pressure specified in the technical database.
For oil export pipelines this will default to the operating pressure of the
last stage of separation, or 1.5 bara if a reboiled stabiliser is used, to
prevent vapour breakout in the oil export lines.
Temperature
The average ambient temperature. This is used in calculating the fluid properties
in the pipeline. The pipeline hydraulics are calculated assuming the pipeline is
isothermal at ambient temperature.
Pipeline Sections
The number of sections the pipeline is split into. This is not editable and is set by
the Pipeline sections sub-component. A booster or reducer station can be
specified between two sections dependent upon the inlet and outlet pressures.
Nominal Diameter
The nominal diameter by which line pipe is marketed. For diameters of 14 inches
and above it is the outer diameter, for smaller diameters it is approximately the
inner diameter of lines with standard wall thickness. In both cases the actual
inner diameter is dependent on the wall thickness. The available diameters range
from a minimum diameter of 4 inch to a maximum diameter of 60 inch.
Note: If you wish to change the pipeline diameter, remember to click Apply
to calculate the new pressure profile and wall thickness.
QUE$TOR Help
424
Fixed diameter
Once multiple pipeline sections have been created each section can have a
different diameter, the nominal diameter input/output is therefore greyed.
However, checking the fixed diameter box allows all sections of the same pipeline
to be fixed at the same diameter; this will then calculate a new pressure profile
and wall thickness.
Corrosion Allowance
The corrosion allowance to be included in the wall thickness. There are default
values for each of the three materials available.
Wall Thickness
The wall thickness of the pipeline is calculated using a design internal pressure to
110% of the inlet pressure. The calculated wall thickness can be overwritten if
you want to use a specific value. If the pipeline is to be designed for a much
higher design pressure than operating pressure, e.g. for well shut-in pressure,
then the diameter should be calculated using the operating pressure. The wall
thickness should then be recalculated using the design pressure. The wall
thickness includes the corrosion allowance. There is a minimum wall thickness of
6 mm (0.236 inch).
Slug Catchers
The Slug catchers tab defines whether slug catchers are to be included.
A slug catcher can be included on the inlet or outlet of a pipeline by checking the
boxes at the top of the desired frame. The inlet option is to allow a slug catcher
to be placed on the shore line when an offshore pipeline comes ashore. The
outlet option is to allow a slug catcher to be placed at the end of a pipeline before
the flow is passed into a processing facility.
QUE$TOR Onshore
425
- Slug volume: determined based on the speed of the flow and the mix of
liquid and gas in the pipeline.
The dimensions of the slug catcher are such that the size of the unit is kept as
compact possible while performing the separation with a maximum diameter of
48 inch and a maximum length of 150m.
Note: Slug catchers will always need to be entered if required as they are
never included by default.
Winterisation
The Winterisation tab allows users to specify the level of winterisation of the
pipeline. If Arctic/Tundra is selected as the terrain in the field level data then the
box will be checked, at all other times it is unchecked. Checking winterisation
adds insulation as default.
- Increased depth of gravel base: when checked the depth of the gravel
bases under the equipment at any booster stations is increased by 50%.
- Winterisation of booster station facilities: when checked there is
increased thermal insulation around temperature sensitive equipment and
piping at any booster stations.
Pipeline Sections
Clicking on Pipeline sections in the pipeline inputs panel opens the pipeline
sections form. The pipeline sections form has two modes of operation which are
dependent on the number of sections.
QUE$TOR Help
426
When the pipeline has only one section most of the inputs are greyed and
unavailable because they are defined on the pipeline sizing tab. The pipeline
sections form allows the user to define if the pipeline has insulation, coatings and
corrosion protection. This form also allows access to the Terrain and crossings
form.
The second mode of operation is when more than one pipeline section is
specified. To add a pipeline section click Add new section. To remove a
pipeline section and its associated station click Remove last section. Adding a
new section will result in a booster or reducer station being added between the
pipeline sections to provide pumping or pressure reduction. The pipeline sections
form with three sections being calculated is illustrated below.
Now the majority of the main inputs are editable in order to specify the pipeline
sections separately.
Pipeline Sections
QUE$TOR Onshore
427
The pipeline sections form contains the details of each section. If any conditions
are to be applied to the pipeline as a whole these can be changed on the main
inputs, but intermediate conditions are changed here. As before each section can
have the insulation, coating and corrosion protection specified. The terrain and
crossings form can be accessed for each section.
- Pipeline section: designates the section. The sections are ordered
alphabetically.
- Liquid flow: the liquid flow through the pipeline. This is set by the value
on the pipeline sizing tab of the pipeline inputs and is not editable.
- Gas flow: the gas flow through the pipeline. This is set by the value on
the pipeline sizing tab of the pipeline inputs and is not editable.
- Inlet pressure / outlet pressure: the inlet and outlet pressure of the
section. The inlet or outlet pressure of each of the sections can be
adjusted, dependant on the radio button option chosen on the main input
screen.
- Inlet elevation: the elevation at the inlet of the pipeline section. This is
set by the elevation of the source component for the first section and by
the outlet elevation of the previous section for all other sections.
- Outlet elevation: the elevation at the outlet of the pipeline section. This
is dependent on the specified elevation of the source and destination
components. Any change in elevation is accounted for in the first section
with a constant elevation for the remaining sections.
- Length: the length of the section. The final section length cannot be
edited and displays the remaining length to make up the total pipeline
length.
Note: In order to exit this form the total length of all sections must match
the length of the pipeline link which they make up. If the final section has a
length of 0 then the form will not be calculated and OK cannot be clicked.
- Diameter: calculated in an identical manner to a single section pipeline.
See Pipeline sizing. Alternatively the diameter can be fixed for the length
of the pipeline, this can be specified by checking the box on the pipeline
sizing tab of inputs.
- Wall thickness / Corrosion allowance: calculated in an identical
manner to a single section pipeline. See Pipeline sizing.
- Coating: this includes an external three layer polypropylene coating in
the cost calculation. The default selection is for coating to be included for
all pipelines. Polypropylene is suitable for wall temperatures up to 100C.
- Cathodic protection: included for carbon steel lines only. The weight of
the sacrificial anodes is dependent on the diameter and length. It is
assumed 1 kg of anodes is required per square metre of external pipe
surface area.
- Insulation: allows a choice of 15, 25 or 50 mm thickness of
polyurethane foam insulation. Insulation is included for sections with
Arctic / Tundra as a terrain type.
- Terrain and crossings: clicking on Terrain and crossings in the pipeline
sections form opens the terrain and crossings form. This allows the details
of the pipeline route to be specified.
QUE$TOR Help
428
Booster / Reducer Stations
A booster station is included when the outlet pressure of the first section is lower
than the inlet pressure of the second section; similarly a reducer station is
included when the outlet pressure of the first section is higher than the inlet
pressure of the second section. If the inlet and outlet pressure are the same no
station is included. See Booster / Reducer Stations for further details.
Note: Booster and reducer stations are only available for single phase
pipelines.
Booster / Reducer Stations
Booster and reducer stations are used to equalise the pressure in between
pipeline sections so that the outlet pressure of one section is equal to the inlet of
the next.
Note: Booster and reducer stations are only available for single phase
pipelines.
A booster station includes pumping or compression equipment, plus any required
power generation and distribution as well as controls, communications, safety
facilities and utilities. The cost estimates includes for materials, design, project
management, construction and insurance of the booster station.
A reducer station includes for a reduction valve, plus design, project
management, and insurance. Associated construction is assumed to be included
in the general pipeline construction costs.
- From section / Station / To section: specifies the location of the
station.
- Booster / reducer: the booster or reducer station can be removed by
unchecking the check box.
- Station type: specifies whether the station is a booster or a reducer. A
booster station is included when the outlet pressure of the first section is
lower than the inlet pressure of the second section. A reducer station is
included when the outlet pressure of the first section is higher than the
inlet pressure of the second section. If the inlet and outlet pressure are
the same no station is required.
Product Export / Gas Compression
QUE$TOR Onshore
429
For liquid lines clicking on Product export in the booster / reducer frame of the
pipeline sections form opens the product export form.
For further details on pumps see Product Export.
For gas lines clicking on Gas compression in the booster / reducer frame of the
pipeline sections form opens the gas compression form.
For further details on compressors see Gas Compression.
QUE$TOR Help
430
In addition to the specifications of the booster station the control system,
communications system, utilities, power, and civils also need to be specified.
Fuel supply: specifies the fuel source for the gas compression turbine drivers.
This can be either external gas or from the gas product in the pipeline.
Clicking on Control and comms in the booster / reducer frame of the pipeline
sections form opens the control and communications form. This allows the details
of the control and communications systems for the booster station to be specified
and is shown below.
Four control options are available.
- Distributed: suitable for the larger pipeline systems with multiple
booster stations where a main control room and several local equipment
rooms are necessary.
- Conventional: suitable for medium-sized pipeline systems with several
booster stations where one centralised control room is required
- Basic local: suitable for small pipeline systems with easily accessible
booster stations
- Manual: suitable for small easily accessible booster stations
Three communications options are available.
- Satellite: a satellite system will be used to handle the communications.
Costs are estimated for a main satellite connection with additional booster
stations hooked in with a cable connection.
- Microwave: communications are handled using a microwave link. Each
booster station supports a transmitter and receiver to communicate with
the control facility. This method of communication is limited to line of
sight.
- Cable / fibre: communications are handled by direct cable connection to
the control facility
Utilities
QUE$TOR Onshore
431
Clicking on Utilities in the booster / reducer frame of the pipeline sections form
opens the utilities form. This allows the details of the required utility systems for
the booster station to be specified.
- Diesel fuel / storage: required by diesel fuelled and emergency
generators. The weight includes for storage, transfer pumps and filters.
Power
Clicking on Power in the booster / reducer frame of the pipeline sections form
opens the power form. This allows the details of the power requirements and
generation for the booster station to be specified.
QUE$TOR Help
432
The radio buttons at the top dictate whether the cost of power generation is
included or if only distribution is considered. Emergency power generation is
required in both cases.
Power Requirements
equipment sizing sub-components. The list identifies the loads for each system
which can be changed by overwriting the stated load with a new figure.
Emergency Power
Safety power.
Derating Factor
Duty
QUE$TOR Onshore
433
factor.
factor.
Note: Changing the number of generators will also initially change the
design duty/generator if unlocked, to ensure there is always a spare generator.
Driver Type
than 1MW (1,340hp).
box, if desired.
Weights
system:
type selected
QUE$TOR Help
434
Civils
Clicking on Civils in the booster / reducer frame of the pipeline sections form
opens the civils form. This allows the details of the civil requirements for the
booster station to be specified.
- Foundations area: covers the foundation area required for pumping,
compression power generation and distribution, utilities, safety, vehicular
access and buildings.
- Totals: gives the total of the above frame and then by applying a factor
to this gives the corresponding plot area.
Terrain and Crossings
Clicking on Terrain + crossing in the pipeline sections frame of the pipeline
sections form opens the terrain / crossings form. This allows the terrain through
which the pipeline section is laid to be specified.
QUE$TOR Onshore
435
Each section may cross a number of different terrains en route to its destination.
To add an additional terrain type click Add new terrain. To remove terrain type
click Remove last terrain.
- Terrain type: the default is the same as selected when defining the
procurement strategy. The terrains can be revised using the dropdown list
box. Terrain options available are; Arctic/Tundra, Desert, Grassland,
Jungle, Mountain, Swamp or Urban. The number and types of terrain
specified primarily affect the construction duration.
- Construction type: specifies the construction type for the terrain. The
construction types can be revised using the dropdown list box. The
construction options are Buried, Surface or Elevated. A default is selected
dependent on the terrain.
- Length: the length of the terrain section. The final section length cannot
be edited and displays the remaining length to make up the total pipeline
length.
- Note: In order exit this form the total length of all
terrains must match the length of the pipeline section which
they make up. If the final section has a length of 0 then the
form will not be calculated and OK cannot be clicked.
- Number of crossings: for each terrain selected it is also possible to
specify the number of crossings that the pipeline must negotiate while in
that terrain. Crossings include; Estuary, Major river, Minor river, Major
road, railway, and Minor road. The default number of crossings is set by
- Construction duration: number of construction days required to build
each portion of the pipeline section. This is automatically calculated and
does not include the any mob/demob days; these are included in the
construction duration form.
Pipeline Schematic
Clicking on Schematic in the pipeline sections form opens the onshore pipeline
schematic form. This is a graphical representation of the pipeline and stations
specified.
QUE$TOR Help
436
The x axis shows the length of the pipeline and the y axis shows the elevation of
the pipeline at any point along its length. The colour of the area under the line
represents the terrain over which the pipeline is being laid. The arrow symbols
represent a booster or reducer station located between sections of the pipeline.
The schematic can be previewed and printed using the buttons at the top of the
form.
Construction Duration
Clicking on Pipeline sections in the pipeline inputs panel opens the product
pipeline sections form. This form shows the total construction duration required
for each terrain in each section of the pipeline.
QUE$TOR Onshore
437
- Construction duration: number of days required to build each terrain
portion of the pipeline section. This is calculated in the terrains and
crossings form.
- Number of spreads: used to schedule the pipeline laying. The terrains
are grouped by the type of spread required. Grassland, desert and urban
are assumed to require the same basic pipelay spread. Whereas each of
the other terrains require a specialised spread.
- Mob / demob: the days required to get the spread into the field and
ready for laying.
- Total duration: the total pipelay spread requirement. This is the sum of
the construction and mob / demob durations.
Equipment Costs
Equipment costs relate only to the booster / reducer stations and slug catchers.
Each booster station and slug catcher has its own cost sheet which breaks out the
component costs.
Booster Stations
QUE$TOR Help
438
Clicking on Booster station 1 in the cost sheet opens the equipment cost sheet
for the booster station.
Equipment costs for booster stations are broken down to account for pumping
and compression requirements, controls and communications, safety, utilities and
power. Freight, design, project management, insurance and contingency are
included on the main cost sheet.
Reducer Stations
Reducer stations have a single line item for the reducer valve. This is dependent
on the pipeline diameter.
Slug Catchers
Clicking on Inlet Slug Catcher in the cost sheet opens the equipment cost sheet
for the inlet slug catcher as shown below.
QUE$TOR Onshore
439
The cost sheet gives a single line for the weight and unit rate of the slug catcher.
Freight, design, project management, insurance and contingency are included on
the main cost sheet.
Freight
procured from the same region as the pipeline Location or from out of region.
Materials Costs
Materials costs relate to the pipeline, coatings, fittings and crossings. Booster
stations and slug catchers have separate materials cost sheets.
QUE$TOR Help
440
Linepipe
The linepipe unit rate is a composite rate per unit length determined from the
pipeline material and wall thickness. The pipelines are assumed to be seamless
for 14 inch diameter and below and seam welded for 16 inch diameter and
above. All pipes include an epoxy anti-corrosion coat.
Fittings
This includes for all the required valves and joints to connect the pipeline at
either end to the facilities, as well as any required joints along its length. It is
taken as a percentage of the linepipe cost.
Freight
same region as the terminal facility Location or from out of region.
Booster stations
Clicking on Booster station 1 in the cost sheet opens the materials cost sheet
- Steelwork: calculated by applying a factor on the booster station
equipment weights. The unit rate for steel materials includes allowances
for cutting, wastage and surface coatings.
- Piping: calculated by applying factors to the booster station equipment
weights. The factors relate tonnes of equipment to tonnes of piping and
are stored in regional databases to reflect different design practices and
materials of construction. The weight includes for all pipe supports,
QUE$TOR Onshore
441
flanges and fittings and valves but excludes control valves and emergency
shutdown valves (which are included in instrument bulks).
- Electrical: calculated by applying factors to the booster station
equipment weights. The factors relate tonnes of equipment to tonnes of
electrical bulks. The weights include for all cabling, cable trays, supports,
terminations, glands, gland transits, junction boxes, lighting and small
power systems (e.g. batteries/life support power).
- Instrument: calculated by applying factors on the booster station
equipment weights. The factors relate tonnes of equipment to tonnes of
instrument bulks. The weights include all instrument cabling, pneumatic
tubing, terminations, glands, gland penetrations, supports, control valves,
relief valves and ESD and blowdown valves.
- Others: includes all additional bulk system weights associated with the
HVAC and safety systems plus painting and architectural bulks. HVAC
bulks are calculated as a factor of the equipment system weights. It
includes for ducts, duct supports, insulation, flow dampers and grilles.
Safety system bulks are calculated as a factor of the equipment system
weights. It includes for fire monitors, hose reels, deluge valves, fire and
gas sectors, halon and CO
2
systems, portable fire extinguishers, fire
blankets, fireman's equipment. Architectural bulks are calculated as a
factor of those equipment systems requiring architectural items. These
items are then totalled up to give an overall weight which is entered under
the item other bulks.
- Civils materials: includes for the clearing and grading of the booster
station site.
- Freight: the cost of transportation of the materials from the place of
procurement to its intended destination. It is a fixed percentage applied
to the materials cost. The percentage is dependent on whether the
equipment is procured from the same region as the terminal facility
Location or from out of region.
Slug Catchers
Clicking on Inlet Slug Catcher in the cost sheet opens the material cost sheet
for the inlet slug catcher.
QUE$TOR Help
442
As for booster stations the materials are broken into categories and are calculated
based on the weight of the slug catcher equipment.
Construction Costs
Construction costs relate to the physical construction of the pipeline, crossings,
support framing, plus any pipeline testing or right of way assessments. Booster
stations and slug catchers have separate construction cost sheets.
Booster Stations
Clicking on Booster station 1 in the cost sheet opens the construction cost sheet
QUE$TOR Onshore
443
This gives the breakdown of construction costs for the booster station and
includes the construction of the bulk materials which were estimated in the
previous section.
Slug Catchers
Clicking on Inlet Slug Catcher in the cost sheet opens the construction cost
sheet for the inlet slug catcher.
QUE$TOR Help
444
The costs are broken down into similar categories to the booster station
construction cost sheet.
General Costs
The general costs cover all other expenditures associated with the pipeline. They
include design, project management, certification, insurance and a contingency.
QUE$TOR Onshore
445
Insurance
This is a fixed percentage of the pipeline cost and includes insurance for all
project components during transportation, construction, installation and testing
and commissioning. Personnel liability insurance is covered in the respective cost
centres.
Certification
Contingency
Wellpad Group
About Wellpad Groups
The wellpad group component lists all of the wellpads, wells, well location
equipment and flowlines required to connect to a production facility.
A wellpad group can be just one individual wellpad with the necessary flowlines
back to a production facility or it can be several wellpads located in one group
and manifolded together with the associated flowlines back to a production
facility. The user can also specify whether pig launchers and test separators are
required at the wellpad location.
User Interface
On entering the wellpad group component the input panel is shown in the bottom
left of the screen with the cost estimate sheet on the right hand side. QUE$TOR
will choose appropriate values for every parameter based on linked components
and field level data. Some inputs may also be dependent upon high level inputs
within the same component, for example flowline diameters are dependent on
flowrates. The cost estimate displays a breakdown of every cost item included in
the component.
QUE$TOR Help
446
Inputs
The wellpad group input panel is shown below. QUE$TOR will choose appropriate
values for every parameter based on linked components and field level data.
Many inputs are also dependent upon higher level inputs within the same
component.
available facilities, such as wellpads, in more detail click on the relevant arrow
button. Each facility can be considered as a sub-component within the wellpad
group. All of these sub-components are recalculated when unlocked if high level
inputs (e.g. flowrates) are changed. In a similar fashion if you adjust wellpads
then, as long as it is unlocked, civils will be recalculated based on the new
wellpad configuration.
sub-components and the cost estimate.
Facilities
Each facility or sub-component has an associated arrow button; clicking on this
QUE$TOR Onshore
447
dependent inputs and costs. Clicking Cancel will exit without saving.
Primary Inputs
The Primary tab allows users to choose the highest level wellpad group design
specifications.
Location
Several geographical factors can affect the cost of the wellpad group. The two
taken into account are:
data. The terrain at the location of the production facility can be revised
using the dropdown list box Terrain options available are; Arctic/Tundra,
Desert, Grassland, Jungle, Mountain, Swamp or Urban.
- Elevation: is the elevation of the wellpad group above sea level.
Wells
Specifies the number of wells by well type and the associated flowrates. The
flowrate is calculated by pro-rating the total field flow by the number of wells
assuming an equal flowrate for all wells of the same type. The number of wells
displayed here will update automatically if you add or remove wells in the Wellpad
editor.
QUE$TOR Help
448
- Wells: the number of wells for each type of well. If the wellpad group is
connected to drilling components it will automatically pick up the number
of wells from the drilling components.
Note: Changing the number of wells in a drilling component
will change the number of wells in any linked wellpad group
component, but the reverse situation does not apply. Therefore, it is
recommended that adjustments to the well count are made in the
drilling components.
- Flowrate: the total flowrate from / to each well type. This is used to size
the flowlines required. For an oil project the production flowrate represent
the total liquids flow i.e. the oil and produced water flowrate.
Note: The produced water cut is assumed to be 10% at peak
well flow.
Freeze Wellpad Configuration
Checking the box will prevent changes made in a linked drilling component or in
the field level data changing the wellpad group configuration. If the number of
wells is changed the layout will revert to the default and any changes made in the
Wellpad Editor will be lost.
QUE$TOR Onshore
449
Note: The wellpad configuration will become frozen if you click the OK
button in the Wellpad editor. If you want to review and then accept the default
data then you should click on the Cancel button.
Prefabrication
wellpads within the group.
applied.
on-site.
Winterisation
wellpads and flowlines within the wellpad group. If Arctic/Tundra is selected as
QUE$TOR Help
450
the terrain for the wellpad group on the Primary tab then the boxes will be
checked, at all other times they are unchecked.
- Winterisation of facilities: when checked there is increased insulation
around temperature sensitive equipment.
Wellpad Editor
Clicking on Wellpads opens the wellpad editor form. All wellpads specified within
this wellpad group appear on this sheet. The editor details the technical
information relating to each of the designated wellpads in the wellpad group.
QUE$TOR Onshore
451
Any number of wellpads can be selected at one time from the list. When a
wellpad is selected the row becomes highlighted and the technical information
displayed. The listbox follows the standard Windows conventions for multiple
selections i.e. as in Explorer.
To select a single wellpad click on the desired wellpad. To select all the wellpads
click Select all. To select a range of consecutive wellpads select the first desired
wellpad, hold down the Shift key and select the last wellpad. To select a non-
consecutive wellpads hold down the Ctrl key and select the wellpads required. To
clear all selections click Select none.
To add a wellpad click Add wellpad. To remove wellpads select the wellpads to
be removed and click Remove wellpad.
On selecting the desired wellpad(s), the tabs in the bottom half of the form
become active and display the technical data of the wellpad(s). Changes made in
the tabs will apply to all the selected wellpads. If a field is blank then the value is
not consistent for the selected wellpads, changes can be applied to these fields in
the same manner as any other e.g. to change the power supply of wellpads 1, 2
and 4 select the wellpads and adjust the power supply. All three wellpads take
on the new selection.
Note: The wellpad configuration will become frozen if you click the OK
button in the Wellpad editor. If you want to review and accept the default data
then you should click on the Cancel button
QUE$TOR Help
452
Wellpad Editor Primary Inputs
The Primary tab contains the highest level technical data of the selected
wellpad(s).
Linkages
This frame specifies which production facility the wellpad is linked to. The drop
down list contains the production facilities which are linked to the wellpad group
within the development. If there is no linked production facility then a third party
facility is assumed.
Equipment
Specifies the equipment that is installed at the wellpad.
- Test separator: is selected when there are at least 4 production wells at
the wellpad.
- Pig launcher: is selected when waxy crude is specified in the field level
data.
Power Requirements
This frame specifies the power and emergency power requirements together with
the location of the power generation.
- Power supply: specifies if the power is generated at the wellpad or by a
linked production facility.
- Power: the power required by the wellpad. This covers control systems
and utilities. The pump power is included for pumped wells.
- Emergency power: provided by diesel generators. This covers essential
systems such as control but does not include for pumps.
QUE$TOR Onshore
453
Note: The power required by pumps at pumped wells will only be included
if pumped wells are specified in associated drilling components.
Well Count
This frame specifies the number of wells by well type. The number of wells is
distributed evenly between the wellpads by type.
Wellpad Editor Flowline Bundle
The Flowline bundle tab allows users to specify the flowlines that link the
production facility to the wellpad.
Bundle
The flowlines to and from each wellpad are bundled into a single track containing
all the flowlines. This frame contains technical data that applies to that bundle.
- Length: the length of the bundle; the distance of the wellpad from the
connected production facility, or third party facility, and therefore the
length of the flowline is set by the Field Length and Field Width.
- Inlet elevation: the elevation at the wellpad. This is set by the
elevation specified in the primary tab of the wellpad group inputs.
- Outlet elevation: the elevation at the flowline destination. This is set by
the elevation of the linked production facility or by the elevation of the
linked sink for an existing production facility.
Note: These represent the inlet and outlet of the production
lines. For injection flowlines the elevations are inverted.
- Power cable: the power cable will be selected when the power supply in
the Primary tab is set to the linked production facility.
QUE$TOR Help
454
- Umbilicals: allows for a chemical injection tube, if selected the number
of umbilicals defaults to one per well.
- Bundle diameter: the equivalent diameter of the pipeline bundle. This
is calculated from the diameters of the selected flowlines and will affect
the pipelay spread selection.
Flowlines
Specifies the details of the flowlines in the bundle. For each flowline the flowrate
and diameter is shown. The full flowline sizing routine can be accessed using the
arrow button.
- Flow: the flowrate of the fluid. For the production flowline the liquid and
gas flowrates are specified separately.
- Diameter: determined through standard flowline hydraulics. The inlet
pressure is fixed for production lines assuming free flow of the fluid. The
outlet pressure is fixed for injection flowlines by the injection pressure.
- Flowline sizing: clicking on the flowline sizing arrow button opens the
flowline sizing form.
This form allows full sizing of the flowline including diameter, corrosion allowance
and wall thickness. For further details of flowline sizing in QUE$TOR see Pipeline
Sizing.
Construction
Specifies the details of the construction and route of the flowline bundle.
- Construction type: specifies the construction type. The construction
types can be revised using the dropdown list box. The construction
options are Buried, Surface or Elevated. A default is selected dependent
on the terrain.
QUE$TOR Onshore
455
- Number of crossings: for each terrain selected it is also possible to
specify the number of crossings that the flowline must negotiate while in
that terrain. Crossings include; Estuary, Major river, Minor river, Major
road, Minor road and Railway. The default number of crossings is set by
- Construction duration: number of construction days required to build
the flowline bundle. This is automatically calculated and does not include
the any mob/demob days.
Wellpad Editor - Details
The Details tab specifies the calculated weights of equipment by system and is
shown below. It also specifies the foundation area.
Manifolding and Equipment
This frame specifies the weight of the manifolding systems for the specified
flowlines including production, test, injection and lift flowlines. The weight of the
test facilities is given at the bottom of the frame.
Utilities
This frame specifies the weights of the associated utility and safety systems.
Power
This frame specifies the weights of the power requirements specified in the
Primary tab of the wellpad editor. A weight is given for power generation, power
distribution and emergency power.
Flowlines
QUE$TOR Help
456
Clicking on Flowlines in the wellpad inputs panel opens the flowlines form. The
default selection is based on the wellpad configuration and the systems selected.
Flowline
This frame details the specifics of the flowline construction, including insulation,
coating and insulation.
- Material: three grades of steel can be chosen for the flowlines: Carbon
steel, Duplex steel and CRA (Corrosion Resistant Alloy). The production
flowline default is API 5L Grade X60 carbon steel (density 7800 kg/m
3
,
allowable stress 298 MPa, corrosion allowance 3 mm) unless acid gas has
been specified when duplex is selected (density 7900 kg/m
3
, allowable
stress 327 MPa, corrosion allowance 0 mm). CRA should be used for
flowlines susceptible to pitting corrosion (density 7900 kg/m
3
, allowable
stress 402 MPa, corrosion allowance 0 mm). QUE$TOR assumes that
water and gas injection flowlines and gas lift lines are carbon steel.
- Thermal insulation: allows a choice of 15, 25 or 50 mm thickness of
polyurethane foam insulation. Insulation is included when Arctic / Tundra
is selected as the terrain type.
- Routing: the flowline length can be calculated based on either a direct
route or corridor route.
- Coating: this includes an external three layer polypropylene coating in
the cost calculation. The default selection is for coating to be included for
all flowlines. Polypropylene is suitable for wall temperatures up to 100C.
QUE$TOR Onshore
457
- Cathodic protection: included for carbon steel lines only. The weight of
the sacrificial anodes is dependent on the diameter and length. It is
assumed 1 kg of anodes is required per square metre of external pipe
surface area.
Installation
This frame specifies the details of the installation of the flowlines.
- Number of spreads: used to schedule the flowline laying.
- Mob / demob per spread: the days required to get each spread into the
field and ready for laying.
Control System
Clicking on Control systems in the wellpad group inputs panel opens the control
systems form. Control and communications allows selection of the process
control system and communications options. The choice of the type of control
system is inherently a function of the geography and location of the wellpad
group. For example in an isolated environment, like a desert, a satellite would
normally be used.
Three options are available; each option covers main control, emergency shut-
down (ESD), fire & gas and associated interface panels.
- Distributed: suitable for larger wellpad groups where a main
necessary.
- Conventional: suitable for medium-sized wellpad groups where one
- Basic: suitable for small wellpad groups where local control panels are
the only requirement.
Civils
Clicking on Civils in the wellpad group inputs panel opens the Civils form. The
civils sub-component covers the plot area required by the wellpad group.
QUE$TOR Help
458
- Total foundations: covers the area of the equipment specified on the
wellpad configuration and the systems selected, with an allowance for
access around each item within the terminal facility.
- Buildings: covers the required buildings within the wellpad group and is
- Total plot area: the total area of the wellpad group. This is used to
area; buildings plot area and vehicular access plot area.
Equipment Costs
components, sub-vendor's submission to approval authorities and testing at the
vendor's works. Direct procurement costs are included in the design cost centre.
QUE$TOR Onshore
459
Manifolding
Covers all the manifolding required at all the wellpad locations. A breakdown per
wellpad is given during the calculation process in the wellpads sub-component.
When the wellpads contain only one well the figure here will be minimal. The
manifolding includes all piping and associated equipment to gather the fluids to
and from each well and collect it together into the flowlines connecting the
wellpads to the production facility. This will include all manifolding for production
fluids, gas lift, gas injection, water injection and test lines.
Freight
Freight is a fixed percentage applied to the equipment cost and establishes the
cost of shipping all the equipment from the manufacturers location to the field.
Materials Costs
QUE$TOR Help
460
Steelwork
Covers all the necessary steelwork to erect and install the equipment specified.
This includes all prefabricated skids, main truss framing, outfitting steel for
walkways, platforms etc.
Piping
Covers the cost of all necessary piping and manually operated valves required to
connect all the equipment together. It includes a range of pipeline sizes and
different materials and includes all pipe rack and pipe supports required. The
piping cost is calculated by applying factors to each of the equipment system
weights, summing these and applying a unit rate dependent on material selection
to give a total cost.
Electrical
Covers cost of all necessary electrical cabling required to connect the equipment
together. It includes all junction boxes but excludes transformers and switch
gear which are included in Power distribution. It also includes all cabling racking
and ties. The electrical cost is calculated by applying factors to each of the
equipment systems weights, summing these to give a total weight and applying a
unit rate to get the total cost.
Instruments
Covers the cost of all necessary instrumentation to operate and control the
Others
Covers HVAC, architectural, insulation and painting. The others cost is calculated
by the program by applying factors to each of the equipment systems weights,
summing these and applying a unit rate to give a total cost.
QUE$TOR Onshore
461
Flowlines
Covers all the flowline materials required to connect the wellpads to the
production facility. This is broken into production, test, gas lift, gas injection, and
water injection lines with each flowline type further broken down into three areas.
- Linepipe: covers the cost of the pipeline. The unit rate is based on the
length.
- Fittings: covers the associated fittings and is calculated as a percentage
of the Linepipe cost.
- Coating: covers any coating specified for the pipeline. The unit rate is
dependent on the type(s) of coating and is based on the length of the
flowline.
Umbilical
Includes the total length of umbilicals required for the specified wellpad
configuration. Umbilicals are run in parallel with flowlines assuming the same
lengths.
Power Cable
Covers the cost of the lengths of power lines required to link the wellpads to the
Crossings
Covers all specified crossings. There is a single cost which is dictated by the type
and number of crossings.
Civils materials
Covers all the materials required to construct the foundations, buildings and
vehicular access areas. This includes all concrete, reinforcement hardcore,
gravel, surfacing, etc. The unit rate is dependent on the relative areas for
foundations, roads and general civils preparation.
Freight
Covers the cost of transporting the materials from the place of procurement to
the intended destination. It is a fixed percentage applied to the materials cost.
same region as the wellpad group Location or from out of region.
the Prefabrication tab of the wellpad group user interface, and are updated in the
cost estimate sheet as each sub-component is adjusted. The prefabrication costs
include all prefabrication activities, from receipt and storage of materials,
QUE$TOR Help
462
Construction Costs
QUE$TOR Onshore
463
Site Preparation
Covers the preparation of the site and is a total area based on the area calculated
in the Civils sub-component. The cost includes for all preparation work required
prior to construction, e.g. clearing and levelling of jungle.
Civil Construction
Flowline Testing
Covers the cost of testing the flowlines and is taken as a fixed percentage of the
flowline construction cost.
Flowline Right of Way
Covers the cost or the right of way assessment and is taken as a fixed percentage
of the flowline construction cost.
General Costs
The general costs cover all other expenditures associated with the wellpad group.
contingency.
QUE$TOR Help
464
Insurance
This is a fixed percentage of the wellpad group cost and includes insurance for all
centres.
Certification
Contingency
Onshore Drilling
About Onshore Drilling
The drilling component estimates the drilling costs including rig hire, drill crew,
well equipment, consumables, materials, conductors, etc.
For each well a profile is specified and the total measured depth calculated.
Durations are determined from depth versus duration curves for both the drilling
and completion operations and from drilling learning factor curves. The eighth
QUE$TOR Onshore
465
well in a drilling operation is assumed to be the technical well with a learning
factor of 1. These durations and factors can be changed by editing the Drilling
Curves.
Several drilling operations can be specified on a single development allowing well
drilling programmes to be phased more easily. Different classes of rigs can also
be specified.
Exploration and appraisal wells should also be costed in their own drilling
component to allow them to be accurately scheduled.
User Interface
On entering the drilling component the input panel is shown in the bottom left of
the screen with the cost estimate sheet on the right hand side.
Inputs
The drilling input panel is shown below. QUE$TOR will choose appropriate values
for every parameter based on field level data. Many inputs are also dependent
upon higher level inputs within the same component.
available sub-components, such as the drilling profiles, click on the relevant
arrow button. Both of these sub-components are recalculated when unlocked if
high level inputs (e.g. rig class) are changed.
drilling sub-components and the cost estimate.
QUE$TOR Help
466
Within the sub-component form clicking OK will save any changes, close the form
and update all unlocked dependent inputs and costs. Clicking Cancel will exit
without saving.
Details
The Details tab defines the highest level drilling campaign design specifications
and is shown below.
QUE$TOR Onshore
467
Rig class
Due to the difficulty in adequately classifying rig types QUE$TOR simply defines
rigs within categories from A to E. The default depth versus duration curves for
each rig type can be edited allowing rigs with user defined characteristics to be
created. The default rig classification is based upon:
A-Class: An international heavy duty top drive rig with the capability to
drill highly deviated HP/HT wells to a measured depth of 9,000 metres
(30,000 ft).
B-Class: An international medium duty rig with the capability to drill
deviated wells to a measured depth of 5,000 metres (16,000 ft).
C-Class: An international light duty rig with the capability to drill deviated
wells to a measured depth of 3,000 metres (10,000 ft).
D-Class: A domestic medium duty rig with the capability to drill deviated
E-Class: A basic domestic light duty drilling unit with the capability to drill
substantially vertical wells to a measured depth of 2,000 metres (6,500
ft).
Note: Only A-Class to C-Class rigs are selected by default. If the reservoir depth
is greater than 9000m then an A-Class rig is assumed.
Well type
QUE$TOR Help
468
Specifies the type of wells being drilled by the component. There are four
options; which option is selected is dependent on the field level data.
Exploration: wells drilled for exploration and appraisal of the field. This
is never selected by default but can be specified to allow accurate
scheduling.
Note: A separate drilling component needs to be used to define Exploration wells
as they are likely to be drilled many months before the production wells.
Natural: specifies that the wells require no pumping to extract the well
fluids. This is selected when the pressure within the field is sufficient to
allow free flow of the well fluids from the well to the production facility.
Gas lift: specifies that the wells use gas to provide artificial lift to extract
the well fluids. This should be selected when the pressure within the field
is insufficient to allow free flow of the well fluids from the well to the
Pumped: specifies that the wells use pumps to provide artificial lift to
extract the well fluids. This should be selected when the pressure within
the field is insufficient to allow free flow of the well fluids from the well to
the production facility.
Note: Gas lift and pumped wells are only available in projects where oil is the
main product.
Pumped wells
This specifies the type of pump being used to provide the artificial lift and is only
active when Pumped is selected as the well type.
Beam: surface based beam pumps or nodding donkeys provide the
necessary pumping to extract the well fluids.
Downhole electric: electric pumps located at the bottom of the well
provide the necessary pumping to extract the well fluids.
Downhole hydraulic: hydraulic pumps located at the bottom of the well
provide the necessary pumping to extract the well fluids.
Profile
There are four available Drilling Profiles in QUE$TOR, described below. The
profile dictates the profile by which the wells are drilled and is selected using the
dropdown list.
Build and drop: wells are drilled on a build and drop profile, allowing
multiple wells to be drilled from the same wellpad. This profile is never
selected as a default.
Build and hold: wells are drilled on a build and hold profile, allowing
multiple wells to be drilled from the same wellpad. This profile is selected
as default when the number of production, water injection or gas injection
wells is greater than one.
QUE$TOR Onshore
469
Horizontal at true vertical depth: wells are drilled on horizontally once
the well depth is reached, allowing multiple wells to be drilled from the
same wellpad. This profile is never selected as a default.
Vertical: wells are drilled vertically from individual wellpads. The first
well and all exploration/appraisal wells are drilled assumed to always be
vertically drilled.
Well details
The well details frame allows you to specify the number of production, water
injection and gas injection wells to be included in the drilling component together
with the flowrates from these wells. See well and flow distribution for more
details.
Wells: the number of wells for each of the types of well and is defined
from the production profile. The number of wells is distributed evenly
between all drilling components i.e. if the project has multiple drilling
components, adding wells to one drilling component will reduce the
number of wells in the other components if unlocked.
Flowrate: the total flowrate from/to each well category in the drilling
component and is used to select the size of tubing, wellheads and Xmas
trees required. Flowrates are not required for exploration/appraisal wells,
as it is assumed they are not completed. The flowrate is linked to the
number of wells and changing the number of wells will change unlocked
flowrates proportionally.
Note: In an oil project the production flowrate represents the flowrate of the
produced oil only.
Drilling details
The drilling details frame specifies the reservoir details together with some
prerequisite limits of the drilling.
Reservoir depth: the vertical distance to the reservoir from the surface
and is set by the field reservoir depth. If several different reservoir depths
are to be exploited in the same campaign you can do one of the following:
- Click on View/edit drilling profiles and specify the depth of each well
individually through the Drilling Profiles form.
- Use a different drilling component for each reservoir, remembering to adjust
the mob/demob durations and learning factors to prevent double dipping.
Reservoir pressure: the pressure of the reservoir is set by the field level
reservoir pressure.
Maximum stepout: is the maximum allowed horizontal stepout from a
wellpad and is set by the value specified in the field level details.
Longest stepout: the calculated maximum horizontal displacement from
the drilling centre. This assumes a rectangular reservoir with dimensions
as entered in the field level details and the number of drilling centres as
defined by the concept selector. The default number of drilling centres is
calculated so that the longest stepout does not exceed the maximum well
stepout.
QUE$TOR Help
470
The first well is assumed to be vertical and the remaining wells are assumed to
be laid out in concentric rings centred on the drill rig. The number of
concentric rings is dependent on the total number of wells per drilling
operation. For 2 to 7 wells there is a single ring, for up to 19 wells there are
two rings, for up to 37 wells there are three rings, for up to 61 wells there are
four rings, etc. The horizontal stepout of the outer ring is set to the Longest
stepout. This takes into account the radius of the well drainage area per well.
Rate of build: the amount by which the deviation angle below the well
kick-off point can change in 30 m/100 ft. This applies to all deviated wells
and defines the radius of bends used in the drilling profiles.
Acid gas: identifies whether acid gas is to be taken into consideration in
the drilling cost calculations. If checked higher grade materials for tubing,
Xmas trees, wellheads and completions are used. This is selected if the
CO
2
content of the wellstream fluid is above 3 mole %.
Every time Apply is clicked the drilling profiles are recalculated.
Drilling profile is protected
Checking the box will prevent changes made in the Field Level Data changing the
drilling configuration. If the number of wells is changed the layout will revert to
the default and any changes made in the Drilling Profiles will be lost.
QUE$TOR Onshore
471
Note: Once you have reviewed the drilling profile form the values in the Well
details frame are shown as locked and read only. In addition the Protect current
profile box at the bottom of the input panel will be checked to preserve any
changes you have made. If you deselect this check box the well count by type
will revert back to the default as defined by the well distribution logic and you can
then overwrite values. Any changes made to the drilling profiles will be lost.
Winterisation
drilling rig and is shown below. If Arctic/Tundra is selected as the terrain for the
associated wellpad group then the box will be checked, at all other times it is
unchecked.
Winterisation cost
A factor applied to the rig day rate to allow for the extra cost of the winterised
drilling rig. This is set to 1.25 when selected.
Drilling Profiles
QUE$TOR Help
472
Clicking on View/edit drilling profiles opens the onshore drilling profiles form
shown below. The form allows the type, bottom hole location (as defined by the
TVD, horizontal shift and horizontal section length), profile type, completion and
drilling duration of each well to be specified individually.
A well bottom hole location configuration is generated by QUE$TOR for each
drilling component. This assumes that the first well is drilled vertically and
subsequent wells are drilled radially from the centre with increasing horizontal
offsets. Intermediate rings are laid out such that the horizontal shift between
successive rings is the same. The profile of each well and the bottom hole
location can be readily modified.
Note: Making changes in this window results in the well count by type being
updated and the Drilling profile is protected check box in the input panel being
checked.
If there are any gas injection wells these are assumed to have the minimum well
stepout as they are likely to be in the gas cap. The remaining production and
water injection wells are laid out assuming a spot pattern well flood arrangement.
To add a well, select the well immediately above where you want to add the new
well (the whole row for the selected well is highlighted) and then click the Add
well button. By default a production well will be added.
To remove a well, click on the well number (the whole row for the selected well is
highlighted) and then click the Remove well button. You will be asked to
confirm you wish to remove the selected well.
Any changes made to a well can be replicated in all the wells or a selection of
wells using the Apply changes to single or multiple wells frame. Selecting Single
applies the change to the selected well only, selecting All applies the change to all
wells, selecting Specified wells applies the changes to the wells specified. To
specify the wells insert the numbers of the wells separated by commas, e.g. 1, 2,
5, 11, for a range specify the start and end well e.g. 3-15.
Note: Only new changes will be replicated when multiple wells are changed.
QUE$TOR Onshore
473
Well type
and The Multilateral and Host options allow multilateral wells to be specified.
The well type of any well can be changed by using the dropdown box. There are
six options here; Production, Water inj., Gas inj., Prod. host, Prod. Multi. and
Disposal. The first three and Disposal options are specified by within the well
details on the Details tab. The Prod. host and Prod. multi options allow
multilateral wells to be specified.
Prod. host: specifies that the well will be used to host multilateral
production wells.
Prod. multi.: the well is a multilateral production well drilled from the
host. The kick off, horizontal shift, profile type, horizontal section and
maximum deviation are uneditable as they are set by the host well.
In the example shown above, well 4 was specified as the host well, automatically
selecting the next production well, well 5, as a multilateral. When you change a
wells type to host one multilateral is automatically included. The number of
multilaterals added per host well can be adjusted using the dropdown list for
Multilaterals per production host, with four being the maximum.
Note: The multilaterals are designated as the next n number of production wells
after the host well
TVD
The true vertical depth of the well bottom hole location the surface. For all wells
this is set to the specified reservoir depth.
Kick off
QUE$TOR Help
474
The distance below the surface at which deviated wells kick-off from the vertical.
Horizontal shift
The horizontal distance (offset) between the drilling centre and the bottom hole
location excluding any horizontal portion.
Profile type
Dictates the profile by which the well is drilled and is selected using the dropdown
list. There are four available Drilling Profiles; Build and hold (BH), Build and drop
(BD), Horizontal at TVD
Horizontal section
The length drilled horizontally through the reservoir. This can only be included
for the Horizontal at TVD profile.
To modify the drilling profile of any well, type in a new TVD, kick off, horizontal
shift or horizontal section and the measured depth and maximum deviation are
automatically recalculated.
There are combinations of profile parameters that are not compatible. Those
locations which are accessible for each profile type and those which are not are
shown below.
Note: Situations where the bottom hole location is not achievable given the
specified well profile parameters typically result in a calculated measured depth
which is larger than expected.
Vertical well (bottom hole locations)
QUE$TOR Onshore
475
Build and hold well (bottom hole locations)
Build and drop well (bottom hole locations)
QUE$TOR Help
476
Horizontal at TVD well (bottom hole locations)
Measured depth
The measured depth is calculated automatically and is dependent on the specified
drilling profile options. Normally the profile should be adjusted in preference to
the numbers contained here. For a multilateral well the measured depth is the
total length of the multilateral section measured from the host well.
The sum of these, the total measured depth for all wells is displayed but cannot
be edited.
Maximum deviation
The maximum deviation is the angle from the vertical (angle o) you need to
achieve to reach the specified horizontal displacement given the true vertical
depth, kick-off point, profile and rate of build (degrees/30 m) of a well. It is
given for information only and cannot be overwritten.
Drilling rig
The type of rig used to drill the well; due to the difficulty in adequately classifying
rig types QUE$TOR simply defines rigs within categories from A to E. The type
selected is set by the rig class selected on the Details tab.
A-Class: An international heavy duty top drive rig with the capability to
(30,000 ft).
B-Class: An international medium duty rig with the capability to drill
QUE$TOR Onshore
477
C-Class: An international light duty rig with the capability to drill deviated
D-Class: A domestic medium duty rig with the capability to drill deviated
E-Class: A basic domestic light duty drilling unit with the capability to drill
ft).
Note: Only A-Class to C-Class rigs are selected by default. If the reservoir depth
is greater than 9000m then an A-Class rig is assumed.
Completion rig
Similarly to the drilling rig QUE$TOR simply defines rigs within categories from A
to E, see above. The type selected is set by the rig class selected on the Details
tab.
Completion type
A default completion type of cased hole is assumed for all wells. The completion
type selected affects both the equipment cost and the installation duration.
QUE$TOR includes data for the following types of completion:
Open hole: the casing and tubing finish at the top of the pay zone.
Cased hole: the tubing extends into the pay zone and is perforated.
Slotted: the tubing ends at the top of the pay zone but a section of very
closely woven mesh extends into the pay zone. This method is often
applied in the case of horizontal wells to prevent the holes from collapsing.
Gravel pack: the gap between the drilled section and the production
tubing in the pay zone is filled with fine, very uniformly sized sand (not
gravel). Quite often the tubing section is a 'slotted liner'.
Frac pack: similar to a gravel pack but a sand containing a 'propant' is
pumped into the fractured fissures to prevent them collapsing (prop them
open).
Drilling durations
The time for which the rigs are used for drilling and completion. These are
automatically calculated for each well based on time versus depth curves in the
technical database. These curves can be edited by clicking on View/edit
drilling curves in the drilling inputs.
Drilling Curves
Clicking on View/edit drilling curves opens the drilling curves form. These
time vs. depth curves are extracted from the relevant technical database and are
used to calculate drilling durations. A different curve is used for each region, rig
type, well type (deviated or non-deviated) and drill stage. Modifications to these
curves can be made using the table below the graph.
Note: Changes to this data will be stored in the project.
QUE$TOR Help
478
Rig class
The type of rig used to drill the well, due to the difficulty in adequately classifying
rig types QUE$TOR simply defines rigs within categories from A to E. For a full
definition see Details.
Profile
The profile by which the wells are drilled. There are four available Drilling
Profiles; Deviated (Build and hold and Build and drop), Horizontal (HTVD) and
Vertical.
Stage
The drilling stage duration includes for all drilling activities for the complete well,
including weather downtime, replacing drill bits, etc.
Completion: show the depth dependent duration during the completion
phase and are used to calculate the completion durations. Cased holes are
assumed but the incremental time, dependent on the completion type, is
excluded.
Drilling: show the depth dependent duration during the drilling phase and
are used to calculate the drilling duration of production and injection wells.
Exploration: show the depth dependent duration for exploration wells
and are used to calculate the drilling duration of exploration wells.
Learning: show the learning factors dependent on the number of wells
drilled. The factor is a multiplier applied to the drilling duration to take
account of the improvement in drill rate typically achieved as more wells
are drilled in reservoir. The eighth well in a drilling operation is assumed
to be the technical well with a learning factor of 1. The learning curve is
illustrated below.
QUE$TOR Onshore
479
Equipment Costs
The equipment quantities are updated in the cost estimate sheet as each sub-
retrieved based on the procurement strategy and are also dependent on material
with stainless steel used in areas where high acid gas contents are experienced.
Equipment costs cover the vendor's cost for fabrication of the equipment, any
procurement of sub-components and sub-vendor's submission to approval
authorities and testing at the vendor's works. Direct procurement costs are
included in the design cost centre.
When determining the equipment size the peak daily throughput is multiplied by
a factor of 1.3 to account for well decline over the year. High pressure wells are
QUE$TOR Help
480
rated above 345 bar (5000 psi). Low pressure are rated at 345 bar (5000 psi)
and below.
Well equipment
Each well type present has its own section on the cost sheet, these costs are
broken down into three areas.
Xmas trees: covers the Xmas trees at the wellheads for each type of
well. The configuration of the Xmas trees is typically subsurface safety
valve, lower master valve, upper master valve, choke valve and wing
valve.
Wellhead: sits below the Xmas tree and typically includes a casing
hanger, casing head spool, tubing hanger, tubing spool and seals.
Completion: covers the cost of well completions and is dependent on the
type of completion selected.
Note: The cost of multilateral wells is separate to allow for the increased
flowrate through the wellhead and Xmas tree.
Pumps
Covers the cost of the pumps that provide artificial lift, when specified and is
broken down into beam pumps and downhole pumps.
Freight
procured from the same region as the wellpad location or from out of region.
Material Costs
The material quantities are updated in the cost estimate sheet as each sub-
QUE$TOR Onshore
481
The drilling material costs are depth related. The length of each casing/tubing
size shown on the cost sheet is the total based on the individual well drilled depth
and the typical Casing Programme.
The exception to this is multilaterals where the length of 7 liner and production
tubing is set equal to length of the multilateral section.
Cement
Covers the cost of the casing cement, the cost is averaged over the total drill
depth.
Mud
Covers the cost of the drilling mud required to correct the pressure during
drilling. The cost is based on the use of a typical mud system with a mixture of
seawater polymer, KCl polymer and pseudo oil-based muds and is averaged over
the total drill depth.
Brine
Covers the cost of the brine used to mix the drilling mud. The cost is based on
the use of a mixture of 1.5 and 1.8 SG brines and is averaged over the total drill
depth.
Bits
Covers the cost of the drill bits used. The cost assumes that each bit can be used
for two runs.
Freight
Freight is a fixed percentage applied to the materials costs to give a total cost. It
is the cost of transportation of the bulk materials from the manufacturers yard to
the field location.
QUE$TOR Help
482
Construction Costs
The construction costs cover the costs of drilling the wells and are updated in the
cost estimate sheet as each sub-component is adjusted. Unit rates for each
identified group are retrieved from the procurement strategy.
Each rig class has its own rental and operating costs and are based on the
required number of days in the field.
Rig hire
Rig hire is the number of days the drilling rig is in the field. This is the sum of the
drilling, completion plus in-field relocation days. The unit rate is the bare hire rig
cost and a function of rig type.
Drill crew
both the drill crew (tool pusher, tyre pusher, drillers and assistant drillers and
roughnecks) and the engineering/maintenance crew (engineers, mechanics,
welders and oilers). The number given is for the number of days the drilling rig is
in the field and covers both crew shifts.
Consumables
The consumables include diesel, water and other utilities required to support the
drilling operation. Consumables are assumed not to be required during the
period when the rig is moving between wellpads.
Drill camps
Drill camp costs include for the living and messing facilities for the drill crew plus
offices and drilling materials storage. The number given is for the number of
days the drilling rig is in the field.
Transportation
QUE$TOR Onshore
483
Transportation costs include for transporting the drilling consumables from a
supply base to the field and are assumed not to be required during the period
when the rig is moving between wellpads.
Mob / Demob
The number of days that it takes the drilling rig to get to and from the field
location. This can include days to transport the rig from abroad and transport
within country of operations.
Drilling services
Drilling services include the crew cost plus hire of equipment to perform the
specific operation on a per well basis. All production wells are assumed to be
logged and tested. If the well is an exploration or appraisal well additional costs
are included. All wells require the services of the cementing crew.
Other costs
Additional drilling construction costs can optionally be added.
General Costs
The general costs cover all other expenditures associated with the drilling. They
include design, project management, certification, insurance and a contingency.
QUE$TOR Help
484
It incorporates all wages, salaries and other benefits paid to personnel,
payroll burdens, insurance, general overheads (office facilities, utility
services, depreciation of facilities and equipment and administration),
project expenses and equipment. It includes vendor data delivery of items
to the yard, insurance up to delivery, guarantees and import duties.
Design man-hours are factored from the weight of equipment and bulk
materials, the storage capacity and civils area.
Insurance
This is a fixed percentage of the drilling cost and includes insurance for all project
components during transportation, construction, installation and testing and
commissioning. Personnel liability insurance is covered in the respective cost
centres.
Certification
Contingency
Infrastructure
About Infrastructure
The infrastructure component is included to allow the user to define fully the cost
of any new development. The standard of each item will vary depending on the
terrain or geographical region.
User Interface
On entering the infrastructure component the input panel is shown in the bottom
left of the screen with the cost estimate sheet on the right hand side.
QUE$TOR Onshore
485
Inputs
The infrastructure input panel is shown below. QUE$TOR will choose appropriate
values for every parameter based on other components and field level data.
Many inputs are also dependent upon higher level inputs within the same
component.
available facilities, such as oil processing, in more detail click on the relevant
arrow button. Each facility can be considered as a sub-component within
infrastructure. All of these sub-components are recalculated when unlocked if
high level inputs (e.g. distance to terminal facility) are changed. In a similar
fashion if you adjust construction camp then, as long as it is unlocked, operations
camp will be recalculated based on the new requirements.
infrastructure sub-components and the cost estimate.
Facilities
QUE$TOR Help
486
clicking OK will save any changes and exit, this will update all unlocked
Recalc, where available, will recalculate the sub-component without updating any
other sub-component or the cost estimate; these will only be updated when OK is
clicked.
Cost estimate
component. The production facility inputs are used to calculate the quantities
any appropriate changes to the calculated weights or the unit rates.
Modifications to the material and construction weights will be immediately
reflected in the design, insurance and contingency costs if these are unlocked.
Primary Inputs
The primary inputs allow users to choose the highest level infrastructure design
specifications.
Location
QUE$TOR Onshore
487
Several geographical factors can affect the cost of the infrastructure component.
The two taken into account are:
data. The terrain at the location of the production facility can be revised
using the dropdown list box. Terrain options available are; Arctic/Tundra,
Desert, Grassland, Jungle, Mountain, Swamp or Urban.
- Field in existing oil or gas producing area: this affects the facilities
selected, e.g. an airstrip is assumed to exist if the box is checked
- Production facility access good: this affects the transport links that
will be selected to link the production facility to the existing transport
network
- Terminal facility access good: this affects the transport links that will
be selected to link the terminal facility to the existing transport network
Distances to Major Populations
These values give the distances from the facilities in the field to the nearest
major population centre. The defaults lengths of power and transport links are
determined from these lengths along with the necessity of building and camps.
The distances are selected from the technical database with allowances for
distances on the FDS.
- Production facility: is the distance from the production facility to the
nearest major population centre
- Terminal facility: is the distance from the terminal facility to the nearest
major population centre
Road
Clicking on Road in the infrastructure inputs panel opens the road form. The
road sub-component covers the cost for all the road links within the field and
those providing access to the field. The road sub-component is broken down into
the links between the components and provides for a single lane road of a
construction type appropriate to the region, i.e. metalled in Europe/U.S.A. and
gravel/hardcore in Africa/S.E. Asia. In Arctic/Tundra regions it includes for
levelled and compacted snow roads. The road sub-component can be turned off
using the check box at the top of the form, setting all costs for the sub-
component to zero.
QUE$TOR Help
488
- Production facilities to road network: covers the roads required to
link the main production facility to the existing road network
- Terminal facilities to road network: covers the roads required to link
the terminal facility to the existing road network
- Production facilities to terminal facilities: covers the roads required
to link the main production facility to the terminal facility
- Production facilities to wellpads: covers the roads required to link the
main production facility to the wellpads
- Regasification facilities to road network: covers the roads required to
link the regasification facility to the existing road network
- Other roads: covers any other roads that are required
- Total road length: is the sum of the above lengths
Rail
Clicking on Rail in the infrastructure inputs panel opens the rail form. The rail
sub-component covers all the rail links within the field and is only included if rail
export has been specified for any of the product export options in a terminal
facility. It assumes one single track railway with occasional passing places and
includes for railway, sleepers, construction costs and civil work. The rail sub-
component can be turned off using the check box at the top of the form, setting
all costs for the sub-component to zero.
Note: The rail loading facility cost is included in the terminal facility
component.
QUE$TOR Onshore
489
- Terminal facilities to rail network: covers length of railway required
from the terminal to the end location.
- Regasification facilities rail network: covers length of railway
required from the regasification terminal to the end location.
- Other roads: covers any other rail links that are required
- Total railway length: is the sum of the above lengths
Construction Camp
Clicking on Construction camp in the infrastructure inputs panel opens the
construction camp form. The construction camp sub-component covers the
camps required for construction workers at the field location including
accommodation (portacabins), entertainment facilities, messing and external
communications. It is broken down into three components; wellpads, production
facilities, terminal facilities and regasification facilities. The sub-component can
be turned off using the check box at the top of the form, setting all costs for the
sub-component to zero.
QUE$TOR Help
490
- Construction man-hours: is the number of construction man-hours
required for each component. This is taken from the component and
labour rates in the technical database.
- Nominal duration: this is the construction duration of the component
and is taken from the technical database and based on the man-hours.
- Number of men: is the total number of men required for the
construction work. It is based on 160 hours being worked per man per
month.
- Others: for any further men required for construction.
- Total: is the sum of the above number of men.
Operations Camp
Clicking on Operations camp in the infrastructure inputs panel opens the
operations camp form. The operations camp sub-component covers a field
location camp to house the operators required under normal production and
includes provision for accommodation, entertainment and offices. The operations
camp sub-component can be turned off using the check box at the top of the
form, setting all costs for the sub-component to zero.
Note: The size of the operations camp may need to be reviewed once the
personnel requirements have been calculated in OPEX.
Number of men: is the required number of operating personnel on the field at
any time. It is determined from the size of the facilities in each component
Administration Offices
Clicking on Administration offices in the infrastructure inputs panel opens the
company administration offices form. The administration offices sub-component
covers the building of offices and facilities required by permanent company
personnel. The administration offices sub-component can be turned off using the
check box at the top of the form, setting all costs for the sub-component to zero.
Number of administration personnel: is the required number of
administration personnel on the field at any time. It is determined from the size
of the facilities in each component
QUE$TOR Onshore
491
Permanent Housing
Clicking on Permanent housing in the infrastructure inputs panel opens the
permanent housing form. The permanent housing sub-component covers the
building of permanent housing for expatriate company personnel required at the
field location. The permanent housing sub-component can be turned off using
the check box at the top of the form, setting all costs for the sub-component to
zero.
- Number of administration personnel: is the required number of
administration personnel on the field at any time. It is determined from
the size of the facilities in each component.
- Number of projects personnel: is the required number of projects
personnel on the field at any time. It is determined from the size of the
facilities in each component.
- Total: the sum of the above number of personnel.
Medical / Hospital Facilities
Clicking on Medical / hospital in the infrastructure inputs panel opens the
medical / hospital facilities form. The medical / hospital sub-component covers
the medical facilities at the field location and includes treatment facilities, beds
for short-term stays and emergency surgical facilities. The medical / hospital
sub-component can be turned off using the check box at the top of the form,
setting all costs for the sub-component to zero.
QUE$TOR Help
492
Number of beds: is the required number of beds within the medical facilities. It
is determined from the total operations personnel count.
Schools, Places of Worship, Community Buildings
Clicking on Schools / worship in the infrastructure inputs panel opens the
schools, places of worship, community buildings form. The schools, places of
worship, community buildings sub-component covers cost of schools and places
of worship for the operations personnel and their families. This sub-component is
required if permanent housing has been supplied. The schools, places of worship,
community buildings sub-component can be turned off using the check box at the
top of the form, setting all costs for the sub-component to zero.
Number of operations personnel: is the required number of operating
personnel on the field at any time. It is determined from the size of the facilities
in each component.
Power Transmission
Clicking on Power transmission in the infrastructure inputs panel opens the
power transmission form. The power transmission sub-component covers length
of power transmission lines from the grid, and is only selected when generation
only is selected in a terminal or production facility. The medical / hospital sub-
component covers steel pylons with cabling or small timber poles and cabling.
The sub-component can be turned off using the check box at the top of the form,
QUE$TOR Onshore
493
- Lines to production facilities: covers the lines from the grid to the
production facilities within the field. The length is determined by the
Primary Inputs.
- Lines to terminal facilities: covers the lines from the grid to the
terminal facilities within the field. The length is determined by the Primary
Inputs.
- Lines to regasification facilities: covers the lines from the grid to the
regasification facilities within the field. The length is determined by the
Primary Inputs.
- Total power lines length: is the sum of the above lengths
Airstrip
Clicking on Airstrip in the infrastructure inputs panel opens the airstrip form.
The airstrip sub-component covers the one-off cost for building an airstrip
including necessary control stations, radio beacons and lighting. It is only
selected when the field is not in an existing oil or gas producing area. The sub-
component and can be turned off using the check box at the top of the form,
Number of airstrips: allows the number of separate airstrips to be set. It is
always set to one by default.
QUE$TOR Help
494
Material and Construction Costs
The material and construction weights are updated in the cost estimate sheet as
each sub-component is adjusted. Unit rates for each identified material item are
retrieved from the procurement strategy. The weights are updated in the cost
estimate sheet as each sub-component is adjusted. Unit rates are retrieved
based on the procurement strategy and are also dependent on the construction
material.
The material and construction costs are broken down into the sub-component
costs.
Road Construction
Is an all-up cost for building the roads required. Generally it provides for a single
lane road of a construction type appropriate to the region, i.e. metalled in
Europe/U.S.A. and gravel/hardcore in Africa/S.E. Asia. In Arctic/Tundra regions
it includes for levelled and compacted snow roads. The unit cost includes for
materials and construction.
Rail Construction
This item is only included if rail export has been specified for any of the export
options in a terminal facility. The unit cost includes all materials: railway,
sleepers, and the construction costs of the civils work required to build the
railway. It assumes one single track railway with occasional passing places.
Note: The rail loading facility cost is included in the Terminals component.
Construction Camp
This item includes for building a construction camp at the field location. It is
determined by a cost per man appropriate to the region and environmental
conditions and includes accommodation (portacabins), entertainment facilities,
messing and external communications.
QUE$TOR Onshore
495
Operations Camp
This is a field location camp to house the operators required under normal
production. The item is a cost per man and includes provision for
accommodation, entertainment and offices.
Note: The size of the operations camp may need to be reviewed once the
personnel requirements have been calculated in OPEX.
Administration Buildings
This is a total cost for building offices and facilities required by permanent
company personnel. The cost is calculated on a cost per man basis.
Permanent Housing
This is a total cost for building permanent housing for expatriate company
personnel required at the field location. The cost is calculated on a cost per man
basis.
Medical Facilities
This is a total cost to provide medical facilities at the field locations. The facility is
sized according to the total operations personnel count and includes treatment
facilities, beds for short-term stays and emergency surgical facilities.
Schools, Places of Worship
This will be required if permanent housing has been supplied. It includes the cost
of providing a school and places of worship for the operations crew and their
families.
Power Transmission
If power is to be supplied from the grid then a length of power transmission line
is required. Dependent on the geographical terrain or region, the facility will be
steel pylons with cabling or small timber poles and cabling.
Airstrips
This item is a one-off cost for building the airstrip. In the jungle it will include for
clearing a jungle area and then rolling and laying a spray tarred airstrip. In the
desert it includes for levelling and then laying a spray tarred airstrip. In rolling
plain land it includes for clearing a suitable flat area. All costs include necessary
control stations, radio beacons and lighting.
Community Projects/Others
These are unidentified costs or projects which have not been specified but are
necessary to develop the prospect.
General Costs
QUE$TOR Help
496
The general costs cover all other expenditures associated with the infrastructure.
contingency.
Insurance
This is a fixed percentage of the infrastructure cost and includes insurance for all
centres.
QUE$TOR Onshore
497
Certification
Contingency
Onshore User Defined
About User Defined Components
The user defined component is a blank cost estimate sheet where the user can
enter all quantities and unit rates for items within each cost centre. This facility
allows components not covered by any other component to be included as part of
the overall cost estimate. User defined components are automatically included in
the cost summary and CAPEX schedule, but have no operating costs
automatically associated with them.
You can build up a library of user defined components which can be used across
all projects, e.g. further process facilities.
Cost Estimate
On entering the user defined component, a blank cost estimate will be displayed
with the same format the other onshore component cost estimates. A section is
provided for each of the seven onshore cost centres; Equipment, Materials,
Prefabrication, Construction, Design & Project management, Insurance and
Certification and Contingency. An example of the equipment section of this sheet
is shown below. This sheet allows you to enter data into all cells on the sheet
except in the total costs column. By entering quantities and unit rates the total
cost for each item, cost centre and component are automatically calculated.
QUE$TOR Help
498
Once user defined components have been created, they can be saved in a
library. This makes them available to any other projects run. The panel in the
bottom left of the screen, shown below, has a dropdown list which enables
previously saved user defined components to be selected.
To use a previously saved user defined component, select the desired component
from the dropdown list and click Apply.
Note: QUE$TOR will not check that the currency of any imported user
defined components matches the project currency. You must ensure the project
currency and the user defined component currency match.
If you wish to save a new user defined component to the library, click on Add,
once the cost estimate is completed. The component will be saved under its
defined name.
To delete saved user defined components from the library, select the desired
component from the dropdown list and click Delete.
You can build up a library of user defined components which can be used across
all projects. This is very useful for components which are unusual and not
included within QUE$TOR such as a mercury recovery package or mercaptans
removal package. In-house data may be used to generate these items, allowing
any development to be incorporated into the program.
499
LNG Regasification Onshore
Modelling an LNG Regasification Terminal
LNG Regasification Structure
The LNG regasification terminal module can be used on its own or as part of a
larger onshore or offshore field development. If used in conjunction with a
QUE$TOR Onshore licence then the LNG regasification terminal can be linked to a
storage terminal, an onshore sink and an onshore source. No other links to the
LNG regasification terminal are acceptable. Infrastructure costs can be included
provided the LNG regasification terminal is run in conjunction with QUE$TOR
Onshore.
If the LNG regasification terminal is to be included in a QUE$TOR Onshore project
then the program checks for a valid LNG regasification terminal licence and uses
the same input/output units, procurement and technical database as the primary
onshore project. See Modelling an onshore project.
If the LNG regasification terminal is to be included in a QUE$TOR Offshore project
then select the Add LNG regas onshore project button. QUE$TOR checks for a
valid LNG regasification terminal licence and then displays the Add onshore to
project form to allow you to select from the list of existing procurement strategies
or allow you to create a new strategy based on the region selected in the primary
project form. The default technical database will be selected based on the region
selected in the primary project form but an alternative can be selected from a
template or custom technical database using the Browse button. The
input/output units used for the LNG regasification terminal will be the same as
specified in the initial project properties form.
The main product as specified in initial project properties form is not used in an
LNG regasification terminal only project. Additionally the field level data entered
is only used to set the distance between the LNG regasification terminal and the
infrastructure (used to set the send out pump discharge pressure), determine the
gas/associated gas design flowrate and the production profile field life used in
calculating the LNG regasification terminal OPEX.
To add an LNG regasification terminal to the field schematic select the onshore
regasification terminal toolbar icon and position it on the field development
schematic. There are two options which can be included or excluded by right
mouse clicking on the tool bar icon; Marine infrastructure and LNG processing.
Marine infrastructure should be included if a tanker berth (jetty or slipway),
breakwater and pipeline from the berth to the plant are required. This may not
be required if the LNG regasification terminal under consideration is a phased
extension using an existing berth. LNG processing will be required if the sales
gas specification is leaner than LNG off-loaded from the LNG tankers. These
options/functions can also be selected/deselected in the primary input form. If
deselected the field development schematic image will update when OK is clicked.
QUE$TOR Help
500
There are four possible tabs: LNG Regas onshore, Onshore, Offshore plus a
types in use in QUE$TOR. For an LNG regasification development the LNG regas
onshore tab will appear along with the tabs for any other components, offshore or
onshore, on the FDS.
501
Print Preview: activates the report builder wizard to preview the reports
The OPEX module released differs significantly from the rest of QUE$TOR. It is
not live linked into other parts of QUE$TOR. If changes are made to any
component you must create a new OPEX analysis to bring these changes into the
OPEX analysis. This will mean losing any changes you have made to the
operating costs. The same principles apply if components are added or deleted or
if the production profile is changed. All default values in the OPEX analysis are
taken from the databases specified in the procurement strategy.
you adjust defaults in the databases for faster results.
field schematic.
Operating Personnel
This covers the permanent manning levels required by the regasification terminal
facility. These numbers are shown in the Operating personnel window along with
the Shift rotation pattern and annual Cost per man taken from the procurement
strategy. The wellpad groups and production facilities operating personnel sheet
is shown below.
QUE$TOR Help
502
The permanent manning levels on each facility are passed from the regasification
terminal facility components. These numbers are shown in the Operating
taken from the procurement strategy. The drilling crew and associated support
staff are excluded from these numbers as their costs are included within the
drilling day rate used in the drilling components.
The operating personnel cost is based on the number of permanent crew onsite
with allowance for a replacement crew or crews on leave according to the rotation
pattern. The Days onsite 2 and Days offsite 2 inputs allow you to specify more
than one shift pattern. The Cost per man covers salaries, expenses, payroll
burden, etc but excludes transport to and from the platform.
Inspection and maintenance window.
503
Maintenance.
Inspection is based on contract labour or services to complete periodic inspection
and includes for equipment vendor representatives and specialist inspection staff
in addition to the permanent maintenance crew.
Clicking on Logistics and consumables in the OPEX summary opens the
Logistics and consumables summary window.
Clicking on Consumables costs in the OPEX summary opens the Consumables
window.
QUE$TOR Help
504
Nitrogen
The amount of nitrogen consumed is determined from the LNG flowrate and the
Nitrogen level specified in the LNG processing sub-component. This is only
considered in the OPEX when Purchase is selected for as the Nitrogen supply
option.
Fuel Gas
The electrical power load and gas turbine driver duties for all platforms are
brought forward from the component estimates. From these power loads, fuel
gas requirements are calculated using typical efficiencies for power generation
sets and gas turbine drivers and the number of on-stream days. The cost of fuel
gas is only included for projects where gas is exported and is then charged at
sales gas value. Where all produced gas is flared or re-injected into the reservoir
it is assumed the gas has no value.
Diesel
generators, cranes, fire pump testing, etc. An allowance is also included for the
base electrical load on a FPSO or semi-submersible.
cost database.
Clicking on Logistics costs in the OPEX summary opens the Logistics window.
505
Transportation
The personnel transportation costs for each grade are dependent on the Distance
travelled from their home, the Frequency with which each trip is made, the
Method of transport and the Number of Men. The first three values are picked up
from the regional technical database. The number of men is picked up from the
Operating Personnel sheet. To revise the method of transportation click on the
dropdown arrow against Method and select either Road, Rail or Air.
The cost to transport consumables to the field is dependent on the Transportation
(% of consumable cost) and the Cost of Consumables. The first value is picked
up from the regional technical database and varies according to the method of
transportation selected for other labour. The cost of consumables (excluding
fuel gas and power from the grid) is picked up from the Consumables sheet.
Messing
Messing costs (cost of providing food and cleaning) are dependent on the Cost
per man day and the Total Men at Site. The first value is picked up from the
regional technical database and the second from the Operating Personnel sheet.
Vehicles
Vehicle lease costs are dependent on the Cost per vehicle and the Number of
Vehicles. The first value is picked up from the regional technical database and is
based on a vehicle pay back period of three years, the second is dependent on
the number of personnel in the field.
QUE$TOR Help
506
Insurance
Annual insurance costs are determined as a percentage of the initial capital
costs. The percentages are applied to the total component capital cost, assuming
complete component replacement with an identical item and can be viewed and
modified by clicking on Insurance costs. This displays the Insurance window.
Field/Project OPEX
Support
507
- Administration: covers the cost of supervising and pay-rolling the
operating crews. The cost is determined as a percentage of personnel
costs.
- Warehousing: includes for a secure warehouse and open storage area to
store key spare equipment, piping and valves. The rate includes labour
costs and office accommodation. The cost is determined as a percentage
of personnel costs.
- Corporate support: covers on going project support by management and
engineering staff at head office. The cost is determined as a percentage of
personnel costs.
- Personnel costs: are read from the personnel cost section of the OPEX
sheet.
- Infrastructure support: covers the annual maintenance and repair of
the infrastructure. The cost is determined as a percentage of the
infrastructure capital costs.
Land Costs
Land Costs are dependent on the area and whether the land is purchased, rented
or acquired at no cost. To revise the method of payment click on the dropdown
arrow against Land Costs and select either Rent, Purchase or None. If the land is
purchased a one-off payment in Year 1 is assumed.
Land Cost per m2 is dependent on the method of land payment and applied
equally to all land.
The area shown is the total Site preparation areas read from the corresponding
component cost sheets.
Over-writing any input value automatically results in the costs being updated.
Tariffs
liquid and gas profiles on which tariffs can be paid. These default to the field
export profiles but you can overwrite them. You can also include profiles on
which tariffs can be received.
processing and transportation of the liquid and gas streams.
QUE$TOR Help
508
CAPEX Scheduling
contracting techniques and practices.
Project menu.
509
QUE$TOR Help
510
Distributions
511
Locking
First Oil
QUE$TOR Help
512
Timescale
st
schedule will be lost
513
QUE$TOR Help
514
The Investment and production profile combines the scheduled capital
expenditure, the OPEX and the regasification terminal facility capacity. An OPEX
analysis and a CAPEX schedule will be automatically generated if you have not
already edited them.
and may be edited.
515
QUE$TOR Help
516
LNG Regasification Terminal
About Regasification Terminal Facilities
The regasification terminal facility component covers unloading, storage, and
vapourisation of LNG including marine infrastructure, LNG storage, LNG pumping,
LNG processing, liquid storage, liquid export and metering, vapourisation, gas
metering, utilities, power generation and distribution, control and
communications, safety systems, bulk materials, prefabrication, construction,
design and project management and insurance and certification.
from which weights are derived. The equipment weights are combined into
system weights and the associated utilities and power requirements calculated.
Bulk factors are applied to system and individual equipment items to determine
the steel, piping, electrical, instrumentation, architectural and safety bulk
material costs. Civils materials costs are calculated based on the plot area.
and productivities.
517
User Interface
On entering the regasification terminal facility component the input panel is
shown in the bottom left of the screen with the cost estimate sheet on the right
hand side.
Inputs
The regasification terminal facility input panel is shown below. QUE$TOR will
field level data. Many inputs are also dependent upon higher level inputs within
the same component.
Each facility can be considered as a sub-component within the regasification
terminal facility. All of these sub-components are recalculated when unlocked if
high level inputs (e.g. LNG capacity) are changed. In a similar fashion if you
adjust LNG Pumping then, as long as it is unlocked, power generation will be
recalculated based on the new power requirements.
QUE$TOR Help
518
Facilities
Resize pipeline, where available, will recalculate the pipeline hydraulics without
updating any other sub-component or the cost estimate; these will only be
updated when OK is clicked.
Cost estimate
component. The regasification terminal facility inputs are used to calculate the
quantities shown on the cost estimate. The unit rates are determined by the
procurement strategy. The costs are generally based on a simple weight x unit
rate = cost relationship. It is possible to go to any blue number in the cost
sheet and make any appropriate changes to the calculated quantities or the unit
rates.
519
Primary Inputs
The Primary tab defines the highest level regasification terminal facility (RTF)
design specifications.
The primary tab covers the location, functions and capacity.
Terrain
The terrain type primarily affects the construction cost. The default is the same as
selected when defining the Field level data. The terrain at the regasification
terminal facility can be revised using the dropdown list box. Terrain options
available are; Arctic/Tundra, Desert, Grassland, Jungle, Mountain, Swamp or
Urban.
Elevation
The elevation of the regasification terminal facility above sea level. This is used
to determine the pipeline hydraulics and decide the ISO rated power available
from gas turbine drivers. The default is sea level as the terminal is assumed to
be coastal.
Functions
The regasification terminal facility has two functions which can be selected or
deselected; Marine infrastructure and LNG processing. Selecting a function will
include all associated systems in the cost estimate and allow you to open and edit
the associated sub-components.
QUE$TOR Help
520
The functions are:
- Marine infrastructure: selection of this includes either a jetty or marine
slip, a breakwater and associated unloading systems, including berths,
unloading arms and unloading lines. When deselected the Marine
infrastructure sub-component will be disabled.
- LNG processing: selection of this will mean that QUE$TOR will try to
meet the sales gas specification specified on the Design conditions tab.
This will be achieved by injection of nitrogen, removal of NGL's or a
combination of both. When deselected the LNG processing, Liquid storage
and Liquid export sub-components will be disabled.
Utilities, power generation and distribution systems and civils area are calculated
for all regasification terminal facilities and are based on the process systems
included.
Capacities
The capacities represents the flows going into and out of the regasification
terminal facility and are used to size the facilities.
- LNG capacity: this is the total annual flowrate coming into the
regasification terminal facility. And is used to size the facilities. The
composition of the inlet LNG can be specified by clicking on the
Composition button.
- Gas equivalent: is the equivalent gas flow of the LNG capacity.
- Send out rate: is the gas send out rate from the regasification terminal
facility. It is defined as the gas equivalent flow after processing, if
selected, minus fuel gas used in the terminal for vapourisation and power
generation.
Inlet Composition
Clicking on Composition in the regasification terminal facility inputs panel opens
the LNG composition form.
521
The LNG composition form has two modes of operation which are dependent on
the radio button selected at the top of the form.
Molecular weight
When molecular weight is selected QUE$TOR will input a hydrocarbon
composition, based on the molecular weight entered, which is then normalised to
take account of the specified Inerts level.
Warnings are based on MW, absolute lowest possible is 16.5 (this is almost all
methane 98%) and highest limit is 20.5. The range covers typical LNG
compositions.
Composition
Specifying the composition allows the molar percentage of each hydrocarbon
component to be specified individually as well as the percentage of inerts.
QUE$TOR Help
522
Note: Inerts are presumed to be only nitrogen throughout QUE$TOR when
sizing equipment.
Gas Properties
The gas properties frame displays the calculated higher heating value and Wobbe
number based on the composition.
- Higher heating value: the higher heating value (HHV), also known as
gross calorific value or gross energy, is defined as the amount of heat
released by combustion of the gas. The higher heating value takes into
account the latent heat of vapourisation of water in the combustion
products and is commonly specified within gas supply contracts.
- Wobbe number: Wobbe Number or Index is the main indicator of the
interchangeability of fuel gases and is frequently set in the gas supply
contract. It is defined as:
- Wobbe number = HHV x S.G.
0.5
- Where: S.G. = MW of the gas / MW of air
Design Specifications
523
The Design specifications tab allows you to specify the desired sales gas
composition and the maximum ambient air temperature.
Sales gas specification
The sales gas specification frame specifies the desired properties of the send out
gas. These values will be passed into the LNG processing sub-component and are
set in the regional technical database.
Higher heating value: the higher heating value (HHV), also known as
gross calorific value or gross energy, is defined as the amount of heat
released by combustion of the gas. The higher heating value takes into
account the latent heat of vapourisation of water in the combustion products
and is commonly specified within gas supply contracts.
Wobbe number: Wobbe Number or Index is the main indicator of the
interchangeability of fuel gases and is frequently set in the gas supply
contract. It is defined as:
Wobbe number = HHV x S.G.
0.5
Where: S.G. = MW of the gas / MW of air
Maximum nitrogen content: injecting nitrogen into LNG will reduce the
HHV and Wobbe number. This value specifies the maximum nitrogen content
in the send out gas.
Maximum ambient air temperature
power generation packages and is taken from the technical database. The
calculated power requirement is then divided by the derating factor to calculate
the ISO equivalent power requirement for any gas turbines.
Prefabrication
QUE$TOR Help
524
regasification terminal facility.
applied.
on-site.
Winterisation
regasification terminal facility. If Arctic/Tundra is selected as the terrain for the
regasification terminal facility on the Primary inputs tab then the boxes will be
checked, at all other times they are unchecked.
525
insulation around temperature sensitive equipment and pipelines.
Marine Infrastructure
The Marine infrastructure sub-component is only available if the Marine
infrastructure function has been selected. It covers the requirements for ship
berthing and unloading, including unloading and vapour return arms, jetty or
marine slip requirements, breakwaters and dredging.
Clicking on Marine infrastructure in the regasification terminal facility inputs
panel opens the Marine infrastructure form.
QUE$TOR Help
526
Ship / Berth Details
The ship / berth details frame covers the specification of the ship and the berth.
- LNG tanker size: the maximum size of tanker that the berth will be
designed to handle. This defaults to 145,000m
3
and can be edited by the
user. The tanker size influences the size of the berth and the marine slip
depth, see Tanker Properties.
- Unloading rate: the unloading rate is based on a 15 hour unloading
time. If modified the unloading rate then determines the unloading time
and therefore the number of berths as well as the unloading arm
configuration.
- Unloading arm diameter: there are two possible loading arms
diameters, 16in or 20in, the selection is based on the unloading rate.
- Number of berths: the number of berths is determined from the
turnaround time for one tanker and the number of tankers per year
required to meet the LNG capacity specified on the primary inputs tab.
The turnaround time is the defined as the time required to unload the
tanker based on the unloading rate with 12 hours added for entry to / exit
from the channel and docking.
Each berth has a cost associated with it based on the tanker size which includes
for berthing and breasting dolphins.
- Unloading arms per berth: the number of arms is based on the
maximum flowrate through one arm (5000m3/hr for 16inch arms and
8000m3/hr for 20inch arms) with the allowance that full unloading rate
can be achieved with one arm out of service. i.e. there is one spare.
527
- Vapour return arms per berth: the number of vapour return arms will
default to 1 for every 2 (active) loading arms. They are the same size as
the unloading arms.
Jetty details
When jetty is selected the jetty details frame will become active allowing the
number of jetties and the jetty length to be specified.
- Number of jetties: the number of jetties is determined from the number
of berths, with a limit of 2 berths per jetty based on a T arrangement.
- Jetty length: the jetty length is based on a fixed distance from the shore
of 500m. In the case of a 2 berth jetty there will be an additional 200m
between the berths. The jetty length is used to calculate the materials
and construction cost.
Marine Slip Details
When marine slip is selected the marine slip details frame will become active and
will specify the details of the marine slip. The marine slip is assumed to be
dredged to a depth 2m greater than draft of the tanker, with a gradient of 6:1.
- Number of marine slips: the number of marine slips is determined from
the number of berths, with a limit of 2 berths per marine slip based on a
parallel berthing arrangement.
- Marine slip length: the marine slip length is based on the length of the
tanker, with 100m allowance for manoeuvring.
- Marine slip width: the marine slip width is based on the width of the
tanker, with 100m allowance for manoeuvring.
- Marine slip perimeter: the marine slip perimeter excludes the open end
of the marine slip and is used to calculate the materials and construction
cost.
LNG Metering
Fiscal or custody transfer metering is required for all liquid products at the
transfer of ownership from one party to another with a high degree of accuracy
required. The liquid metering sub-system is based on the use of a conventional
fiscal turbine meter incorporating a meter prover loop for operation within an
ANSI Class 150 # rating. Normally one spare metering run is included.
LNG Flowlines / Berth
The LNG flowlines carry the LNG from the tanker to the storage tanks. The
length and diameter are used to calculate the boil off rate for sizing the
equipment in Vapour handling.
- Length: the length will be dependent on whether there is a jetty or
marine slip. For a jetty the length is dependent on the length of the jetty
and the jetty arrangement, with an additional 500m for the onshore
section from the end of the jetty to the storage tanks. For marine slips
the length is dependent on the marine slip arrangement, with 500m
assumed between the marine slip and the storage tanks.
QUE$TOR Help
528
- Number of flowlines / Flowlines per berth: allows the specification of
spare lines.
- Size flowline: clicking on Size flowline opens the LNG flowline sizing
form.
The layout and functionality of the form is identical to the Pipeline sizing tab
within the pipelines component. The outlet pressure is set to LNG storage tank
pressure, assumed to be 1 atm. The inlet pressure of the pipeline should not
exceed 11 bara as the tanker offloading pumps could have insufficient head.
Breakwater
A breakwater is assumed to be wire cages filled with large concrete blocks and
natural boulders which are sunk offshore to alter wave direction and to filter the
energy of waves and tides protecting the jetty or marine slip behind. By default a
breakwater will never be included. The breakwater length will be dependent on
whether there a jetty or marine slip has been selected.
Dredging
Dredging is required to clear the channel for the LNG tanker. For a marine slip
dredging is always included as the marine slip and approach are assumed to be
dredged. For a jetty it is assumed that no dredging is required as the jetty will
terminate at the required water depth for tanker approach.
The dredging cost is calculated on a volumetric basis and is dependent on where
the dredged material is being disposed. Checking remote disposal will increase
the unit rate.
LNG Storage
529
Clicking on LNG storage in the regasification terminal facility inputs panel opens
the LNG storage form as shown below. LNG storage covers the storage of the
LNG being unloaded at the terminal prior to vapourisation.
Containment Type
There are four containment types that are going to be considered, they are:
Single: is a single primary container and generally an outer shell designed
and constructed so that only the primary container is required to meet the
low temperature ductility requirements for storage of the product. The outer
shell (if any) of a single containment storage tank is primarily for the
retention and protection of insulation and to contain the purge gas pressure,
but is not designed to contain refrigerated liquid in the event of leakage from
the primary container. An aboveground single containment tank shall be
surrounded by a bund (dike) wall to contain any leakage. See Examples.
Double: is designed and constructed so that both the inner self supporting
primary container and the secondary container are capable of independently
containing the refrigerated liquid stored. To minimize the pool of escaping
liquid, the secondary container should be located at a distance not exceeding
6 meters from the primary container. The primary container contains the
refrigerated liquid under normal operating conditions. The secondary
container is intended to contain any leakage of the refrigerated liquid, but it
is not intended to contain any vapour resulting from this leakage. See
Examples.
Full: a tank designed and constructed so that both self supporting primary
container and the secondary container are capable of independently
containing the refrigerated liquid stored and for one of them its vapour. The
secondary container can be a distance of 3 to 6 feet (1 to 2 meters) from the
primary container. The primary container contains the refrigerated liquid
under normal operating conditions. The outer roof is supported by the
secondary container. The secondary container shall be capable both of
containing the refrigerated liquid and of controlled venting of the vapour
resulting from product leakage after a credible event. See Examples.
Membrane: membrane tanks are similar to single containment tanks but
are buried and therefore require excavation.
QUE$TOR Help
530
The containment type affects the equipment, construction and civils unit rates
and the civils area.
Number of Tanks / Capacity per Tank
The storage tank arrangement is based on a minimum total storage capacity and
a maximum capacity per tank. Where:
Minimum storage capacity = Tanker size OR 5 days storage capacity (whichever
the greater)
The number and capacity of tanks allows for send out to be maintained whilst the
other tanks are being filled. Therefore QUE$TOR will always default to at least
two tanks.
Diameter / Height
The internal geometry of each storage tank is calculated so that the tank height
does not exceed 50m with 3m included in the height to take into account the
dead space.
LNG Processing
The LNG processing sub-component is only available if the LNG processing
function has been selected. It calculates the weights and dimensions for nitrogen
injection, Demethanisation and NGL processing.
Clicking on LNG processing in the regasification terminal facility inputs panel
opens the LNG processing sub-component. This consists of a series of linked
forms which represent different LNG processing unit operations (nitrogen
injection, NGL removal / recovery, and stabiliser). These can be turned on and
off using the check boxes. The LNG processing specifications and the process
used can be changed from within the forms.
531
QUE$TOR chooses a default LNG processing system configuration based on the
requirements to meet the sales gas specification. The sales gas specification can
be either the higher heating value (HHV) or the Wobbe number, for definitions
see Design specifications. QUE$TOR will select some form of processing if the
desired HHV or Wobbe number is below that of the inlet stream (1), see Inlet
composition.
QUE$TOR will first look at whether the sales gas specification can be met by
injection of nitrogen up to the maximum nitrogen level, see Design specifications,
if it can then nitrogen injection will be selected and the appropriate value
injected. If the specification can not be met then the next step is to see if the
specification can be met just the demethaniser column without nitrogen injection.
If it can't be met then QUE$TOR will try to meet the specification using nitrogen
injection to the maximum level then calculating what percentage needs to pass
through the demethaniser column.
QUE$TOR Help
532
Note: QUE$TOR only looks to decrease the HHV and Wobbe within the specified
HHV or Wobbe. There is no process available to increase these values.
At all times, a mass balance is maintained over the LNG processing module and
numbered buttons.
The available LNG processing unit operations are explained below.
Nitrogen injection
Injecting Nitrogen into the LNG reduces the heating value, increases the specific
gravity of the gas, and as a consequence reduces the Wobbe Number e.g.
injection of one 1% by volume of nitrogen or air reduces the Wobbe Number of
533
natural gas by approximately 1%. The injection of the nitrogen will occur in the
recondenser, see Vapour handling.
- Nitrogen level: this displays the level of nitrogen leaving the nitrogen
injection unit and will default to the level required to meet the sales gas
specification, it is limited by the maximum nitrogen level, see Design
specifications.
Note: This is the nitrogen level in stream 2. If LNG processing
is selected as well as Nitrogen injection then the nitrogen level in the
gas going to the vapourisers, stream 3, could be higher than the
maximum nitrogen content. If this occurs then you should manually
enter a lower value for nitrogen level so that the nitrogen in stream
3 is within the maximum.
- Nitrogen supply: the nitrogen being injected can be either generated on
site using air separation units (ASU's) or can be purchased if there is a
source within the locality. When Air separation unit is selected then the
cost of the ASU's will be included in the estimate. When Purchase is
selected the nitrogen will become an operating cost, see OPEX - Logistics
and consumable for further details.
Demethaniser
The demethaniser removes the heavier hydrocarbons from the LNG, thus
reducing the HHV and Wobbe number. The demethaniser is assumed to be
residue condensing, i.e. it uses exchangers to re-condense the residue gas. The
re-condensed gas (LNG) is then sent to the send out pumps for pressure boosting
then to the vapourisers. The cost includes all associated heat exchangers and
reflux equipment.
Feed to column: in most cases all of the liquid need not pass through the
demethaniser to reach the target specification. This value represents the
required value calculated based on fixed component splits within the column.
QUE$TOR Help
534
This value can be edited and is used to cost the column and associated
equipment.
Deethaniser
The deethaniser column strips ethane and lighter components from the
demethaniser bottoms. Overhead gas is used for fuel gas and the bottoms liquids
either exported as NGL or fed to the stabiliser column. A deethaniser column is
included when the demethaniser is selected. The column is a trayed column with
reboiler and partial reflux condenser.
Stabiliser
The stabiliser separates LPG (propane and butane) from the liquids if a
deethaniser is installed or removes all propane and lighter components if one is
not installed. In both cases the stabiliser column produces a bottom liquids
product of stabilised gasoline suitable for injecting into an oil/condensate pipeline
or as a separate gasoline stream. The stabiliser is included when the production
facility is exporting LPG or Gasoline/condensate; this is determined from the
pipelines on the FDS. The stabiliser removes lighter components from the NGL to
produce a bottom liquids product of dead condensate suitable for injecting into an
oil/condensate pipeline. The overhead stream is LPG (a combined C
3
, C
4
stream). If the stabiliser is preceded by a deethaniser or a fuel gas stream (C
3
and lighter components) if not. The operating pressure of the stabiliser is 8 bara.
Stream properties
The stream properties can be viewed by clicking on any stream.
The top half of the form specifies the conditions of the stream, flowrate
temperature, pressure. The bottom half of the form displays the compositional
information, including the HHV and Wobbe number.
LNG Pumping
Clicking on LNG pumping in the regasification terminal facility inputs panel
opens the LNG pumping form. LNG pumping covers three possible sets of pumps
required to pump the LNG to sufficient pressure prior to vapourisation thus
preventing the need for any compression of the gas.
535
In-tank Pumps / Tank
Submerged motor pumps are located within the LNG storage tanks. The pumps
are on a per tank basis and it is presumed that each tank has the capacity to
pump the entire send out, with the addition of one spare.
The LNG is stored at atmospheric pressure and the outlet pressure of the pumps
is limited by the available head.
pressure and the discharge pressure, we assume a fixed discharge
pressure of 10 bara.
- Note: Changing the number of pumps will also initially change the
capacity/pump if unlocked, to ensure there is always a spare pump.
LNG Processing Feed Pumps
The LNG processing feed pumps are only available if the demethaniser is selected
within the LNG processing sub-component. The inlet pressure is taken as the
outlet pressure of the in-tank pumps with the outlet pressure set by operating
pressure of the demethaniser column, 35 bara.
Send out Pumps
QUE$TOR Help
536
The send out pumps pump the LNG to the gas send out pressure. If the
demethaniser is selected the inlet pressure is set to that of stream 3 in LNG
processing, if not then the inlet pressure is taken as the outlet pressure of the in-
tank pumps. The delivery pressure is set by the inlet pressure of the gas export
pipeline, see below. An allowance is made for losses through the vapourisers and
metering skids.
Size export pipeline: the vapourisation is assumed to be isobaric, therefore
the outlet pressure of the send out pumps is set by the gas export pipeline.
The pipeline sizing form allows you to resize your gas export line, to alter the
pressure drop along it and change the power requirements of the send out
pumps. Clicking on Size export pipeline in the duty frame opens the
pipeline sizing form.
This form allows you to resize the gas export line, or specify a diameter and
of the send out pumps. Click on Resize pipeline to recalculate all unlocked
FDS. If no export pipeline is connected to the regasification terminal facility this
is taken from the regional technical database.
Liquid Storage
537
The Liquid storage sub-component is only available if the LNG Processing
function has been selected. Liquid storage covers the storage of the three
possible liquid products from LNG processing. On opening the product storage
sub-component there is a tab for each product with generated in LNG processing.
A storage cost will only be calculated for the products present.
Clicking on Liquid storage in the regasification terminal facility inputs panel
opens the liquid storage form as shown below. Two types of storage are
considered in QUE$TOR. They are:
(volatile) products such as de-ethanised NGL and LPG. The pressurised
QUE$TOR provides full sizing of the required storage for fully stabilised products.
The default for all products is one day as the storage as it is only intended
as a buffer to allow for upstream disruptions.
- Number of tanks: the number of tanks required to give the required
- Design capacity / tank: gives the size of each of the tanks and is the
QUE$TOR Help
538
- Diameter and Height: give the geometry of each of the tanks and are
QUE$TOR provides full sizing of the required storage for volatile products. The
inputs and calculated sizes are common to the NGL and LPG storage tabs.
The default for all products is one day as the storage at the regasification
terminal facility as it is only intended as a buffer to allow for upstream
disruptions.
- Bullet / Sphere: the radio buttons determine whether the volatile liquid
are selected.
- Number of vessels: the number of vessels needed to give the required
- Vapour space: the volume above the maximum liquid level within each
- Design capacity / vessel: gives the size of each of the vessels and is
- Diameter and Length: give the geometry of each of the vessels. The
539
Liquid Export
The Liquid export sub-component is only available if the LNG Processing function
has been selected. Liquid export covers the export of the three possible liquid
products from LNG processing. On opening the product export sub-component
there is a tab for each product with generated in LNG processing. A cost will only
be calculated for the products present.
Clicking on Liquid export in the regasification terminal facility inputs panel
opens the liquid export form.
Export Rate
default export rates are calculated based on the export pipeline operating 24
hours/day.
Export Equipment
Size export pipeline: the pump differential pressure and pump power are
dependent on the pressure drop along the export pipeline and so clicking on this
button displays the pipeline sizing form.
QUE$TOR Help
540
FDS. If no export pipeline is connected to the regasification terminal facility this
is taken from the regional technical database.
pressure (taken as the storage pressure) and the discharge pressure.
Allowances are included for pressure losses through the metering skid and
the loading arms, when appropriate, of 2.5 bar and 1.0 bar respectively.
pump.
541
- Total weight: the sum of the pump and metering package weight.
Vapour Handling
The Vapour handling sub-component covers the equipment required to handle the
gas that boils off during the unloading and storage of the LNG, including vapour
return blowers, boil off gas compressors and recondensers.
Clicking on Vapour handling in the regasification terminal facility inputs panel
opens the Vapour handling form.
Derating Factor
QUE$TOR Help
542
The power available from the turbine driver is affected by the air temperature and
elevation. This frame states the derating factor with together with the basis of
the factor.
- Derating factor: used to calculate the ISO equivalent power if gas
turbines are selected as the Driver type. For electric drivers no derating is
applied.
- Derated power based on: the maximum expected air temperature,
taken from the Design specifications tab.
- Elevation: the elevation of the production facility, taken from the Primary
tab.
Boil off Gas Compression (BOG)
BOG compressors are used to compress the gas that boils off due to heat leak
into the storage tanks and unloading lines. It is compressed to the same
pressure as the 1st stage LNG export pumps and reintroduced to the stream
through the recondenser, see below.
Design quantity: the gas flowrate that the compressor is designed to
handle. This is the boil off rate of the LNG based on the size and length of
the LNG flowlines, see Marine infrastructure, and the storage tank
dimensions.
Suction pressure: the inlet pressure for the compressors. The boil off gas
will be coming from the LNG storage tanks, which are at atmospheric
pressure.
Discharge pressure: the required outlet pressure from the compressors.
The boil off gas is compressed to the outlet pressure of the In-tank LNG
pumps, see LNG pumping normally around 11bara. There is a 0.5 bar
allowance for pressure loss through the recondenser.
Power: the power required by the compressors. The power for is based on
the molecular weight of the gas, assumed to be the same as the LNG.
Derated power: the ISO equivalent power if turbine drivers are selected. It
is the Power divided by the Derating factor.
Number of compressors: specifies the number of parallel compressors
installed. By default the value is such that there is one spare generator. If
modified, the program recalculates the compressor weight.
Design duty/compressor: the capacity of each generator set as a
proportion to the total generator power, e.g. 100%, 50% or 33%. Combined
with the Number of compressors this specifies how many spare units are
installed.
Electric: electric motors are used to generate the required design power
drivers will be selected by default if the Power is less than 4MW. The
maximum size of electric motor considered is 5 MW.
Turbine: gas turbines are used to generate the required design power. This
is selected when the Power is greater than 4MW. When selected the derating
factor becomes active to take into account the effect that the Ambient
temperature and Elevation have on the power available from the turbine
driven generator. Gas turbine drivers can be used up to 40 MW per train.
Type: selects the type of turbine driver and is only active when Turbine is
543
turbine driver types based on the smallest driver that will provide the design
power. You can overwrite the turbine type via a drop-down list box, if
desired.
Compressor weight: a skid-mounted package containing the driver, the
compressor(s), base plate, seal and lube oil systems. Inlet and exhaust
systems for gas turbine drivers are included if selected.
Scrubber weight: one scrubber per stage is included using a compression
ratio of 3 per stage (all stages are located on the same shaft).
Note: No compressor after-cooler is included as the compressed gas is
condensed in the sub-cooled LNG.
Recondenser
The recondenser is used to recondense the boil off gas and liquefy any nitrogen
being injected. It is assumed to be a direct contact packed column.
- Gas flow: the gas flowrate that the recondenser is designed to handle.
This is the sum of the gas boil off rate, calculated for the boil off gas
compressor, and the nitrogen injection flowrate, see LNG processing.
- Number of recondensers: specifies the number of parallel recondensers
installed. By default the value is such that there is no spare. If modified,
the program recalculates the recondenser weight.
- Design duty/recondenser: the capacity of each recondenser as a
proportion to the gas flow, e.g. 100%, 50% or 33%. Combined with the
Number of recondensers this specifies how many spare units are installed.
- Recondenser weight: based on the gas flow. The weight is calculated
from the diameter and length of the column, with an allowance for the
internal packing.
Vapour return blowers
Some of the vapours generated during the unloading process are returned to the
tanker via a vapour return line. This maintains a positive pressure in the ships'
tanks, allowing a continuous flow of LNG from the tanker to the storage tanks.
- Gas flowrate: the gas flowrate that the blowers is designed to handle.
This is the equal to the volumetric LNG unloading rate, therefore
maintaining the pressure in the tanker.
- Suction pressure: the inlet pressure for the blowers. The boil off gas
will be coming from the LNG storage tanks, which are at atmospheric
pressure.
- Discharge pressure: the required outlet pressure from the blowers. The
boil off gas requires minimal boosting, for vapour return blowers a
differential pressure of 0.5 bar is assumed.
- Power: the power required by the blowers. The power for is based on
the molecular weight of the gas, assumed to be the same as the LNG.
- Number of blowers: specifies the number of parallel blowers installed.
By default the value is such that there is no spare. If modified, the
program recalculates the blower weight.
QUE$TOR Help
544
- Design duty/blowers: the capacity of each generator set as a
Combined with the Number of blowers this specifies how many spare units
are installed.
- Electric: electric motors are used to generate the required design power
drivers are always used for vapour return blowers. The maximum size of
electric motor considered is 5 MW.
- Blower weight: a skid-mounted package containing the driver, the
blower(s), base plate, seal and lube oil systems.
Vapourisation
Clicking on Vapourisation in the regasification terminal facility inputs panel
opens the vapourisation form as shown below. Vapourisation covers the
vapourisers used to warm and vapourise the LNG as well as any metering of the
dens out gas. On opening the vapourisation component the default vapouriser
will be selected. Three types of vapourisers are considered in QUE$TOR. They
are:
- Open rack: uses seawater to heat the LNG and includes the associated
seawater pumps and filtration.
- Submerged combustion: heat is provided by the combustion of a
percentage of the send out gas to provide the heat for vapourisation and
includes the air blower and exhaust skids.
- Intermediate fluid: uses a closed heating medium system to heat the
LNG in shell and tube type heat exchangers..
Process
The process frame specifies the primary vapouriser and the vapourisation
capacity.
545
- Primary vapouriser: selects the type of vapouriser used, the default is
specified in the regional technical database. The selected primary
vapouriser will become active and will be sized for 100% of the LNG flow.
It is common for there to be back up vapourisers, e.g. if open rack is the
primary system then, if there is the possibility of the seawater
temperature dropping below that required for vapourisation, then backup
submerged combustion vapourisers may be required. A backup
vapourisation system can be selected by checking the box at the top of the
vapouriser. If a backup vapourisation system is selected then it will be
sized for 50% of the flow with no sparing.
- LNG flowrate: the LNG flowrate that the vapourisers will be designed to
handle. This is taken as the flow coming from the LNG send out pumps,
see LNG pumping.
- Equivalent gas flow: is the equivalent gas flow of the LNG flowrate.
Open Rack
Open rack vapourisers (ORV's) use the heat from warm seawater. The seawater
flows over a series of panel coils to vaporize the LNG that is flowing
countercurrent within the panels. Seawater lift pumps raise the seawater to the
top of each ORV to flow down the outside of the panels as a falling film. The
panels are multiple LNG tubes with integral fins. LNG flowing upward through the
tubes is vaporized and warmed to approximately 0C. These ORV panels are
coated with a zinc alloy to provide corrosion resistance against seawater. Annual
maintenance is required to maintain the protective coating and clean finned-tube
surface area.
The seawater is cooled by exchanging heat with the LNG. The maximum seawater
temperature change is typically limited to 8 C with LNG approach temperatures
of around -15C depending on winter and summer conditions.
Vapouriser details: the number of vapourisers and design duty per vapouriser
are dependent on whether it has been selected as the primary vapourisation
method.
- Number of vapourisers: specifies the number of parallel vapourisers
installed. By default the value is such that there is one spare vapouriser
to ensure send out can be maintained in the event of a failure. If
modified, the program recalculates the vapouriser weight.
- Design duty / vapouriser: the capacity of each vapouriser as a
proportion to the total vapourisation duty, e.g. 100%, 50% or 33%.
Combined with the number of vapourisers this specifies how many spare
- Note: Changing the number of vapourisers will also initially change
the capacity/pump if unlocked, to ensure there is always the correct
number of spare vapourisers.
- Vapouriser weight: the vapourisers are sized on a per vapouriser basis,
based on the throughput. This gives a weight per vapouriser. The value
shown is the total weight of the selected vapourisers, i.e. weight per
vapouriser x number of vapourisers.
- Seawater pumps: the seawater pumps are required to circulate the
seawater used for vapourisation, with the pumps being common to all the
QUE$TOR Help
546
vapourisers. The calculation based on the standard pump sizing
calculation with the stainless steel being the material of choice due to the
corrosive seawater. The seawater flowrate is based on a seawater
temperature change of 8C. The differential pressure defaults to 10bara.
- Filter station: the seawater flows through intake screens to remove debris
and marine life prior to being pumped to the ORV's. The filter station
allows for all the intake screens and the weight is a factor of the seawater
pump weight.
Submerged Combustion
Submerged combustion vapourisers (SCV's) use a tube bundle submerged in a
water bath to vaporize the LNG. The water temperature is maintained by burning
natural gas. Combustion products are bubbled through a distribution tube into the
water bath. Heat is transferred from the water bath to the LNG fluid flowing
inside the tube bundle. The tube bundle is a multi-tube, serpentine bundle
mounted horizontally within the weir. Combustion products, after disengaging
from the gas/water, are normally discharged to atmosphere via a short stack.
The water bath vapourises the LNG in the immersed tube coil.
SCV's can offer extremely high thermal efficiencies, approaching 100%, due to
the condensing combustion-products water vapour in the water bath. Since the
combustion products are bubbled directly into the water bath, almost all of the
available heat is transferred to the water. The tube bundle is always immersed in
a high-thermal capacity water bath; thus, the SCV's provide rapid response times
for startups, shutdowns and rapid load fluctuations.
- Number of vapourisers: specifies the number of parallel vapourisers
installed. By default the value is such that there is one spare vapouriser
to ensure send out can be maintained in the event of a failure. If
modified, the program recalculates the vapouriser weight.
- Design duty / vapouriser: the capacity of each vapouriser as a
Note: Changing the number of vapourisers will also initially
change the capacity/pump if unlocked, to ensure there is always the
correct number of spare vapourisers.
- Vapouriser weight: the vapourisers are sized on a per vapouriser basis,
based on the throughput. This gives a weight per vapouriser. The value
shown is the total weight of the selected vapourisers, i.e. weight per
vapouriser x number of vapourisers.
- Gas requirement: the gas requirement is calculated from the required
duty based on the heat of combustion of the gas. The duty is calculated
based on vapourising the LNG and then heating it to -10C. This value is
dependent on the LNG composition and is normally in the range of 1.5% -
2% of the throughput.
- Air blowers: each vapouriser requires a blower skid to provide sufficient
air for the combustion of the gas. The quantity is based on the
composition of the LNG with a design margin of 10%.
547
Intermediate fluid
Intermediate fluid vapourisers are specially designed shell and tube heat
exchangers, an intermediate fluid is used which is vaporised by the heating
medium and condensed by the LNG. The intermediate fluid is assumed to be a
glycol / water mixture. The heat source for the medium is a fired heater.
- Number of heat exchangers: specifies the number of parallel
exchangers installed. By default the value is such that there is one spare
exchangers to ensure send out can be maintained in the event of a pump
failure. If modified, the program recalculates the vapouriser weight.
- Design duty / heat exchanger: the capacity of each vapouriser as a
Note: Changing the number of vapourisers will also initially
change the capacity/pump if unlocked, to ensure there is always the
correct number of spare vapourisers.
- Medium inlet / outlet temperature: specify the inlet and outlet
temperatures of the heating medium and affect the size of the exchanger.
- Total exchanger weight: the exchangers are sized on a per exchanger
basis. This gives a weight per exchanger. The value shown is the total
weight of the selected exchangers, i.e. weight per exchanger x number of
exchangers.
- Heating medium: the duty displayed is the total duty required to heat
the medium to it's original inlet temperature from the outlet temperature.
This value is passed through to Utilities where the fired heater and
circulation pumps are costed.
Gas metering
Fiscal metering of the gas using orifice plates is automatically included. The
weight includes the metering skid and meter prover.
Clicking on Control and comms in the regasification terminal facility inputs
panel opens the control and communication form. Control and communications
allows selection of the process control system and communications options. The
choice of the type of control and communication system is inherently a function of
the geography and location of the regasification terminal facility. For example in
an isolated environment, like a desert, a satellite would normally be used.
QUE$TOR Help
548
Control system
regasification terminal facility. Each option covers main process/utility control,
emergency shut-down (ESD), fire & gas and associated interface panels.
- Distributed: suitable for larger regasification terminal facilities where a
main computerised control room and several local equipment rooms are
necessary.
- Conventional: suitable for medium-sized regasification terminal where
one centralised control room is required.
- Basic: suitable for small, simple regasification terminal, where local
control panels are the only requirement.
Communications
complexity of the regasification terminal
i.e. to a distance of approximately 30 km.
Utilities
The Utilities sub-component calculates the weights of all the regasification
terminal facility utilities systems.
Clicking on Utilities in the regasification terminal facility inputs opens the utilities
sub-component form. The Utilities sub-component covers all the utilities systems
549
typical for the regasification terminal facility. QUE$TOR sets the utility systems
required based on the defined equipment items.
Design capacities
The design capacities frame details the design capacities for the major utility, the
heating medium. This is calculated from the requirements set in the LNG
processing and Vapourisation sub-components.
Fuel gas requirements
The fuel gas requirements frame details the fuel gas usage throughout the
regasification terminal facility. This is calculated from the requirements set in the
LNG processing, Vapourisation and Power sub-components. The value can be
defined as a gas flowrate or as a percentage of the gas equivalent of the LNG
inlet.
Utilities
The utilities weights are calculated from factors applied to the equipment sizes
and weights. Utilities can be added or removed from the cost estimate by using
the check boxes. The details of each utility system are as follows:
QUE$TOR Help
550
- Inert gas: includes for inert gas storage and distribution systems
- Plant water: includes for plant water distribution and treatment costs.
- Heating medium: required to meet vapour pressure specifications of
exported oil/condensate or to aid oil/condensate & water separation. The
heating medium flowrate is calculated in the oil processing module. The
weight includes for a fired heater package, a heating medium make-up
tank, a heating medium make-up pump, an expansion vessel and heating
medium circulation pumps.
- Chemical inj / storage: includes for chemical storage, dosing pumps
and associated distribution systems.
- Diesel fuel / storage: required by diesel fuelled and emergency
generators. The weight includes for storage, transfer pumps and filters.
Power
Clicking on Power in the regasification terminal facility input panel opens the
power sub-component form.
551
Power requirement
new figure.
- LNG processing: the power required by the LNG processing sub-
component.
- LNG pumping: the power required by the LNG pumps.
- Liquid export: the power required by the export pumps for each of the
three liquid products of the regasification facility; NGL, LPG and gasoline.
- Vapour handling: the power required by the BOG compressors and
vapour return blowers within the vapour handling sub-component.
- Vapourisation: the power required by the seawater lift pumps within the
vapourisation sub-component.
QUE$TOR Help
552
- Safety: the power required by the safety system, this comprises
firewater and foam systems and includes for all necessary pumping
requirements.
sub-component.
Generation and distribution / Distribution only radio buttons
cases.
equipment.
regasification terminal facility and includes transformers, all buses, power
cabling between switchboards, switchboards and ancillary controls.
Derating factor
Duty
factor.
factor.
- Note: Changing the number of generators will also initially change
the design duty/generator if unlocked, to ensure there is always a spare
generator.
553
Driver Type
than 1MW (1,340hp).
box, if desired.
Emergency power
Safety power.
Weights
system:
type selected
Civils
The civils sub-component covers the plot area required by the regasification
terminal facility.
Clicking on Civils in the regasification terminal facility input opens the civils plot
area form.
QUE$TOR Help
554
Foundation area
Foundation areas are calculated from the footprint area of each system with an
allowance for good access. These are summated to give the total foundation
area.
- Marine infrastructure: the area required by the marine slip is not
included in the total foundations area, but will be a significant value in the
total plot area.
- LNG storage: covers the LNG storage tanks.
- LNG processing: the foundation area required by the equipment within
the LNG processing sub-component, this is broken down into the
components available within LNG processing.
- LNG pumping: covers the LNG pumps that were sized in LNG pumping
with an area given for each of the pumps. In tank pumps have no civils
foundation area requirement as they are located within the LNG storage
tanks.
555
- Liquids storage: covers the storage tanks for the three products and is
broken down into atmospheric and pressurised storage.
- Liquids export pumps: covers the export pumps that were sized in
liquid export with an area given for the pumps of each of the products.
- Liquids metering: covers the metering equipment that was sized in the
liquid export sub-component with an area given for the metering of each
of the products.
- Vapour handling: covers the compressors, blowers and recondensers
that were sized in vapour handling.
- Vapourisation: covers the vapourisers and associated equipment that
were sized in vapourisation.
- Other: covers the remaining sub-components; Power and Utilities. There
is an area for all the sub-components associated safety systems.
Totals
- Total foundations area: is the sum of the above areas, excluding the
marine slip area.
determined by applying a factor to the Total foundations area
- Buildings: covers the required buildings within the regasification terminal
facility and is determined by applying a factor to the Total foundations
area
- Total plot area: the total area of the regasification terminal facility and
is used to determine the cost of grading the site and the associated civil
materials cost. An area factor is applied to the Total foundations to give
the equipment plot area. The total plot area is the sum of equipment plot
area, buildings plot area, vehicular access plot area and marine slip area.
Equipment Costs
centre.
QUE$TOR Help
556
Odourisation
The odourisation system comprises the storage and injection equipment to dose
odourising chemicals into send out gas. The weight is based on the regasification
terminal facility capacity.
Safety
equipment.
Freight
procured from the same region as the regasification terminal facility location or
from out of region.
557
Material Costs
Steelwork
Berth
This is the material cost for building the berths for the LNG tankers. It includes
all berthing dolphins, breasting dolphins, unloading platform and associated
fastenings. The length is based on the tanker size.
Jetty
This is the material cost for building a jetty to which the tanker can moor. It
includes all necessary materials to build the jetty.
Marine slip
This is the material cost for building the reinforced concrete perimeter wall of the
marine slip.
Breakwater
This is the material cost for building a breakwater, it includes all boulders and the
steel retaining structure.
LNG Flowlines
QUE$TOR Help
558
This is the material cost of the LNG flowlines specified in Marine infrastructure.
The cost is based on insulated low temperature stainless steel (grade 316)
pipelines.
Piping (cryogenic)
This item includes the cost of all necessary low temperature stainless steel (grade
316) piping and manually operated valves required to connect all the cryogenic
equipment together. It includes a range of pipeline sizes and different materials
and includes all pipe rack and pipe supports required. The piping cost is
calculated by applying factors to each of the cryogenic equipment system
weights, summing these and applying a unit rate to give a total cost.
Piping
Electrical
Instruments
Others
total cost.
Civils materials
Freight
559
same region as the regasification terminal facility Location or from out of region.
the Prefabrication tab of the production facility user interface, and are updated in
Construction Costs
QUE$TOR Help
560
breakdown giving details of how the construction costs are calculated, see
Site preparation
This is a total area based on the foundations requirement of the equipment
previously calculated. The cost includes for all preparation work required prior to
construction, e.g. clearing and levelling of jungle.
Civil construction
This includes the construction of all equipment specified and is a cost based on
the total foundations area previously calculated.
Tank excavation
This is only required for membrane storage tanks, which are buried. The volume
is based on the volume of the storage tank with an allowance for construction
access.
General Costs
The general costs cover all other expenditures associated with the regasification
terminal facility. They include design, project management, certification,
insurance and a contingency.
561
equipment and bulk materials, the LNG storage capacity and civils area. Project
equipment and bulk materials, the LNG storage capacity and civils area.
stage through to first send out.
Insurance
This is a fixed percentage of the regasification terminal facility cost and includes
insurance for all project components during transportation, construction,
installation and testing and commissioning. Personnel liability insurance is
covered in the respective cost centres.
Certification
QUE$TOR Help
562
Contingency
563
Reports
About Reports
QUE$TOR can produce a range of high quality reports. These can be printed or
exported to Excel. Project reports can be created using the Reports menu.
Reports can also be created from the field development schematic and within
individual components by selecting Print, Print preview or Export to Excel.
Selecting Report builder wizard in the Reports menu opens a wizard which
allows you to create a full or customised project report. This wizard can also be
accessed by selecting Print, Print preview or Export to Excel.
The Reports menu also gives a shortcut to the following project reports:
- Cost summary: A breakdown of the total CAPEX by component and cost
centre.
- Project summary: A summary of the high level project inputs.
- OPEX summary: A high level breakdown of OPEX by year. This report
can only be viewed once you have opened the OPEX module by selecting
OPEX from the Project menu and then clicked OK to apply and exit.
- Investment and production profile.
To print reports
Select Print from the File menu or click in the toolbar. Reports will be
printed to your default printer.
To see a preview before you print, select Print preview from the File menu or
click in the toolbar. Select on the preview screen to print the report.
To export reports to Excel
Select Export to Excel workbook from the File menu or click in the
toolbar. You will be prompted for the location in which you wish to save the Excel
file created.
Note: If your filename contains a . and you do not have .xls at the end
of the filename, the file will not be saved correctly.
Component Reports
Individual component reports are produced when you have a component open.
Two reports are available: Input data and Cost sheet. When you select Print,
Print preview or Export to Excel a form will appear, as shown below. Use the
check boxes to select the reports you wish to print. When you select Export to
Excel the reports will be saved as an Excel file.
QUE$TOR Help
564
Project Reports
The Reports menu allows users to produce a range of high quality reports.
Selecting Report builder wizard in the Reports menu opens a wizard which
allows you to create a full or customised project report. This wizard can also be
accessed by selecting Print, Print preview or Export to Excel from the File
menu.
The Reports menu also gives a shortcut to the following project reports:
- Cost summary: A breakdown of the total CAPEX by component and cost
centre.
- Project summary: A summary of the high level project inputs.
- OPEX summary: The total project OPEX and a high level breakdown of
OPEX by year. This report can only be viewed once you have run the
OPEX module by selecting OPEX from the Project menu and then clicked
OK to apply and exit.
- Investment and production profile: A summary of the annual CAPEX
expenditure under various categories, the annual OPEX plus the annual
production of oil, condensate and gas. In addition, simple cost per barrel
equivalent economic indicators for E&A cost, Drilling cost, Facilities cost,
total Capital cost, Operating cost and Lifecycle cost are given.
- Copy schematic image to clipboard: This allows you copy the field
development schematic to a clipboard and import it into another document
as a bitmap.
When the report builder wizard starts, a form will appear asking if you require a
complete or custom report. Select Complete report and click on Finish to print
out every report available.
Note: A complete report can often be over 20 pages.
To specify which reports you want to print select Custom report and click on Next
to open the report builder. The report builder is shown below.
Reports
565
The available reports are shown in the left hand window and the reports selected
for printing are shown in the right hand window. The buttons in the central panel
enable selected reports to be moved between the two windows. All selected
component reports have two check boxes for input and cost reports, these should
be checked if you want the report included. Click on Finish to complete your
selection. If you selected Report builder wizard in the Reports menu or Print
preview, a preview will be displayed before the report is printed. If you selected
Print, the report will be sent to your default printer.
Selecting Export to Excel when you are in the field development schematic
allows you to build a report that will be saved as an Excel file.
567
Editors
Unit Editor
About Unit Editor
QUE$TORs built in unit editor allows you to define a default set of units for use
with your QUE$TOR projects.
QUE$TOR ships with three built-in unit sets: Oilfield, Imperial and Metric.
New unit sets can be created by copying and editing either the built-in sets or
your own custom sets.
A unit set can only be assigned to a QUE$TOR project when the project is first
created. This is done in the project properties, the first form to appear when you
create a new project. The units selected are used for all inputs and outputs.
Remember you can still change the units of all individual values at any stage,
simply by clicking on the unit.
The unit editor can be accessed using the Start menu following All Programs
\IHS \QUE$TOR 9.x \Unit editor. Or select Unit editor from the Tools menu
of QUE$TOR.
Custom Unit Sets
QUE$TORs unit editor allows you to create new unit sets and edit existing ones.
There are three ways to open the unit editor:
- On the task selection form, which appears when QUE$TOR starts, select
Edit units sets and click OK.
- Select Unit editor from the Tools menu in an open project.
- Click on in the utilities toolbar in an open project.
The unit editor will open in a new window and the initial task selection form will
appear.
QUE$TOR Help
568
Note: When you create a project it will take a snapshot of your chosen unit
set, any future changes to that unit set will have no impact on the project.
Opening the unit editor while you have a project open will not allow you to edit
the projects unit set.
Creating a new custom unit set.
1. Select New from the File menu in the unit editor.
2. The Create new unit set form, shown below, opens.
3. Enter a title for the unit set, a description is optional.
4. Select a base unit set that you will edit to create your new unit set.
- To use a built-in unit set: Select Use built-in unit set and choose
using the dropdown list
- To use an existing custom unit set: Select Use custom unit set and
click on the Select button to browse your saved sets.
5. Click OK.
Opening a unit set
Editors
569
Select Open from the File menu in the unit editor, and use the browser to locate
your saved unit set.
Note: Built in unit sets cannot be edited
Editing a unit set
Opened unit sets are displayed in a window, as shown below. 5.2. The panel on
the left contains a tree, from which each unit category can be selected. On the
left the units group and category are displayed along with a description of where
it is used. To change the unit used, change the unit in the current unit box using
the dropdown list. The unit choice in the left hand window will be updated to
show your selection.
Saving a unit set.
Once you have made your changes to a new or existing custom unit set you must
save them. Changes are not saved automatically. To do this select Save or
Save As from the File menu. When you do this a Details of change form is
displayed as shown below. This allows you to enter your name (to provide an
audit trail) and optionally enter a description of why/what changes were made.
Click OK to complete the save.
QUE$TOR Help
570
Database Editor
About Database Editor
The database editor allows you to create and view/edit both procurement
strategies (cost databases) and the regional technical databases. It can be
accessed either using the Start menu following All Programs \IHS \QUE$TOR
9.x \Database editor
OR
from the Tools menu when QUE$TOR is running.
Note: Any changes made to databases will not be reflected in any existing
projects that use those databases. Only future projects will pick up the changes.
Warning: Care is required when editing procurement strategies and technical
databases. These databases are used to drive QUE$TOR and it is possible to
modify them so that QUE$TOR no longer functions correctly when the modified
databases are used in a project.
On entering the database editor you are given various options,
Editors
571
Click on the button for the task you want to perform.
Procurement Strategies
The procurement strategy specifies the regional databases to be used for each of
the cost centres within a project. For example equipment could be sourced from
North America and design performed in Europe.
You can either view/edit an existing procurement strategy or create a new
strategy using one of the existing databases as its base.
View/Edit Procurement Strategy
If you select View/edit the form, shown below, is displayed allowing you to select
the database you want to open. Only procurement strategies that you have
already created are displayed. By default these are stored in the My
Documents \IHS \QUE$TOR \Procurement Strategies folder. An
alternative folder can optionally be specified. QUE$TOR and the database editor
remember the last folder selected and will use this as the user preference when
creating a new procurement strategy.
Create new procurement strategy
QUE$TOR Help
572
If you select Create new in the database options form then the form shown below
is displayed allowing you to select the database you want to use as the template.
(If no templates exist then you should refer to Creating Procurement Strategies).
This will open up a copy of the selected template cost database allowing you to
make changes and then save the data under a new file name.
Technical Databases
You can either create your own custom technical database using one of the
existing QUE$TOR default regional databases as a template or view/edit an
existing database. You cannot revise a template database; you can only use it as
the basis for a custom technical database.
Create new technical database
If you select Create new in the database options form then the form, shown
below, is displayed allowing you to select the database you want to use as the
template.
Editors
573
The technical databases are listed by filename with separate lists for offshore
technical databases and onshore technical databases.
When you have made all the necessary changes to the template database you
need to save the changes to a new file name. The new database will by default
be saved in the My Documents \IHS \QUE$TOR \Technical Databases
folder. You may select an alternative folder and this will be used as your
preference for your custom technical databases.
View/Edit Technical Database
If you select View/edit in the database options form then the form, shown below,
is displayed allowing you to select the database you want to open.
QUE$TOR Help
574
Database Editor Interface
The following screen shots reflect the interface when opening a procurement
strategy. However, similar screens open when opening a technical database.
Any differences that occur between the information seen when viewing cost and
technical databases are noted below.
On opening the required database the screen is displayed.
Editors
575
To select a table you must choose the Item type, Component type and the Table
description. The Toolbar Buttons provided to help you search through a
database, plus log, print and save changes.
Item Type (procurement strategies)
This allows you to select the procurement strategy item of interest. The options
are certification and insurance, contingency, design & project management,
equipment, fabrication and HUC, freight, installation, linepipe, materials and
OPEX.
Item Type (technical database)
This allows you to select the technical database item of interest. The options are
design & project management, equipment, fabrication and HUC, installation,
linepipe, materials, none and OPEX.
None covers the small group of items that dont fall into any of the other
categories.
Component Type
This allows you to select the component of interest. The options include barge,
GBS, jacket, offshore drilling, offshore loading, offshore pipeline, semi-
submersible, spar buoy, subsea, tanker (FPSO), TLP and topsides but vary
depending on the item type.
Table description
This allows you to select the cost table of interest. The options in this box vary
depending on the item and component selected.
Some tables contain several columns of values, e.g. equipment, topsides, gas
compression turbine data. If there are a number of columns some may not be
QUE$TOR Help
576
visible without scrolling across. To maximise the amount of data that can be
seen without having to scroll you can use Scale data column width slider to adjust
the relative width of the data columns.
If the show audit information check box is ticked then two more columns (or rows
depending on the format of the selected table) are added to show who edited the
data plus the time and date when the last change was made.
If you are unsure which table contains the data you want to view the search
feature should be used. When selected, search form is displayed allowing you to
enter the key word(s) you want search for.
The table produced when the search criteria entered was mooring is shown
below. This shows data items containing the key word(s) and the source table
information allowing you to rapidly go to the required data set. Select the
required data item (in blue) to open the relevant table.
Note: QUE$TOR can take up to 30 seconds to prepare the database for the
first search. This will enable fast searching for the rest of the current database
editing session.
Editors
577
Should you want to go back to the above set of search results then select the
icon from the toolbar. This feature will display the last set of results from a
search.
Four print options available. To select the option you want select the icon
from the toolbar. This displays the Print options form.
All modifications to the default QUE$TOR data are shown in bold font. A log of all
changes made to the current database between a date range defined by you can
be produced by selecting the icon in the toolbar.
QUE$TOR Help
578
The format of a typical modification log is shown below, this can be printed or
saved to a directory of your choice.
Project Editor
About Project Editor
The project editor allows changes to be made to the procurement strategy and
technical database used within saved projects. It can be accessed through the
Windows Start menu following All Programs \IHS \QUE$TOR 9.x \Project
editor.
Clicking on project editor opens the form shown below, this allows the project to
be selected.
Editors
579
Only projects that have been saved previously are displayed. By default these
are stored in the My Documents \IHS \QUE$TOR \Projects folder. An
alternative folder can optionally be specified. The last used folder is remembered
automatically.
Note: Changes are made directly to the project selected. When a
comparison is required we advise that a copy should be made first and the
changes made to this copy.
User Interface
Selecting the project to be edited and clicking Open will open the Project editor.
QUE$TOR Help
580
The project editor displays the procurement strategy and technical database used
for the offshore and onshore sections of the project. If a section is not in use it
will not have a procurement strategy or technical database allocated and will
display No file exists as is the case for the offshore section above.
Procurement Strategies
Clicking on the Browse button next to the procurement strategy will open the
procurement strategy form. This form allows the selection of the new
procurement strategy.
Editors
581
Only procurement strategies that you have already created are displayed. By
default these are stored in the My Documents \IHS \QUE$TOR
\Procurement Strategies folder. An alternative folder can optionally be
specified. The project editor remembers the last folder selected and will use this
as the user preference when selecting the procurement strategy.
Note: Inserted procurement strategies must use the same currency as the
original procurement strategy. This is to avoid issues with locked unit rates.
Technical Databases
Clicking on the Browse button next to the technical database will open the
technical database selection form.
QUE$TOR Help
582
You can either use one of the existing 17 offshore or 11 onshore QUE$TOR
default regional technical databases or use a predefined custom technical
database.
Selecting the template technical database and clicking OK opens the select
technical database form, shown below.
The technical databases are listed by filename with separate lists for offshore
technical databases and onshore technical databases.
Custom databases are stored in a separate folder. Selecting the custom technical
database and clicking OK opens this folder. The default is My Documents \IHS
\QUE$TOR \Technical Databases.
583
Definitions
Contingency Definitions
The contingency applies to individual components and is used to bring the cost
estimate to a P50 level. It is applied as a fixed percentage of the components
cost.
This section provides the definitions and basis for the application of contingencies
and accuracy levels to cost estimates. These allowances express the confidence
in the produced estimate by defining numerically the anticipated variations to the
base cost and to provide a maximum expected project cost.
The definitions of basic terminology used are as follows:
Base Cost Estimate
This is the initial estimate produced as a product of the anticipated scope of work
and rates and standard norms available at the time of estimate preparation. This
does not include for changes in scope of work or for changes in rates or norms
during the project cycle.
Expected Value (or most likely cost)
This is the most likely final cost of the development, defined statistically as the
50/50 value, or the cost with an even chance of being exceeded or underrun.
This includes for increases to the base estimate which can be foreseen as a result
of experience from previous projects. The difference between the Expected Value
and the Base Cost is defined as Contingency.
Contingency
A contingency is a sum included in a cost estimate to cover events and incidents
which probably will occur during the course of a project but which are at the time
of preparing the estimate, unquantifiable. On this basis it is apparent that
contingency funds are expected to be spent.
A contingency is not to cover any variations to the project scope of work and/or
project schedule upon which the estimate was based apart from minor changes
that may occur during the project life span such as clash rectifications and make
fit changes.
A contingency is designated to cover typically:-
- Delays to the project schedule due to impact of one contractor to another.
- Late delivery of equipment and materials.
- Lack of productivity resulting in the need for acceleration measures.
- Onsite clash rectification, make-fit changes and other minor modifications
during fabrication/construction to promote timely project completion.
- Severe weather conditions during installation and hook-up.
- A larger degree of onshore incompletion than conventionally allowed
resulting in additional offshore hook-up man-hours.
QUE$TOR Help
584
- Consequential and time dependant costs resulting from delays to the
project schedule.
In the event that the cost impact of any of the above is in excess of that
reasonably anticipated then this cost is deemed to be covered within the estimate
accuracy ranges.
Accuracy Levels
The accuracy of the cost estimate (Expected Value), i.e. base cost plus
contingency, is expressed in percentage terms. This is calculated from the
difference between the Expected Value and the Upper and Lower Estimate
Values. These limits are the maximum reasonable anticipated variations to the
project cost which may occur during the project as a result of, for example, major
construction problems, major changes in installation rates, etc.
The upper limit is defined statistically as the 90% estimate, that is the value with
a 90% probability of being underrun for the development. The lower limit is
defined as the 10% value, that is the cost with a 10% chance of being underrun.
Operators Reserve
This provides for a sum to raise the 50/50 estimate to a level where the cost is
unlikely to be exceeded i.e. to the 90/10 confidence level. This cost is typically
used by operators in economic evaluation of projects on raising project finance.
The operators reserve includes for incidences which are not likely to occur, but
which may have a significant cost penalty if they do, such as:
- Significant changes in scope
- Major changes in legislation
- Major project delays
- Significant economic changes such as currency devaluation.
Definitions
585
ANSI Class
ANSI class Maximum working pressure
(barg)*
150 17.7
300 46.4
600 92.8
900 139.1
1500 231.9
2500 386.5
*Based on a maximum working temperature of 100
o
C.
Flow Definitions
Multiphase
Wellstream products
Liquids
Oil/condensate and produced water
Inlet gas
Unprocessed but separated gas
QUE$TOR Help
586
Outlet gas
Gas processed to export specification
Oil
Oil stabilised for atmospheric storage
Condensate
Full range of liquids extracted from a gas stream
NGL
Light liquids condensed from a gas stream
LPG
A liquid propane/butane mixture produced from NGL by
fractionation
Gasoline
C5+ from the bottom of a stabiliser column
QUE$TOR Offshore
Offshore Components
Topsides: can range from a small well protector
platform weighing a few hundred tonnes, to a
large drilling platform including processing,
compression and quarters and weighing more
than 30,000 tonnes. The main process systems
can be specified together with the associated
utilities, quarters and drilling and estimates
equipment and bulk weights, material and
fabrication costs, installation durations, design,
management and HUC man-hours to produce an
overall cost estimate.
Jackets: traditional steel-piled jackets with
three, four, six or eight legs can be selected
based on the topsides weight, installation method
and local environmental conditions. For topsides
operating weights up to 1,600 tonnes and water
depths up to 90m lightweight structures including
guyed caissons, braced monotowers and
lightweight jackets can be selected.
Gravity based structures GBS: concrete GBS
either conventional or monotower can be selected
with or without storage. Typically used in the
Norwegian sector of the North Sea.
FPSOs: floating production and storage offshore
units (FPSOs) can be either new build or
converted monohull tankers up to 300,000
deadweight tonnes. Used in water depths down
to 4,000m.
Definitions
587
Semi-submersible: second to fifth generation
new builds and second to fourth generation
converted semi-submersibles can be selected
with or without rigs. Used in water depths down
to 4,000m.
Tension leg platforms (TLPs): conventional
and mini TLPs can be selected. Used in water
depths down to 4,000m.
Spars: caisson, truss and cell spar buoys can be
selected. Used in water depths down to 4,000m.
Barges: similar to tankers but of a much simpler
design and without propulsion. Only suitable for
shallow water (up to 50m) with mild
environments.
Pipelines: are defined by size, wall thickness,
material and installation. The cost includes for
risers, pipeline tie-ins and shore approaches.
Used in water depths down to 4,000m.
Offshore loading: a single-point mooring
system with or without permanent tanker storage
that provides an alternative to pipeline export of
liquids.
Drilling: exploration/appraisal and development
drilling from a platform rig, jack-up or semi-
submersible. Includes all associated well costs;
Xmas tree, wellhead, completions, production
tubing, casing, conductors, rig hire, labour and
consumables.
Subsea: template or cluster wells linked to
manifolds, covers flowlines, umbilicals and
risers. Includes features such as diver or
diverless installation, steel or flexible flowlines,
round trip pigging, trawl protection structures
and new or retrofit risers. Used in water depths
down to 4,000m.
QUE$TOR Help
588
User defined: a blank cost sheet into which any
item not covered in the components listed above
can be input for inclusion in cost summaries and
schedules.
Offshore Toolbar
Topsides Drilling
Jacket Subsea
Gravity Based
Structure (GBS)
Offshore
Loading
Tanker Link
Semi-
submersible
User Defined
Tension Leg
Platform (TLP)
Source
Spar Buoy Sink
Barge Annotation
Label
Offshore Technical Databases
Filename Database
OffTechAfrica.qft Africa
OffTechAustralia.qft Australia
OffTechCaspian.qft Caspian
OffTechECanada.qft Canada East
OffTechEurope.qft Europe
OffTechGulfOfMexico.qft Gulf of Mexico
OffTechGulfOfMexicoShelf.qft Gulf of Mexico Shelf
OffTechIndianOcean.qft Indian Ocean
OffTechMiddleEast.qft Middle East
OffTechNetherlands.qft Netherlands
OffTechNorwayNNorthSea.qft N. North Sea (Norway)
OffTechNorwaySNorthSea.qft S. North Sea (Norway)
Definitions
589
OffTechRussiaArctic.qft Russia (Arctic)
OffTechSAmerica.qft S. America
OffTechSEAsia.qft S. E. Asia
OffTechUKNNorthSea.qft N. North Sea (U.K.)
OffTechUKNorthSea.qft S. North Sea (U.K.)
Offshore Concepts
Offshore Project Development
Concepts
Subsea tie-back
Wellhead (s) + tie-back
Wellhead (s) with separator + tie-back
Production platform
FPSO + Wellheads
FPSO + Subsea
Production platform + Wellhead (s)
Tension Leg Platform (TLP)
Gravity Base Structure
Production platform + Subsea tie-back
Spar buoy
Tension Leg Platform (TLP) + Subsea tie-
back
Spar buoy + Subsea tie-back
Semi-submersible + Subsea tie-back
Blank Concept
Basis of Inspection and Maintenance
Spares % of Inspection Repair
Topsides
Equipment and
materials cost
Man-hours based on hours
per tonne of topsides
weight
Jackets Materials cost
DSV, duration based on
water depth
GBS
Equipment and
materials cost
DSV, duration based on
water depth
Floaters
Vessel,
equipment and
materials cost
Annual DSV, duration
based on water depth
None
QUE$TOR Help
590
Offshore
loading
Equipment and
materials cost
None None
Pipelines None
Annual surveys, durations
based on speed of vessel
and length of pipeline.
Intelligent pigging in
specified years. Costs
include hire of crew, and
pig and analysis of
recorded data.
Trenching/
burial spread for
span correction,
reburying, etc
Subsea Capital cost
DSV for inspection of
templates, clusters,
manifolds and survey of
flowlines
MSV for repair,
replacement of
manifolds,
structures,
valves,
connectors, etc
CAPEX Scheduling Toolbar
Print: Prints the report.
Print preview: Displays a preview of the printed
report.
Expand all: Shows all activities of all components.
Collapse all: Collapses the view so that only total
CAPEX scheduling bar is shown for each component.
Re-scale: Resizes the Gantt chart to start and
finish within the project timescale. (Use this if the
bars finish a long way before the end of the chart).
CAPEX breakdown graph: Opens a window with
a bar chart showing CAPEX by year, by quarter or
by month.
Project timescale: Displays the timescale in
project months starting at zero.
Calendar timescale: Displays the timescale in
calendar years starting at the Calendar start date.
Calendar start date: The start month and year
for the Calendar timescale.
Zoom: Displays the Gantt chart at a particular
magnification.
Comparison of Profile Timescales
Production profile Investment profile
Definitions
591
Year
Annual oil
production
Year
Annual oil
production
1 10 1 0
2 20 2 0
3 30 3 5
4 30 4 15
5 30 5 25
6 20 6 30
7 0 7 30
8 0 8 25
9 0 9 10
Total 140 Total 140
Offshore Components
Concept Selector - Export Options
Main
hydrocarbon
Exported
fluid
Export methods available
Oil Oil offshore loading
pipeline to shore
via existing production
platform
via existing pipeline
ship to ship
Oil Associated Gas fuel/flare
inject into reservoir
pipeline to shore
platform
Gas Gas inject into reservoir
pipeline to shore
platform
Gas Associated
Liquids
inject into gas line
pipeline to shore
platform
offshore loading
ship to ship
QUE$TOR Help
592
Oil Processing Defaults for Oil Projects
Product
specification
Inlet
pressure
(bara)
Number
of
stages
Separator operating pressure
(bara)
High
Pressure
Medium
Pressure
Low
Pressure
Tanker/Fully
Stabilised
P < 6 1 1.5
6 20 3 Inlet P Px 1.5
Pipeline/Partially
Stabilised
P < 15 1
Min(Inlet
P, 10)
15 50 3 Inlet P Px 15
Live Export s 50 1 Inlet P
> 50 2 Inlet P
Inlet
P/2.5,
Notes : Live export product specification corresponds to primary
separation on a wellhead platform. Inlet pressure is set 10 bara above the
default HP separator pressure to allow free flow across to the main production
platform.
Reboiled stabiliser operates at 6 bara.
Px = LP * (Inlet P/LP)
0.5
, where LP = low pressure.
Oil Processing Defaults for Gas Projects
Product
specification
Inlet
pressure
(bara)
Number
of
stages
Separator operating
pressure (bara)
HP MP LP
Tanker/fully
stabilised
P < 6 1 1.5
6 90
2 +
Stabiliser
Inlet P
Inlet
P/3
Definitions
593
Pipeline/partially
stabilised
P s 50 1
Min(Inlet P,
10)
P > 50 2 Inlet P
Min(Inlet
P/2.5, 15)
Gas + condensate 1 Inlet P
Live export 1 Inlet P
Notes : Live export product specification corresponds to primary
separation on a wellhead platform. Inlet pressure is set 10 bara above the
default HP separator pressure to allow free flow across to the main production
platform.
Oil Processing Toolbar
Toolbar button Button function
Insert separator / insert test separator (2nd occurrence of
symbol to the right of the stabiliser icon)
Insert heat exchanger
Insert dehydrator
Insert desalter
Insert reboiled stabiliser
Delete component
Print. Print out contains the oil processing schematic plus a
table containing the flow, temperature, pressure, oil SG and
gas molecular weight
Print preview
Offshore Gas Processing Product Specification
Product
specification
H2S
(ppm)
CO2
(mol %)
Water
(lb/MMscf)
Hydrocarbon
dewpoint
(C)
Pipeline 4 4 3 -5
Gas Grid 4 2.5 1.5 -20
Gas Reinjection 100 None 3 None
Combined gas +
condensate
(1)
4 4 3 None
Flare/Fuel None None None None
QUE$TOR Help
594
(1) This option is only available for gas/condensate projects.
Note: The 100 ppm specification for H
2
S in the gas reinjection case has
been set to prevent reservoir contamination problems and the water specification
in the gas reinjection case has been set to prevent hydrate formation in gas
injection lines. The pipeline product specification is based on typical North Sea
sales gas specifications and the gas grid specification is based on the
Interconnector pipeline from Norway to mainland Europe.
Wind Speed Lookup
Averaging
time
Mean wind speed (m/s)
1 hour 30 35 40 45 50
1 minute 35 41 47 54 60
5 seconds 40 47 55 62 70
Standard Chain and Rope Sizes
Chain size Rope size
2.5in 4.5in
3.0in 5.5in
3.5in 6.0in
4.0in 7.0in
4.5in 8.0in
5.0in 9.0in
5.5in 9.5in
6.0in 10.5in
6.5in 11.5in
Maximum Topsides Weight
Jacket type Maximum topsides weight (te)
8 Leg Jacket 40,000
6 Leg Jacket 40,000
4 Leg Jacket 40,000
Tripod 2,000
Lightweight Jacket 1,600
Definitions
595
Braced Monotower 500
Guyed Caisson 320
Default Dehydration Process
Water dewpoint (C) Process
>0 TEG - conventional
0 to -20 TEG - stripping gas
-20 to -40 TEG - Cold Finger
-40 to -70 TEG - Drizo
-70 to -100 Molecular sieve
CO
2
Removal Only
H
2
S Removal Only
QUE$TOR Help
596
Simultaneous H
2
S and CO
2
Removal
Definitions
597
Solvent Data
Solvent
Mol
Wt
Density
(kg/m
s
)
Specific
Heat
Capacity
(kJ/kg
C)
Solution
Concentration
(wt %)
Rich
Solution
Loading
(mol/mol)
Reboiler
Duty
(kW/m
3
/h)
MEA 61 1018 2.55 20 0.35 85.2
DEA 105 1092 2.51 35 0.45 73.6
MDEA 119 1042 2.24 40 0.60 92.9
Selexol 280 1031 2.05 95 0.99 38.7
Sulfinol 120 1268 1.47 50 1.00 86.0
Typical Gas Compositions
Gas Project Oil Project
MW 17 20 29 19 30 45
C
1
96.3 89.4 72.7 88.7 50.4 14.0
C
2
1.6 4.1 5.0 6.3 27.5 39.5
C
3
1.4 2.5 7.5 3.0 12.5 20.3
C
4
0.6 1.0 5.5 1.0 3.5 10.2
C
5
+
0.1 3.0 9.4 1.0 6.1 16.0
Jacket Installation Factors
Installation method Installation factor
Lift 0.95
Launch 1.0
Float 1.1
Monotower GBS Concrete Volume
QUE$TOR Help
598
Tripod GBS Concrete Volume
GBS Storage Capacity
Definitions
599
Semi-Submersible Characteristics
Generation Build cycle
Water
depth (m)
Number
of chains
Chain size
(in)
2
nd
Generation 1974-1979 s 500 8 3
3
rd
Generation 1980-1984/5 s 600 8 3.5
4
th
Generation 1985/6-1990 s 900 8 4
5
th
Generation 1997+ s 3000 8 5
Maximum Load and Buoyancy Aid Weights
Generation Variable deck
load (tonne)
Maximum
supported load
without buoyancy
aid (tonne)
Recommended
maximum
buoyancy aids
(tonne)
2
nd
Generation 2000
2,700 2,000
3
rd
Generation 3000
4,100 2,000
4
th
Generation 4000
5,800 2,500
5
th
Generation 6000
10,800 -
QUE$TOR Help
600
Tanker Storage Capacity
Tanker size
(000 dwt)
Nominal maximum storage capacity
(bbl)
70 450,000
70-100 600,000
100-150 1,000,000
150-300 2,000,000
Single Point Mooring Systems
Barge Sizes With Storage
Deadweight (tonnes) Typical storage capacity
75,000 dwt up to 300,000 bbl
100,000 dwt 300,000 to 600,000 bbl
150,000 dwt 600,000 to 1,000,000 bbl
Definitions
601
Barge Sizes Without Storage
Deadweight (tonnes) Topsides operating weight
(tonnes)
30,000 dwt <1000
50,000 dwt 1000
Subsea Pressure Ratings
Water depth (m) Default pressure rating (psig)
1,000 3,000
1,000 < Water depth 1,500 5,000
>1,500 10,000
Subsea Toolbar
Cluster manifold for four, six, eight, ten or twelve slots with
wells connected by flexible jumpers. Click the arrow to display
a dropdown list which enables you to change the number of
wells in the cluster.
Template structure, for four, six, eight, ten or twelve slots.
Click the arrow to display a dropdown list which enables you to
change the number of wells in the template.
Satellite well green for production, red for gas injection and
blue for water injection.
Commingling or distribution manifold, flowrates are combined.
Flowline group - this can include production, test, water
injection, gas injection, gas lift and chemical injection
flowlines.
Redraw configuration reverts back to the QUE$TOR default
layout
Clear all removes all subsea items and links (except for the
root component)
Offshore Drilling Profiles
QUE$TOR Help
602
QUE$TOR Onshore
Onshore Components
Wellpad groups: allows the location of all the wells to
be specified along with any equipment at the well
location and the flowlines necessary to transport the
produced fluids to a production facility. Equipment costs
can include for manifolding, test facilities, pumps, power
generation and distribution. Wellpads can be grouped for
CAPEX scheduling purposes.
Drilling: covers appraisal and development drilling. The
drilling rig characteristics and well type can be specified.
The costs include for rig hire and drill crews, Xmas trees,
casing, production tubing and consumables.
Production facilities: can range from manifolding for
flowlines, to a large facility including manifolding,
processing and compression. Processing, product
storage, export pumping, gas compression, metering,
water injection, produced water treatment, power
generation, power distribution, utilities and controls &
Definitions
603
communications can all be specified. The overall cost
estimate combines cost estimates for equipment, bulk,
materials, pre-fabrication, construction, design,
management and insurance to produce an overall cost
estimate.
Terminals: can handle crude oil or any liquid derivative
of oil or gas - NGL, LNG, Gasoline. The facility includes
for all storage and export systems. Export can be by
road, rail, pipe or ship.
Pipelines: calculation of pipeline size and wall
thickness, material, installation and design costs.
Includes for booster stations when necessary.
Infrastructure: calculation of all infrastructure
requirements including roads, rail links, airstrips, camps
and buildings.
User defined: a blank cost sheet into which any item
not covered in the components listed above can be input
for inclusion in cost summaries and schedules.
Onshore Toolbar
Wellpad Group Link
Drilling User Defined
Production
Facility
Source
Terminal Sink
Infrastructure Annotation
Label
Onshore Technical Databases
Filename Database
OnTechAfrica.qnt Africa
OnTechAsia.qnt Asia
OnTechAustralasia.qnt Australasia
QUE$TOR Help
604
OnTechChina.qnt China
OnTechCSAmerica.qnt Central and South
America
OnTechEEurope.qnt Eastern Europe
OnTechMiddleEast.qnt Middle East
OnTechNAmerca.qnt North America
OnTechRussia.qnt Russia
OnTechSEAsia.qnt South East Asia
OnTechWEurope.qnt Western Europe
Onshore Concepts
Onshore Project Development Concepts
Wellpad group tied back to main production facility
Wellpad groups tied back to main production facility
Wellpad groups with manifolding tied back to main production facility
Wellpad group tied back to existing production facility
Wellpad groups tied back to existing production facility
Wellpad groups with manifolding tied back to existing production facility
Blank concept
Spares % of Inspection Repair
Production
facilities,
wellpad
groups and
terminal
facilities
Equipment and
materials cost
per tonne of equipment
weight
Pipelines None
Intelligent pigging in
specified years. Costs
include hire of crew, and
pig and analysis of
recorded data.
Repair in
specified years.
Costs include
hire of crew
and materials
Onshore Components
Definitions
605
Onshore Drilling - Profiles
Onshore Drilling - Rig Class
- A-Class: an international heavy duty top drive rig with the capability to
(30,000 ft).
- B-Class: an international medium duty rig with the capability to drill
- C-Class: an international light duty rig with the capability to drill deviated
- D-Class: a domestic medium duty rig with the capability to drill deviated
- E-Class: a basic domestic light duty drilling unit with the capability to drill
ft).
Note: Only A-Class to C-Class rigs are selected by default.
Casing / Tubing Programme
Drilled depth (m)
QUE$TOR Help
606
Diameter
(inch)
< 900 900 - 2300
2300 -
3800
> 3800
30 - - - 75
20 - - 60 DD * 0.2
13.375 - 50 DD * 0.5 DD * 0.5
9.625 - DD * 0.5 DD * 0.8 DD * 0.8
7 30 DD
30 + DD *
0.2
60 + DD *
0.2
5 DD - -
5 DD [1] DD [1] DD [1] DD [1]
3.5 DD [1] DD [1] DD [1] DD {1]
DD Drilled depth
[1] Tubing size is either 3.5 or 5 depending on the average well flowrate
Gas Processing Defaults
Product
specification
H2S
(ppm)
CO2
(mol
%)
Water
(lb/MMscf)
Hydrocarbon
dewpoint
(C)
Pipeline 4 4 3 -5
Gas Grid 4 2.5 1.5 -20
Gas Reinjection 100 None 3 None
Combined gas +
condensate
(1)
4 4 3 None
Flare/Fuel None None None None
(1) This option is only available for gas/condensate projects.
Note: The 100ppm specification for H
2
S in the gas reinjection case has been
set to prevent reservoir contamination problems and the water specification in the
gas reinjection case has been set to prevent hydrate formation in gas injection
lines. The pipeline product specification is based on typical North Sea sales gas
specifications and the gas grid specification is based on the Interconnector
pipeline from Norway to mainland Europe.
Column Operating Conditions - Both Columns
Column Unit Value
Deethaniser
Pressure bar 14
Reboiler temperature C 56
Definitions
607
Number of trays 20
Stabiliser
Pressure bar 5
Number of trays 20
Column Operating Conditions - Single Column
Column Unit Value
Deethaniser only
Pressure bar 27
Number of trays 30
Stabiliser only
Pressure bar 8
Number of trays 30
Oil Processing Defaults for Oil Projects
Product
specification
Inlet
pressure
(bara)
Number
of
stages
(bara)
High
Pressure
Medium
Pressure
Low
Pressure
Refinery & Terminal
/ Fully Stabilised
P < 6 1 1.5
6 20 3 Inlet P Px 1.5
Pipeline/Partially
Stabilised
P < 15 1
Min(Inlet
P, 10)
15 50 3 Inlet P Px 15
Live Export s 50 1 Inlet P
> 50 2 Inlet P
Inlet
P/2.5,
Notes: Refinery/fully stabilised has the same configuration as
terminal/fully stabilised with the addition of a desalting system.
QUE$TOR Help
608
Live export product specification should be selected when only primary
separation is required, with the full processing occurring on a separate
production facility. Inlet pressure is set 10 bara above the default HP separator
pressure to allow free flow to the main production facility.
Px = LP * (Inlet P/LP)
0.5
, where LP = low pressure.
Oil Processing Defaults for Gas Projects
Product
specification
Inlet
pressure
(bara)
Number
of
stages
(bara)
High
Pressure
Medium
Pressure
Low
Pressure
Refinery &
Terminal / Fully
Stabilised
P > 90
2 +
Stabiliser
Inlet P Inlet P/3
P < 6 1 1.5
6 90
2 +
Stabiliser
Inlet P Inlet P/3
Pipeline/partially
stabilised
P s 50 1
Min(Inlet
P, 10)
P > 50 2 Inlet P
Min(Inlet
P/2.5, 15)
Gas + condensate 1 Inlet P
Live export 1 Inlet P
Note : Refinery/fully stabilised has the same configuration as
terminal/fully stabilised with the addition of a desalting system.
Live export product specification should be selected when only primary
separation is required, with the full processing occurring on a separate
production facility. Inlet pressure is set 10 bara above the default HP separator
pressure to allow free flow to the main production facility.
QUE$TOR LNG
Double Containment LNG Storage Tanks
Definitions
609
Images taken from:
http://www.ferc.gov/industries/lng/enviro/eis/06-30-06-eis.asp
Draft Environmental Impact Statement on Calhoun LNG Project (Docket Nos. CP05-91-000 and CP05-
380-000)
Issued: June 30, 2006
Full Containment LNG Storage Tanks
QUE$TOR Help
610
Images taken from:
380-000)
Single Containment LNG Storage Tanks
Definitions
611
Images taken from:
380-000)
LNG Tanker Properties
Tanker
capacity
75000 100000 125000 150000 175000 200000 225000 250000
QUE$TOR Help
612
(m
3
)
Tanker
length
(m)
255 275 285 295 305 315 330 345
Tanker
width (m)
35 40 44 44 47 50 52 54
Tanker
draft (m)
10 10 11 11.5 12 12 12 12
Note: If tanker size is between two values, then values for the larger
tanker are taken
LNG Regasification Onshore Toolbar
Regasification
terminal facility
Annotation
Label
Spares % of Inspection
Regasification
terminal
facilities
Equipment and
materials cost
per tonne of equipment
weight
Editors
Unit Sets
Oilfield Imperial Metric
Length
km mile km
Length
m ft m
Diameter
in in cm
Area
m
2
ft
2
m
2
Volume
m
3
ft
3
m
3
Mass
tonne
[1]
ton
[2]
tonne
[1]
Definitions
613
Heat
MW MMBtu/hr MW
Power
MW hp MW
Pressure
bar psi bar
Temperature
C F C
Oil flow
bbl/day bbl/day Mm
3
/day
Gas flow
MMscf/day MMscf/day MMsm
3
/day
Gas oil ratio
scf/bbl scf/bbl sm
3
/m
3
Density
kg/m
3
lb/ft
3
kg/m
3
[1] 2205 lb, [2] 2240 lb
Database Editor Toolbar
Toolbar button Button function
Save: Save changes to the current database
Search: Search the database for a specific cost
item
Display: Display the results of the previous
search
Print: Print out the database tables. A number
of options are available see below.
Print modification log: Prints a log of all
changes to the QUE$TOR default values
View procurement strategy: opens a new
window displaying the details of the
procurement strategy

QUE$TOR Help

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

QUE$TOR Help

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

QUE$TOR Help

You might also like